Jump to content

APU-102 User Interface: Difference between revisions

From DocDepot
GMalcom (talk | contribs)
AShanks (talk | contribs)
No edit summary
 
(135 intermediate revisions by one other user not shown)
Line 4: Line 4:


== User Access ==
== User Access ==
<p>There are three types of user access available, local, remote, and network. Local access requires a computer equipped with a standard communications package and a null-modem cable from the local port of the APU-102 to the computer. Remote access requires a computer equipped with a Hayes compatible modem and a standard communications package. Telnet connection requires that the APU-102 has network capable hardware and software as well as a valid network path to the APU-102, via WAN remotely or LAN at the site.</p><p>The factory default communications settings are:</p><p><br></p>
<p>There are three types of user access available, local, remote, and network. Local access requires a computer equipped with a standard communications package and a null-modem cable from the local port of the APU-102 to the computer. Remote access requires a computer equipped with a Hayes compatible modem and a standard communications package. Telnet connection requires that the APU-102 has network capable hardware and software as well as a valid network path to the APU-102, via WAN remotely or LAN at the site.</p>
<p>The factory default communications settings are:</p>
<p><br></p>


{| style="border-collapse: collapse; height: 140px; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"  
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; height: 140px; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
|- style="height: 28px;"  
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 52.8125px;" |<p>Type</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 52.8125px; background-color: rgb(12, 71, 157);" | <p><span style="color: rgb(255, 255, 255);" >Type</span></p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 216.922px; background-color: rgb(12, 71, 157);" | <p><span style="color: rgb(255, 255, 255);" >Baud Rate</span></p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 82.2031px; background-color: rgb(12, 71, 157);" | <p><span style="color: rgb(255, 255, 255);" >Word Length</span></p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 36.8125px; background-color: rgb(12, 71, 157);" | <p><span style="color: rgb(255, 255, 255);" >Parity</span></p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 57.6406px; background-color: rgb(12, 71, 157);" | <p><span style="color: rgb(255, 255, 255);" >Stop Bits</span></p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 52.8125px;" | <p>Local</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 216.922px;" | <p>2400</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 82.2031px;" | <p>8</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 36.8125px;" | <p>N</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 57.6406px;" | <p>1</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 52.8125px;" | <p>Remote</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 216.922px;" | <p>Modems will negotiate best speed</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 82.2031px;" | <p>8</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 36.8125px;" | <p>N</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 57.6406px;" | <p>1</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 52.8125px;" | <p>Network</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 216.922px;" | <p>Handled by TCP/IP protocol</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 82.2031px;" | <p><br></p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 36.8125px;" | <p><br></p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 57.6406px;" | <p><br></p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 52.8125px;" | <p><br></p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 216.922px;" | <p><br></p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 82.2031px;" | <p><br></p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 36.8125px;" | <p><br></p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 57.6406px;" | <p><br></p>
|}<p style="text-align: center;">Communications Settings</p>


| style="height: 28px; width: 216.922px;" |<p>Baud Rate</p>
== Main Menu Options ==
<p>There are two APU-102 Menu options: the System Menu'' ''and the Supervisory Menu.</p><p>The System Menu (aka Main Menu) functions provide accessibility to a wide range of reports and other information that can be generated from the stored data.</p><p>The Supervisory Menu'' ''(aka Change Menu) provides functions to reconfigure the operational parameters of the APU-102 as well as clear the APU-102 of all trains and status information. The same data is available whether accessing the APU-102 from a remote site via the modem or on-site via the local communications port or via a telnet connection. For detailed information about these menus, see the ''System Menu'' and ''Supervisory Menu ''sections later in this chapter.</p>


| style="height: 28px; width: 82.2031px;" |<p>Word Length</p>
== Software Programs ==
<p>The APU-102 uses up to three different software programs. The first is the APU application software, which runs the APU-102’s normal functions. Comet Electronics incorporates its standard remote support into this application software. The second is a standalone “fail-safe” software program, used mainly for recovery and diagnostics. There are various versions of the fail-safe program depending on configuration of the APU-102. Mini Remote Support (MRS, Start-up ROM version 4.1) or ROMSHELL&nbsp;(Start-up ROM version 5.0+). When the SYS light (LED) is on steadily, the APU-102 is running the APU application software. When the SYS light (LED) is flashing, the APU-102 is running MRS/ROMSHELL.</p><p>With addition of network connections to the APU-102, NetMRS, a network capable version of ROMSHELL was created. It has all the functions/commands of ROMSHELL, with local and remote connectivity. Additionally, it has network connectivity using the AEI Application’s networking parameter set.</p>


| style="height: 28px; width: 36.8125px;" |<p>Parity</p>
=== APU Application Software ===
<p>The APU application software is the heart of the APU-102. It is stored on the solid state disk along with the train information. It logs the train axles, correlates the axles into cars, and puts the tags with the cars. It is a multitasking (or multi-threaded) program that allows the system to record a train, share live acquisition data to external devices, transmit consists and maintenance reports to multiple hosts, and allow remote diagnostic access.</p><p>When the APU application software is running, you connect to the APU-102 via the User Interface or “Front Door.” Connecting via the Front Door allows you to define the system parameters and individual session parameters, view train data, delete trains, and view the systems logs, etc. The Front Door is generally used unless there is a problem with the APU application software.</p>


| style="height: 28px; width: 57.6406px;" |<p>Stop Bits</p>
=== Mini Remote Support (MRS), ROMSHELL, and NetMRS ===
===== Mini Remote Support (MRS) Start-up ROM 4.1 and earlier =====
<p>Mini Remote Support (MRS) is a version of the Video Masters (VMI) Remote Support software. When this program or the APU application software is running (version 4.x only), you can log into the APU site’s ''Back Door''. Logging into the Back Door via the MRS program allows you to connect to the APU locally or via dial-up modem, transfer individual files, and download new code. However, these functions are not menu-driven. A special communication program, “Remote Support,” is required to connect to an APU-102 to use MRS’s features. Remote Support is a communications utility developed by VMI. It also requires legacy serial ports and modems and must be run under MS-DOS. It is not compatible with Windows operating system or most modern PC’s ports or modems.</p><p>MRS was programmed or burned into an EPROM before the unit was shipped to the customer. The use of the EPROM means the software cannot be erased. The APU-102 boots to the EPROM first, then looks to see if the APU application software is available. If there is any problem with the APU application software, the APU-102 loads the MRS program. Every fifth time the APU hard boots (power reset or watchdog timer reboot), the MRS program is loaded, stays in MRS mode for 20 minutes, then reboots. To boot the APU-102 directly into the MRS mode, press and hold the SYS button, then turn on the APU-102. A short time after power up, the Startup ROM checks the status of the SYS button and will flash rapidly (about 4 times per second) during this check. Release the SYS button anytime after the rapid flash stops. When the MRS application is ready, the SYS LED will flash slowly (about once per second).</p><p>The EPROM is located on the USSD card and can be identified by the name "Start-up ROM", version and USSD capacity. The capacity of the USSD is in a system file on the ROM and must match the configured SRAM memory on the USSD.</p><p>'''Note''': The reboot command from the Front Door (soft boot) does not increment the MRSCOUNT counter.</p>
===== ROMSHELL Start-up ROM version 5.0 or higher =====
<p>ROMSHELL (Start-up ROM version 5.0+) replaces MRS. It has expanded functionality compared to MRS listed above and is accessible with any commercial communication software program. The ROMSHELL interface is detailed in [[#ROMSHELL_User_Interface_(Optional)|ROMSHELL User Interface (Optional)]].</p><p>The EPROM is located on the USSD or PCM-SSD card in a Pentium class APU-102 and can be identified by the name "Startup ROM", version and USSD capacity. The capacity of the USSD is in a system file on the ROM and must match the configured memory on the USSD. The PCM-SSD does not use SRAM so capacity is irrelevant. Startup ROM is not used in the LX-800 equipped APU-102.</p>


|- style="height: 28px;"
===== NetMRS =====
| style="height: 28px; width: 52.8125px;" |<p>Local</p>
<p>NetMRS is a network-capable version of ROMSHELL. It is not loaded from the Startup ROM, but is an application running from the XPe kernel on the system’s Flash memory. It has some additional capabilities compared to ROMSHELL. The NetMRS interface is detailed in [[#NetMRS_User_Interface_(Optional)|NetMRS User Interface (Optional)]]</p>


| style="height: 28px; width: 216.922px;" |<p>2400</p>
== Multiple Sessions ==
<p>The APU-102 supports numerous virtual APU's. (pre 5.2 supports four. 5.2+ supports up to ten) Each virtual APU, called a "session," can be configured individually according to the needs of the railroad it supports.</p><p>Current versions of the AEI application include a new feature, NetMenu. It allows multiple devices to be accessed via one external connection. You may be presented with a menu BEFORE getting the session menu of the APU-102. NetMenu is detailed later in this text.</p><p>When accessing the site, the first question the APU-102 software asks is which APU session you want to access. The Session Menu will only show 4 sessions unless more are configured. Each session has its own password protection, just like each physical APU would. (See Passwords.) Once you gain access to a session (other than Session 1), any parameters you change affect only that session.</p><p>Each session on the APU-102 is capable of reporting consist and maintenance reports to the host of your choice. Sessions can be configured for different purposes. For example, a customer may set up Session 1 for standard consist and maintenance reporting to its normal host system, then configure Session 2 to report different types of information (such as scale reports) to other facilities on the railroad. This often happens when the host system to which the AEI reports are sent cannot handle the type of data the other facility needs.</p><p>Each session uses the same train information but is completely independent when formatting and transmitting the information. The owner of the APU-102 is responsible the initial setup of each session, while the session owner has the ability to customize the individual session. After you select a session, password entry is required.</p>


| style="height: 28px; width: 82.2031px;" |<p>8</p>
== Passwords ==
<p>Comet Electronics delivers the systems with default passwords set up in the APU-102. Both the System Menu and the Supervisory Menu are password protected. Also, a password is available for each session’s host interface. The System and Supervisory passwords are only visible under the Supervisory Menu display of the site parameters where separate password fields are maintained. Each session is independent of one another, so passwords for one session would not be available to other session users. The System Menu and the Supervisory Menu require different passwords from the host system. The following are the APU-102 default passwords:[DDC1]&nbsp;</p>
<p><br></p>
<div>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;"
|-
! style="background-color:#0c479d; color:#ffffff;" colspan="2" | Default Passwords
|-
| System Menu
| Supervisory Menu
|-
| SECRET
| SUPER
|}
</div>
<p style="text-align: center;">Default Passwords</p>
<p><br></p>


| style="height: 28px; width: 36.8125px;" |<p>N</p>
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="4px"
|-
| style="background-color: rgb(12, 71, 157);" | <p style="text-align: center;"><span style="color: rgb(255, 255, 255);">Tip</span></p>
<p style="text-align: center;"><span style="color: rgb(255, 255, 255);">Version 5 +</span></p>
|   <p>Entering the supervisory password at the initial login screen will login directly to the Supervisory Menu.</p>
|}


| style="height: 28px; width: 57.6406px;" |<p>1</p>
<p>User-level security with complex password capability has been added with version 5.2. User-level security is detailed in [[#User_Access_Account_Management_(USER)_5.2+|User Access Account Management (USER) 5.2+]], later in this article.</p>


|- style="height: 28px;"
== Inactivity Timeouts ==
| style="height: 28px; width: 52.8125px;" |<p>Remote</p>
<p>There are numerous inactivity timeouts built into the APU-102. Their purpose is to remind the user that action has not been taken for a particular amount of time or to log the user off in case the user has forgotten to do so. At the Session Select'' ''menu, the APU-102 pauses for three minutes. The APU-102 then beeps and redisplays the Session Select menu. This represents one timeout period. The table below demonstrates how timeouts work:</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<div>


| style="height: 28px; width: 216.922px;" |<p>Modems will negotiate best speed</p>
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
|-
| style="background-color: rgb(12, 71, 157); width: 141px;" | <p style="text-align: center;" ><span style="color: rgb(255, 255, 255);" >Screen</span></p>
| style="background-color: rgb(12, 71, 157); width: 307px;" | <p style="text-align: center;" ><span style="color: rgb(255, 255, 255);" >Number of 3-minute Inactivity Timeouts Allowed</span></p>
| style="background-color: rgb(12, 71, 157); width: 453px;" | <p style="text-align: center;" ><span style="color: rgb(255, 255, 255);" >Result</span></p>
|-
| style="width: 141px;" | <p>Session Select Menu</p>
| style="width: 307px;" | <p>3</p>
| style="width: 453px;" | <p>APU-102 logs user off.</p>
|-
| style="width: 141px;" | <p>Password</p>
| style="width: 307px;" | <p>2</p>
| style="width: 453px;" | <p>Returns to Session Select Menu screen.</p>
|-
| style="width: 141px;" | <p>System Menu</p>
| style="width: 307px;" | <p>1</p>
| style="width: 453px;" | <p>APU-102 logs user off and returns to the Session Select Menu screen.</p>
|-
| style="width: 141px;" | <p>Supervisory Menu</p>
| style="width: 307px;" | <p>1</p>
| style="width: 453px;" | <p>Returns to System Menu screen.</p>
|}
</div>
<p style="text-align: center;">Inactivity Timeouts</p>


| style="height: 28px; width: 82.2031px;" |<p>8</p>
== On-Line Help ==
<p>Throughout the user command interface in the System Menu or Supervisory Menu, you may type a command followed by &lt;'''?&gt; '''to display available information about the command. If you do not remember the command, enter '''&lt;?&gt;''' at the command prompt and the software shows what commands you can currently use. ''Example:'' Typing '''&lt;D&gt;&lt;?&gt;''' describes the Directory command and any options available with that command. Features that have been added since publication of this manual will be documented in the APU-102’s on-line help.</p>


| style="height: 28px; width: 36.8125px;" |<p>N</p>
== Command Formats ==
<p>When entering commands in a string, always type a comma between them.</p><p>''Example:'' To use the Check Tag Sequence ('''CT''') command to verify that Reader0 and all antennas for a particular site are working correctly, enter '''CT,0,* '''for the command string.</p><p>'''Note''': Applicable only when check tags are part of the hardware components.</p>


| style="height: 28px; width: 57.6406px;" |<p>1</p>
= Logging On To the APU-102 =
<p>1)&nbsp; After connecting to the APU-102 through either the local port, remote port (modem), or telnet, press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt; to activate the Session Select menu screen. If you get a “NetMenu Equipment Selection screen”, enter the option for the desired APU-102 to be connected to. Press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt; again if necessary to activate the Session Select menu screen and you will get the Session Select menu.</p>
<div><p><br></p>


|- style="height: 28px;"  
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="2px"
| style="height: 28px; width: 52.8125px;" |<p>Network</p>
|-
| style="width: 100%;" | <p>1. Comet Electronics</p>
<p>2. Inactive Session, Not Available for Selection</p>
<p>3. Inactive Session, Not Available for Selection</p>
<p>4. Inactive Session, Not Available for Selection</p>
<p>X. Log Off</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Select the Appropriate Session # ( 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5)</p>
<p>Session #: 1</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Test&nbsp; Wed 05/02/11&nbsp; 10:11:12</p>
<p>Password: ******</p>
|}


| style="height: 28px; width: 216.922px;" |<p>Handled by TCP/IP protocol</p>
<p><br></p></div>
 
<p style="text-align: center;">Figure 4.1: Session Select Menu Screen</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 82.2031px;" |<p><br></p>
<p>Options 1 - 4 on this menu represent the four available sessions in the APU-102. Additional sessions only appear if configured. Option X logs you off the Session Select menu and, if accessed through the remote port, disconnects the modem.</p>
<p>2)&nbsp; To log on to a session, enter the number corresponding to the desired session. The APU-102 requests the password for that session.</p>
<p>3)&nbsp; Enter the correct system password. If no password is established for that session, type '''SECRET''', the default password for the System Menu. (Passwords are not case-sensitive) The default security level System and Supervisory password fields are both a maximum of seven ASCII, printable characters. A higher level, user-based security is available and detailed in the “User” section later in this chapter.</p>
<p><br></p>


| style="height: 28px; width: 36.8125px;" |<p><br></p>
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 80%; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="4px"
|-
| style="width: 8.21206%; background-color: rgb(12, 71, 157);" | <span style="color: rgb(255, 255, 255);" ><p style="text-align: center;">'''Warning'''</p>
<p style="text-align: center;">Version 4x</p></span>
| style="width: 91.684%;" | <p>An issue was discovered in Version 4x where the password parameter would allow you to enter 7 characters. The password entry on login only allowed 6 characters, making the APU-102 inaccessible.&nbsp; It has been corrected in Version 5x.</p>
|}<p>'''&nbsp;'''</p>
<p>As the password is entered, an asterisk (*) displays where you type the character. After the correct system password is entered and accepted, the Logon'' ''menu displays and the cursor flashes at the ''APU102XP: &nbsp;Main ''prompt with the current session number.</p>
<div><p><br></p></div>


| style="height: 28px; width: 57.6406px;" |<p><br></p>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="2px"
|-
| style="width: 100%;" | <div>


|- style="height: 28px;"
<p>Comet Electronics</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 52.8125px;" |<p><br></p>
<p>Automatic Equipment Identification System</p>
<p>APU Software Version 5.1.1.101</p>
<p>AMTECH Model AI1200 Ver 2.80 SN97514</p>
<p>Mon 05/02/11&nbsp; 10:11:12</p>
<p>Host Reporting:&nbsp; On, All</p>
<p>Last LOGON:&nbsp; Thu 11/12/10&nbsp;&nbsp; 17:28:40</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>USID&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; COMET05150</p>
<p>Site Name:&nbsp; Test</p>
<p>APU102XP: Main 1&gt;</p></div>
|}


| style="height: 28px; width: 216.922px;" |<p><br></p>
<p class="mwt-heading" style="text-align: center;" >Figure 4.2: Logon Menu Screen</p>
 
<p>If a train is being recorded or if an associated APU is recording a train (double-track sites), a “train recording” or “site activity” message will be displayed along with the prompt.</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 82.2031px;" |<p><br></p>
<p>The APU-102 will not transmit critical system messages until the System Menu password is entered. This ensures that the information is available to authorized users only and that the remote terminal is ready to display data from the site.</p>
 
<p>If the password entered is invalid, the APU-102 displays the message “Invalid Password”. The password field re-displays to allow you a second chance. After 3 failed attempts, you are returned the user to the Session Select menu.</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 36.8125px;" |<p><br></p>
<p>4)&nbsp; Type &lt;'''?'''&gt; at the ''APU102XP: &nbsp;Main ''prompt to display the System Menu.</p>
 
<p>5)&nbsp; To enter the Supervisory Menu, type &lt;'''C&gt; '''(for Change) at the ''APU102XP: &nbsp;Main'' prompt. The APU-102 requests the Supervisory Menu password for that session.</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 57.6406px;" |<p><br></p>
<p>6)&nbsp; Enter the correct system password. If no password is established for that session, type '''SUPER''', the default password for the Supervisory Menu. The ''APU102XP: &nbsp;Change'' prompt displays.</p>
 
<p>7)&nbsp; Type &lt;'''?'''&gt; to display the Supervisory Menu.</p>
|}<p style="text-align: center;">Communications Settings</p>
<p>The rest of this chapter explains the System and Supervisory menus in detail.</p>


== Main Menu Options ==
<br>
<p>There are two APU-102 Menu options: the System Menu'' ''and the Supervisory Menu.</p><p>The System Menu (aka Main Menu) functions provide accessibility to a wide range of reports and other information that can be generated from the stored data.</p><p>The Supervisory Menu'' ''(aka Change Menu) provides functions to reconfigure the operational parameters of the APU-102 as well as clear the APU-102 of all trains and status information. The same data is available whether accessing the APU-102 from a remote site via the modem or on-site via the local communications port or via a telnet connection. For detailed information about these menus, see the ''System Menu'' and ''Supervisory Menu ''sections later in this chapter.</p>


== Software Programs ==
= System Menu =
<p>The APU-102 uses up to three different software programs. The first is the APU application software, which runs the APU-102’s normal functions. Comet Electronics incorporates its standard remote support into this application software. The second is a standalone “fail-safe” software program, used mainly for recovery and diagnostics. There are various versions of the fail-safe program depending on configuration of the APU-102. Mini Remote Support (MRS, Start-up ROM version 4.1) or ROMSHELL&nbsp;(Start-up ROM version 5.0+). When the SYS light (LED) is on steadily, the APU-102 is running the APU application software. When the SYS light (LED) is flashing, the APU-102 is running MRS/ROMSHELL.</p><p>With addition of network connections to the APU-102, NetMRS, a network capable version of ROMSHELL was created. It has all the functions/commands of ROMSHELL, with local and remote connectivity. Additionally, it has network connectivity using the AEI Application’s networking parameter set.</p>
== Overview ==
<p>To access the System Menu, type '''&lt;?&gt; '''at the ''APU102XP: Main ''prompt and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. The System Menu displays. The left side of the System Menu shows the command options for displaying train information and the exit command. The right side of the System Menu shows the command options for displaying APU-102 system information and the help command.</p>
<div>
<p>&nbsp;</p>


=== APU Application Software ===
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px"
<p>The APU application software is the heart of the APU-102. It is stored on the solid state disk along with the train information. It logs the train axles, correlates the axles into cars, and puts the tags with the cars. It is a multitasking (or multi-threaded) program that allows the system to record a train, share live acquisition data to external devices, transmit consists and maintenance reports to multiple hosts, and allow remote diagnostic access.</p><p>When the APU application software is running, you connect to the APU-102 via the User Interface or “Front Door.” Connecting via the Front Door allows you to define the system parameters and individual session parameters, view train data, delete trains, and view the systems logs, etc. The Front Door is generally used unless there is a problem with the APU application software.</p>
|-
 
| style="width: 100%;" | <p style="text-align: center;" >APU102</p>
=== Mini Remote Support (MRS), ROMSHELL, and NetMRS ===
<p style="text-align: center;" >SYSTEM MENU</p>
===== Mini Remote Support (MRS) Start-up ROM 4.1 and earlier =====
|}
<p>Mini Remote Support (MRS) is a version of the Video Masters (VMI) Remote Support software. When this program or the APU application software is running (version 4.x only), you can log into the APU site’s ''Back Door''. Logging into the Back Door via the MRS program allows you to connect to the APU locally or via dial-up modem, transfer individual files, and download new code. However, these functions are not menu-driven. A special communication program, “Remote Support,” is required to connect to an APU-102 to use MRS’s features. Remote Support is a communications utility developed by VMI. It also requires legacy serial ports and modems and must be run under MS-DOS. It is not compatible with Windows operating system or most modern PC’s ports or modems.</p><p>MRS was programmed or burned into an EPROM before the unit was shipped to the customer. The use of the EPROM means the software cannot be erased. The APU-102 boots to the EPROM first, then looks to see if the APU application software is available. If there is any problem with the APU application software, the APU-102 loads the MRS program. Every fifth time the APU hard boots (power reset or watchdog timer reboot), the MRS program is loaded, stays in MRS mode for 20 minutes, then reboots. To boot the APU-102 directly into the MRS mode, press and hold the SYS button, then turn on the APU-102. A short time after power up, the Startup ROM checks the status of the SYS button and will flash rapidly (about 4 times per second) during this check. Release the SYS button anytime after the rapid flash stops. When the MRS application is ready, the SYS LED will flash slowly (about once per second).</p><p>The EPROM is located on the USSD card and can be identified by the name "Start-up ROM", version and USSD capacity. The capacity of the USSD is in a system file on the ROM and must match the configured SRAM memory on the USSD.</p><p>'''Note''': The reboot command from the Front Door (soft boot) does not increment the MRSCOUNT counter.</p>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="6px"
===== ROMSHELL Start-up ROM version 5.0 or higher =====
|-
<p>ROMSHELL (Start-up ROM version 5.0+) replaces MRS. It has expanded functionality compared to MRS listed above and is accessible with any commercial communication software program. The ROMSHELL interface is detailed in section 4.6.</p><p>The EPROM is located on the USSD or PCM-SSD card in a Pentium class APU-102 and can be identified by the name "Startup ROM", version and USSD capacity. The capacity of the USSD is in a system file on the ROM and must match the configured memory on the USSD. The PCM-SSD does not use SRAM so capacity is irrelevant. Startup ROM is not used in the LX-800 equipped APU-102.</p>
| style="width: 50%;" | <p>D&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Directory</p>
===== NetMRS =====
<p>L&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; List Clean Consist</p>
<p>NetMRS is a network-capable version of ROMSHELL. It is not loaded from the Startup ROM, but is an application running from the XPe kernel on the system’s Flash memory. It has some additional capabilities compared to ROMSHELL. The NetMRS interface is detailed in section 4.7.</p>
<p>S&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Train Summary</p>
 
<p>SHS&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; System Health Summary</p>
== Multiple Sessions ==
<p>/&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; System Information & Status</p>
<p>The APU-102 supports numerous virtual APU's. (pre 5.2 supports four. 5.2+ supports up to ten) Each virtual APU, called a "session," can be configured individually according to the needs of the railroad it supports.</p><p>Current versions of the AEI application include a new feature, NetMenu. It allows multiple devices to be accessed via one external connection. You may be presented with a menu BEFORE getting the session menu of the APU-102. NetMenu is detailed later in this text.</p><p>When accessing the site, the first question the APU-102 software asks is which APU session you want to access. The Session Menu will only show 4 sessions unless more are configured. Each session has its own password protection, just like each physical APU would. (See Passwords.) Once you gain access to a session (other than Session 1), any parameters you change affect only that session.</p><p>Each session on the APU-102 is capable of reporting consist and maintenance reports to the host of your choice. Sessions can be configured for different purposes. For example, a customer may set up Session 1 for standard consist and maintenance reporting to its normal host system, then configure Session 2 to report different types of information (such as scale reports) to other facilities on the railroad. This often happens when the host system to which the AEI reports are sent cannot handle the type of data the other facility needs.</p><p>Each session uses the same train information but is completely independent when formatting and transmitting the information. The owner of the APU-102 is responsible the initial setup of each session, while the session owner has the ability to customize the individual session. After you select a session, password entry is required.</p>
<p>MST&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Modem Self test (local only)</p>
 
<p>SP&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Toggle Sensor Power</p>
== Passwords ==
<p>TR&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Terminate Recording</p>
<p>Comet Electronics delivers the systems with default passwords set up in the APU-102. Both the System Menu and the Supervisory Menu are password protected. Also, a password is available for each session’s host interface. The System and Supervisory passwords are only visible under the Supervisory Menu display of the site parameters where separate password fields are maintained. Each session is independent of one another, so passwords for one session would not be available to other session users. The System Menu and the Supervisory Menu require different passwords from the host system. The following are the APU-102 default passwords:[DDC1]&nbsp;</p><p><br></p><div>
<p>ST&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Simulate Train</p>
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
<p>SM&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Stimulate Maintenance Report</p>
|-
<p>ODM&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Outbound Data Manager</p>
|<p>Default Passwords</p>
<p>DM&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Inbound Data Manager</p>
|-
<p>MAP&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Display Likely Matches</p>
|<p>System Menu</p>
<p>X&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Exit and Log Out&nbsp;</p>
|<p>Supervisory Menu</p>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
|-
| style="width: 50%;" | <p>DD&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Dump Raw Data</p>
|<p>SECRET</p>
<p>DP&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Display Parameters</p>
|<p>SUPER[RCT2]&nbsp;</p>
<p>C&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Change to Supervisory Menu</p>
<p>I&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Display I/O Information</p>
<p>TL&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Train Logger Reports</p>
<p>PT&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Pass-through to Port</p>
<p>AMT&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Pass-through to Reader</p>
<p>CT&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Check Tag Sequence</p>
<p>IR&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Initialize Reader</p>
<p>RFON&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Activate Reader RF</p>
<p>RST&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Reader Interface Self Test</p>
<p>MA&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Print Match List</p>
<p>CMP&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Compare two Trains</p>
<p>?&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; This Screen</p>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
|}
|}
</div><p style="text-align: center;">Default Passwords</p><p><br></p>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px"
|-
| style="width: 100%; text-align: center;" | For help on a command, enter the command followed by a '?'
|}
</div>
<p style="text-align: center;" >Figure 4.3: System Menu</p>
<p style="text-align: center;" >Menu and available commands may vary depending on AEI Application version. If not detailed in this text, refer to the on-board help.</p>


{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="4px"
=== System Menu Commands ===
|-
<p>Each System Menu command initiates a screen on which you may perform APU-102 transactions. The System Menu’s standard header fields are defined in the ''System Menu Headers ''section below. Individual screen functionality and data field definitions follow in the ''System Menu Screens ''section.</p>
|<p>Tip</p><p>Version 5 +</p>


|<p>Entering the supervisory password at the initial login screen will login directly to the Supervisory Menu.</p>
=== System Menu Headers ===
 
<p>Tables 4-1 through 4-3 define the header information that appears on many of the screens. Table 4-1 shows the basic header that displays on all System Menu screens. Each screen description in this chapter refers you back to the appropriate header definition table where necessary.</p>
|}<p>User-level security with complex password capability has been added with version 5.2. User-level security is detailed in section 4.4.3.9, later in this chapter.</p>
<p><br></p>
 
<div>
== Inactivity Timeouts ==
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; height: 112px; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
<p>There are numerous inactivity timeouts built into the APU-102. Their purpose is to remind the user that action has not been taken for a particular amount of time or to log the user off in case the user has forgotten to do so. At the Session Select'' ''menu, the APU-102 pauses for three minutes. The APU-102 then beeps and redisplays the Session Select menu. This represents one timeout period. The table below demonstrates how timeouts work:</p><p><br></p><p><br></p><div>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 87px; background-color:#0c479d; color:#ffffff;" | <p>Header Field</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 480px; background-color:#0c479d; color:#ffffff;" | <p>Description</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 87px;" | <p>MP:</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 480px;" | <p>Mile Post. Represents the mile post location of the site.</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 87px;" | <p>STATION:</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 480px;" | <p>Station Number. Represents the five-digit station number identifying the site.</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 87px;" | <p>READER:</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 480px;" | <p>Reader Number. Identifies the specific reader assigned to that station.</p>
|}
</div>
<p style="text-align: center;" >Table 4-1: Basic Header Information</p>
<p><br></p>
<div>
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"  
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"  
|-  
|-  
|<p>Screen</p>
| style="background-color:#0c479d; color:#ffffff;" | <p>Header Field</p>
|<p>Number of 3-minute Inactivity Timeouts Allowed</p>
| style="background-color:#0c479d; color:#ffffff;" | <p>Description</p>
|<p>Result</p>
|-  
|-  
|<p>Session Select Menu</p>
| <p>Train Seq #</p>
|<p>3</p>
| <p>Sequence number of the train that is being listed.</p>
|<p>APU-102 logs user off.</p>
|-  
|-  
|<p>Password</p>
| <p>DATE:</p>
|<p>2</p>
| <p>Date the train passed the site.</p>
|<p>Returns to Session Select Menu screen.</p>
|-  
|-  
|<p>System Menu</p>
| <p>TIME:</p>
|<p>1</p>
| <p>Arrival time of the train at the site.</p>
|<p>APU-102 logs user off and returns to the Session Select Menu screen.</p>
|-
| <p>ENG:</p>
| <p>Lead engine tag number if available. This will be replaced by a zero (0) if no tag is available.</p>
|-  
| <p>DIR:</p>
| <p>Train direction as it entered the site. Stopping and backing have no effect on this field. This is determined by the Transducer Orientation in the Operating Parameters and the Track Orientation in the Session Parameters.</p>
|-  
|-  
|<p>Supervisory Menu</p>
| <p>MPH:</p>
|<p>1</p>
| <p>Average miles per hour of the train as it passed through the site.</p>
|<p>Returns to System Menu screen.</p>
|}
</div><p style="text-align: center;">Inactivity Timeouts</p>
 
== On-Line Help ==
<p>Throughout the user command interface in the System Menu or Supervisory Menu, you may type a command followed by &lt;'''?&gt; '''to display available information about the command. If you do not remember the command, enter '''&lt;?&gt;''' at the command prompt and the software shows what commands you can currently use. ''Example:'' Typing '''&lt;D&gt;&lt;?&gt;''' describes the Directory command and any options available with that command. Features that have been added since publication of this manual will be documented in the APU-102’s on-line help.</p>
 
== Command Formats ==
<p>When entering commands in a string, always type a comma between them.</p><p>''Example:'' To use the Check Tag Sequence ('''CT''') command to verify that Reader0 and all antennas for a particular site are working correctly, enter '''CT,0,* '''for the command string.</p><p>'''Note''': Applicable only when check tags are part of the hardware components.</p>
 
= Logging On To the APU-102 =
<p>1)&nbsp; After connecting to the APU-102 through either the local port, remote port (modem), or telnet, press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt; to activate the Session Select menu screen. If you get a “NetMenu Equipment Selection screen”, enter the option for the desired APU-102 to be connected to. Press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt; again if necessary to activate the Session Select menu screen and you will get the Session Select menu.</p>
<div><p><br></p>
 
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="2px"
|-  
|-  
| style="width: 100%;" | <p>1. Comet Electronics</p>
| <p>AXLES:</p>
<p>2. Inactive Session, Not Available for Selection</p>
| <p>Total number of axles correlated by the APU-102 during the train passage.</p>
<p>3. Inactive Session, Not Available for Selection</p>
|-
<p>4. Inactive Session, Not Available for Selection</p>
| <p>WDA</p>
<p>X. Log Off</p>
| <p>Number of wheel counts received on Wheel Detector A. Includes forward and backing counts.</p>
<p><br></p>
|-
<p>Select the Appropriate Session # ( 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5)</p>
| <p>WDB</p>
<p>Session #: 1</p>
| <p>Number of wheel counts received on Wheel Detector B. Includes forward and backing counts.</p>
<p><br></p>
|-
<p>Test&nbsp; Wed 05/02/11&nbsp; 10:11:12</p>
| <p>WDAB</p>
<p>Password: ******</p>
| <p>Number of wheel transitions from Wheel Detector A to Wheel Detector B if the train was traveling across the sensor in the A to B direction. Otherwise this number will be 000.</p>
|}
 
<p><br></p></div>
<p style="text-align: center;">Figure 4.1: Session Select Menu Screen</p>
<p>Options 1 - 4 on this menu represent the four available sessions in the APU-102. Additional sessions only appear if configured. Option X logs you off the Session Select menu and, if accessed through the remote port, disconnects the modem.</p>
<p>2)&nbsp; To log on to a session, enter the number corresponding to the desired session. The APU-102 requests the password for that session.</p>
<p>3)&nbsp; Enter the correct system password. If no password is established for that session, type '''SECRET''', the default password for the System Menu. (Passwords are not case-sensitive) The default security level System and Supervisory password fields are both a maximum of seven ASCII, printable characters. A higher level, user-based security is available and detailed in the “User” section later in this chapter.</p>
<p><br></p>
 
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 80%; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="4px"
|-  
|-  
| style="width: 8.21206%;" | <p style="text-align: center;">'''Warning'''</p>
| <p>WDBA</p>
<p style="text-align: center;">Version 4x</p>
| <p>Number of wheel transitions from Wheel Detector B to Wheel Detector A if the train was traveling across the sensor in the B to A direction. Otherwise this number will be 000.</p>
| style="width: 91.684%;" | <p>An issue was discovered in Version 4x where the password parameter would allow you to enter 7 characters. The password entry on login only allowed 6 characters, making the APU-102 inaccessible.&nbsp; It has been corrected in Version 5x.</p>
|}<p>'''&nbsp;'''</p>
<p>As the password is entered, an asterisk (*) displays where you type the character. After the correct system password is entered and accepted, the Logon'' ''menu displays and the cursor flashes at the ''APU102XP: &nbsp;Main ''prompt with the current session number.</p>
<div><p><br></p></div>
 
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="2px"
|-  
|-  
| style="width: 100%;" | <div>
| <p>HOST REPORT</p>
 
| <p>Describes the reporting that was provided to the Host System. The information that displays is:</p>
<p>Comet Electronics</p>
<p>Host reporting status = ON/OFF</p>
<p>Automatic Equipment Identification System</p>
<p>Report status = (Y, N, P, E, X). See the Directory command for an explanation of these. An asterisk (*) displays when Host Reporting is off.</p>
<p>APU Software Version 5.1.1.101</p>
<p>Date of the host system transaction.</p>
<p>AMTECH Model AI1200 Ver 2.80 SN97514</p>
<p>Time of the log-on to the host system / Time of the end message from host system.</p>
<p>Mon 05/02/11&nbsp; 10:11:12</p>
|}
<p>Host Reporting:&nbsp; On, All</p>
</div>
<p>Last LOGON:&nbsp; Thu 11/12/10&nbsp;&nbsp; 17:28:40</p>
<p>Table 4-2: Secondary Header Information</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>USID&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; COMET05150</p>
<p>Site Name:&nbsp; Test</p>
<p>APU102XP: Main 1&gt;</p></div>
|}
<p class="mwt-heading" style="text-align: center;" >Figure 4.2: Logon Menu Screen</p>
<p>If a train is being recorded or if an associated APU is recording a train (double-track sites), a “train recording” or “site activity” message will be displayed along with the prompt.</p>
<p>The APU-102 will not transmit critical system messages until the System Menu password is entered. This ensures that the information is available to authorized users only and that the remote terminal is ready to display data from the site.</p>
<p>If the password entered is invalid, the APU-102 displays the message “Invalid Password”. The password field re-displays to allow you a second chance. After 3 failed attempts, you are returned the user to the Session Select menu.</p>
<p>4)&nbsp; Type &lt;'''?'''&gt; at the ''APU102XP: &nbsp;Main ''prompt to display the System Menu.</p>
<p>5)&nbsp; To enter the Supervisory Menu, type &lt;'''C&gt; '''(for Change) at the ''APU102XP: &nbsp;Main'' prompt. The APU-102 requests the Supervisory Menu password for that session.</p>
<p>6)&nbsp; Enter the correct system password. If no password is established for that session, type '''SUPER''', the default password for the Supervisory Menu. The ''APU102XP: &nbsp;Change'' prompt displays.</p>
<p>7)&nbsp; Type &lt;'''?'''&gt; to display the Supervisory Menu.</p>
<p>The rest of this chapter explains the System and Supervisory menus in detail.</p>
<br>
= System Menu =
== Overview ==
<p>To access the System Menu, type '''&lt;?&gt; '''at the ''APU102XP: Main ''prompt and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. The System Menu displays. The left side of the System Menu shows the command options for displaying train information and the exit command. The right side of the System Menu shows the command options for displaying APU-102 system information and the help command.</p>
<div>
<div>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; height: 461px;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"  
 
|- style="height: 51px;"
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px"  
| style="height: 51px; width: 80.3125px; background-color:#0c479d; color:#ffffff;" | <p>Header Field</p>
|-
| style="height: 51px; width: 1117.69px; background-color:#0c479d; color:#ffffff;" | <p>Description</p>
| style="width: 100%;" | <p style="text-align: center;" >APU102</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
<p style="text-align: center;" >SYSTEM MENU</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 80.3125px;" | <p>Loco Cnt:</p>
|}
| style="height: 28px; width: 1117.69px;" | <p>Count of all locomotives recognized by the APU-102 - tagged and untagged.</p>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="6px"  
|- style="height: 28px;"
|-
| style="height: 28px; width: 80.3125px;" | <p>Loco Tags:</p>
| style="width: 50%;" | <p>D&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Directory</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 1117.69px;" | <p>Count of all locomotives recognized to have at least one AEI tag (EGC = 5).</p>
<p>L&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; List Clean Consist</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
<p>S&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Train Summary</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 80.3125px;" | <p>Loco Xtags:</p>
<p>SHS&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; System Health Summary</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 1117.69px;" | <p>Untagged Locomotives. Count of locomotives recognized where the APU-102 did not read any AEI tags.</p>
<p>/&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; System Information & Status</p>
|- style="height: 51px;"
<p>MST&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Modem Self test (local only)</p>
| style="height: 51px; width: 80.3125px;" | <p>Car Cnt:</p>
<p>SP&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Toggle Sensor Power</p>
| style="height: 51px; width: 1117.69px;" | <p>Count of all equipment recognized on the train to be a railcar - tagged and untagged. Multiple-platform articulated cars are counted as one (1) car. Cabooses are counted in this field. Lost axles groups are not counted in this field.</p>
<p>TR&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Terminate Recording</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
<p>ST&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Simulate Train</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 80.3125px;" | <p>Car Tags:</p>
<p>SM&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Stimulate Maintenance Report</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 1117.69px;" | <p>Count of all the railcars recognized to have at least one AEI tag (EGC = 19). EOT tags are not counted in this field.</p>
<p>ODM&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Outbound Data Manager</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
<p>DM&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Inbound Data Manager</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 80.3125px;" | <p>Car Xtags:</p>
<p>MAP&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Display Likely Matches</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 1117.69px;" | <p>Untagged cars. Count of railcars recognized where the APU-102 did not read any AEI tags. Lost axle groups are not counted in this field.</p>
<p>X&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Exit and Log Out&nbsp;</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
<p>&nbsp;</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 80.3125px;" | <p>Containers:</p>
| style="width: 50%;" | <p>DD&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Dump Raw Data</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 1117.69px;" | <p>Number of tagged containers found on the train (EGC = 10).</p>
<p>DP&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Display Parameters</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
<p>C&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Change to Supervisory Menu</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 80.3125px;" | <p>Chassis:</p>
<p>I&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Display I/O Information</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 1117.69px;" | <p>Number of tagged chassis found on the train (EGC = 27).</p>
<p>TL&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Train Logger Reports</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
<p>PT&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Pass-through to Port</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 80.3125px;" | <p>Trailers:</p>
<p>AMT&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Pass-through to Reader</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 1117.69px;" | <p>Number of tagged trailers found on the train (EGC = 21).</p>
<p>CT&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Check Tag Sequence</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
<p>IR&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Initialize Reader</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 80.3125px;" | <p>Lost Axles:</p>
<p>RFON&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Activate Reader RF</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 1117.69px;" | <p>Count of axles that could not be associated with a recognizable axle pattern. This does not indicate missed axles.</p>
<p>RST&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Reader Interface Self Test</p>
|- style="height: 51px;"
<p>MA&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Print Match List</p>
| style="height: 51px; width: 80.3125px;" | <p>Lost Tags:</p>
<p>CMP&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Compare two Trains</p>
| style="height: 51px; width: 1117.69px;" | <p>Count of tags not associated with a car, locomotive, caboose or EOT device. Test Tags are counted in this group when system testing is being done. This does not indicate missed tags.</p>
<p>?&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; This Screen</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
<p>&nbsp;</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 80.3125px;" | <p>Other Tags:</p>
|}
| style="height: 28px; width: 1117.69px;" | <p>Count of tags other than EGC 5, 6, 10, 14, 19, 21, and 27.</p>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px"
|- style="height: 28px;"
|-
| style="height: 28px; width: 80.3125px;" | <p>END:</p>
| style="width: 100%; text-align: center;" | For help on a command, enter the command followed by a '?'
| style="height: 28px; width: 1117.69px;" | <p>END Statement. After the last line of any train report, a blank line will be sent followed by the "END" Statement.</p>
|}
|}
</div>
</div>
<p style="text-align: center;" >Figure 4.3: System Menu</p>
<p style="text-align: center;" >Table 4-3: Detailed Header Information</p>
<p style="text-align: center;" >Menu and available commands may vary depending on AEI Application version. If not detailed in this text, refer to the on-board help.</p>


=== System Menu Commands ===
== System Menu Screens ==
<p>Each System Menu command initiates a screen on which you may perform APU-102 transactions. The System Menu’s standard header fields are defined in the ''System Menu Headers ''section below. Individual screen functionality and data field definitions follow in the ''System Menu Screens ''section.</p>
<p>The following explains the purpose and use of System Menu commands and defines the data fields on the System Menu screens. Where applicable, the ''Header Fields'' section refers you to the appropriate header definition table above.</p>


=== System Menu Headers ===
=== Directory '''(D)''' ===
<p>Tables 4-1 through 4-3 define the header information that appears on many of the screens. Table 4-1 shows the basic header that displays on all System Menu screens. Each screen description in this chapter refers you back to the appropriate header definition table where necessary.</p>
<p>The Directory (D) command displays the 15 most current trains. If there are less than 15 trains on the APU-102, the complete train list displays. If there are no current trains, the message “There are currently no trains available” displays.</p>
<p><br></p>
<div>
<div>
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; height: 112px; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 100%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241);" cellpadding="2px"
|- style="height: 28px;"
|-  
| style="height: 28px; width: 87px;" | <p>Header Field</p>
| style="width: 100%;" |
| style="height: 28px; width: 480px;" | <p>Description</p>
APU102
|- style="height: 28px;"
 
| style="height: 28px; width: 87px;" | <p>MP:</p>
Nicholson Ave&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; MP: 0000.0&nbsp;&nbsp; Station 00001&nbsp;&nbsp; Reader 1
| style="height: 28px; width: 480px;" | <p>Mile Post. Represents the mile post location of the site.</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 87px;" | <p>STATION:</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 480px;" | <p>Station Number. Represents the five-digit station number identifying the site.</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 87px;" | <p>READER:</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 480px;" | <p>Reader Number. Identifies the specific reader assigned to that station.</p>
|}
|}
</div>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 100%; height: 69px; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241);"
<p style="text-align: center;" >Table 4-1: Basic Header Information</p>
|- style="height: 23px;"
<p><br></p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
<div>
SEQ
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"  
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
|-
DATE
| <p>Header Field</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
| <p>Description</p>
TIME
|-
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
| <p>Train Seq #</p>
RPT
| <p>Sequence number of the train that is being listed.</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
|-
LEAD
| <p>DATE:</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
| <p>Date the train passed the site.</p>
ENG
|-
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
| <p>TIME:</p>
DIR
| <p>Arrival time of the train at the site.</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
|-
RT
| <p>ENG:</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
| <p>Lead engine tag number if available. This will be replaced by a zero (0) if no tag is available.</p>
MPH
|-
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
| <p>DIR:</p>
AXLES
| <p>Train direction as it entered the site. Stopping and backing have no effect on this field. This is determined by the Transducer Orientation in the Operating Parameters and the Track Orientation in the Session Parameters.</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
|-
CARS
| <p>MPH:</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
| <p>Average miles per hour of the train as it passed through the site.</p>
TAGS
|-
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
| <p>AXLES:</p>
LEN(FT)
| <p>Total number of axles correlated by the APU-102 during the train passage.</p>
|- style="height: 23px;"
|-
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
| <p>WDA</p>
0002
| <p>Number of wheel counts received on Wheel Detector A. Includes forward and backing counts.</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
|-
05-02-11
| <p>WDB</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
| <p>Number of wheel counts received on Wheel Detector B. Includes forward and backing counts.</p>
09:02
|-  
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
| <p>WDAB</p>
Y
| <p>Number of wheel transitions from Wheel Detector A to Wheel Detector B if the train was traveling across the sensor in the A to B direction. Otherwise this number will be 000.</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
|-
OICU
| <p>WDBA</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
| <p>Number of wheel transitions from Wheel Detector B to Wheel Detector A if the train was traveling across the sensor in the B to A direction. Otherwise this number will be 000.</p>
812
|-  
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
| <p>HOST REPORT</p>
S
| <p>Describes the reporting that was provided to the Host System. The information that displays is:</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
<p>Host reporting status = ON/OFF</p>
0
<p>Report status = (Y, N, P, E, X). See the Directory command for an explanation of these. An asterisk (*) displays when Host Reporting is off.</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
<p>Date of the host system transaction.</p>
024
<p>Time of the log-on to the host system / Time of the end message from host system.</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
|}
0024
</div>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
<p style="text-align: center;" >Table 4-2: Secondary Header Information</p>
0005
<p><br></p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
<div>
0001
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; height: 461px;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"  
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
|- style="height: 51px;"
003007
| style="height: 51px; width: 80.3125px;" | <p>Header Field</p>
|- style="height: 23px;"
| style="height: 51px; width: 1117.69px;" | <p>Description</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
|- style="height: 28px;"
0001
| style="height: 28px; width: 80.3125px;" | <p>Loco Cnt:</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
| style="height: 28px; width: 1117.69px;" | <p>Count of all locomotives recognized by the APU-102 - tagged and untagged.</p>
05-02-11
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
| style="height: 28px; width: 80.3125px;" | <p>Loco Tags:</p>
06:31
| style="height: 28px; width: 1117.69px;" | <p>Count of all locomotives recognized to have at least one AEI tag (EGC = 5).</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
|- style="height: 28px;"
Y
| style="height: 28px; width: 80.3125px;" | <p>Loco Xtags:</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
| style="height: 28px; width: 1117.69px;" | <p>Untagged Locomotives. Count of locomotives recognized where the APU-102 did not read any AEI tags.</p>
ENG
|- style="height: 51px;"
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
| style="height: 51px; width: 80.3125px;" | <p>Car Cnt:</p>
1
| style="height: 51px; width: 1117.69px;" | <p>Count of all equipment recognized on the train to be a railcar - tagged and untagged. Multiple-platform articulated cars are counted as one (1) car. Cabooses are counted in this field. Lost axles groups are not counted in this field.</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
S
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
0
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
024
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
0024
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
0005
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
0001
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
003007
|}
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 100%; height: 23px; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241);" cellpadding="2px"
|- style="height: 23px;"
| style="width: 100%; height: 23px;" | APU102XP: Main 1&gt;
|}
 
</div><p>Figure 4.4: Directory Screen</p><p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''D''' command in one of the following formats:</p><p><br></p>
 
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; height: 84px;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
|- style="height: 28px;"
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 80.3125px;" | <p>Car Tags:</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 121px;" |<p>Command Format</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 1117.69px;" | <p>Count of all the railcars recognized to have at least one AEI tag (EGC = 19). EOT tags are not counted in this field.</p>
 
| style="height: 28px; width: 461px;" |<p>Description</p>
 
|- style="height: 28px;"
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 80.3125px;" | <p>Car Xtags:</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 121px;" |<p>D</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 1117.69px;" | <p>Untagged cars. Count of railcars recognized where the APU-102 did not read any AEI tags. Lost axle groups are not counted in this field.</p>
 
| style="height: 28px; width: 461px;" |<p>Required. Display the 15 most current trains.</p>
 
|- style="height: 28px;"
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 80.3125px;" | <p>Containers:</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 121px;" |<p>D,*</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 1117.69px;" | <p>Number of tagged containers found on the train (EGC = 10).</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 80.3125px;" | <p>Chassis:</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 1117.69px;" | <p>Number of tagged chassis found on the train (EGC = 27).</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 80.3125px;" | <p>Trailers:</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 1117.69px;" | <p>Number of tagged trailers found on the train (EGC = 21).</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 80.3125px;" | <p>Lost Axles:</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 1117.69px;" | <p>Count of axles that could not be associated with a recognizable axle pattern. This does not indicate missed axles.</p>
|- style="height: 51px;"
| style="height: 51px; width: 80.3125px;" | <p>Lost Tags:</p>
| style="height: 51px; width: 1117.69px;" | <p>Count of tags not associated with a car, locomotive, caboose or EOT device. Test Tags are counted in this group when system testing is being done. This does not indicate missed tags.</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 80.3125px;" | <p>Other Tags:</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 1117.69px;" | <p>Count of tags other than EGC 5, 6, 10, 14, 19, 21, and 27.</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 80.3125px;" | <p>END:</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 1117.69px;" | <p>END Statement. After the last line of any train report, a blank line will be sent followed by the "END" Statement.</p>
|}
</div>
<p style="text-align: center;" >Table 4-3: Detailed Header Information</p>


== 4.3.2&nbsp; System Menu Screens ==
| style="height: 28px; width: 461px;" |<p>Optional. See all trains (one page at a time if there are more than fifteen).</p>
<p>The following explains the purpose and use of System Menu commands and defines the data fields on the System Menu screens. Where applicable, the ''Header Fields'' section refers you to the appropriate header definition table above.</p>


=== Directory '''(D)''' ===
|}<p><br></p><p>2)&nbsp; Press '''&lt;ESC&gt; '''to exit or any other key to continue.</p>
<p>The Directory (D) command displays the 15 most current trains. If there are less than 15 trains on the APU-102, the complete train list displays. If there are no current trains, the message “There are currently no trains available” displays.</p>
===== Header Fields =====
<div>
<p>Refer to tables 4-1 through 4-3 for header field definitions.</p>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 100%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241);" cellpadding="2px"
|-
| style="width: 100%;" |
APU102


Nicholson Ave&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; MP: 0000.0&nbsp;&nbsp; Station 00001&nbsp;&nbsp; Reader 1
<br>
|}
===== Data Fields =====
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 100%; height: 69px; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241);"
<p>The table below defines the data fields on the Directory screen.</p><p><br></p><div>
|- style="height: 23px;"
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
|-
SEQ
|<p>Field</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
|<p>Description</p>
DATE
|-
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
|<p>SEQ:</p>
TIME
|<p>Sequence number assigned by the APU-102 to identify the train file stored on the solid-state disk. This number continues to 9,999 before resetting to 0001. Can be reset to 0001 by using the Master Reset command. Before modifying this field, see the description of the Master Reset command in the Supervisory Menu later in this chapter.</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
|-
RPT
|<p>DATE:</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
|<p>Date the train passed the site.</p>
LEAD
|-
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
|<p>TIME:</p>
ENG
|<p>Arrival time of the train at the site.</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
|-
DIR
|<p>RPT:</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
|<p>Report Status. Indicates the status of the host report for that train.</p>
RT
<p>Y = Train reported OK.</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
<p>N = Train has not been reported, but will be reported when the APU-102 gets to its sequence number.</p>
MPH
<p>P = Train is currently being reported or will be reported next when the telephone line becomes available.</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
<p>E = Train was reported but an error was found when the APU-102 correlated the axles and tags. This is '''NOT''' an error in host communication.</p>
AXLES
<p>X = Train was not reported due to an inhibit such as the age time-out. (The train was too old.)</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
<p>F = Train information was not reported due to an unknown condition. This would occur if none of the above conditions could be identified.</p>
CARS
|-
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
|<p>LEAD ENG:</p>
TAGS
|<p>Lead Engine Tag ID. Identifies the lead locomotives tag number for that train if it is tagged. If the lead locomotive is not tagged, the field will display the first locomotive tag that was read. If no locomotives are tagged, the field will be filled with 4 blanks and 6 zeros.</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
|-
LEN(FT)
|<p>DIR:</p>
|- style="height: 23px;"
|<p>The train direction as it entered the site. Stopping and backing have no effect on this field. This is determined by the Transducer Orientation in the Operating Parameters and the Track Orientation in the Session Parameters.</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
|-
0002
|<p>RT</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
|<p>Indicates the route the train is taking.</p>
05-02-11
|-
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
|<p>MPH:</p>
09:02
|<p>Average miles per hour of the train as it passed through the site.</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
|-
Y
|<p>AXLES:</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
|<p>Total number of axles detected by the APU-102 during the train passage.</p>
OICU
|-
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
|<p>CARS:</p>
812
|<p>Total number of railcars recognized by the APU-102. An engine is listed as a car here. An articulated car (3 or 5 pack) will be recognized as one car in this count. An untagged caboose will be recognized as a railcar. Unidentified cars are NOT reported in the car count.</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
|-
S
|<p>TAGS:</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
|<p>Total of all read tagged units on the train. A tag count preceded by a minus sign (-) indicates that only a Train Summary remains for that train.</p>
0
|-
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
|<p>LEN (FT)</p>
024
|<p>Total of all the calculated car lengths in the train. If the length is enclosed with brackets, [00486], one or more cars in the train had a length above 100 feet. This could indicate that the train had stopped, which would make the length of the car inaccurate. '''This length is approximate and should never be used for train movement operations. i.e., “will this train fit in a siding?”'''</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
|}
0024
</div><p style="text-align: center;">An asterisk (*) indicates the other track was active on a double-track site.</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
 
0005
<br>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
 
0001
=== List Clean Consist '''(L)''' ===
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
<p>The List Clean Consist (L) command lists the most recent train in a generic format.</p>
003007
<p><br></p>
|- style="height: 23px;"
<div>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"  
0001
|-
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
| style="width: 100%;" | <p>Nicholson Ave&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; MP: 0000.0 Station 00001&nbsp; Reader 1</p>
05-02-11
<p>&nbsp;Train Seq #0002&nbsp;&nbsp; Date: 05-02-11&nbsp;&nbsp; Time: 09:02:35</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
<p>&nbsp; ENG: OICU 812&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Dir: S&nbsp;&nbsp; MPH: 024&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Axles: 0024</p>
06:31
<p>&nbsp; WDA = 024&nbsp;&nbsp; WDB = 024&nbsp;&nbsp; WDAB = 000&nbsp;&nbsp; WDBA = 024</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; HOST REPORT:&nbsp; ON&nbsp; : * :05-02-11&nbsp; 09:04:52/09:05:01</p>
Y
<p><br></p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
<p>&nbsp; Loco Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 02&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 01&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Xtags: 01</p>
ENG
<p>&nbsp; Car Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 003&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Xtags: 003</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
<p>&nbsp; Container:&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Chassis:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Trailer:&nbsp;&nbsp;000</p>
1
<p>&nbsp; Lost Axles:&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Lost Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;&nbsp;000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Other Tags: 00</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
<p><br></p>
S
<p>&nbsp; &nbsp;&nbsp;D001&nbsp; OICU &nbsp;&nbsp;812&nbsp; &nbsp;N&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0/ 14</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
<p>&nbsp; @ D002&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;000000&nbsp;&nbsp; C&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; (6)</p>
0
<p>&nbsp; @ R003&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;000000&nbsp;&nbsp; C&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; (4)</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
<p>&nbsp; @ R004&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;&nbsp;000000&nbsp;&nbsp; C&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; (4)</p>
024
<p>&nbsp; @ R005&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;&nbsp;000000 &nbsp;&nbsp;C&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; (4)</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
<p><br></p>
0024
<p>&nbsp; End List 0002</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
<p><br></p>
0005
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; END</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
<p><br></p>
0001
<p>APU102XP: Main 1&gt;</p>
| style="width: 6.25%; height: 23px;" |
003007
|}
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 100%; height: 23px; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241);" cellpadding="2px"
|- style="height: 23px;"
| style="width: 100%; height: 23px;" | APU102XP: Main 1&gt;
|}
|}
</div>
<p style="text-align: center;" >Figure 4.5: List Clean Consist Screen</p>
<p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''L''' command in one of the following formats:</p>
<p><br></p>


</div><p>Figure 4.4: Directory Screen</p><p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''D''' command in one of the following formats:</p><p><br></p>
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; height: 280px; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
 
|- style="height: 28px;"
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; height: 84px;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
| style="height: 28px; width: 120px;" | <p>Command Format</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 415px;" | <p>Description</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 121px;" |<p>Command Format</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
 
| style="height: 28px; width: 120px;" | <p>By information:</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 461px;" |<p>Description</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 415px;" | <p><br></p>
 
|- style="height: 28px;"
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 120px;" | <p>L</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 121px;" |<p>D</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 415px;" | <p>Required. Lists the most current train in generic format.</p>
 
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 461px;" |<p>Required. Display the 15 most current trains.</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 120px;" | <p>L,*</p>
 
| style="height: 28px; width: 415px;" | <p>Optional. Lists all trains.</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 121px;" |<p>D,*</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 120px;" | <p>L, Sequence #</p>
 
| style="height: 28px; width: 415px;" | <p>Optional. Displays information for the specified sequence number.</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 461px;" |<p>Optional. See all trains (one page at a time if there are more than fifteen).</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 120px;" | <p>By format:</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 415px;" | <p>Many formats no longer used</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"  
| style="height: 28px; width: 120px;" | <p>LC</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 415px;" | <p>Optional. COMPASS format. No Longer used.</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 120px;" | <p>LT</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 415px;" | <p>Optional. TCS format. No Longer used.</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"  
| style="height: 28px; width: 120px;" | <p>LT94</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 415px;" | <p>Optional. T94 format.</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"  
| style="height: 28px; width: 120px;" | <p>LF</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 415px;" | <p>Optional. Full consist format.</p>
|}<p>Each time you enter the '''L''' command, the APU-102 prompts you to select a '''C''' (Continuous) or '''P''' (Paused) screen display. Selecting the Continuous display scrolls through all of the requested information without stopping. Selecting (P)aused scrolls through the data one screen at a time.</p>
<p>2)&nbsp; Enter '''C '''or '''P'''.</p>
<p>If you selected Paused and there are more screens to display, the APU-102 prompts you to press '''&lt;''''''C&gt;''' to change to Continuous display, press '''&lt;ESC&gt; '''to exit the list, or press any other key to continue the Paused display. This process continues until all the requested data has been displayed or a different selection is made.</p>
<p>If there are no additional screens, the ''APU102XP: &nbsp;Main ''prompt displays.</p>
<h5 class="mwt-heading" >Header Fields</h5>
<p>Refer to tables 2, 3, and 4 for header field definitions.</p>
<h5 class="mwt-heading" >Optional Formats</h5>
<p>The '''LC, LT, LF''', and '''LT94''' commands list train information in specific formats. Below are the optional formats and their command code.</p>
<h5 class="mwt-heading" >List Clean Consist - Compass Format (LC)</h5>
<p>The List Clean Consist - Compass Format command generates and displays a train consist listing in the COMPASS format. For information on Compass Record format processing, refer to ''Header and Tag Formats ''in ''2.0 AEI Site Operation''.'' ''For Compass Record header and tag formats, refer to ''Appendix B.''</p>
<p><br></p>
<div>&nbsp;</div>


|}<p><br></p><p>2)&nbsp; Press '''&lt;ESC&gt; '''to exit or any other key to continue.</p>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
===== Header Fields =====
|-
<p>Refer to tables 4-1 through 4-3 for header field definitions.</p>
| style="width: 100%;" | <div><p>Nicholson Ave&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; MP: 0000.0 Station 00001&nbsp; Reader 1</p></div>
 
<p>&nbsp;Train Seq #0002&nbsp;&nbsp; Date: 05-02-11&nbsp;&nbsp; Time: 09:02:35</p>
<br>
<p>&nbsp; ENG: OICU 812&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Dir: S&nbsp;&nbsp; MPH: 024&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Axles: 0024</p>
===== Data Fields =====
<p>&nbsp; WDA = 024&nbsp;&nbsp; WDB = 024&nbsp;&nbsp; WDAB = 000&nbsp;&nbsp; WDBA = 024</p>
<p>The table below defines the data fields on the Directory screen.</p><p><br></p><div>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; HOST REPORT:&nbsp; ON&nbsp; : * :05-02-11&nbsp; 09:04:52/09:05:01</p>
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
<p><br></p>
|-
<p>&nbsp; Loco Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 02&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 01&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Xtags: 01</p>
|<p>Field</p>
<p>&nbsp; Car Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 003&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Xtags: 003</p>
|<p>Description</p>
<p>&nbsp; Container:&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Chassis:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Trailer:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000</p>
|-
<p>&nbsp; Lost Axles:&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Lost Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Other Tags:&nbsp; 00</p>
|<p>SEQ:</p>
<p><br></p>
|<p>Sequence number assigned by the APU-102 to identify the train file stored on the solid-state disk. This number continues to 9,999 before resetting to 0001. Can be reset to 0001 by using the Master Reset command. Before modifying this field, see the description of the Master Reset command in the Supervisory Menu later in this chapter.</p>
<p>4O2 1 00001S1996013116020001000003000000000000</p>
|-
<p>&nbsp;05 OICU&nbsp; 812C0X</p>
|<p>DATE:</p>
<p>&nbsp;19&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 000000C0X</p>
|<p>Date the train passed the site.</p>
<p>&nbsp;19&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 000000C0X</p>
|-
<p>&nbsp;19&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 000000C0X</p>
|<p>TIME:</p>
<p>&nbsp;AVI</p>
|<p>Arrival time of the train at the site.</p>
<p>&nbsp; End List 0002</p>
|-
|}
|<p>RPT:</p>
<p style="text-align: center;" >Figure 4.6: List Clean Consist - Compass Format Screen</p>
|<p>Report Status. Indicates the status of the host report for that train.</p>
<h5 class="mwt-heading" >List Clean Consist - TCS Format (LT)</h5>
<p>Y = Train reported OK.</p>
<p>The List Clean Consist - TSC Format ('''LT''') generates and displays a train consist listing in the TCS format. For information on the TCS format processing, refer to [[APU-102_AEI_Site_Operation#Header_and_Tag_Formats|Header and Tag Formats]]. For TSC header and tag formats, refer to ''Appendix B: Host Reporting Formats''.</p>
<p>N = Train has not been reported, but will be reported when the APU-102 gets to its sequence number.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>P = Train is currently being reported or will be reported next when the telephone line becomes available.</p>
<div>
<p>E = Train was reported but an error was found when the APU-102 correlated the axles and tags. This is '''NOT''' an error in host communication.</p>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
<p>X = Train was not reported due to an inhibit such as the age time-out. (The train was too old.)</p>
|-
<p>F = Train information was not reported due to an unknown condition. This would occur if none of the above conditions could be identified.</p>
| style="width: 100%;" | <p>Nicholson Ave&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; MP: 0000.0 Station 00001&nbsp; Reader 1</p>
|-
<p>&nbsp;Train Seq #0002&nbsp;&nbsp; Date: 05-02-11&nbsp;&nbsp; Time: 09:02:35</p>
|<p>LEAD ENG:</p>
<p>&nbsp; ENG: OICU 812&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Dir: S&nbsp;&nbsp; MPH: 024&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Axles: 0024</p>
|<p>Lead Engine Tag ID. Identifies the lead locomotives tag number for that train if it is tagged. If the lead locomotive is not tagged, the field will display the first locomotive tag that was read. If no locomotives are tagged, the field will be filled with 4 blanks and 6 zeros.</p>
<p>&nbsp; WDA = 024&nbsp;&nbsp; WDB = 024&nbsp;&nbsp; WDAB = 000&nbsp;&nbsp; WDBA = 024</p>
|-  
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; HOST REPORT:&nbsp; ON&nbsp; : * :05-02-11&nbsp; 09:04:52/09:05:01</p>
|<p>DIR:</p>
<p><br></p>
|<p>The train direction as it entered the site. Stopping and backing have no effect on this field. This is determined by the Transducer Orientation in the Operating Parameters and the Track Orientation in the Session Parameters.</p>
<p>&nbsp; Loco Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 02&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 01&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Xtags:&nbsp; 01</p>
|-
<p>&nbsp; Car Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 003&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Xtags:&nbsp; 003</p>
|<p>RT</p>
<p>&nbsp; Container:&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Chassis:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Trailer:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000</p>
|<p>Indicates the route the train is taking.</p>
<p>&nbsp; Lost Axles:&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Lost Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Other Tags:&nbsp; 00</p>
|-
<p><br></p>
|<p>MPH:</p>
<p>=#@001000000test&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 199601311602002000003000000000000S&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</p>
|<p>Average miles per hour of the train as it passed through the site.</p>
<p>0000000G000216020030</p>
|-
<p>7024</p>
|<p>AXLES:</p>
<p>001D OICU&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;812&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 00000024</p>
|<p>Total number of axles detected by the APU-102 during the train passage.</p>
<p>002D&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 000000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 00000024</p>
|-
<p><br></p>
|<p>CARS:</p>
<p>&nbsp; End List 0002</p>
|<p>Total number of railcars recognized by the APU-102. An engine is listed as a car here. An articulated car (3 or 5 pack) will be recognized as one car in this count. An untagged caboose will be recognized as a railcar. Unidentified cars are NOT reported in the car count.</p>
<p><br></p>
|-
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; END</p>
|<p>TAGS:</p>
|<p>Total of all read tagged units on the train. A tag count preceded by a minus sign (-) indicates that only a Train Summary remains for that train.</p>
|-
|<p>LEN (FT)</p>
|<p>Total of all the calculated car lengths in the train. If the length is enclosed with brackets, [00486], one or more cars in the train had a length above 100 feet. This could indicate that the train had stopped, which would make the length of the car inaccurate. '''This length is approximate and should never be used for train movement operations. i.e., “will this train fit in a siding?”'''</p>
|}
|}
</div><p style="text-align: center;">An asterisk (*) indicates the other track was active on a double-track site.</p>
</div>
<p style="text-align: center;" >Figure 4.7: List Clean Consist - TCS Format Screen</p>
<h5 class="mwt-heading" >List Clean Consist - Full Consist Format (LF)</h5>
<p>The List Clean Consist - Full Consist Format ('''LF''') command generates and displays a train consist listing in the Full Consist format. For information on the Full Consist format processing, refer to ''Header and Tag Formats ''in ''2.0 AEI Site Operation''. For Full Consist header and tag formats, refer to ''Appendix B: Host Reporting Formats.''</p>


<br>
<br><p><br></p>
 
=== List Clean Consist '''(L)''' ===
<p>The List Clean Consist (L) command lists the most recent train in a generic format.</p>
<p><br></p>
<div>
<div>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"  
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"  
Line 566: Line 684:
<p>&nbsp; Loco Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 02&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 01&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Xtags: 01</p>
<p>&nbsp; Loco Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 02&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 01&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Xtags: 01</p>
<p>&nbsp; Car Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 003&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Xtags: 003</p>
<p>&nbsp; Car Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 003&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Xtags: 003</p>
<p>&nbsp; Container:&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Chassis:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Trailer:&nbsp;&nbsp;000</p>
<p>&nbsp; Container:&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Chassis:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Trailer:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000</p>
<p>&nbsp; Lost Axles:&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Lost Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;&nbsp;000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Other Tags: 00</p>
<p>&nbsp; Lost Axles:&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Lost Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Other Tags:&nbsp; 00</p>
 
<p style="text-align: center;" >Full Consist Listing</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp; &nbsp;&nbsp;D001&nbsp; OICU &nbsp;&nbsp;812&nbsp; &nbsp;N&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0/ 14</p>
<p>Car EGC&nbsp;&nbsp; Car ID&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Ts Or Ax&nbsp; LenFT MPH&nbsp;&nbsp; Tr PC Pp A0&nbsp; A1&nbsp; Fuel(L) Spare</p>
<p>&nbsp; @ D002&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;000000&nbsp;&nbsp; C&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; (6)</p>
<p>--- --- ----------- -- -- --- ----- ----&nbsp; -- -- -- --- --- ------- -------</p>
<p>&nbsp; @ R003&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;000000&nbsp;&nbsp; C&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; (4)</p>
<p>1&nbsp;&nbsp; 5&nbsp;&nbsp; OICU000812&nbsp; L&nbsp; A&nbsp; 6&nbsp; &nbsp;61&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 24.7&nbsp; -&nbsp; -&nbsp; -&nbsp; -&nbsp; &nbsp;14&nbsp; ------- -------</p>
<p>&nbsp; @ R004&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;&nbsp;000000&nbsp;&nbsp; C&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; (4)</p>
<p>2&nbsp;&nbsp; 5&nbsp;&nbsp; ----------&nbsp; U&nbsp; -&nbsp; 6&nbsp; &nbsp;61&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 24.7&nbsp; -&nbsp; -&nbsp; -&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp; ------- -------</p>
<p>&nbsp; @ R005&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;&nbsp;000000 &nbsp;&nbsp;C&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; (4)</p>
<p>3&nbsp; &nbsp;19&nbsp; ---------- &nbsp;U&nbsp; -&nbsp; 4&nbsp; &nbsp;62&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 24.7&nbsp; -&nbsp; -&nbsp; -&nbsp; -&nbsp; &nbsp;-&nbsp;&nbsp; ------- -------</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>End List 0002</p>
<p>&nbsp; End List 0002</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; END</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; END</p>
Line 582: Line 701:
|}
|}
</div>
</div>
<p style="text-align: center;" >Figure 4.5: List Clean Consist Screen</p>
<p style="text-align: center;" >Figure 4.8: List Clean Consist - Full Consist Format Screen</p>
<p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''L''' command in one of the following formats:</p>
<h5 class="mwt-heading" >List Clean Consist - T94 Format (LT94, AAR standard S918A)</h5>
<p>The List Clean Consist - T94 Format ('''LT94''') generates and displays a train consist listing in the T94 format. T94 is the most common host reporting format. For information on T94 format processing, refer to ''Header and Tag Formats ''in ''2.0 AEI Site Operation''.'' ''For T94 header and tag formats, refer to ''Appendix B: Host Reporting Formats.''</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
 
<div>
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; height: 280px; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"  
|- style="height: 28px;"
|-
| style="height: 28px; width: 120px;" | <p>Command Format</p>
| style="width: 100%;" | <p>Nicholson Ave&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; MP: 0000.0 Station 00001&nbsp; Reader 1</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 415px;" | <p>Description</p>
<p>&nbsp;Train Seq #0002&nbsp;&nbsp; Date: 05-02-11&nbsp;&nbsp; Time: 09:02:35</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
<p>&nbsp; ENG: OICU 812&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Dir: S&nbsp;&nbsp; MPH: 024&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Axles: 0024</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 120px;" | <p>By information:</p>
<p>&nbsp; WDA = 024&nbsp;&nbsp; WDB = 024&nbsp;&nbsp; WDAB = 000&nbsp;&nbsp; WDBA = 024</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 415px;" | <p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; HOST REPORT:&nbsp; ON&nbsp; : * :05-02-11&nbsp; 09:04:52/09:05:01</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 120px;" | <p>L</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 415px;" | <p>Required. Lists the most current train in generic format.</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 120px;" | <p>L,*</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 415px;" | <p>Optional. Lists all trains.</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 120px;" | <p>L, Sequence #</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 415px;" | <p>Optional. Displays information for the specified sequence number.</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 120px;" | <p>By format:</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 415px;" | <p>Many formats no longer used</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 120px;" | <p>LC</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 415px;" | <p>Optional. COMPASS format. No Longer used.</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 120px;" | <p>LT</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 415px;" | <p>Optional. TCS format. No Longer used.</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 120px;" | <p>LT94</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 415px;" | <p>Optional. T94 format.</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 120px;" | <p>LF</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 415px;" | <p>Optional. Full consist format.</p>
|}<p>Each time you enter the '''L''' command, the APU-102 prompts you to select a '''C''' (Continuous) or '''P''' (Paused) screen display. Selecting the Continuous display scrolls through all of the requested information without stopping. Selecting (P)aused scrolls through the data one screen at a time.</p>
<p>2)&nbsp; Enter '''C '''or '''P'''.</p>
<p>If you selected Paused and there are more screens to display, the APU-102 prompts you to press '''&lt;''''''C&gt;''' to change to Continuous display, press '''&lt;ESC&gt; '''to exit the list, or press any other key to continue the Paused display. This process continues until all the requested data has been displayed or a different selection is made.</p>
<p>If there are no additional screens, the ''APU102XP: &nbsp;Main ''prompt displays.</p>
<h5 class="mwt-heading" >Header Fields</h5>
<p>Refer to tables 2, 3, and 4 for header field definitions.</p>
<h5 class="mwt-heading" >Optional Formats</h5>
<p>The '''LC, LT, LF''', and '''LT94''' commands list train information in specific formats. Below are the optional formats and their command code.</p>
<h5 class="mwt-heading" >List Clean Consist - Compass Format (LC)</h5>
<p>The List Clean Consist - Compass Format command generates and displays a train consist listing in the COMPASS format. For information on Compass Record format processing, refer to ''Header and Tag Formats ''in ''2.0 AEI Site Operation''.'' ''For Compass Record header and tag formats, refer to ''Appendix B.''</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<div>&nbsp;</div>
<p>&nbsp; Loco Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 02&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 01&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Xtags: 01</p>
<p>&nbsp; Car Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 003&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Xtags: 003</p>
<p>&nbsp; Container:&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Chassis:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Trailer:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000</p>
<p>&nbsp; Lost Axles:&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Lost Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Other Tags:&nbsp; 00</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>AEM&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; COMET00515011050206021602060N4110002GGS0E024024024??FN00307G02000030000024</p>
<p>RRE001D&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; OICU000812A GLK00014240601</p>
<p>THI001OICU0000000812?????0000?00000000??????0?0014????</p>
<p>RTD2A453C29502020243252452058585858204E415300</p>
<p>RRE002D&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0000000000U GNK00000240601</p>
<p>RRE003R&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0000000000U GNK00000240401</p>
<p>RRE004R&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0000000000U GNK00000240401</p>
<p>RRE005R&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0000000000U GNK00000240401</p>
<p>EOC0000000378</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp; End List 0002</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; END</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>APU102XP: Main 1&gt;</p>
|}
</div>
<p style="text-align: center;" >Figure 4.9: List Clean Consist - T94 Format Screen</p>


=== Train Summary '''(S)''' ===
<p>The Train Summary ('''S''') command provides the train header and the equipment and tag summary without the consist information. A recap of the equipment that moved across the site is provided. This includes the number and types of equipment that went through the site as well as the number of tags read for some groups.</p>
<p><br></p>
<div>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"  
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"  
|-
|-
| style="width: 100%;" | <div><p>Nicholson Ave&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; MP: 0000.0 Station 00001&nbsp; Reader 1</p></div>
| style="width: 100%;" | <span ><span >''''''</span></span>Nicholson Ave&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<span style="font-size: 14.4px;"> MP: 0000.0 Station 00001</span>&nbsp;<span style="font-size: 14.4px;"> Reader 1</span>
<p>&nbsp;Train Seq #0002&nbsp;&nbsp; Date: 05-02-11&nbsp;&nbsp; Time: 09:02:35</p>
<p>&nbsp;Train Seq #0002&nbsp;&nbsp; Date: 05-02-11&nbsp;&nbsp; Time: 09:02:35</p>
<p>&nbsp; ENG: OICU 812&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Dir: S&nbsp;&nbsp; MPH: 024&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Axles: 0024</p>
<p>&nbsp; ENG: OICU 812&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Dir: S&nbsp;&nbsp; MPH: 024&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Axles: 0024</p>
Line 640: Line 752:
<p>&nbsp; Loco Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 02&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 01&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Xtags: 01</p>
<p>&nbsp; Loco Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 02&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 01&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Xtags: 01</p>
<p>&nbsp; Car Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 003&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Xtags: 003</p>
<p>&nbsp; Car Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 003&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Xtags: 003</p>
<p>&nbsp; Container:&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Chassis:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Trailer:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000</p>
<p>&nbsp; Container:&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Chassis:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Trailer:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000</p>
<p>&nbsp; Lost Axles:&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Lost Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Other Tags:&nbsp; 00</p>
<p>&nbsp; Lost Axles:&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Lost Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Other Tags:&nbsp; 00</p>
<p><br></p>
 
<p>4O2 1 00001S1996013116020001000003000000000000</p>
<p>End List 0002</p>
<p>&nbsp;05 OICU&nbsp; 812C0X</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; END</p>
<p>&nbsp;19&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 000000C0X</p>
<p>APU102XP: Main 1&gt;</p>
<p>&nbsp;19&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 000000C0X</p>
<p>&nbsp;19&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 000000C0X</p>
<p>&nbsp;AVI</p>
<p>&nbsp; End List 0002</p>
|}
|}
<p style="text-align: center;" >Figure 4.6: List Clean Consist - Compass Format Screen</p>
</div>
<h5 class="mwt-heading" >List Clean Consist - TCS Format (LT)</h5>
<p style="text-align: center;" >Figure 4.10: Train Summary Screen</p>
<p>The List Clean Consist - TSC Format ('''LT''') generates and displays a train consist listing in the TCS format. For information on the TCS format processing, refer to ''Header and Tag Formats'' in 2.''0 AEI Site Operation''. For TSC header and tag formats, refer to ''Appendix B: Host Reporting Formats''.</p>
<p>Type the '''S''' command in one of the following formats:</p>
<p><br></p>
 
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
|-  
| style="background-color:#0c479d; color:#ffffff;" | <p>Command Format</p>
| style="background-color:#0c479d; color:#ffffff;" | <p>Description</p>
|-
| <p>S</p>
| <p>Required. Summary of most recent train.</p>
|-
| <p>S, Sequence #</p>
| <p>Optional. Summary for the specified sequence number</p>
|-
| <p>S,*</p>
| <p>Optional. Summary for all available trains.</p>
|}<p><br></p>
<br><h5 class="mwt-heading" >Header Fields</h5>
<p>Refer to tables 4-1 through 4-3 for header field definitions.</p>
<h5 class="mwt-heading" >Data Fields</h5>
<p>As a summary screen, only header fields displays.</p>
 
=== System Health Summary '''(SHS)''' ===
<p>The System Health Summary ('''SHS''') command displays any trains that the APU-102 flags as having potential problems, performs a Reader Interface Self Test ('''RST''') and, if not dialed in with the modem, performs a Modem Self Test ('''MST'''). The APU-102 monitors items such as antenna handshakes, wheel detector pulses, modem retries, etc. If a train shows up on the System Health Summary, it should be determined if a problem can be prevented before it happens.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<div>
<div><p><br></p>
 
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"  
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"  
|-
|-
| style="width: 100%;" | <p>Nicholson Ave&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; MP: 0000.0 Station 00001&nbsp; Reader 1</p>
| style="width: 100%;" | <p>APU102</p>
<p>&nbsp;Train Seq #0002&nbsp;&nbsp; Date: 05-02-11&nbsp;&nbsp; Time: 09:02:35</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp; ENG: OICU 812&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Dir: S&nbsp;&nbsp; MPH: 024&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Axles: 0024</p>
<p>SYSTEM HEALTH SUMMARY</p>
<p>&nbsp; WDA = 024&nbsp;&nbsp; WDB = 024&nbsp;&nbsp; WDAB = 000&nbsp;&nbsp; WDBA = 024</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; HOST REPORT:&nbsp; ON&nbsp; : * :05-02-11&nbsp; 09:04:52/09:05:01</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp; Loco Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 02&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 01&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Xtags:&nbsp; 01</p>
<p>Condition&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Status</p>
<p>&nbsp; Car Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 003&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Xtags:&nbsp; 003</p>
<p>&nbsp; Container:&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Chassis:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Trailer:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000</p>
<p>&nbsp; Lost Axles:&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Lost Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Other Tags:&nbsp; 00</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>=#@001000000test&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 199601311602002000003000000000000S&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</p>
<p>Train #0070&nbsp;&nbsp; Axle conversion error&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; WARNING</p>
<p>0000000G000216020030</p>
<p>Train #0076&nbsp;&nbsp; Axle conversion error&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; WARNING</p>
<p>7024</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>001D OICU&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;812&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 00000024</p>
<p>0 Failure(s), 2 Warning(s).</p>
<p>002D&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 000000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 00000024</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp; End List 0002</p>
<p>End of report.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; END</p>
<p>APU102XP: Main 1&gt;</p>
|}
|}
</div>
</div>
<p style="text-align: center;" >Figure 4.7: List Clean Consist - TCS Format Screen</p>
<p style="text-align: center;" >Figure 4.11: System Health Summary Screen</p>
<h5 class="mwt-heading" >List Clean Consist - Full Consist Format (LF)</h5>
<p>Type the '''SHS''' command and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;.</p>
<p>The List Clean Consist - Full Consist Format ('''LF''') command generates and displays a train consist listing in the Full Consist format. For information on the Full Consist format processing, refer to ''Header and Tag Formats ''in ''2.0 AEI Site Operation''. For Full Consist header and tag formats, refer to ''Appendix B: Host Reporting Formats.''</p>


<br><p><br></p>
<br><h5 class="mwt-heading" >Header Fields</h5>
<p>There are no header fields on this screen.</p>
<h5 class="mwt-heading" >Data Fields</h5>
<p>The table below defines the data fields on the System Health Summary screen.</p>
<p><br></p>
<div>
<div>
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
|-
| <p>Field</p>
| <p>Description</p>
|-
| <p>Condition</p>
| <p>Condition of the train. Lists the train sequence number and the diagnosed problem.</p>
|-
| <p>Status</p>
| <p>Issues a “Warning” or “Failure” status indicating if the problem may be corrected or if system failure has occurred.</p>
|-
| <p># Failure(s)</p>
| <p>Lists number of APU-102 system failures.</p>
|-
| <p># Warning(s)</p>
| <p>Lists number of APU-102 system warnings.</p>
|}
</div>
<p><br></p>
=== System Information and Status '''(/) '''[Forward Slash] ===
<p>The System Information and Status ('''/''') command displays the software version, date, and file size. It also displays the available memory and disk space. The status of the Inter-track Communications ('''ITC'''), HBD, Scale, REDI, XTrack are displayed, if installed. The status indicator reports the presence of periodic '''heartbeat''' messages received from the other connected device. <br>''This report may be updated as improvements are made to the AEI application.''</p>
<p>''''</p>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"  
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"  
|-
|-
| style="width: 100%;" | <p>Nicholson Ave&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; MP: 0000.0 Station 00001&nbsp; Reader 1</p>
| style="width: 100%;" | <p>Version Date/Time: "AP423.EXE" V4.23 9/2/1998 4:23:0&nbsp; (180272bytes)</p>
<p>&nbsp;Train Seq #0002&nbsp;&nbsp; Date: 05-02-11&nbsp;&nbsp; Time: 09:02:35</p>
<p>&nbsp; ENG: OICU 812&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Dir: S&nbsp;&nbsp; MPH: 024&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Axles: 0024</p>
<p>&nbsp; WDA = 024&nbsp;&nbsp; WDB = 024&nbsp;&nbsp; WDAB = 000&nbsp;&nbsp; WDBA = 024</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; HOST REPORT:&nbsp; ON&nbsp; : * :05-02-11&nbsp; 09:04:52/09:05:01</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp; Loco Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 02&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 01&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Xtags: 01</p>
<p>Free Mem: 194160, Free Disk: 431104, Next Handle: 2, Free Handles: 15</p>
<p>&nbsp; Car Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 003&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Xtags: 003</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp; Container:&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Chassis:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Trailer:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000</p>
<p>ITC Status....... Not Installed</p>
<p>&nbsp; Lost Axles:&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Lost Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Other Tags:&nbsp; 00</p>
<p>Scale Status..... Not Installed</p>
<p>REDI 1 Status.... Not Installed</p>
<p>REDI 2 Status.... Not Installed</p>
<p>REDI 3 Status.... Not Installed</p>
<p>REDI 4 Status.... Not Installed</p>
|}
<p style="text-align: center;" >Figure 4.12: System Information and Status Screen Version &lt; 5.1.1</p>


<p style="text-align: center;" >Full Consist Listing</p>
<br><p><br></p>
<div>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
|-
| style="width: 100%;" | <p>Version Date/Time: "APU102.EXE" V5.1.1.102 4/11/2011 11:37:32 (bytes)</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Car EGC&nbsp;&nbsp; Car ID&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Ts Or Ax&nbsp; LenFT MPH&nbsp;&nbsp; Tr PC Pp A0&nbsp; A1&nbsp; Fuel(L) Spare</p>
<p>Free Mem: 331,169,792, Free Disk: 85,196 KB</p>
<p>--- --- ----------- -- -- --- ----- ----&nbsp; -- -- -- --- --- ------- -------</p>
<p>1&nbsp;&nbsp; 5&nbsp;&nbsp; OICU000812&nbsp; L&nbsp; A&nbsp; 6&nbsp; &nbsp;61&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 24.7&nbsp; -&nbsp; -&nbsp; -&nbsp; -&nbsp; &nbsp;14&nbsp; ------- -------</p>
<p>2&nbsp;&nbsp; 5&nbsp;&nbsp; ----------&nbsp; U&nbsp; -&nbsp; 6&nbsp; &nbsp;61&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 24.7&nbsp; -&nbsp; -&nbsp; -&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp; ------- -------</p>
<p>3&nbsp; &nbsp;19&nbsp; ---------- &nbsp;U&nbsp; -&nbsp; 4&nbsp; &nbsp;62&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 24.7&nbsp; -&nbsp; -&nbsp; -&nbsp; -&nbsp; &nbsp;-&nbsp;&nbsp; ------- -------</p>
<p>End List 0002</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; END</p>
<p>ITC Status......... Not Installed.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Scale Status....... Not Installed.</p>
<p>APU102XP: Main 1&gt;</p>
<p>MicroHBD Status.... Not Installed.</p>
|}
|}
</div>
</div>
<p style="text-align: center;" >Figure 4.8: List Clean Consist - Full Consist Format Screen</p>
<p style="text-align: center;" >Figure 4.13: System Information and Status Screen Version 5.2+</p>
<h5 class="mwt-heading" >List Clean Consist - T94 Format (LT94, AAR standard S918A)</h5>
<p>Type the &lt;'''/'''&gt; command (Forward Slash) and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;.</p>
<p>The List Clean Consist - T94 Format ('''LT94''') generates and displays a train consist listing in the T94 format. T94 is the most common host reporting format. For information on T94 format processing, refer to ''Header and Tag Formats ''in ''2.0 AEI Site Operation''.'' ''For T94 header and tag formats, refer to ''Appendix B: Host Reporting Formats.''</p>
<h5 class="mwt-heading" >Header Fields</h5>
<p>Refer to table 4-1 for header field definitions.</p>
<h5 class="mwt-heading" >Data Fields</h5>
<p>The table below defines the data fields on the System Information and Status screen.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<div>
 
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
|-
| <p>Field</p>
| <p>Description</p>
|-
| <p>Version Date/Time:</p>
| <p>Software version, date, and file size.</p>
|-
| <p>Free Mem:</p>
| <p>Available memory.</p>
|-
| <p>Free Disk:</p>
| <p>Available disk space.</p>
|-
| <p>Next Handle</p>
| <p>Next available file handle.</p>
|-
| <p>Free Handles</p>
| <p>Number of handles available to open files.</p>
|-
| <p>ITC Status</p>
| <p>Status of the Inter-track Communications (ITC).</p>
|-
| <p>Scale Status</p>
| <p>Status of the scale.</p>
|-
| <p>REDI (1-4) Status</p>
| <p>Status of the REDI port(s), if installed.</p>
|-
| <p>MicroHBD Status</p>
| <p>Status of the MicroHBD, if installed.</p>
|-
| <p>XTrack Status</p>
| <p>Status of all configured Tracks</p>
|}
 
=== Extended System Information and Status '''(//) '''[Double Forward Slash] ] ===
<p>The Extended System Information and Status (/'''/''') command (Double Slash) displays debug and self diagnostic information in addition to the standard System Information. It varies from version to version and will not be detailed here.</p>
 
=== Display Message Metrics '''(MM) '''Version 5.2+ ===
<p>The Display Message Metrics (MM) command displays the count for each system status message. Messages are from APUERROR.DAT file and correspond to messages in SYS report and reports sent to maintenance host. Remove the file "messmet.dat" to reset the Message Metrics count file.</p><p><br></p><div>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"  
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"  
|-
|-
| style="width: 100%;" | <p>Nicholson Ave&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; MP: 0000.0 Station 00001&nbsp; Reader 1</p>
| style="width: 100%;" | <p class="mwt-heading" >===== Message Metrics =====</p>
<p>&nbsp;Train Seq #0002&nbsp;&nbsp; Date: 05-02-11&nbsp;&nbsp; Time: 09:02:35</p>
<p>Unit Startup&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; -</p>
<p>&nbsp; ENG: OICU 812&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Dir: S&nbsp;&nbsp; MPH: 024&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Axles: 0024</p>
<p>User Abort&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; -</p>
<p>&nbsp; WDA = 024&nbsp;&nbsp; WDB = 024&nbsp;&nbsp; WDAB = 000&nbsp;&nbsp; WDBA = 024</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; ************</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; HOST REPORT:&nbsp; ON&nbsp; : * :05-02-11&nbsp; 09:04:52/09:05:01</p>
<p>Presence Startup&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;8</p>
<p>Presence Clear&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; 8</p>
<p>Process Startup&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; -</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; ************</p>
<p>Pres Circuit Warnin&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;1</p>
<p>Aborted File Create&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; -</p>
|}
<p style="text-align: center;" >Figure 4.14: Display Message Metrics Screen (partial) Version 5. 2+</p>
 
=== Modem Self Test - Local Only '''(MST)''' ===
<p>The Modem Self Test ('''MST''') command checks the modem setup and operational ability. It does '''NOT''' test telephone line connectivity. It can only be run from the local port or telnet and will return the test results in the same format as the Reader Interface Self Test.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp; Loco Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 02&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 01&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Xtags: 01</p>
<div></div>
<p>&nbsp; Car Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 003&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Xtags: 003</p>
 
<p>&nbsp; Container:&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Chassis:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Trailer:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000</p>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
<p>&nbsp; Lost Axles:&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Lost Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Other Tags:&nbsp; 00</p>
|-
| style="width: 100%;" | <div><p>Modem Test&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Status</p>
<p>-----------------------------------------------------------&nbsp; -----</p>
<p>Modem Communications.........................&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; OK</p>
<p>Modem Carrier.........................................&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; OK</p>
<p>All Tests Passed.......................................&nbsp;&nbsp; NORMAL</p></div>
|}
 
<p style="text-align: center;">Figure 4.15: Modem Self Test - Local Only Screen</p>
<p>Type the '''MST''' command and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;.</p>
<p>Data Fields</p>
<div>
 
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; height: 84px;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 82.1719px;" | <p>Field</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 542.656px;" | <p>Description</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 82.1719px;" | <p>Modem Test:</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 542.656px;" | <p>Lists the type of modem test being run: Modem Communications and Modem Carrier.</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 82.1719px;" | <p>Status</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 542.656px;" | <p>Displays the results of the modem tests.</p>
|}
</div>
 
=== Toggle Sensor Power '''(SP)''' ===
<p>The Toggle Sensor Power ('''SP''') command allows you to turn the power to the external sensor devices off and on (if the site is equipped with a sensor power relay or LVD-2000).</p>
<p>1)&nbsp; To turn external sensor power off, type the '''SP''' command and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. The following message displays:</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>AEM&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; COMET00515011050206021602060N4110002GGS0E024024024??FN00307G02000030000024</p>
<div>
<p>RRE001D&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; OICU000812A GLK00014240601</p>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241);" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
<p>THI001OICU0000000812?????0000?00000000??????0?0014????</p>
|-
<p>RTD2A453C29502020243252452058585858204E415300</p>
| style="width: 100%;" | <p>---------------------------------------</p>
<p>RRE002D&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0000000000U GNK00000240601</p>
<p>!! External sensor power is now OFF&nbsp; !!</p>
<p>RRE003R&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0000000000U GNK00000240401</p>
<p>RRE004R&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0000000000U GNK00000240401</p>
<p>RRE005R&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0000000000U GNK00000240401</p>
<p>EOC0000000378</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp; End List 0002</p>
<p>Press any key to turn power back on...</p>
<p>---------------------------------------</p>
|}
</div>
<p style="text-align: center;" >Figure 4.16: Toggle Sensor Power Message</p>
<p>2)&nbsp; Press any key to turn external sensor power back on. The following message will display.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; END</p>
<p>“External sensor power is now ON”</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>APU102XP: Main 1&gt;</p>
<p>'''Note:''' This usually causes spurious inputs the APU-102 perceives as site activity. The APU-102 may go into acquisition mode. It will timeout.</p>
|}
 
</div>
=== Terminate Recording '''(TR)''' ===
<p style="text-align: center;" >Figure 4.9: List Clean Consist - T94 Format Screen</p>
<p>The Terminate Recording ('''TR''') command terminates the APU-102’s recording of the current train.</p>
<p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''TR''' command and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. The following message displays:</p>
<p>"This function will terminate recording of current train. Continue (Y/N)?"</p>
<p>2)&nbsp; Select Y(es) or N(o). The APU102XP: &nbsp;Main prompt redisplays.</p>


=== 4.3.2.3&nbsp; Train Summary '''(S)''' ===
<br>
<p>The Train Summary ('''S''') command provides the train header and the equipment and tag summary without the consist information. A recap of the equipment that moved across the site is provided. This includes the number and types of equipment that went through the site as well as the number of tags read for some groups.</p><p><br></p><div><p>Nicholson Ave&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; MP: 0000.0 Station 00001&nbsp; Reader 1</p>
 
<p>&nbsp;Train Seq #0002&nbsp;&nbsp; Date: 05-02-11&nbsp;&nbsp; Time: 09:02:35</p>
=== Simulate Train '''(ST)''' ===
<p>&nbsp; ENG: OICU 812&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Dir: S&nbsp;&nbsp; MPH: 024&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Axles: 0024</p>
<p>The Simulate Train ('''ST''') command initiates a train test sequence for testing the reporting functions. The simulation cannot exercise the acquisition processes, but can perform post-processing functions and consist reporting. It is assigned a sequence number and will appear in the train directory just like an actual train. If it is undesirable to report simulated trains, a host reporting parameter can be modified to enable/disable reporting for each active session.</p><p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''ST''' command and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. The ''APU-102 Main ''prompt re-displays.</p><p>2)&nbsp; Type '''D '''(or any of the available D command formats) to access the Directory command. The Directory screen displays the simulated train.</p>
<p>&nbsp; WDA = 024&nbsp;&nbsp; WDB = 024&nbsp;&nbsp; WDAB = 000&nbsp;&nbsp; WDBA = 024</p>
 
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; HOST REPORT:&nbsp; ON&nbsp; : * :05-02-11&nbsp; 09:04:52/09:05:01</p>
=== Simulate Maintenance Report ('''SM''') ===
<p>The Simulate Maintenance Report ('''SM''') command causes the maintenance reporter process to initiate a maintenance transaction with the host by issuing a "No Activity" message to the system logger for the session you are logged into. If maintenance is enabled, it goes through its normal reporting processes. This function has no effect if the maintenance reporter is not activated.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp; Loco Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 02&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 01&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Xtags: 01</p>
<div>
<p>&nbsp; Car Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 003&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Xtags: 003</p>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
<p>&nbsp; Container:&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Chassis:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Trailer:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000</p>
|-
<p>&nbsp; Lost Axles: 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Lost Tags:&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Other Tags: 00</p>
| style="width: 100%;" | <p>No Activity" message has been logged.</p><p>Maintenance report is now pending...</p><p><br></p><p>APU102XP: Change 1&gt;</p>
<p><br></p>
|}
<p>End List 0002</p>
</div>
<p><br></p>
<p style="text-align: center;" >Figure 4.17: Simulate Maintenance Report Screen</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; END</p>
<p>Type the '''SM''' command and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;.</p>
<p><br></p>
 
<p>APU102XP: Main 1&gt;</p></div><p>Figure 4.10: Train Summary Screen</p><p>Type the '''S''' command in one of the following formats:</p><p><br></p>
=== Outbound Data Manager ('''ODM''') ===
<p>Outbound Data Manager is used in '''''Distributed Processing''''' Systems. AEI information from this APU-102 is transmitted to other “readerless” wayside systems, upstream on the same corridor, to match to axle data on those systems. This allows those systems to send tagged consists with defect data added to their respective hosts.</p><p>Refer to the ''APU103 Installation & Operation Manual'''' ''for additional information.</p>


{|
<br>
|-
|<p>Command Format</p>


|<p>Description</p>
=== Inbound Data Manager ('''IDM''') ] ===
<p>Inbound Data Manager is used in Distributed Processing Systems. If this APU-102 was configured as a readerless APU (APU-103) it would be connected to wayside defect detector equipment. Axle data from the Defect Detector would be matched to AEI data received from downstream APU-102s. Its primary use is to show what trains from what remote sites are on the system, specifics about each train, and whether or not it has been matched to a local train.</p><p>Refer to the ''APU103 Installation & Operation Manual'''' ''for additional information.</p>


|-  
=== Display Likely Matches ('''MAP''') ===
|<p>S</p>
<p>MAP used in Distributed Processing Systems. If this APU-102 was configured as a readerless APU (APU-103) it would be connected to wayside defect detector equipment. The MAP command displays potential matches between trains received from downstream readers to local trains acquired by this APU-103.</p><p><br></p><p>Refer to the ''APU103 Installation & Operation Manual'''' ''for additional information.</p>


|<p>Required. Summary of most recent train.</p>
=== Exit and Log Out ('''X''') ===
<p>The Exit and Log Out ('''X''') command allows you to exit the current session and return to the Session Select menu.</p><p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''X''' command (or “'''5'''” if displayed as a choice) at the ''Session #'' prompt and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. '''X''' works regardless of the version.</p><p>2)&nbsp; The system displays site name, the date and time, then logs out.</p>


|-
=== Dump Raw Data ('''DD''') ===<p>The Dump Raw Data ('''DD''') command dumps the raw data to the requesting terminal.</p><p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''DD '''command in one of the following formats.</p><p>'''Note: '''This command must be entered with one of the valid extensions.</p>
|<p>S, Sequence #</p>


|<p>Optional. Summary for the specified sequence number</p>
<br><p><br></p>


{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1" cellpadding="2"
|-  
|-  
|<p>S,*</p>
|<p>Command Format</p>


|<p>Optional. Summary for all available trains.</p>
|<p>Description</p>


|}<p><br></p>
|-
|<p>DD(Extension)</p>


<br><p>Header Fields</p><p>Refer to tables 4-1 through 4-3 for header field definitions.</p><p>Data Fields</p><p>As a summary screen, only header fields displays.</p>
|<p>Required. Raw data for the most recent train.</p><p>Valid extensions:</p><p>S&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Processing Summary</p><p>F&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Full Composite Listing</p><p>T&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Raw Tag Data</p><p>C&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Axle-Car Conversion Data</p><p>L&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Event Log</p><p>W&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Wheel Event Log</p>


=== 4.3.2.4&nbsp; System Health Summary '''(SHS)''' ===
|-
<p>The System Health Summary ('''SHS''') command displays any trains that the APU-102 flags as having potential problems, performs a Reader Interface Self Test ('''RST''') and, if not dialed in with the modem, performs a Modem Self Test ('''MST'''). The APU-102 monitors items such as antenna handshakes, wheel detector pulses, modem retries, etc. If a train shows up on the System Health Summary, it should be determined if a problem can be prevented before it happens.</p><p><br></p><div><p><br></p>
|<p>DD(Extension), Sequence #</p>
<p>APU102</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>SYSTEM HEALTH SUMMARY</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Condition&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Status</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Train #0070&nbsp;&nbsp; Axle conversion error&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; WARNING</p>
<p>Train #0076&nbsp;&nbsp; Axle conversion error&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; WARNING</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>0 Failure(s), 2 Warning(s).</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>End of report.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>APU102XP: Main 1&gt;</p></div><p>Figure 4.11: System Health Summary Screen</p><p>Type the '''SHS''' command and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;.</p>


<br><p>Header Fields</p><p>There are no header fields on this screen.</p><p>Data Fields</p><p>The table below defines the data fields on the System Health Summary screen.</p><p><br></p><div>
|<p>Optional. Raw data for the specified sequence number.</p>


{|
|-  
|-  
|<p>Field</p>
|<p>DD(Extension), *</p>
|<p>Description</p>
 
|-
|<p>Optional. Raw data for all trains.</p>
|<p>Condition</p>
|<p>Condition of the train. Lists the train sequence number and the diagnosed problem.</p>
|-
|<p>Status</p>
|<p>Issues a “Warning” or “Failure” status indicating if the problem may be corrected or if system failure has occurred.</p>
|-
|<p># Failure(s)</p>
|<p>Lists number of APU-102 system failures.</p>
|-
|<p># Warning(s)</p>
|<p>Lists number of APU-102 system warnings.</p>
|}
</div><p><br></p>


=== 4.3.2.5&nbsp; System Information and Status '''(/) '''[Forward Slash] ===
|}<p><br></p><p>''Example: ''Type DDS,0002 to receive Processing Summary information for sequence'' ''number 0002.</p><p>If all screen information has displayed, the ''APU102XP: &nbsp;Main ''prompt displays.'' ''If more information is available, you are prompted to select Continuous ('''C''') or Paused ('''P''').'' ''The Continuous display screen scrolls all information about the requested train without stopping.'' ''The Paused display scrolls through the data one screen at a time.</p><p>2)&nbsp; Type''' C''' or '''P'''.</p><p>If you selected ('''P''')aused and there are more screens to display, the APU-102 prompts you with an option to press &lt;'''C&gt;''' to change to Continuous display, press '''&lt;ESC&gt; '''to exit the list, or press any other key to continue the Paused display.'' ''This process continues until all the train data has been displayed or a different selection is made.</p>
<p>The System Information and Status ('''/''') command displays the software version, date, and file size. It also displays the available memory and disk space. The status of the Inter-track Communications ('''ITC'''), HBD, Scale, REDI, XTrack are displayed, if installed. The status indicator reports the presence of periodic '''heartbeat''' messages received from the other connected device. <br>''This report may be updated as improvements are made to the AEI application.''</p><p><br></p><div><p><br></p>
===== Optional Formats =====
<p>Version Date/Time: "AP423.EXE" V4.23 9/2/1998 4:23:0&nbsp; (180272bytes)</p>
<p>The functionality of each Dump Raw Data command extension is described below.</p>
<p><br></p>
===== Dump Data Processing Summary ('''DDS''') =====
<p>Free Mem: 194160, Free Disk: 431104, Next Handle: 2, Free Handles: 15</p>
<p>The Dump Data Processing Summary ('''DDS''') command takes the raw data and sorts it into categories that you can easily identify and use.'' ''The information is divided into six groups excluding the train header and equipment and tag summary.'' ''The groups include the Train Summary Recap, the Axle Summary, the Speed summary, the Conversion Summary, the Tagged Equipment Summary, and the Reader Summary.</p><p><br></p><div>
<p><br></p>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2" cellpadding="4"
<p>ITC Status....... Not Installed</p>
|-
<p>Scale Status..... Not Installed</p>
| style="width: 100%;" |<p>Nicholson Ave&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; MP: 0000.0 Station 00001&nbsp; Reader 1</p>
<p>REDI 1 Status.... Not Installed</p>
<p>&nbsp;Train Seq #0002&nbsp;&nbsp; Date: 05-02-11&nbsp;&nbsp; Time: 09:02:35</p>
<p>REDI 2 Status.... Not Installed</p>
<p>&nbsp; ENG: OICU 812&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Dir: S&nbsp;&nbsp; MPH: 024&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Axles: 0024</p>
<p>REDI 3 Status.... Not Installed</p>
<p>&nbsp; WDA = 024&nbsp;&nbsp; WDB = 024&nbsp;&nbsp; WDAB = 000&nbsp;&nbsp; WDBA = 024</p>
<p>REDI 4 Status.... Not Installed</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; HOST REPORT:&nbsp; ON&nbsp; : * :05-02-11&nbsp; 09:04:52/09:05:01</p>
<p><br></p></div><p>Figure 4.12: System Information and Status Screen Version &lt; 5.1.1</p>
<p><br></p>
 
<p>&nbsp; Loco Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 02&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 01&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Xtags: 01</p>
<br><p><br></p><div><p>Version Date/Time: "APU102.EXE" V5.1.1.102 4/11/2011 11:37:32 (bytes)</p>
<p>&nbsp; Car Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 003&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Xtags: 003</p>
<p>&nbsp; Container:&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Chassis:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Trailer:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000</p>
<p>&nbsp; Lost Axles:&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Lost Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Other Tags:&nbsp; 00</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp; Site : test&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Lead Engine : ENG0000001&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Locomotives : 2</p>
<p>&nbsp; Time : 16:02:01 01/31/96&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Sequence # : 0001&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Railcars : 3</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; Dir : LtoR (S)&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; File ID : 00000001&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Unknown : 0</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Axle Summary&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Speed Summary&nbsp;&nbsp; Conversion Summary</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;--------&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; -----------------&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; ---------------------</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; WDA : 24&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; WDAB : 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Average : 24&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Status&nbsp; : GOOD</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; WDB : 24&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; WDBA : 24&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Maximum : 24&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Lost Axles : 0</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;C On : 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; C Off: 48&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Minimum : 24&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Lost Tags&nbsp; : 0</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Total : 24</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Free Mem: 331,169,792, Free Disk: 85,196 KB</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Tagged Equipment Summary</p>
<p>&nbsp; ----------------------------------</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;Locomotive : 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;Tractor : 0</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Railcar : 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Truck : 0</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;Container : 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Dolly : 0</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Trailer : 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Non.Rev : 0</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Chassis : 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;EOT : 0</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Other : 0</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Reader Summary</p>
<p>&nbsp; ---------------------------------------------------------------------------</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Tier&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Tags Read&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Avg Handshakes&nbsp; Pred Handshakes&nbsp; Performance Index</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; -------&nbsp;&nbsp; --0--&nbsp; --1--&nbsp;&nbsp; --0--&nbsp; --1--&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; --0--&nbsp; --1--&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; --0--&nbsp; --1--</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;Tier&nbsp; 0 :&nbsp;&nbsp; 1&nbsp;&nbsp;0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 14&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; -</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;Tier&nbsp; 1 :&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;-&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; -</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;Tier&nbsp; 2 :&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;-&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; -</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;Tier&nbsp; 3 :&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;-&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; -</p>
<p>&nbsp; End List 0001</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>ITC Status......... Not Installed.</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; END</p>
<p>Scale Status....... Not Installed.</p>
<p>MicroHBD Status.... Not Installed.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p></div><p>Figure 4.13: System Information and Status Screen Version 5.2+</p><p>Type the &lt;'''/'''&gt; command (Forward Slash) and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;.</p><p>Header Fields</p><p>Refer to table 4-1 for header field definitions.</p><p>Data Fields</p><p>The table below defines the data fields on the System Information and Status screen.</p><p><br></p>
<p>APU102XP: Main 1&gt;</p>
|}
</div><p style="text-align: center;">Figure 4.18: Dump Data Processing Summary Screen</p><p>Type the '''DDS''' command in one of the following formats:</p><p><br></p>


{|
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1" cellpadding="2"
|-  
|-  
|<p>Field</p>
|<p>Command Format</p>


|<p>Description</p>
|<p>Description</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>Version Date/Time:</p>
|<p>DDS</p>


|<p>Software version, date, and file size.</p>
|<p>Required. Summary of the most recent train.</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>Free Mem:</p>
|<p>DDS, Sequence #</p>


|<p>Available memory.</p>
|<p>Optional. Summary for the specified sequence number.</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>Free Disk:</p>
|<p>DDS,*</p>
 
|<p>Optional. Summaries for all available trains.</p>


|<p>Available disk space.</p>
|}<p><br></p>


|-  
<br>
|<p>Next Handle</p>
===== Header Fields =====
<p>Refer to tables 4-1 through 4-3 for header descriptions on this screen.</p>
===== Data Fields =====
<p>The tables below define the data fields in the different sections on the Dump Data Processing Summary screen.</p>
===== Train Summary Recap =====
<p>Recaps information that identifies the train.</p><p><br></p>


|<p>Next available file handle.</p>
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; height: 280px; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1" cellpadding="2"
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 80.875px;" |<p>Field</p>


|-
| style="height: 28px; width: 456.266px;" |<p>Description</p>
|<p>Free Handles</p>


|<p>Number of handles available to open files.</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 80.875px;" |<p>Site</p>


|-
| style="height: 28px; width: 456.266px;" |<p>Site name.</p>
|<p>ITC Status</p>


|<p>Status of the Inter-track Communications (ITC).</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 80.875px;" |<p>Time</p>


|-
| style="height: 28px; width: 456.266px;" |<p>Time and date the train entered the site.</p>
|<p>Scale Status</p>


|<p>Status of the scale.</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 80.875px;" |<p>Dir</p>


|-
| style="height: 28px; width: 456.266px;" |<p>Direction the train was moving.</p>
|<p>REDI (1-4) Status</p>


|<p>Status of the REDI port(s), if installed.</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 80.875px;" |<p>Lead Engine</p>


|-
| style="height: 28px; width: 456.266px;" |<p>Lead engine’s tag number, if read.</p>
|<p>MicroHBD Status</p>


|<p>Status of the MicroHBD, if installed.</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 80.875px;" |<p>Sequence #</p>


|-
| style="height: 28px; width: 456.266px;" |<p>Sequence number of the train.</p>
|<p>XTrack Status</p>


|<p>Status of all configured Tracks</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 80.875px;" |<p>File ID</p>


|}
| style="height: 28px; width: 456.266px;" |<p>Permanent file identification number that the APU-102 assigns the train.</p>


=== 4.3.2.6&nbsp; Extended System Information and Status '''(//) '''[Double Forward Slash] ] ===
|- style="height: 28px;"
<p>The Extended System Information and Status (/'''/''') command (Double Slash) displays debug and self diagnostic information in addition to the standard System Information. It varies from version to version and will not be detailed here.</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 80.875px;" |<p>Locomotives</p>


=== 4.3.2.7&nbsp; Display Message Metrics '''(MM) '''Version 5.2+ ===
| style="height: 28px; width: 456.266px;" |<p>Number of locomotives detected.</p>
<p>The Display Message Metrics (MM) command displays the count for each system status message. Messages are from APUERROR.DAT file and correspond to messages in SYS report and reports sent to maintenance host. Remove the file "messmet.dat" to reset the Message Metrics count file.</p><p><br></p><div><p>===== Message Metrics =====
</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Unit Startup&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; -</p>
<p>User Abort&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; -</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; ************</p>
<p>Presence Startup&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 8</p>
<p>Presence Clear&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 8</p>
<p>Process Startup&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; -</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; ************</p>
<p>Pres Circuit Warnin&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 1</p>
<p>Aborted File Create&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; -</p></div><p>Figure 4.14: Display Message Metrics Screen (partial) Version 5. 2+</p><p>4.3.2.8&nbsp; Modem Self Test - Local Only '''(MST)'''</p><p>The Modem Self Test ('''MST''') command checks the modem setup and operational ability. It does '''NOT''' test telephone line connectivity. It can only be run from the local port or telnet and will return the test results in the same format as the Reader Interface Self Test.</p><p><br></p><div><p>Modem Test&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Status</p>
<p>-----------------------------------------------------------&nbsp; -----</p>
<p>Modem Communications......................................&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; OK</p>
<p>Modem Carrier.............................................&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; OK</p>
<p>All Tests Passed..........................................&nbsp;&nbsp; NORMAL</p></div><p>Figure 4.15: Modem Self Test - Local Only Screen</p><p>Type the '''MST''' command and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;.</p><p>Data Fields</p><p><br></p><div>


{|
|- style="height: 28px;"
|-
| style="height: 28px; width: 80.875px;" |<p>Railcars</p>
|<p>Field</p>
|<p>Description</p>
|-  
|<p>Modem Test:</p>
|<p>Lists the type of modem test being run: Modem Communications and Modem Carrier.</p>
|-
|<p>Status</p>
|<p>Displays the results of the modem tests.</p>
|}
</div><p><br><br></p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><br></p>


=== 4.3.2.9&nbsp; Toggle Sensor Power '''(SP)''' ===
| style="height: 28px; width: 456.266px;" |<p>Number of railcars detected.</p>
<p>The Toggle Sensor Power ('''SP''') command allows you to turn the power to the external sensor devices off and on (if the site is equipped with a sensor power relay or LVD-2000).</p><p>1)&nbsp; To turn external sensor power off, type the '''SP''' command and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. The following message displays:</p><p><br></p><div><p>---------------------------------------</p>
<p>!! External sensor power is now OFF&nbsp; !!</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Press any key to turn power back on...</p>
<p>---------------------------------------</p></div><p>Figure 4.16: Toggle Sensor Power Message</p><p>2)&nbsp; Press any key to turn external sensor power back on. The following message will display.</p><p><br></p><p>“External sensor power is now ON”</p><p><br></p><p>'''Note:''' This usually causes spurious inputs the APU-102 perceives as site activity. The APU-102 may go into acquisition mode. It will timeout.</p><p>4.3.2.10&nbsp; Terminate Recording '''(TR)'''</p><p>The Terminate Recording ('''TR''') command terminates the APU-102’s recording of the current train.</p><p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''TR''' command and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. The following message displays:</p><p><br></p><p>This function will terminate recording of current train. Continue (Y/N)?</p><p>2)&nbsp; Select Y(es) or N(o). The APU102XP: &nbsp;Main prompt redisplays.</p>


<br>
|- style="height: 28px;"
=== 4.3.2.11&nbsp; Simulate Train '''(ST)''' ===
| style="height: 28px; width: 80.875px;" |<p>Unknown</p>
<p>The Simulate Train ('''ST''') command initiates a train test sequence for testing the reporting functions. The simulation cannot exercise the acquisition processes, but can perform post-processing functions and consist reporting. It is assigned a sequence number and will appear in the train directory just like an actual train. If it is undesirable to report simulated trains, a host reporting parameter can be modified to enable/disable reporting for each active session.</p><p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''ST''' command and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. The ''APU-102 Main ''prompt re-displays.</p><p>2)&nbsp; Type '''D '''(or any of the available D command formats) to access the Directory command. The Directory screen displays the simulated train.</p>


=== 4.3.2.12&nbsp; Simulate Maintenance Report ('''SM''') ===
| style="height: 28px; width: 456.266px;" |<p>Number of units detected that did not fit into any recognizable pattern.</p>
<p>The Simulate Maintenance Report ('''SM''') command causes the maintenance reporter process to initiate a maintenance transaction with the host by issuing a "No Activity" message to the system logger for the session you are logged into. If maintenance is enabled, it goes through its normal reporting processes. This function has no effect if the maintenance reporter is not activated.</p><p><br></p><div><p>No Activity" message has been logged.</p>
<p>Maintenance report is now pending...</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>APU102XP: Change 1&gt;</p></div><p>Figure 4.17: Simulate Maintenance Report Screen</p><p>Type the '''SM''' command and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;.</p>


=== 4.3.2.13&nbsp; Outbound Data Manager ('''ODM''') ===
|}<p><br></p>
<p>Outbound Data Manager is used in '''''Distributed Processing''''' Systems. AEI information from this APU-102 is transmitted to other “readerless” wayside systems, upstream on the same corridor, to match to axle data on those systems. This allows those systems to send tagged consists with defect data added to their respective hosts.</p><p>Refer to the ''APU103 Installation & Operation Manual'''' ''for additional information.</p>
===== Axle Summary =====
<p>Summarizes the axle count for the train'''.'''</p><p><br></p>


<br>
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; height: 247px; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1" cellpadding="2"
=== 4.3.2.14&nbsp; Inbound Data Manager ('''IDM''') ] ===
|- style="height: 28px;"
<p>Inbound Data Manager is used in Distributed Processing Systems. If this APU-102 was configured as a readerless APU (APU-103) it would be connected to wayside defect detector equipment. Axle data from the Defect Detector would be matched to AEI data received from downstream APU-102s. Its primary use is to show what trains from what remote sites are on the system, specifics about each train, and whether or not it has been matched to a local train.</p><p>Refer to the ''APU103 Installation & Operation Manual'''' ''for additional information.</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 43.2031px;" |<p>Field</p>


=== 4.3.2.15&nbsp; Display Likely Matches ('''MAP''') ===
| style="height: 28px; width: 1147.8px;" |<p>Description</p>
<p>MAP used in Distributed Processing Systems. If this APU-102 was configured as a readerless APU (APU-103) it would be connected to wayside defect detector equipment. The MAP command displays potential matches between trains received from downstream readers to local trains acquired by this APU-103.</p><p><br></p><p>Refer to the ''APU103 Installation & Operation Manual'''' ''for additional information.</p>


=== 4.3.2.16&nbsp; Exit and Log Out ('''X''') ===
|- style="height: 28px;"
<p>The Exit and Log Out ('''X''') command allows you to exit the current session and return to the Session Select menu.</p><p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''X''' command (or “'''5'''” if displayed as a choice) at the ''Session #'' prompt and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. '''X''' works regardless of the version.</p><p>2)&nbsp; The system displays site name, the date and time, then logs out.</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 43.2031px;" |<p>WDA</p>


=== 4.3.2.17&nbsp; Dump Raw Data ('''DD''') ===
| style="height: 28px; width: 1147.8px;" |<p>Number of wheel counts received on Wheel Detector A. Includes forward and backing counts.</p>
<p>The Dump Raw Data ('''DD''') command dumps the raw data to the requesting terminal.</p><p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''DD '''command in one of the following formats.</p><p>'''Note: '''This command must be entered with one of the valid extensions.</p>


<br><p><br></p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 43.2031px;" |<p>WDB</p>


{|
| style="height: 28px; width: 1147.8px;" |<p>Number of wheel counts received on Wheel Detector B. Includes forward and backing counts.</p>
|-
|<p>Command Format</p>


|<p>Description</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 43.2031px;" |<p>C On</p>


|-
| style="height: 28px; width: 1147.8px;" |<p>Number of “C - On” pulses received over the maximum required for the axle count. Should be 0.</p>
|<p>DD(Extension)</p>


|<p>Required. Raw data for the most recent train.</p><p>Valid extensions:</p><p>S&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Processing Summary</p><p>F&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Full Composite Listing</p><p>T&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Raw Tag Data</p><p>C&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Axle-Car Conversion Data</p><p>L&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Event Log</p><p>W&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Wheel Event Log</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 43.2031px;" |<p>Total</p>


| style="height: 28px; width: 1147.8px;" |<p>Total number of axles on the train.</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 43.2031px;" |<p>WDAB</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 1147.8px;" |<p>Number of wheel transitions from Wheel Detector A to Wheel Detector B.</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 43.2031px;" |<p>WDBA</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 1147.8px;" |<p>Number of wheel transitions from Wheel Detector B to Wheel Detector A.</p>
|- style="height: 51px;"
| style="height: 51px; width: 43.2031px;" |<p>C Off</p>
| style="height: 51px; width: 1147.8px;" |<p>Number of “C-Off” pulses received over the maximum required for the axle count. Zero-Speed transducers should = 0; Passive transducers should = total number of A and B pulses (because C-pulse not used).</p>
|}<p><br></p>
===== Speed Summary =====
<p>Summarizes the train’s speed as it passed the site.</p><p><br></p>
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1" cellpadding="2"
|-  
|-  
|<p>DD(Extension), Sequence #</p>
|<p>Field</p>
 
|<p>Description</p>
 
|-
|<p>Average</p>


|<p>Optional. Raw data for the specified sequence number.</p>
|<p>Average speed of the train as it passed the site.</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>DD(Extension), *</p>
|<p>Maximum</p>


|<p>Optional. Raw data for all trains.</p>
|<p>Fastest speed of the train as it passed the site.</p>


|}<p><br></p><p>''Example: ''Type DDS,0002 to receive Processing Summary information for sequence'' ''number 0002.</p><p>If all screen information has displayed, the ''APU102XP: &nbsp;Main ''prompt displays.'' ''If more information is available, you are prompted to select Continuous ('''C''') or Paused ('''P''').'' ''The Continuous display screen scrolls all information about the requested train without stopping.'' ''The Paused display scrolls through the data one screen at a time.</p><p>2)&nbsp; Type''' C''' or '''P'''.</p><p>If you selected ('''P''')aused and there are more screens to display, the APU-102 prompts you with an option to press &lt;'''C&gt;''' to change to Continuous display, press '''&lt;ESC&gt; '''to exit the list, or press any other key to continue the Paused display.'' ''This process continues until all the train data has been displayed or a different selection is made.</p><p>Optional Formats</p><p>The functionality of each Dump Raw Data command extension is described below.</p><p>Dump Data Processing Summary ('''DDS''')</p><p>The Dump Data Processing Summary ('''DDS''') command takes the raw data and sorts it into categories that you can easily identify and use.'' ''The information is divided into six groups excluding the train header and equipment and tag summary.'' ''The groups include the Train Summary Recap, the Axle Summary, the Speed summary, the Conversion Summary, the Tagged Equipment Summary, and the Reader Summary.</p>
|-  
|<p>Minimum</p>


<br><p><br></p><p><br></p><div><p>Nicholson Ave&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; MP: 0000.0 Station 00001&nbsp; Reader 1</p>
|<p>Slowest speed of the train as it passed the site.</p>
<p>&nbsp;Train Seq #0002&nbsp;&nbsp; Date: 05-02-11&nbsp;&nbsp; Time: 09:02:35</p>
 
<p>&nbsp; ENG: OICU 812&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Dir: S&nbsp;&nbsp; MPH: 024&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Axles: 0024</p>
|}<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp; WDA = 024&nbsp;&nbsp; WDB = 024&nbsp;&nbsp; WDAB = 000&nbsp;&nbsp; WDBA = 024</p>
===== Conversion Summary =====
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; HOST REPORT:&nbsp; ON&nbsp; : * :05-02-11&nbsp; 09:04:52/09:05:01</p>
<p>Summarizes the train conversion.</p><p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp; Loco Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 02&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 01&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Xtags: 01</p>
<p>&nbsp; Car Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 003&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Xtags: 003</p>
<p>&nbsp; Container:&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Chassis:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Trailer:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000</p>
<p>&nbsp; Lost Axles: 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Lost Tags:&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Other Tags: 00</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp; Site : test&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Lead Engine : ENG0000001&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Locomotives : 2</p>
<p>&nbsp; Time : 16:02:01 01/31/96&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Sequence # : 0001&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Railcars : 3</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; Dir : LtoR (S)&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; File ID : 00000001&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Unknown : 0</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Axle Summary&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Speed Summary&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Conversion Summary</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; --------&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; -----------------&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; ---------------------</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; WDA : 24&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; WDAB : 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Average : 24&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Status&nbsp; : GOOD</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; WDB : 24&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; WDBA : 24&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Maximum : 24&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Lost Axles : 0</p>
<p>&nbsp; C On : 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; C Off: 48&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Minimum : 24&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Lost Tags&nbsp; : 0</p>
<p>&nbsp;Total : 24</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Tagged Equipment Summary</p>
<p>&nbsp; ----------------------------------</p>
<p>&nbsp; Locomotive : 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Tractor : 0</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Railcar : 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Truck : 0</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; Container : 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Dolly : 0</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Trailer : 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Non.Rev : 0</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Chassis : 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; EOT : 0</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Other : 0</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Reader Summary</p>
<p>&nbsp; ---------------------------------------------------------------------------</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Tier&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Tags Read&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Avg Handshakes&nbsp; Pred Handshakes&nbsp; Performance Index</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; -------&nbsp;&nbsp; --0--&nbsp; --1--&nbsp;&nbsp; --0--&nbsp; --1--&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; --0--&nbsp; --1--&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; --0--&nbsp; --1--</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Tier&nbsp; 0 :&nbsp;&nbsp; 1&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 14&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; -</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Tier&nbsp; 1 :&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; -</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Tier&nbsp; 2 :&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; -</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Tier&nbsp; 3 :&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; -</p>
<p>&nbsp; End List 0001</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; END</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>APU102XP: Main 1&gt;</p></div><p>Figure 4.18: Dump Data Processing Summary Screen</p><p>Type the '''DDS''' command in one of the following formats:</p><p><br></p>


{|
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1" cellpadding="2"
|-  
|-  
|<p>Command Format</p>
|<p>Field</p>


|<p>Description</p>
|<p>Description</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>DDS</p>
|<p>Status</p>


|<p>Required. Summary of the most recent train.</p>
|<p>Status of the way the train correlation ended up.</p><p>Good = All axles and tags correlated correctly.</p><p>ERR1 = An error was found in the correlation of the car section of the train.</p><p>ERR2 = An error was found in the correlation of the locomotive section of the train.</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>DDS, Sequence #</p>
|<p>Lost Axles:</p>


|<p>Optional. Summary for the specified sequence number.</p>
|<p>Count of axles that could not be associated with a recognizable axle pattern. It does not mean the system missed any axles.</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>DDS,*</p>
|<p>Lost Tags:</p>


|<p>Optional. Summaries for all available trains.</p>
|<p>Count of tags not associated with a car, locomotive, caboose or EOT device. Test Tags are counted in this group when system testing is being done. It does not mean the system missed any tags.</p>


|}<p><br></p>
|}<p><br></p>
===== Tag Equipment Summary =====
<p>Totals all tags that were read for the train grouped into the following categories:</p><p><br></p>


<br><p>Header Fields</p><p>Refer to tables 4-1 through 4-3 for header descriptions on this screen.</p><p>Data Fields</p><p>The tables below define the data fields in the different sections on the Dump Data Processing Summary screen.</p><p>Train Summary Recap</p><p>Recaps information that identifies the train.</p><p><br></p>
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; height: 112px; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1" cellpadding="2"
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="width: 76px; height: 28px;" |<p>Locomotive</p>


{|
| style="width: 53px; height: 28px;" |<p>Chassis</p>
|-
|<p>Field</p>


|<p>Description</p>
| style="width: 91px; height: 28px;" |<p>Non-Revenue</p>


|-  
|- style="height: 28px;"
|<p>Site</p>
| style="width: 76px; height: 28px;" |<p>Railcar</p>


|<p>Site name.</p>
| style="width: 53px; height: 28px;" |<p>Tractor</p>


|-
| style="width: 91px; height: 28px;" |<p>EOT</p>
|<p>Time</p>


|<p>Time and date the train entered the site.</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="width: 76px; height: 28px;" |<p>Container</p>


|-
| style="width: 53px; height: 28px;" |<p>Truck</p>
|<p>Dir</p>


|<p>Direction the train was moving.</p>
| style="width: 91px; height: 28px;" |<p>Other</p>


|-  
|- style="height: 28px;"
|<p>Lead Engine</p>
| style="width: 76px; height: 28px;" |<p>Trailer</p>


|<p>Lead engine’s tag number, if read.</p>
| style="width: 53px; height: 28px;" |<p>Dolly</p>


|-
| style="width: 91px; height: 28px;" |<p><br></p>
|<p>Sequence #</p>


|<p>Sequence number of the train.</p>
|}<p><br></p>
===== Reader Summary =====
<p>Summarizes what AEI the readers saw while recording the train.</p><p><br></p>


{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1" cellpadding="2"
|-  
|-  
|<p>File ID</p>
|<p>Field</p>


|<p>Permanent file identification number that the APU-102 assigns the train.</p>
|<p>Description</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>Locomotives</p>
|<p>Tier</p>


|<p>Number of locomotives detected.</p>
|<p>Tier on which the tag was read.</p><p>0 = railcar&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 1 = lower container</p><p>2 = upper container&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 3 = interference reader.</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>Railcars</p>
|<p>Tags Read</p>


|<p>Number of railcars detected.</p>
|<p>Number of tags read on each antenna where 0 = the near antenna and 1 = the far antenna.</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>Unknown</p>
|<p>Avg Handshakes</p>


|<p>Number of units detected that did not fit into any recognizable pattern.</p>
|<p>Average number of times the reader read each tag on each antenna where 0 = the near antenna and 1 = the far antenna.</p>


|}<p><br></p><p>Axle Summary</p><p>Summarizes the axle count for the train'''.'''</p><p><br></p>
{|
|-  
|-  
|<p>Field</p>
|<p>Pred Handshakes</p>


|<p>Description</p>
|<p>Predicted Handshakes. Number of handshakes the software predicts should be received based on the speed of the train and the width of the lobe.</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>WDA</p>
|<p>Performance Index</p>
 
|<p>Determines read performance based on the average handshakes and the predicted handshakes. Average handshakes X 100/predicted handshakes. Maximum = 999.</p>


|<p>Number of wheel counts received on Wheel Detector A. Includes forward and backing counts.</p>
|}<p><br></p>
===== Dump Data Full Composite Listing ('''DDF''') =====
<p>The Dump Data Full Composite Listing ('''DDF''') command begins with the standard train header information and continues with the “Composite AEI Listing.” This section is divided into tag-specific and non-tag-specific information for each car on the train. The DDF is a “first run” at processing the train. Further processing may occur before the final consist report is generated for transmission to the host.</p>


{| style="border-collapse: collapse; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2" cellpadding="4"
|-  
|-  
|<p>WDB</p>
|<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Composite AEI Listing</p><p><br></p><p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; +------------------ First Tag --------------++----------------- Second Tag --------------</p><p>Rec# Car EGC&nbsp;&nbsp; Car ID&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Ts Or Pc Ax LenFT MPH&nbsp; Di Tc Ti&nbsp;&nbsp; Hnd Pre&nbsp; Disqual&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; P# EGC LenFT Ax Pc&nbsp; Ti&nbsp;&nbsp; Hnd Pre&nbsp; Disqual&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; P# EGC LenFT Ax Pc</p><p>---- --- --- ----------- -- -- -- -- ----- ---- -- -- ---- --- --- ----------- -- --- ----- -- -- ----- --- --- ----------- -- --- ----- -- --</p><p>1&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 1&nbsp;&nbsp; 5&nbsp;&nbsp; COMT000123&nbsp; G&nbsp; A&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 6&nbsp; 69&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 3.8&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 2&nbsp; R0F- 43&nbsp; 40&nbsp;&nbsp; ----------- -&nbsp; 5&nbsp;&nbsp; 71&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 6&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp; L1R- 31&nbsp; 26&nbsp;&nbsp; ----------- -&nbsp; 5&nbsp;&nbsp; 71&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 6&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp;</p><p>2&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 2&nbsp;&nbsp; 5&nbsp;&nbsp; KCS000659&nbsp;&nbsp; G&nbsp; B&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 6&nbsp; 66&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 3.5&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 2&nbsp; L0F- 39&nbsp; 40&nbsp;&nbsp; ----------- -&nbsp; 5&nbsp;&nbsp; 68&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 6&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp; R1R- 16&nbsp; 26&nbsp;&nbsp; ----------- -&nbsp; 5&nbsp;&nbsp; 68&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 6&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp;</p><p>3&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 3&nbsp;&nbsp; 19&nbsp; KCS125649&nbsp;&nbsp; G&nbsp; A&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 4&nbsp; 64&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 2.7&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 2&nbsp; R0F- 64&nbsp; 40&nbsp;&nbsp; ----------- -&nbsp; 19&nbsp; 67&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp; L1R- 46&nbsp; 40&nbsp;&nbsp; ----------- -&nbsp; 19&nbsp; 67&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp;</p><p>4&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4&nbsp;&nbsp; 19&nbsp; TTZX855310&nbsp; G&nbsp; A&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 4&nbsp; 73&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 1.8&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 2&nbsp; R0F- 90&nbsp; 60&nbsp;&nbsp; ----------- -&nbsp; 19&nbsp; 79&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp; L1R- 11&nbsp; 80&nbsp;&nbsp; ----------- -&nbsp; 19&nbsp; 79&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp;</p><p>5&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 5&nbsp;&nbsp; 19&nbsp; KCS711108&nbsp;&nbsp; G&nbsp; B&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 4&nbsp; [100] 1.1&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 2&nbsp; L0F- 129 120&nbsp; --L-------- -&nbsp; 19&nbsp; 79&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp; R1R- 36&nbsp; 255&nbsp; --L-------- -&nbsp; 19&nbsp; 79&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp;</p><p>6&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 6&nbsp;&nbsp; 19&nbsp; UTLX025459&nbsp; G&nbsp; A&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 4&nbsp; 42&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 1.5&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 2&nbsp; R0F- 93&nbsp; 120&nbsp; ----------- -&nbsp; 19&nbsp; 43&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp; L1R- 59&nbsp; 80&nbsp;&nbsp; ----------- -&nbsp; 19&nbsp; 43&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp;</p><p>7&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 7&nbsp;&nbsp; 19&nbsp; MSRC004330&nbsp; G&nbsp; B&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 4&nbsp; 62&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 1.8&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 2&nbsp; L0F- 95&nbsp; 120&nbsp; ----------- -&nbsp; 19&nbsp; 67&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp; R1R- 6&nbsp;&nbsp; 40&nbsp;&nbsp; ----------- -&nbsp; 19&nbsp; 67&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp;</p><p>8&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 8&nbsp;&nbsp; 19&nbsp; GMSR040435&nbsp; G&nbsp; A&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 4&nbsp; 64&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 2.5&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 2&nbsp; R0F- 87&nbsp; 60&nbsp;&nbsp; ----------- -&nbsp; 19&nbsp; 67&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp; L1R- 29&nbsp; 40&nbsp;&nbsp; ----------- -&nbsp; 19&nbsp; 67&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp;</p><p>9&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 9&nbsp;&nbsp; 19&nbsp; KCS125602&nbsp;&nbsp; G&nbsp; A&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 4&nbsp; 66&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 3.1&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 2&nbsp; R0F- 59&nbsp; 40&nbsp;&nbsp; ----------- -&nbsp; 19&nbsp; 67&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp; L1R- 35&nbsp; 26&nbsp;&nbsp; ----------- -&nbsp; 19&nbsp; 67&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp;</p><p>10&nbsp;&nbsp; 10&nbsp; 19&nbsp; KCS129103&nbsp;&nbsp; G&nbsp; A&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 4&nbsp; 64&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 3.2&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 2&nbsp; R0F- 48&nbsp; 30&nbsp;&nbsp; ----------- -&nbsp; 19&nbsp; 67&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp; L1R- 27&nbsp; 26&nbsp;&nbsp; ----------- -&nbsp; 19&nbsp; 67&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp;</p><p>11&nbsp;&nbsp; 11&nbsp; 19&nbsp; KCS129279&nbsp;&nbsp; G&nbsp; A&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 4&nbsp; 65&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 3.4&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 2&nbsp; R0F- 59&nbsp; 40&nbsp;&nbsp; ----------- -&nbsp; 19&nbsp; 67&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp; L1R- 38&nbsp; 40&nbsp;&nbsp; ----------- -&nbsp; 19&nbsp; 67&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp;</p><p>12&nbsp;&nbsp; 11&nbsp; 6&nbsp;&nbsp; KCS925804&nbsp;&nbsp; G&nbsp; -&nbsp; -&nbsp; -&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 3.4&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 1&nbsp; -0-- 28&nbsp; 34&nbsp;&nbsp; ----------- -&nbsp; 6&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp; -&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp;</p><p><br></p><p>&nbsp; End List 1349</p><p><br></p><p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; END</p><p><br></p><p><br></p>


|<p>Number of wheel counts received on Wheel Detector B. Includes forward and backing counts.</p>
|}<p style="text-align: center;">Figure 4.19: Dump Data Full Composite Listing Screen</p>


|-
<br><p>Type the '''DDF''' command in one of the following formats:</p><p><br></p>
|<p>C On</p>
 
|<p>Number of “C - On” pulses received over the maximum required for the axle count. Should be 0.</p>


{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1" cellpadding="2"
|-  
|-  
|<p>Total</p>
|<p>Command Format</p>


|<p>Total number of axles on the train.</p>
|<p>Description</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>WDAB</p>
|<p>DDF</p>


|<p>Number of wheel transitions from Wheel Detector A to Wheel Detector B.</p>
|<p>Required. Composite information for the most recent train.</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>WDBA</p>
|<p>DDF, Sequence #</p>


|<p>Number of wheel transitions from Wheel Detector B to Wheel Detector A.</p>
|<p>Optional. Composite information for the specified sequence number.</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>C Off</p>
|<p>DDF,*</p>


|<p>Number of “C-Off” pulses received over the maximum required for the axle count. Zero-Speed transducers should = 0; Passive transducers should = total number of A and B pulses (because C-pulse not used).</p>
|<p>Optional. Composite information for all available trains.</p>


|}<p><br></p><p>Speed Summary</p><p>Summarizes the train’s speed as it passed the site.</p><p><br></p>
|}<p><br></p>
===== Header Fields =====
<p>Refer to tables 4-1 through 4-3 for header descriptions on this screen.</p>
===== Data Fields =====
<p>The table below defines the data fields on the Dump Data Full Composite Listing screen.</p><p>'''Note:''' Some communication programs do not support 142 character display width and will word wrap or truncate at 80 (or 136) characters. '''DDF''' is best viewed by capturing or logging the display and viewing the file offline at 142 characters width.</p>
===== Full Composite Listing =====
<p><br></p>


{|
{| style="border-collapse: collapse;" border="1" cellpadding="2"
|-  
|-  
|<p>Field</p>
|<p>Field</p>
Line 1,176: Line 1,391:


|-  
|-  
|<p>Average</p>
|<p>Rec#</p>


|<p>Average speed of the train as it passed the site.</p>
|<p>Record number assigned by the APU-102.</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>Maximum</p>
|<p>Car</p>


|<p>Fastest speed of the train as it passed the site.</p>
|<p>Location of the equipment in the train with zero (0) being the first car.</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>Minimum</p>
|<p>EGC</p>


|<p>Slowest speed of the train as it passed the site.</p>
|<p>The EGC type of the equipment based on the axle pattern or tag.</p><p><br></p>
 
|}<p><br></p><p>Conversion Summary</p><p>Summarizes the train conversion.</p><p><br></p>


{|
{|
|-  
|-  
|<p>Field</p>
|<p>AAR</p><p>Value</p>


|<p>Description</p>
|<p>Description</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>Status</p>
|<p>1</p>


|<p>Status of the way the train correlation ended up.</p><p>Good = All axles and tags correlated correctly.</p><p>ERR1 = An error was found in the correlation of the car section of the train.</p><p>ERR2 = An error was found in the correlation of the locomotive section of the train.</p>
|<p>Railcar Cover</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>Lost Axles:</p>
|<p>4</p>


|<p>Count of axles that could not be associated with a recognizable axle pattern. It does not mean the system missed any axles.</p>
|<p>Train Number Tag</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>Lost Tags:</p>
|<p>5/37*</p>


|<p>Count of tags not associated with a car, locomotive, caboose or EOT device. Test Tags are counted in this group when system testing is being done. It does not mean the system missed any tags.</p>
|<p>Locomotive&nbsp; *5 is static tag, 37 is dynamic tag</p>


|}<p><br></p><p>Tag Equipment Summary</p><p>Totals all tags that were read for the train grouped into the following categories:</p><p><br></p>
{|
|-  
|-  
|<p>Locomotive</p>
|<p>6</p>


|<p>Chassis</p>
|<p>End-of Train Device</p>
 
|<p>Non-Revenue</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>Railcar</p>
|<p>8</p>


|<p>Tractor</p>
|<p>Generator Set</p>
 
|<p>EOT</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>Container</p>
|<p>10</p>


|<p>Truck</p>
|<p>Intermodal Container</p>
 
|<p>Other</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>Trailer</p>
|<p>14</p>


|<p>Dolly</p>
|<p>Reserved (Formerly Non-Revenue Rail)</p>


|<p><br></p>
|-
|<p>17</p>


|}<p><br></p><p>Reader Summary</p><p>Summarizes what AEI the readers saw while recording the train.</p><p><br></p>
|<p>Tractor (Power)</p>


{|
|-  
|-  
|<p>Field</p>
|<p>18</p>


|<p>Description</p>
|<p>Straight Truck</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>Tier</p>
|<p>19</p>


|<p>Tier on which the tag was read.</p><p>0 = railcar&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 1 = lower container</p><p>2 = upper container&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 3 = interference reader.</p>
|<p>Railcar (Includes non-revenue railcars)</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>Tags Read</p>
|<p>20</p>


|<p>Number of tags read on each antenna where 0 = the near antenna and 1 = the far antenna.</p>
|<p>Dolly</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>Avg Handshakes</p>
|<p>21</p>


|<p>Average number of times the reader read each tag on each antenna where 0 = the near antenna and 1 = the far antenna.</p>
|<p>Trailer</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>Pred Handshakes</p>
|<p>24</p>


|<p>Predicted Handshakes. Number of handshakes the software predicts should be received based on the speed of the train and the width of the lobe.</p>
|<p>Rail Compatible Multi-Modal Equipment</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>Performance Index</p>
|<p>27</p>


|<p>Determines read performance based on the average handshakes and the predicted handshakes. Average handshakes X 100/predicted handshakes. Maximum = 999.</p>
|<p>Chassis</p>
 
|}<p><br></p><p>Dump Data Full Composite Listing ('''DDF''')</p><p>The Dump Data Full Composite Listing ('''DDF''') command begins with the standard train header information and continues with the “Composite AEI Listing.” This section is divided into tag-specific and non-tag-specific information for each car on the train. The DDF is a “first run” at processing the train. Further processing may occur before the final consist report is generated for transmission to the host.</p><div>


{|
|-  
|-  
|<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Composite AEI Listing</p>
|<p>28</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; +------------------ First Tag --------------++----------------- Second Tag --------------</p>
<p>Rec# Car EGC&nbsp;&nbsp; Car ID&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Ts Or Pc Ax LenFT MPH&nbsp; Di Tc Ti&nbsp;&nbsp; Hnd Pre&nbsp; Disqual&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; P# EGC LenFT Ax Pc&nbsp; Ti&nbsp;&nbsp; Hnd Pre&nbsp; Disqual&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; P# EGC LenFT Ax Pc</p>
<p>---- --- --- ----------- -- -- -- -- ----- ---- -- -- ---- --- --- ----------- -- --- ----- -- -- ----- --- --- ----------- -- --- ----- -- --</p>
<p>1&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 1&nbsp;&nbsp; 5&nbsp;&nbsp; COMT000123&nbsp; G&nbsp; A&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 6&nbsp; 69&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 3.8&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 2&nbsp; R0F- 43&nbsp; 40&nbsp;&nbsp; ----------- -&nbsp; 5&nbsp;&nbsp; 71&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 6&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp; L1R- 31&nbsp; 26&nbsp;&nbsp; ----------- -&nbsp; 5&nbsp;&nbsp; 71&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 6&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp;</p>
<p>2&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 2&nbsp;&nbsp; 5&nbsp;&nbsp; KCS000659&nbsp;&nbsp; G&nbsp; B&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 6&nbsp; 66&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 3.5&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 2&nbsp; L0F- 39&nbsp; 40&nbsp;&nbsp; ----------- -&nbsp; 5&nbsp;&nbsp; 68&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 6&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp; R1R- 16&nbsp; 26&nbsp;&nbsp; ----------- -&nbsp; 5&nbsp;&nbsp; 68&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 6&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp;</p>
<p>3&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 3&nbsp;&nbsp; 19&nbsp; KCS125649&nbsp;&nbsp; G&nbsp; A&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 4&nbsp; 64&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 2.7&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 2&nbsp; R0F- 64&nbsp; 40&nbsp;&nbsp; ----------- -&nbsp; 19&nbsp; 67&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp; L1R- 46&nbsp; 40&nbsp;&nbsp; ----------- -&nbsp; 19&nbsp; 67&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp;</p>
<p>4&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4&nbsp;&nbsp; 19&nbsp; TTZX855310&nbsp; G&nbsp; A&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 4&nbsp; 73&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 1.8&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 2&nbsp; R0F- 90&nbsp; 60&nbsp;&nbsp; ----------- -&nbsp; 19&nbsp; 79&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp; L1R- 11&nbsp; 80&nbsp;&nbsp; ----------- -&nbsp; 19&nbsp; 79&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp;</p>
<p>5&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 5&nbsp;&nbsp; 19&nbsp; KCS711108&nbsp;&nbsp; G&nbsp; B&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 4&nbsp; [100] 1.1&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 2&nbsp; L0F- 129 120&nbsp; --L-------- -&nbsp; 19&nbsp; 79&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp; R1R- 36&nbsp; 255&nbsp; --L-------- -&nbsp; 19&nbsp; 79&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp;</p>
<p>6&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 6&nbsp;&nbsp; 19&nbsp; UTLX025459&nbsp; G&nbsp; A&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 4&nbsp; 42&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 1.5&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 2&nbsp; R0F- 93&nbsp; 120&nbsp; ----------- -&nbsp; 19&nbsp; 43&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp; L1R- 59&nbsp; 80&nbsp;&nbsp; ----------- -&nbsp; 19&nbsp; 43&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp;</p>
<p>7&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 7&nbsp;&nbsp; 19&nbsp; MSRC004330&nbsp; G&nbsp; B&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 4&nbsp; 62&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 1.8&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 2&nbsp; L0F- 95&nbsp; 120&nbsp; ----------- -&nbsp; 19&nbsp; 67&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp; R1R- 6&nbsp;&nbsp; 40&nbsp;&nbsp; ----------- -&nbsp; 19&nbsp; 67&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp;</p>
<p>8&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 8&nbsp;&nbsp; 19&nbsp; GMSR040435&nbsp; G&nbsp; A&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 4&nbsp; 64&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 2.5&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 2&nbsp; R0F- 87&nbsp; 60&nbsp;&nbsp; ----------- -&nbsp; 19&nbsp; 67&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp; L1R- 29&nbsp; 40&nbsp;&nbsp; ----------- -&nbsp; 19&nbsp; 67&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp;</p>
<p>9&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 9&nbsp;&nbsp; 19&nbsp; KCS125602&nbsp;&nbsp; G&nbsp; A&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 4&nbsp; 66&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 3.1&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 2&nbsp; R0F- 59&nbsp; 40&nbsp;&nbsp; ----------- -&nbsp; 19&nbsp; 67&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp; L1R- 35&nbsp; 26&nbsp;&nbsp; ----------- -&nbsp; 19&nbsp; 67&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp;</p>
<p>10&nbsp;&nbsp; 10&nbsp; 19&nbsp; KCS129103&nbsp;&nbsp; G&nbsp; A&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 4&nbsp; 64&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 3.2&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 2&nbsp; R0F- 48&nbsp; 30&nbsp;&nbsp; ----------- -&nbsp; 19&nbsp; 67&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp; L1R- 27&nbsp; 26&nbsp;&nbsp; ----------- -&nbsp; 19&nbsp; 67&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp;</p>
<p>11&nbsp;&nbsp; 11&nbsp; 19&nbsp; KCS129279&nbsp;&nbsp; G&nbsp; A&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 4&nbsp; 65&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 3.4&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 2&nbsp; R0F- 59&nbsp; 40&nbsp;&nbsp; ----------- -&nbsp; 19&nbsp; 67&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp; L1R- 38&nbsp; 40&nbsp;&nbsp; ----------- -&nbsp; 19&nbsp; 67&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp;</p>
<p>12&nbsp;&nbsp; 11&nbsp; 6&nbsp;&nbsp; KCS925804&nbsp;&nbsp; G&nbsp; -&nbsp; -&nbsp; -&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 3.4&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 1&nbsp; -0-- 28&nbsp; 34&nbsp;&nbsp; ----------- -&nbsp; 6&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp; -&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp;</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp; End List 1349</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; END</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
|}
</div><p>Figure 4.19: Dump Data Full Composite Listing Screen</p>


<br><p>Type the '''DDF''' command in one of the following formats:</p><p><br></p>
|<p>Passive Alarm Tag</p>


{|
|-  
|-  
|<p>Command Format</p>
|<p>31</p>


|<p>Description</p>
|<p>Experimental User/Other</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>DDF</p>
|<p><br></p>


|<p>Required. Composite information for the most recent train.</p>
|<p><br></p>
 
|}<p><br></p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>DDF, Sequence #</p>
|<p>Car ID</p>


|<p>Optional. Composite information for the specified sequence number.</p>
|<p>Owners code (initials) and equipment number.</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>DDF,*</p>
|<p>Ts</p>


|<p>Optional. Composite information for all available trains.</p>
|<p>Tag status for that piece of equipment.</p><p>G =Both sides tagged correctly.</p><p>R =Right side tag was not read or missing.</p><p>L = Left side tag was not read or missing.</p><p>M =The car ID of the tags did not match.</p><p>U = Untagged.</p><p>E = Extra tag.</p>


|}<p><br></p><p>Header Fields</p><p>Refer to tables 4-1 through 4-3 for header descriptions on this screen.</p><p>Data Fields</p><p>The table below defines the data fields on the Dump Data Full Composite Listing screen.</p><p>'''Note:''' Some communication programs do not support 142 character display width and will word wrap or truncate at 80 (or 136) characters. '''DDF''' is best viewed by capturing or logging the display and viewing the file offline at 142 characters width.</p><p>Full Composite Listing</p><p><br></p>
{|
|-  
|-  
|<p>Field</p>
|<p>Or</p>


|<p>Description</p>
|<p>Orientation of the equipment with A or B as the leading end.</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>Rec#</p>
|<p>Pc</p>


|<p>Record number assigned by the APU-102.</p>
|<p>Platform count for that piece of equipment based on the axles. This pertains only to multi-platform articulated and fixed draw-bar cars such as cars that carry cargo containers.</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>Car</p>
|<p>Ax</p>


|<p>Location of the equipment in the train with zero (0) being the first car.</p>
|<p>Axle count for that piece of equipment.</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>EGC</p>
|<p>LenFT</p>


|<p>The EGC type of the equipment based on the axle pattern or tag.</p><p><br></p>
|<p>Length of the car in feet based on the axles. Stopping does affect this field. Any undetermined lengths over 99 feet will be shown as [100].</p>


{|
|-  
|-  
|<p>AAR</p><p>Value</p>
|<p>MPH</p>


|<p>Description</p>
|<p>Speed the car was traveling through the site. This is the average speed of all the axles.</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>1</p>
|<p>Di</p>


|<p>Railcar Cover</p>
|<p>Direction recorded for that piece of equipment.</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>4</p>
|<p>Tc</p>


|<p>Train Number Tag</p>
|<p>Number of tags that were read.</p>


|-
|}<p><br></p>
|<p>5/37*</p>


|<p>Locomotive&nbsp; *5 is static tag, 37 is dynamic tag</p>
<br>
===== Tag Details =====
<p>Information listed for the first and second tags read for each car. Information based on tag information and how the APU-102 interpreted it.&nbsp;</p><p><br></p>


{| style="border-collapse: collapse;" border="1" cellpadding="2"
|-  
|-  
|<p>6</p>
|<p>Field</p>


|<p>End-of Train Device</p>
|<p>Description</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>8</p>
|<p>Ti</p>


|<p>Generator Set</p>
|<p>Tag information.</p><p>First digit represents the tag that was read. (L=Left; R=Right)</p><p>Second digit represents the antenna that read the tag. (0 or 1)</p><p>Third digit represents the orientation of the car.-(F=Front; R=Rear)</p><p>Fourth digit is the tier of the intermodal tag. (T = Top; B = Bottom)</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>10</p>
|<p>Hnd</p>


|<p>Intermodal Container</p>
|<p>Number of handshakes for that tag. The number of times the reader read the tag.</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>14</p>
|<p>Disqual</p>


|<p>Reserved (Formerly Non-Revenue Rail)</p>
|<p>List of any reasons that the tag and the car information did not match or a reason that the tag is invalid.</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>17</p>
|<p><br></p>
 
|<p>I &nbsp;&nbsp;- Track Interference</p><p>O - Invalid Tag Orientation</p><p>P &nbsp;- Illegal Position</p><p>M - Multiple Antenna</p><p>L &nbsp;- Length Mismatch</p><p>D - Platform Code Mismatch&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</p>


|<p>Tractor (Power)</p>
|<p>A - &nbsp;Axle Mismatch</p><p>C - Inter track Canceled</p><p>E - ECG Mismatch</p><p>T - Inter track Comm Failed</p><p>F - Invalid Format</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>18</p>
|<p>P#</p>


|<p>Straight Truck</p>
|<p>Platform code of a multi-platform car determined by the software based on Orientation. This pertains to multi-platform articulated and fixed draw-bar cars such as cars that carry cargo containers. A single platform car does not have a platform code.</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>19</p>
|<p>EGC</p>


|<p>Railcar (Includes non-revenue railcars)</p>
|<p>The EGC type of the equipment based on the tag programming.</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>20</p>
|<p><br></p>


|<p>Dolly</p>
|<p>05 = Locomotive</p><p>06 = End of Train device</p><p>10 = Intermodal Container</p><p>14 = Non-Revenue Railcar</p><p>17 = Tractor</p>


|-
|<p>19 = Railcar</p><p>20 = Dolly</p><p>21 = Trailer</p><p>27 = Chassis</p><p>05 = Dynamic Locomotive</p>
|<p>21</p>
 
|<p>Trailer</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>24</p>
|<p><br></p>


|<p>Rail Compatible Multi-Modal Equipment</p>
|<p>'''Note''': For a complete list of all possible EGC codes, see the EGC field definition in the Full Composite Listing section or the AAR, S918A specification.</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>27</p>
|<p>LenFT</p>


|<p>Chassis</p>
|<p>Length of the car in feet based on the tag programming.&nbsp; (Stopping does not affect this field as it is read from the tag)</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>28</p>
|<p>Ax</p>


|<p>Passive Alarm Tag</p>
|<p>Axle count for that piece of equipment based on the tag programming.</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>31</p>
|<p>Pc</p>


|<p>Experimental User/Other</p>
|<p>Platform code for that piece of equipment based on the tag programming. This pertains to multi-platform articulated and fixed draw-bar cars such as cars that carry cargo containers. A single platform car does not have a platform code, but are sometimes programmed erroneously.</p>


|-
|}
|<p><br></p>
 
|<p><br></p>
 
|}<p><br></p>


<br>
===== Dump Data Raw Tag Data ('''DDT''') =====
<p>The Dump Data Raw Tag Data ('''DDT''') command displays raw tag data, which is the uncoded information as read by the APU-102. After the normal heading, there are five groups of information in this listing.</p><p><br></p><div>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2" cellpadding="4"
|-
| style="width: 100%;" |<p>Nicholson Ave&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; MP: 0000.0 Station 00001&nbsp; Reader 1</p>
<p>&nbsp;Train Seq #0002&nbsp;&nbsp; Date: 01-31-96&nbsp;&nbsp; Time: 16:02:35</p>
<p>&nbsp; ENG: ENG&nbsp;&nbsp; 1&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Dir: S&nbsp;&nbsp; MPH: 024&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Axles: 0024</p>
<p>&nbsp; WDA = 024&nbsp;&nbsp; WDB = 024&nbsp;&nbsp; WDAB = 000&nbsp;&nbsp; WDBA = 024</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; HOST REPORT:&nbsp; ON&nbsp; : * :05-02-11&nbsp; 09:04:52/09:05:01</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp; Loco Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 02&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 01&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Xtags: 01</p>
<p>&nbsp; Car Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 003&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Xtags: 003</p>
<p>&nbsp; Container:&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Chassis:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Trailer:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000</p>
<p>&nbsp; Lost Axles: 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Lost Tags:&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Other Tags: 00</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Raw AVI Listing</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;#&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; MS&nbsp;&nbsp; EGC&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; ID&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; RAW TAG</p>
<p>--- ------- --- --------- ----------------------------------------------------</p>
<p>001 00000063 D ENG 000001 #*E&lt;)P&nbsp; $2RE XXXX NAS&13:58:01.41 09/04/92%00-0-FF-F</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp; End List 0002</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; END</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>APU102XP: Main 1&gt;</p>
|}
</div><p style="text-align: center;">Figure 4.20: Dump Data Raw Tag Data</p><p>Type the '''DDT''' command in one of the following formats:</p><p><br></p><div>
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1" cellpadding="2"
|-  
|-  
|<p>Car ID</p>
|<p>Command Format</p>
 
|<p>Description</p>
|<p>Owners code (initials) and equipment number.</p>
 
|-  
|-  
|<p>Ts</p>
|<p>DDT</p>
|<p>Required. Tags for the most recent train.</p>
|-
|<p>DDT, Sequence #</p>
|<p>Optional. Tags for the specified sequence number.</p>
|-
|<p>DDT,*</p>
|<p>Optional. Tags for all available trains.</p>
|}
</div>
===== Header Fields =====
<p>Refer to tables 4-1 through 4-3 for header definitions on this screen.</p>
===== Data Fields =====
<p>The table below defines the data fields on the Dump Data Raw Tag Data screen.</p>


|<p>Tag status for that piece of equipment.</p><p>G =Both sides tagged correctly.</p><p>R =Right side tag was not read or missing.</p><p>L = Left side tag was not read or missing.</p><p>M =The car ID of the tags did not match.</p><p>U = Untagged.</p><p>E = Extra tag.</p>
<br><p><br></p>


{| style="border-collapse: collapse;" border="1" cellpadding="2"
|-  
|-  
|<p>Or</p>
|<p>Field</p>


|<p>Orientation of the equipment with A or B as the leading end.</p>
|<p>Description</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>Pc</p>
|<p>#</p>


|<p>Platform count for that piece of equipment based on the axles. This pertains only to multi-platform articulated and fixed draw-bar cars such as cars that carry cargo containers.</p>
|<p>Sequence number. Order in which the tags were read by the APU-102.</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>Ax</p>
|<p>MS</p>


|<p>Axle count for that piece of equipment.</p>
|<p>Time in milliseconds that the event occurred in relation to the start of the train.</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>LenFT</p>
|<p>EGC</p>


|<p>Length of the car in feet based on the axles. Stopping does affect this field. Any undetermined lengths over 99 feet will be shown as [100].</p>
|<p>EGC code. Equipment group code letter from the tag.</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>MPH</p>
|<p>ID</p>


|<p>Speed the car was traveling through the site. This is the average speed of all the axles.</p>
|<p>Equipment ID. Decoded owner code (initials) and equipment number.</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>Di</p>
|<p>RAW TAG</p>


|<p>Direction recorded for that piece of equipment.</p>
|<p>Raw, undecoded tag data as read from the AEI reader. Also includes any appended reader data such as time and date, antenna number, and handshakes.</p>


|-  
|}<p><br></p>
|<p>Tc</p>
===== Dump Data Axle-Car Conversion Data ('''DDC''') =====
<p>The Dump Data Axle-Car Conversion Data ('''DDC''') command lists the standard header and then breaks down each car by axle information only.</p>
<p><br></p>
<div></div>


|<p>Number of tags that were read.</p>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 100%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2" cellpadding="4"
|-
| style="width: 100%;" | <div><p>Nicholson Ave&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; MP: 0000.0 Station 00001&nbsp; Reader 1</p></div>
<p>&nbsp;Train Seq #0002&nbsp;&nbsp; Date: 01-31-96&nbsp;&nbsp; Time: 16:02:35</p>
<p>&nbsp; ENG: ENG&nbsp;&nbsp; 1&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Dir: S&nbsp;&nbsp; MPH: 024&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Axles: 0024</p>
<p>&nbsp; WDA = 024&nbsp;&nbsp; WDB = 024&nbsp;&nbsp; WDAB = 000&nbsp;&nbsp; WDBA = 024</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; HOST REPORT:&nbsp; ON&nbsp; : * :05-02-11&nbsp; 09:04:52/09:05:01</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp; Loco Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 02&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 01&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Xtags: 01</p>
<p>&nbsp; Car Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 003&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Xtags: 003</p>
<p>&nbsp; Container:&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Chassis:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Trailer:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000</p>
<p>&nbsp; Lost Axles:&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Lost Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Other Tags:&nbsp; 00</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car-Axle Listing</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Rec#&nbsp; Car#&nbsp; Plat#&nbsp; Start Ax.&nbsp; End Ax.&nbsp;&nbsp; Axle Count&nbsp; Start Time&nbsp;&nbsp; End Time&nbsp; Type</p>
<p>-----&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;-----&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; ------&nbsp; &nbsp; ----------&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;--------&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; ------------&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;-----------&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; ----------&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; ----</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp; 1&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 5&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 6&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;1303&nbsp;&nbsp;5</p>
<p>&nbsp; 2&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 1&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;6&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 11&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;6&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;1715&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 3019&nbsp;&nbsp;5</p>
<p>&nbsp; 3&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 2&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 12&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;15&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;4&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;3430&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4848&nbsp; 19</p>
<p>&nbsp; 4&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 3&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 16&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;19&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;4&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;5145&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 6563&nbsp; 19</p>
<p>&nbsp; 5&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 20&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;23&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;4&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;6861&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 8278&nbsp; 19</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp; End List 0002</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; END</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>APU102XP: Main 1&gt;</p>
|}
<p style="text-align: center;">Figure 4.21: Dump Data Axle-Car Conversion Data</p>


|}<p><br></p>
<br><p>Type the '''DDC''' command in one of the following formats:</p>
 
<p><br></p>
<br><p>Tag Details</p><p>Information listed for the first and second tags read for each car. Information based on tag information and how the APU-102 interpreted it.&nbsp;</p><p><br></p>


{|
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1" cellpadding="2"
|-  
|-  
|<p>Field</p>
| <p>Command Format</p>
| <p>Description</p>
|-
| <p>DDC</p>
| <p>Required. Cars for the most recent train.</p>
|-
| <p>DDC, Sequence #</p>
| <p>Optional. Cars for the specified sequence number.</p>
|-
| <p>DDC,*</p>
| <p>Optional. Cars for all available trains.</p>
|}<p><br></p>


|<p>Description</p>
===== Header Fields =====
<p>Refer to tables 4-1 through 4-3 for header definitions on this screen.</p>
===== Data Fields =====
<p>The table below defines the data fields on the Dump Data Axle-Car Conversion Data screen.</p><p><br></p>


|-  
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; height: 280px; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1" cellpadding="2"
|<p>Ti</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 70.4531px;" |<p>Field</p>


|<p>Tag information.</p><p>First digit represents the tag that was read. (L=Left; R=Right)</p><p>Second digit represents the antenna that read the tag. (0 or 1)</p><p>Third digit represents the orientation of the car.-(F=Front; R=Rear)</p><p>Fourth digit is the tier of the intermodal tag. (T = Top; B = Bottom)</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 736.344px;" |<p>Description</p>


|-  
|- style="height: 28px;"
|<p>Hnd</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 70.4531px;" |<p>Rec#</p>


|<p>Number of handshakes for that tag. The number of times the reader read the tag.</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 736.344px;" |<p>Record number assigned by the APU-102.</p>


|-  
|- style="height: 28px;"
|<p>Disqual</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 70.4531px;" |<p>Car#</p>


|<p>List of any reasons that the tag and the car information did not match or a reason that the tag is invalid.</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 736.344px;" |<p>Location of the equipment in the train with zero (0) being the first car.</p>


|-  
|- style="height: 28px;"
|<p><br></p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 70.4531px;" |<p>Plat#</p>


|<p>I &nbsp;&nbsp;- Track Interference</p><p>O - Invalid Tag Orientation</p><p>P &nbsp;- Illegal Position</p><p>M - Multiple Antenna</p><p>L &nbsp;- Length Mismatch</p><p>D - Platform Code Mismatch&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 736.344px;" |<p>Number of the platform within the car. Articulated cars are divided into platforms that are grouped into one (1) car.</p>


|<p>A - &nbsp;Axle Mismatch</p><p>C - Inter track Canceled</p><p>E - ECG Mismatch</p><p>T - Inter track Comm Failed</p><p>F - Invalid Format</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 70.4531px;" |<p>Start Ax.</p>


|-
| style="height: 28px; width: 736.344px;" |<p>Axle number in the train that the APU-102 used to begin the car with. The first axle of a train is always zero (0).</p>
|<p>P#</p>


|<p>Platform code of a multi-platform car determined by the software based on Orientation. This pertains to multi-platform articulated and fixed draw-bar cars such as cars that carry cargo containers. A single platform car does not have a platform code.</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 70.4531px;" |<p>End Ax.</p>


|-
| style="height: 28px; width: 736.344px;" |<p>Axle number in the train that the APU-102 used to end the car with.</p>
|<p>EGC</p>


|<p>The EGC type of the equipment based on the tag programming.</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 70.4531px;" |<p>Axle Count</p>


|-
| style="height: 28px; width: 736.344px;" |<p>Total axles in the car.</p>
|<p><br></p>


|<p>05 = Locomotive</p><p>06 = End of Train device</p><p>10 = Intermodal Container</p><p>14 = Non-Revenue Railcar</p><p>17 = Tractor</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 70.4531px;" |<p>Start Time</p>


|<p>19 = Railcar</p><p>20 = Dolly</p><p>21 = Trailer</p><p>27 = Chassis</p><p>05 = Dynamic Locomotive</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 736.344px;" |<p>Time in the train that the APU-102 identified the first axle of the car. The start time of the first axle is always zero (0).</p>


|-  
|- style="height: 28px;"
|<p><br></p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 70.4531px;" |<p>End Time</p>


|<p>'''Note''': For a complete list of all possible EGC codes, see the EGC field definition in the Full Composite Listing section or the AAR, S918A specification.</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 736.344px;" |<p>Time in the train that the APU-102 identified the last axle of the car.</p>


|-  
|- style="height: 28px;"
|<p>LenFT</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 70.4531px;" |<p>Type</p>


|<p>Length of the car in feet based on the tag programming.&nbsp; (Stopping does not affect this field as it is read from the tag)</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 736.344px;" |<p>EGC code of the car as identified by the axles only.</p>


|-
|}<p><br></p>
|<p>Ax</p>
===== Dump Data Wheel Event Log ('''DDW''') =====
 
<p>The Dump Data Wheel Event Log ('''DDW''') command lists transducer activity for the most recent train, all available trains, or a specific train.</p>
|<p>Axle count for that piece of equipment based on the tag programming.</p>
<p><br></p>
 
<div>
|-
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2" cellpadding="4"
|<p>Pc</p>
|-
 
| style="width: 100%;" | <p>Nicholson Ave&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; MP: 0000.0 Station 00001&nbsp; Reader 1</p>
|<p>Platform code for that piece of equipment based on the tag programming. This pertains to multi-platform articulated and fixed draw-bar cars such as cars that carry cargo containers. A single platform car does not have a platform code, but are sometimes programmed erroneously.</p>
<p>&nbsp;Train Seq #0001&nbsp;&nbsp; Date: 01-31-96&nbsp;&nbsp; Time: 16:02:01</p>
 
|}
 
<br><p>Dump Data Raw Tag Data ('''DDT''')</p><p>The Dump Data Raw Tag Data ('''DDT''') command displays raw tag data, which is the uncoded information as read by the APU-102. After the normal heading, there are five groups of information in this listing.</p><p><br></p><div><p>Nicholson Ave&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; MP: 0000.0 Station 00001&nbsp; Reader 1</p>
<p>&nbsp;Train Seq #0002&nbsp;&nbsp; Date: 01-31-96&nbsp;&nbsp; Time: 16:02:35</p>
<p>&nbsp; ENG: ENG&nbsp;&nbsp; 1&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Dir: S&nbsp;&nbsp; MPH: 024&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Axles: 0024</p>
<p>&nbsp; ENG: ENG&nbsp;&nbsp; 1&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Dir: S&nbsp;&nbsp; MPH: 024&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Axles: 0024</p>
<p>&nbsp; WDA = 024&nbsp;&nbsp; WDB = 024&nbsp;&nbsp; WDAB = 000&nbsp;&nbsp; WDBA = 024</p>
<p>&nbsp; WDA = 024&nbsp;&nbsp; WDB = 024&nbsp;&nbsp; WDAB = 000&nbsp;&nbsp; WDBA = 024</p>
Line 1,570: Line 1,825:
<p>&nbsp; Loco Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 02&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 01&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Xtags: 01</p>
<p>&nbsp; Loco Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 02&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 01&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Xtags: 01</p>
<p>&nbsp; Car Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 003&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Xtags: 003</p>
<p>&nbsp; Car Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 003&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Xtags: 003</p>
<p>&nbsp; Container:&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Chassis:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Trailer:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000</p>
<p>&nbsp; Container:&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Chassis:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Trailer:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000</p>
<p>&nbsp; Lost Axles: 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Lost Tags:&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Other Tags: 00</p>
<p>&nbsp; Lost Axles:&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Lost Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Other Tags:&nbsp; 00</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Raw AVI Listing</p>
<p>Rec#&nbsp;&nbsp; Tick Count&nbsp;&nbsp;Disp&nbsp;&nbsp; Type&nbsp; Dir&nbsp; +C&nbsp;&nbsp; Pres?</p>
<p>----&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;------------&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; -------- ----&nbsp; ---&nbsp; ---&nbsp; -----</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;#&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; MS&nbsp;&nbsp; EGC&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; ID&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; RAW TAG</p>
<p>1&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;0&nbsp;&nbsp; B&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; Y</p>
<p>--- ------- --- --------- ----------------------------------------------------</p>
<p>2&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 22&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 22&nbsp;&nbsp; A&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; Y</p>
<p>001 00000063 D ENG 000001 #*E&lt;)P&nbsp; $2RE XXXX NAS&13:58:01.41 09/04/92%00-0-FF-F</p>
<p>3&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;137&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 115&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; B&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; Y</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>4&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;160&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 23&nbsp;&nbsp; A&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; Y</p>
<p>&nbsp; End List 0002</p>
<p>5&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;274&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 114&nbsp;&nbsp; B&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; Y</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>6&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;297&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 23&nbsp;&nbsp; A&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; Y</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; END</p>
<p>7&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 1029&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 732&nbsp;&nbsp; B&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; Y</p>
<p>8&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 1051&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 22&nbsp;&nbsp; A&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; Y</p>
<p>© for continuous display, (ESC) to exit or any other key to continue</p>
|}
</div>
<p style="text-align: center;" >Figure 4.22: Dump Data Wheel Event Log Screen</p>
<p>Type the '''DDW''' command in one of the following formats:</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>APU102XP: Main 1&gt;</p></div><p>Figure 4.20: Dump Data Raw Tag Data</p><p>Type the '''DDT''' command in one of the following formats:</p><p><br></p><div>


{|
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; height: 112px; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1" cellpadding="2"
|-  
|- style="height: 28px;"
|<p>Command Format</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 118.469px;" | <p>Command Format</p>
|<p>Description</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 375.406px;" | <p>Description</p>
|-  
|- style="height: 28px;"
|<p>DDT</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 118.469px;" | <p>DDW</p>
|<p>Required. Tags for the most recent train.</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 375.406px;" | <p>Required. Transducer activity for the most recent train.</p>
|-  
|- style="height: 28px;"
|<p>DDT, Sequence #</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 118.469px;" | <p>DDW, Sequence #</p>
|<p>Optional. Tags for the specified sequence number.</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 375.406px;" | <p>Optional. Transducer activity by specific sequence number.</p>
|-  
|- style="height: 28px;"
|<p>DDT,*</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 118.469px;" | <p>DDW,*</p>
|<p>Optional. Tags for all available trains.</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 375.406px;" | <p>Optional. Transducer activity for all available trains.</p>
|}
|}<p><br></p>
</div><p>Header Fields</p><p>Refer to tables 4-1 through 4-3 for header definitions on this screen.</p><p>Data Fields</p><p>The table below defines the data fields on the Dump Data Raw Tag Data screen.</p>


<br><p><br></p>
===== Header Fields =====
<p>Refer to tables 4-1 through 4-3 for header definitions on this screen.</p>
===== Data Fields =====
<p>The table below defines the data fields on the Dump Data Wheel Event Log screen.</p><p><br></p>


{|
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1" cellpadding="2"
|-  
|-  
|<p>Field</p>
|<p>Field</p>
Line 1,610: Line 1,873:


|-  
|-  
|<p>#</p>
|<p>Rec#</p>
 
|<p>Number assigned to each wheel event.</p>
 
|-
|<p>Tick Count</p>


|<p>Sequence number. Order in which the tags were read by the APU-102.</p>
|<p>Incremental time elapsed from the beginning of wheel event recording to the current specified event.</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>MS</p>
|<p>Disp</p>


|<p>Time in milliseconds that the event occurred in relation to the start of the train.</p>
|<p>Time elapsed between one wheel event and the next.</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>EGC</p>
|<p>Type</p>


|<p>EGC code. Equipment group code letter from the tag.</p>
|<p>Identifies “A” or “B” segment wheel event.</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>ID</p>
|<p>Dir</p>


|<p>Equipment ID. Decoded owner code (initials) and equipment number.</p>
|<p>Direction of train movement.</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>RAW TAG</p>
|<p>+C</p>
 
|<p>Identifies presence of “C” pulse.</p>


|<p>Raw, undecoded tag data as read from the AEI reader. Also includes any appended reader data such as time and date, antenna number, and handshakes.</p>
|-
|<p>Pres?</p>


|}<p><br></p><p>Dump Data Axle-Car Conversion Data ('''DDC''')</p><p>The Dump Data Axle-Car Conversion Data ('''DDC''') command lists the standard header and then breaks down each car by axle information only.</p><p><br></p><div><p>Nicholson Ave&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; MP: 0000.0 Station 00001&nbsp; Reader 1</p>
|<p>Identifies state of presence circuit during that axle event</p>
<p>&nbsp;Train Seq #0002&nbsp;&nbsp; Date: 01-31-96&nbsp;&nbsp; Time: 16:02:35</p>
 
<p>&nbsp; ENG: ENG&nbsp;&nbsp; 1&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Dir: S&nbsp;&nbsp; MPH: 024&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Axles: 0024</p>
|}<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp; WDA = 024&nbsp;&nbsp; WDB = 024&nbsp;&nbsp; WDAB = 000&nbsp;&nbsp; WDBA = 024</p>
 
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; HOST REPORT:&nbsp; ON&nbsp; : * :05-02-11&nbsp; 09:04:52/09:05:01</p>
=== Display Parameters ('''DP''') ===
<p><br></p>
<p>The Display Parameters ('''DP''') command displays a sub-menu of all the APU-102 parameter settings. This function is identical to the Display Parameters function in the Supervisory Menu, except passwords are not displayed. Logging into Session 1 gives access to all parameters including the other session parameters. Acquisition and hardware configuration of the equipment is also accessible to Session 1. Logging into other sessions gains access only to that session’s parameters. The Dump parameters ('''D''') option displays at the bottom of all screens within the Display Parameters menu. The parameter dump can be captured to an ASCII file and later restored to the system using the Edit Parameters ('''EP''') function in the Supervisory Menu.</p>
<p>&nbsp; Loco Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 02&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 01&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Xtags: 01</p>
<p>'''Note:''' Version 5.1.1B103 has added capability of dumping parameters to an on-board file.&nbsp;</p>
<p>&nbsp; Car Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 003&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Xtags: 003</p>
<div><p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp; Container:&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Chassis:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Trailer:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000</p>
 
<p>&nbsp; Lost Axles: 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Lost Tags:&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Other Tags: 00</p>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2" cellpadding="4"
|-
| style="width: 100%;" | <p>Display Parameters -</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car-Axle Listing</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 1. Session1</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 2. Session2</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 3. Session3</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4. Session4</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 5. LocalSupport</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 6. RemoteSupport</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 7. Acquisition</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 8. Ports</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 9. DiskManager</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; 10. TimeZoneControl</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; 11. DaylightSavings</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; 12. SysDiags</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; 13. DebugFlags</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; 14. NetMenu</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; 15. SupportThreads</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; 16. MoreSessions</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Rec#&nbsp; Car#&nbsp; Plat#&nbsp; Start Ax.&nbsp; End Ax.&nbsp;&nbsp; Axle Count&nbsp; Start Time&nbsp;&nbsp; End Time&nbsp; Type</p>
<p>[D]ump parameters, e[X]it &gt;</p>
<p>----- ----- ------ ---------- -------- ------------ ----------- ---------- ----</p>
|}
</div>
<p style="text-align: center;" >Figure 4.23: Display Parameters Menu Screen</p>
<p>All options may not be available depending on software version</p>
<p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''DP''' command and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;.</p>
<p>2)&nbsp; Enter one of the parameter options (1-16) at the screen prompt. Enter any sub-menu options to view the desired parameters.</p>
<p>3)&nbsp; To initiate a parameter dump, type '''D''' and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. The APU-102 will prompt you to press '''&lt;Enter&gt;''' to start the dump. This gives you an opportunity to start your capture file before starting the dump. The dump can be run from any level where the “[D]ump parameters” prompt shows on the bottom of the screen.</p>
<p>If 5.1.1B103 or later you can capture your parameter dump to a file on-board the APU-102. This file can be downloaded after completion using a more reliable transfer protocol (such as ZMODEM) Type '''DF''' and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. (The DF option might not be displayed on the prompt) You will be prompted to supply an on-board file name.</p>
<p>Progress of either dump mode will be displayed.</p>
<p>4)&nbsp; Type '''X '''and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt; to go up one level, but only when the “e[X]it” prompt shows on the bottom of the screen.</p>
<p>Press &lt;'''ESC'''&gt;''' '''to go up one level at any time.</p>
 
=== Change to Supervisory Menu ('''C''') ===
<p>The Supervisory Menu ('''C''') is submenu of the System Menu and can only be accessed with the proper authority and password. The password assigned for access to the Supervisory Menu may or may not be the same as the System Menu password. It is recommended that the password for the two menus be different in order to limit the number of people that can make changes to the parameters or reset the system. Main Menu commands are accessible from the Supervisor menu.</p>
<p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''C '''command at the ''APU102XP: &nbsp;Main ''prompt. The date, time, and password field display.</p>
<p>2)&nbsp; Type the designated Supervisory Menu password and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. Asterisks (*) display as you type the characters.</p>
<p>3)&nbsp; Type your name and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt; at the ''Enter Your Name ''prompt. If the password was entered correctly, the “Welcome to” message displays and the cursor appears at the ''APU102XP: &nbsp;Change'' prompt.</p>
<p>4)&nbsp; Type &lt;'''?'''&gt; and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. The Supervisory Menu displays.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; 1&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 5&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 6&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 1303&nbsp;&nbsp; 5</p>
 
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; 2&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 1&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 6&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 11&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 6&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 1715&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 3019&nbsp;&nbsp; 5</p>
{| style="border-collapse: collapse;" border="1" cellpadding=" 2"
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; 3&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 2&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 12&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 15&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 3430&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4848&nbsp; 19</p>
|-  
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; 4&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 3&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 16&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 19&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 5145&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 6563&nbsp; 19</p>
| style="width: 28px;" | <p style="text-align: center;" >Tip</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; 5&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; -&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 20&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 23&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 6861&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 8278&nbsp; 19</p>
| style="width: 751px;" |
<p>Entering the supervisory password at the initial log on screen will log directly to the Supervisory Menu (version 5.10+).</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp; End List 0002</p>
|}<p>For a screen example and information on moving around the'' ''Supervisory Menu, refer to the ''[[#Supervisory_Menu|Supervisory Menu]]'' section later in this article.</p>
 
=== Display I/O Information ('''I''') ===
<p>The Display I/O Information ('''I''') command displays the state of the Input/Output (I/O) in a real time mode.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; END</p>
<div>
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; height: 1026px; border-color: rgb(0, 0, 0); border-style: outset; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;"
|- style="height: 57px;"
| style="width: 175px; height: 57px;" | <p>APU102 I/O Status Display</p>
<p>-------------------------</p>
|- style="height: 51px;"
| style="width: 175px; height: 51px;" | <p>Block</p>
| style="width: 23px; height: 51px;" | <p>#</p>
| style="width: 74px; height: 51px;" | <p>Label</p>
| style="width: 51px; height: 51px;" | <p>I/O</p>
| style="width: 34.4219px; height: 51px;" | <p>State</p>
&gt;
| style="width: 37px; height: 51px;" | <p>Block</p>
| style="width: 26px; height: 51px;" | <p>#</p>
| style="width: 84px; height: 51px;" | <p>Label</p>
| style="width: 45px; height: 51px;" | <p>I/O</p>
| style="width: 36px; height: 51px;" | <p>State</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="width: 175px; height: 28px;" | <p>-----</p>
| style="width: 23px; height: 28px;" | <p>--</p>
| style="width: 74px; height: 28px;" | <p>---------</p>
| style="width: 51px; height: 28px;" | <p>---</p>
| style="width: 34.4219px; height: 28px;" | <p>------</p>
| style="width: 37px; height: 28px;" | <p>+</p>
| style="width: 26px; height: 28px;" | <p>-----</p>
| style="width: 84px; height: 28px;" | <p>--</p>
| style="width: 45px; height: 28px;" | <p>---------</p>
| style="width: 36px; height: 28px;" | <p>---</p>
| style="width: 31px; height: 28px;" | <p>------</p>
|- style="height: 51px;"
| style="width: 175px; height: 51px;" | <p>Main</p>
| style="width: 23px; height: 51px;" | <p>&nbsp;7</p>
| style="width: 74px; height: 51px;" | <p>PresIn</p>
| style="width: 51px; height: 51px;" | <p>I</p>
| style="width: 34.4219px; height: 51px;" | <p>Clear</p>
&gt;
| style="width: 37px; height: 51px;" | <p>Main</p>
| style="width: 26px; height: 51px;" | <p>&nbsp;9</p>
| style="width: 84px; height: 51px;" | <p>PresOut</p>
| style="width: 45px; height: 51px;" | <p>O</p>
| style="width: 36px; height: 51px;" | <p>Clear</p>
|- style="height: 51px;"
| style="width: 175px; height: 51px;" | <p>Main</p>
| style="width: 23px; height: 51px;" | <p>15</p>
| style="width: 74px; height: 51px;" | <p>DTrkPres</p>
| style="width: 51px; height: 51px;" | <p>I</p>
| style="width: 34.4219px; height: 51px;" | <p>Clear</p>
&gt;
| style="width: 37px; height: 51px;" | <p>Main</p>
| style="width: 26px; height: 51px;" | <p>16</p>
| style="width: 84px; height: 51px;" | <p>DTrkPres</p>
| style="width: 45px; height: 51px;" | <p>O</p>
| style="width: 36px; height: 51px;" | <p>Clear</p>
|- style="height: 51px;"
| style="width: 175px; height: 51px;" | <p>----</p>
| style="width: 23px; height: 51px;" | <p>--</p>
| style="width: 74px; height: 51px;" | <p>WDA</p>
| style="width: 51px; height: 51px;" | <p>I</p>
| style="width: 34.4219px; height: 51px;" | <p>0</p>
&gt;
| style="width: 37px; height: 51px;" | <p>Aux1</p>
| style="width: 26px; height: 51px;" | <p>&nbsp;7</p>
| style="width: 84px; height: 51px;" | <p>ClkSync</p>
| style="width: 45px; height: 51px;" | <p>O</p>
| style="width: 36px; height: 51px;" | <p>1</p>
|- style="height: 51px;"
| style="width: 175px; height: 51px;" | <p>----</p>
| style="width: 23px; height: 51px;" | <p>--</p>
| style="width: 74px; height: 51px;" | <p>WDB</p>
| style="width: 51px; height: 51px;" | <p>I</p>
| style="width: 34.4219px; height: 51px;" | <p>0</p>
&gt;
| style="width: 37px; height: 51px;" | <p>Aux!</p>
| style="width: 26px; height: 51px;" | <p>&nbsp;9</p>
| style="width: 84px; height: 51px;" | <p>WatchDog</p>
| style="width: 45px; height: 51px;" | <p>O</p>
| style="width: 36px; height: 51px;" | <p>1</p>
|- style="height: 51px;"
| style="width: 175px; height: 51px;" | <p>Aux1</p>
| style="width: 23px; height: 51px;" | <p>&nbsp;5</p>
| style="width: 74px; height: 51px;" | <p>WDC</p>
| style="width: 51px; height: 51px;" | <p>I</p>
| style="width: 34.4219px; height: 51px;" | <p>0</p>
&gt;
| style="width: 37px; height: 51px;" | <p>Aux2</p>
| style="width: 26px; height: 51px;" | <p>&nbsp;9</p>
| style="width: 84px; height: 51px;" | <p>SensorPwr</p>
| style="width: 45px; height: 51px;" | <p>O</p>
| style="width: 36px; height: 51px;" | <p>On</p>
|- style="height: 51px;"
| style="width: 175px; height: 51px;" | <p>Aux2</p>
| style="width: 23px; height: 51px;" | <p>&nbsp;1</p>
| style="width: 74px; height: 51px;" | <p>WDD</p>
| style="width: 51px; height: 51px;" | <p>I</p>
| style="width: 34.4219px; height: 51px;" | <p>0</p>
&gt;
| style="width: 37px; height: 51px;" | <p>Aux2</p>
| style="width: 26px; height: 51px;" | <p>11</p>
| style="width: 84px; height: 51px;" | <p>SpareOut</p>
| style="width: 45px; height: 51px;" | <p>O</p>
| style="width: 36px; height: 51px;" | <p>1</p>
|- style="height: 51px;"
| style="width: 175px; height: 51px;" | <p>----</p>
| style="width: 23px; height: 51px;" | <p>--</p>
| style="width: 74px; height: 51px;" | <p>VTP R0,A0</p>
| style="width: 51px; height: 51px;" | <p>I</p>
| style="width: 34.4219px; height: 51px;" | <p>Off</p>
&gt;
| style="width: 37px; height: 51px;" | <p>----</p>
| style="width: 26px; height: 51px;" | <p>--</p>
| style="width: 84px; height: 51px;" | <p>RFOn R0,A0</p>
| style="width: 45px; height: 51px;" | <p>O</p>
| style="width: 36px; height: 51px;" | <p>Off</p>
|- style="height: 51px;"
| style="width: 175px; height: 51px;" | <p>----</p>
| style="width: 23px; height: 51px;" | <p>--</p>
| style="width: 74px; height: 51px;" | <p>VTP R0,A1</p>
| style="width: 51px; height: 51px;" | <p>I</p>
| style="width: 34.4219px; height: 51px;" | <p>Off</p>
&gt;
| style="width: 37px; height: 51px;" | <p>----</p>
| style="width: 26px; height: 51px;" | <p>--</p>
| style="width: 84px; height: 51px;" | <p>RFOn R0,A1</p>
| style="width: 45px; height: 51px;" | <p>O</p>
| style="width: 36px; height: 51px;" | <p>Off</p>
|- style="height: 51px;"
| style="width: 175px; height: 51px;" | <p>----</p>
| style="width: 23px; height: 51px;" | <p>--</p>
| style="width: 74px; height: 51px;" | <p>VTP R1,A0</p>
| style="width: 51px; height: 51px;" | <p>I</p>
| style="width: 34.4219px; height: 51px;" | <p>On</p>
&gt;
| style="width: 37px; height: 51px;" | <p>----</p>
| style="width: 26px; height: 51px;" | <p>--</p>
| style="width: 84px; height: 51px;" | <p>RFOn R1,A0</p>
| style="width: 45px; height: 51px;" | <p>O</p>
| style="width: 36px; height: 51px;" | <p>Off</p>
|- style="height: 51px;"
| style="width: 175px; height: 51px;" | <p>----</p>
| style="width: 23px; height: 51px;" | <p>--</p>
| style="width: 74px; height: 51px;" | <p>VTP R1,A1</p>
| style="width: 51px; height: 51px;" | <p>I</p>
| style="width: 34.4219px; height: 51px;" | <p>On</p>
&gt;
| style="width: 37px; height: 51px;" | <p>----</p>
| style="width: 26px; height: 51px;" | <p>--</p>
| style="width: 84px; height: 51px;" | <p>RFOn R1,A1</p>
| style="width: 45px; height: 51px;" | <p>O</p>
| style="width: 36px; height: 51px;" | <p>Off</p>
|- style="height: 51px;"
| style="width: 175px; height: 51px;" | <p>Aux2</p>
| style="width: 23px; height: 51px;" | <p>&nbsp;7</p>
| style="width: 74px; height: 51px;" | <p>VTP R2,A0</p>
| style="width: 51px; height: 51px;" | <p>I</p>
| style="width: 34.4219px; height: 51px;" | <p>Off</p>
&gt;
| style="width: 37px; height: 51px;" | <p>Aux2</p>
| style="width: 26px; height: 51px;" | <p>15</p>
| style="width: 84px; height: 51px;" | <p>RFOn R2,A0</p>
| style="width: 45px; height: 51px;" | <p>O</p>
| style="width: 36px; height: 51px;" | <p>On</p>
|- style="height: 51px;"
| style="width: 175px; height: 51px;" | <p>Aux2</p>
| style="width: 23px; height: 51px;" | <p>&nbsp;5</p>
| style="width: 74px; height: 51px;" | <p>VTP R2,A1</p>
| style="width: 51px; height: 51px;" | <p>I</p>
| style="width: 34.4219px; height: 51px;" | <p>Off</p>
&gt;
| style="width: 37px; height: 51px;" | <p>Aux2</p>
| style="width: 26px; height: 51px;" | <p>13</p>
| style="width: 84px; height: 51px;" | <p>RFOn R2,A1</p>
| style="width: 45px; height: 51px;" | <p>O</p>
| style="width: 36px; height: 51px;" | <p>On</p>
|- style="height: 51px;"
| style="width: 175px; height: 51px;" | <p>Main</p>
| style="width: 23px; height: 51px;" | <p>11</p>
| style="width: 74px; height: 51px;" | <p>24VAC</p>
| style="width: 51px; height: 51px;" | <p>I</p>
| style="width: 34.4219px; height: 51px;" | <p>Fail</p>
&gt;
| style="width: 37px; height: 51px;" | <p>----</p>
| style="width: 26px; height: 51px;" | <p>--</p>
| style="width: 84px; height: 51px;" | <p>Sys LED</p>
| style="width: 45px; height: 51px;" | <p>O</p>
| style="width: 36px; height: 51px;" | <p>On</p>
|- style="height: 51px;"
| style="width: 175px; height: 51px;" | <p>Aux1</p>
| style="width: 23px; height: 51px;" | <p>&nbsp;3</p>
| style="width: 74px; height: 51px;" | <p>Progrmble</p>
| style="width: 51px; height: 51px;" | <p>I</p>
| style="width: 34.4219px; height: 51px;" | <p>Clear</p>
&gt;
| style="width: 37px; height: 51px;" | <p>----</p>
| style="width: 26px; height: 51px;" | <p>--</p>
| style="width: 84px; height: 51px;" | <p>Sys Button</p>
| style="width: 45px; height: 51px;" | <p>I</p>
| style="width: 36px; height: 51px;" | <p>Out</p>
|- style="height: 51px;"
| style="width: 175px; height: 51px;" | <p>----</p>
| style="width: 23px; height: 51px;" | <p>--</p>
| style="width: 74px; height: 51px;" | <p>RsrfcSens</p>
| style="width: 51px; height: 51px;" | <p>I</p>
| style="width: 34.4219px; height: 51px;" | <p>1</p>
&gt;
| style="width: 37px; height: 51px;" | <p>----</p>
| style="width: 26px; height: 51px;" | <p>--</p>
| style="width: 84px; height: 51px;" | <p>SW3 Button</p>
| style="width: 45px; height: 51px;" | <p>I</p>
| style="width: 36px; height: 51px;" | <p>Out</p>
|- style="height: 51px;"
| style="width: 175px; height: 51px;" | <p>Aux2</p>
| style="width: 23px; height: 51px;" | <p>&nbsp;3</p>
| style="width: 74px; height: 51px;" | <p>24VDC</p>
| style="width: 51px; height: 51px;" | <p>I</p>
| style="width: 34.4219px; height: 51px;" | <p>Ok</p>
&gt;
| style="width: 37px; height: 51px;" | <p>----</p>
| style="width: 26px; height: 51px;" | <p>--</p>
| style="width: 84px; height: 51px;" | <p>SW2 Button</p>
| style="width: 45px; height: 51px;" | <p>I</p>
| style="width: 36px; height: 51px;" | <p>Out</p>
|- style="height: 74px;"
| style="width: 175px; height: 74px;" | <p>----</p>
| style="width: 23px; height: 74px;" | <p>--</p>
| style="width: 74px; height: 74px;" | <p>Phone Sel</p>
| style="width: 51px; height: 74px;" | <p>O</p>
| style="width: 34.4219px; height: 74px;" | <p>Line 1</p>
&gt;
| style="width: 37px; height: 74px;" | <p>----</p>
| style="width: 26px; height: 74px;" | <p>--</p>
| style="width: 84px; height: 74px;" | <p>SW1 Button</p>
| style="width: 45px; height: 74px;" | <p>I</p>
| style="width: 36px; height: 74px;" | <p>Out</p>
|}
</div>
<p style="text-align: center;" >Figure 4.24: APU102 I/0 Status Display Screen</p>
<p>Type the '''I''' command in one of the following formats and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt; at the APU102XP: &nbsp;Main prompt.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>APU102XP: Main 1&gt;</p></div><p>Figure 4.21: Dump Data Axle-Car Conversion Data</p>


<br><p>Type the '''DDC''' command in one of the following formats:</p><p><br></p>
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1" cellpadding="2"
 
{|
|-  
|-  
|<p>Command Format</p>
| <p>Command Format</p>
 
| <p>Description</p>
|<p>Description</p>
 
|-  
|-  
|<p>DDC</p>
| <p>I</p>
 
| <p>Required.''' '''Displays the standard I/O.</p>
|<p>Required. Cars for the most recent train.</p>
 
|-  
|-  
|<p>DDC, Sequence #</p>
| <p>I,C</p>
| <p>Optional.''' '''Displays configurable inputs and counters, if present.</p>
|}<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<div><p><br></p></div>


|<p>Optional. Cars for the specified sequence number.</p>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2" cellpadding="4"
|-
| style="width: 100%;" | <p>There are no special inputs configured.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>There are no special counters configured.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>There are no alarms configured.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>APU102XP: Main 1&gt;_</p>
|}


|-
<p><br></p><p style="text-align: center;" >Figure 4.25: I,C Command Display (No Inputs, Counters, or Alarms Configured)</p>
|<p>DDC,*</p>


|<p>Optional. Cars for all available trains.</p>
<br><h5 class="mwt-heading" >Header Fields</h5>
<p>This screen has no standard header fields.</p>
<h5 class="mwt-heading" >Data Fields</h5>
<p>The following table defines the data fields on the APU102 I/0 Status Display screen.</p>
<p><br></p>


|}<p><br></p><p>Header Fields</p><p>Refer to tables 4-1 through 4-3 for header definitions on this screen.</p><p>Data Fields</p><p>The table below defines the data fields on the Dump Data Axle-Car Conversion Data screen.</p><p><br></p>
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; height: 168px; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1" cellpadding="2"
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 35.2344px;" | <p>Field</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 906.906px;" | <p>Description</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 35.2344px;" | <p>Block</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 906.906px;" | <p>Connection block for DC power, wheel detectors, and AC monitoring or input/output channels. (Green connector blocks on bottom of APU-102)</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 35.2344px;" | <p>#</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 906.906px;" | <p>Block pin number.</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 35.2344px;" | <p>Label</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 906.906px;" | <p>Name for input or output signal.</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 35.2344px;" | <p>I/O</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 906.906px;" | <p>Indicates whether the signal is an input or an output. (I or O)</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 35.2344px;" | <p>State</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 906.906px;" | <p>The condition of the signal.</p>
|}<p><br></p>


{|
=== Train Logger Reports ('''TL''') ===
<p>Using the Train Logger Reports ('''TL''') command with a valid extension displays a log of train related events, consist host transaction events, and maintenance host transaction events for a specific train or all trains.''' '''The displayed information defaults to the most recent train. Type the '''TL''' command in one of the following formats:</p><p><br></p><div>
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1" cellpadding="2"
|-  
|-  
|<p>Field</p>
|<p>Command Format</p>
 
|<p>Description</p>
|<p>Description</p>
|-  
|-  
|<p>Rec#</p>
|<p>TL(Extension)</p>
 
|<p>Required. Command code followed by the selected extension.</p>
|<p>Record number assigned by the APU-102.</p>
<p>Valid extensions:</p>
 
<p>T = Train related events.</p>
<p>C = Consist host transaction events.</p>
<p>M = Maintenance host transaction events.</p>
|-  
|-  
|<p>Car#</p>
|<p>TL(Extension), Sequence #</p>
 
|<p>Optional. Transaction events for a specific sequence number.</p>
|<p>Location of the equipment in the train with zero (0) being the first car.</p>
 
|-  
|-  
|<p>Plat#</p>
|<p>TL(Extension),*</p>
 
|<p>Optional. Transaction events for all trains.</p>
|<p>Number of the platform within the car. Articulated cars are divided into platforms that are grouped into one (1) car.</p>
|}
 
</div><p><br></p>
|-
====== Optional Formats ======
|<p>Start Ax.</p>
<p>Below are the optional formats and their command code.</p>
 
===== Train Log - Train Events ('''TLT''') =====
|<p>Axle number in the train that the APU-102 used to begin the car with. The first axle of a train is always zero (0).</p>
<p>The Train Log - Train Events ('''TLT''') command lists the standard train header followed by an event log listing events associated with the train selected.''' '''Use this command to determine if anything occurred to affect the consist and to dump an event log associated with the train.''' '''Except for specific messages that are always logged in the train log, this information is only available if enabled with the ''DiskManager.TrainLogEnable'' parameter.''' '''(See below for list of these messages that are always on.)''' '''The format of the listing is similar to that viewed with the SYS command in the Supervisory Menu.</p><p><br></p><div>
 
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2" cellpadding="4"
|-
|-
|<p>End Ax.</p>
| style="width: 100%;" |<p>Nicholson Ave&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; MP: 0000.0 Station 00001&nbsp; Reader 1</p>
 
<p>Train Seq #0005&nbsp;&nbsp; Date: 02-22-96&nbsp;&nbsp; Time: 16:46:06</p>
|<p>Axle number in the train that the APU-102 used to end the car with.</p>
 
|-
|<p>Axle Count</p>
 
|<p>Total axles in the car.</p>
 
|-  
|<p>Start Time</p>
 
|<p>Time in the train that the APU-102 identified the first axle of the car. The start time of the first axle is always zero (0).</p>
 
|-
|<p>End Time</p>
 
|<p>Time in the train that the APU-102 identified the last axle of the car.</p>
 
|-
|<p>Type</p>
 
|<p>EGC code of the car as identified by the axles only.</p>
 
|}<p><br></p><p>Dump Data Wheel Event Log ('''DDW''')</p><p>The Dump Data Wheel Event Log ('''DDW''') command lists transducer activity for the most recent train, all available trains, or a specific train.</p>
 
<br><p><br></p><div><p>Nicholson Ave&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; MP: 0000.0 Station 00001&nbsp; Reader 1</p>
<p>&nbsp;Train Seq #0001&nbsp;&nbsp; Date: 01-31-96&nbsp;&nbsp; Time: 16:02:01</p>
<p>&nbsp; ENG: ENG&nbsp;&nbsp; 1&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Dir: S&nbsp;&nbsp; MPH: 024&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Axles: 0024</p>
<p>&nbsp; ENG: ENG&nbsp;&nbsp; 1&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Dir: S&nbsp;&nbsp; MPH: 024&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Axles: 0024</p>
<p>&nbsp; WDA = 024&nbsp;&nbsp; WDB = 024&nbsp;&nbsp; WDAB = 000&nbsp;&nbsp; WDBA = 024</p>
<p>&nbsp; WDA = 024&nbsp;&nbsp; WDB = 024&nbsp;&nbsp; WDAB = 000&nbsp;&nbsp; WDBA = 024</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; HOST REPORT:&nbsp; ON&nbsp; : * :05-02-11&nbsp; 09:04:52/09:05:01</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; HOST REPORT:&nbsp; ON&nbsp;&nbsp; : * :00-00-00&nbsp; 00:00:00/00:00:00</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp; Loco Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 02&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 01&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Xtags: 01</p>
<p>&nbsp; Loco Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 02&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 01&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Xtags: 01</p>
<p>&nbsp; Car Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 003&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Xtags: 003</p>
<p>&nbsp; Car Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 003&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Xtags: 003</p>
<p>&nbsp; Container:&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Chassis:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Trailer:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000</p>
<p>&nbsp; Container:&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Chassis:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Trailer:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000</p>
<p>&nbsp; Lost Axles: 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Lost Tags:&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Other Tags: 00</p>
<p>&nbsp; Lost Axles:&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Lost Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Other Tags:&nbsp; 00</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>96-02-22 16:45:54 REMOTE&nbsp; 0005 ST Function&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; name</p>
<p>96-02-22 16:45:56 RECORD&nbsp; 0005 Record Complete&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0000 0276</p>
<p>96-02-22 16:46:07 RECORD&nbsp; 0005 Simulated Event&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0000 0000</p>
<p>96-02-22 16:46:10 RECORD&nbsp; 0005 Presence Clear&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0018 0005</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp; End List 0005</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Rec#&nbsp;&nbsp; Tick Count&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Disp&nbsp;&nbsp; Type&nbsp; Dir&nbsp; +C&nbsp;&nbsp; Pres?</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; END</p>
<p>----&nbsp; ------------&nbsp; -------- ----&nbsp; ---&nbsp; ---&nbsp; -----</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>1&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp; B&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; Y</p>
<p>APU102XP: Main 1&gt;</p>
<p>2&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 22&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 22&nbsp;&nbsp; A&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; Y</p>
|}
<p>3&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 137&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 115&nbsp;&nbsp; B&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; Y</p>
</div><p style="text-align: center;">Figure 4.26: Train Log - Train Events Screen</p><p>The following messages are always logged in the system log, regardless of the parameter setting.</p>
<p>4&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 160&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 23&nbsp;&nbsp; A&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; Y</p>
<p>5&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 274&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 114&nbsp;&nbsp; B&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; Y</p>
<p>6&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 297&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 23&nbsp;&nbsp; A&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; Y</p>
<p>7&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 1029&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 732&nbsp;&nbsp; B&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; Y</p>
<p>8&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 1051&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 22&nbsp;&nbsp; A&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; Y</p>
<p>© for continuous display, (ESC) to exit or any other key to continue</p></div><p>Figure 4.22: Dump Data Wheel Event Log Screen</p><p>Type the '''DDW''' command in one of the following formats:</p><p><br></p>


{|
*Pres Circuit Failure
|-
*Pres Circuit Warning
|<p>Command Format</p>
*Wheel Det Failure
*Wheel Det Warning
*Antenna Failure
*Antenna Fail Warning
*Extern Com Failure
*Extern Com Warning
*AEI Reader Failure
*AEI Reader Restored


|<p>Description</p>
<br><p>'''Train Log - Consist Host Transaction Events (TLC)'''</p><p>Lists the communications events that occurred as the APU-102 reported the specified train(s) to the host. Log is maintained relative to the train sequence when communications occur (time period from the last train to completion of this train). If no log is present, host transaction logging is probably turned off or consist communications did not occur during the logging period. This information is available only if the ''AEIReportOpts.TransactionLogger'' parameter is enabled for the specific session. Set this parameter to '''0''' to turn host report logging off.</p><p><br></p><div>
 
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2" cellpadding="4"
|-  
|-
|<p>DDW</p>
| style="width: 100%;" |<p>Nicholson Ave&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; MP: 0000.0 Station 00001&nbsp; Reader 1</p>
 
<p>&nbsp;Train Seq #0005&nbsp;&nbsp; Date: 02-22-96&nbsp;&nbsp; Time: 16:46:06</p>
|<p>Required. Transducer activity for the most recent train.</p>
<p>&nbsp; ENG: ENG&nbsp;&nbsp; 1&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Dir: S&nbsp;&nbsp; MPH: 024&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Axles: 0024</p>
 
<p>&nbsp; WDA = 024&nbsp;&nbsp; WDB = 024&nbsp;&nbsp; WDAB = 000&nbsp;&nbsp; WDBA = 024</p>
|-  
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; HOST REPORT:&nbsp; ON&nbsp;&nbsp; : * :00-00-00&nbsp; 00:00:00/00:00:00</p>
|<p>DDW, Sequence #</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp; Loco Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 02&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 01&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Xtags: 01</p>
<p>&nbsp; Car Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 003&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Xtags: 003</p>
<p>&nbsp; Container:&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Chassis:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Trailer:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000</p>
<p>&nbsp; Lost Axles:&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Lost Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Other Tags:&nbsp; 00</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Event log file not found.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp; End List 0005</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; END</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>APU102XP: Main 1&gt;</p>
|}
</div><p style="text-align: center;">Figure 4.27: Train Log - Consist Host Transaction Events Screen</p><p style="text-align: center;">(Usually disabled so log file doesn’t exist)</p><p>'''Train Log - Maintenance Host Transaction Events (TLM)'''</p><p>Lists the communications events that occurred as the APU-102 reported maintenance information around the time of the current train to the maintenance host. Log is maintained relative to the train sequence when communications occur (time period from the last train to completion of this train). If no log is present, host report logging is probably turned off or maintenance host communications did not occur during the logging period. Set this parameter to '''0''' to turn maintenance report logging off. This information is available only if the ''MaintReportOpts.TransactionLogger'' parameter is enabled for the specific session.</p>


|<p>Optional. Transducer activity by specific sequence number.</p>
<br><p><br></p><div>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2" cellpadding="4"
|-
| style="width: 100%;" |<p>Nicholson Ave&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; MP: 0000.0 Station 00001&nbsp; Reader 1</p>
<p>&nbsp;Train Seq #0005&nbsp;&nbsp; Date: 02-22-96&nbsp;&nbsp; Time: 16:46:06</p>
<p>&nbsp; ENG: ENG&nbsp;&nbsp; 1&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Dir: S&nbsp;&nbsp; MPH: 024&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Axles: 0024</p>
<p>&nbsp; WDA = 024&nbsp;&nbsp; WDB = 024&nbsp;&nbsp; WDAB = 000&nbsp;&nbsp; WDBA = 024</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; HOST REPORT:&nbsp; ON&nbsp;&nbsp; : * :00-00-00&nbsp; 00:00:00/00:00:00</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp; Loco Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 02&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 01&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Xtags: 01</p>
<p>&nbsp; Car Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 003&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Xtags: 003</p>
<p>&nbsp; Container:&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Chassis:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Trailer:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000</p>
<p>&nbsp; Lost Axles: 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Lost Tags:&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Other Tags: 00</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Event log file not found.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp; End List 0005</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; END</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>APU102XP: Main 1&gt;</p>
|}
</div><p style="text-align: center;">Figure 4.28: Train Log - Maintenance Host Transaction Events</p><p style="text-align: center;">(Usually disabled so log file doesn’t exist)</p>


|-  
=== Pass-through to Port ('''PT''') ===
|<p>DDW,*</p>
<p>This function allows the operator to establish a connection directly to the port specified in the port parameter file if it is not in use by another process.</p>
<p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''PT''' command in the following format:</p>
<p><br></p>


|<p>Optional. Transducer activity for all available trains.</p>
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; height: 84px;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 154.484px;" | <p>Command Format</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 291.906px;" | <p>Description</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 154.484px;" | <p>PT</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 291.906px;" | <p>Required. Command code.</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 154.484px;" | <p>Port parameter filename</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 291.906px;" | <p>Required. The parameter filename of the port.</p>
|}<p><br></p>
<p>The following message displays:</p>
 
 
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
|-
| style="width: 100%;" | <div><p>Remote passthru session established.</p></div>
<p><br></p>
<p>Press &lt;ESC C&gt; to terminate session.</p>
|}
<div></div>
<p><br></p>
<p>2) Press &lt;'''Esc'''&gt; then uppercase &lt;'''C'''&gt; to terminate. If idle, the session automatically terminates after five minutes. The following message displays:</p>
<div><p><br></p>


|}<p><br></p><p>Header Fields</p><p>Refer to tables 4-1 through 4-3 for header definitions on this screen.</p><p>Data Fields</p><p>The table below defines the data fields on the Dump Data Wheel Event Log screen.</p><p><br></p><div>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
|-
| style="width: 100%;" | <p>Remote passthru session terminated.</p>
<p>APU102XP: Main 1&gt;</p>
|}


{|
<p><br></p></div>
<p><br></p>
<p>Command Examples:</p>
<p><br></p>
<p style="margin-left: 25px;" >PT,$REMPORT.DAT - Connect to the modem port.</p>
<p style="margin-left: 25px;" >PT,$LOCPORT.DAT - Connect to the external LOCAL port.</p>
<p style="margin-left: 25px;" >PT,AVI1PORT.DAT - Connect to the reader 0 port.</p>
<p style="margin-left: 25px;" >PT,AVI2PORT.DAT - Connect to the reader 1 port.</p>
<p style="margin-left: 25px;" >PT,AUX1PORT.DAT - Connect to the external AUX DATA-1 port.</p>
<p style="margin-left: 25px;" >PT,AUX2PORT.DAT - Connect to the external AUX DATA-2 port.</p>
<p style="margin-left: 25px;" >PT,NETMODEM,IP&nbsp; - Connect to the another port on the network.</p>
<p style="margin-left: 25px;" >PT,ETHERNET,IP &nbsp;- Connect to the another port on the network.</p>
<h3 class="mwt-heading" >Pass-through to Reader ('''AMT''')</h3>
<p>The Pass-through to Reader ('''AMT''') command allows you connect directly to the reader card and, if necessary, make changes to the reader card programming. This command should not be used without knowledge of the APU-102 software and the AI1200 reader card command set. All reader related commands will not operate if the reader is currently servicing a train.</p>
<p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''AMT '''command in the following format:</p>
<p><br></p>
 
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
|-  
|-  
|<p>Field</p>
| <p>Command Format</p>
|<p>Description</p>
| <p>Description</p>
|-  
|-  
|<p>Rec#</p>
| <p>AMT</p>
|<p>Number assigned to each wheel event.</p>
| <p>Required. Command code.</p>
|-  
|-  
|<p>Tick Count</p>
| <p>0-2</p>
|<p>Incremental time elapsed from the beginning of wheel event recording to the current specified event.</p>
| <p>Required. The 1-digit reader number.</p>
|-  
|}<p><br></p>
|<p>Disp</p>
<p>The following message displays:</p>
|<p>Time elapsed between one wheel event and the next.</p>
 
 
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
|-
| style="width: 100%;" | <div><p>Remote passthru session established.</p></div>
<p><br></p>
<p>Press &lt;ESC C&gt; to terminate session.</p>
|}
<div></div>
<p><br></p>
<p>2)&nbsp; Press &lt;'''Esc'''&gt; then uppercase &lt;'''C'''&gt; to terminate the session. If idle, the session automatically terminates after five minutes. The following message displays:</p>
 
 
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
|-
| style="width: 100%;" | <div><p>Remote passthru session terminated.</p>
<p>APU102XP: Main 1&gt;</p></div>
|}
<div></div>
 
=== Check Tag Sequence ('''CT''') ===
<p>The Check Tag Sequence ('''CT''') command provides a way of verifying that the antennas, RF unit, and reader card are working correctly. When using the '''CT''' command locally and the Sonalert is on, you hear a beep when each check-tag is read and visually, the appropriate reader’s LOCK LED will light.</p>
<p><br></p>
<div>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
|-
| style="width: 100%;" | <p>Check Tag [Reader: 0] [Antenna: 0] [Status : OK]</p>
<p>Check Tag Data:&nbsp; 0000000000000&nbsp;&nbsp; 00&12:54:09.17 05/31/95</p>
<p>Check Tag [Reader: 0] [Antenna: 1] [Status : OK]</p>
<p>Check Tag Data:&nbsp; 1111111111111&nbsp;&nbsp; 00&12:54:10.47 05/31/95</p>
<p>Reader #1 is not in current configuration.</p>
<p>Reader #2 is not in current configuration.</p>
|}
</div>
<p style="text-align: center;" >Figure 4.29: Check Tag Sequence Screen</p>
<p>Type the '''CT''' command in one of the following formats and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;:</p>
<p><br></p>
 
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
|-  
|-  
|<p>Type</p>
| <p>Command Format</p>
|<p>Identifies “A” or “B” segment wheel event.</p>
| <p>Description</p>
|-  
|-  
|<p>Dir</p>
| <p>CT</p>
|<p>Direction of train movement.</p>
| <p>Required. Command code.</p>
|-  
|-  
|<p>+C</p>
| <p>0 - 2, or *</p>
|<p>Identifies presence of “C” pulse.</p>
| <p>Required. Selected reader number. The asterisk (*) specifies all readers.</p>
|-  
|-  
|<p>Pres?</p>
| <p>0, 1, or *</p>
|<p>Identifies state of presence circuit during that axle event</p>
| <p>Required. Selected antenna number. The asterisk (*) specifies all antennas.</p>
|}
|}<p><br></p>
</div><p><br></p>
<p>''Example:'' Type '''CT,0,*''' to activate the Check Tag Sequence for the first reader, both antennas.</p>
<p><br></p>
{| style="border-collapse: collapse;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
|-
| style="width: 48.9062px;" | <p style="text-align: center;" >NOTE</p>
| style="width: 1142.09px;" | <p>A check tag must be installed inside at least one antenna per track covered. It may not indicate a failure if a failure message is returned from the antenna not containing the check tag.</p>
|}<p><br></p>


=== 4.3.2.18&nbsp; Display Parameters ('''DP''') ===
=== Initialize Reader ('''IR''') ===
<p>The Display Parameters ('''DP''') command displays a sub-menu of all the APU-102 parameter settings. This function is identical to the Display Parameters function in the Supervisory Menu, except passwords are not displayed. Logging into Session 1 gives access to all parameters including the other session parameters. Acquisition and hardware configuration of the equipment is also accessible to Session 1. Logging into other sessions gains access only to that session’s parameters. The Dump parameters ('''D''') option displays at the bottom of all screens within the Display Parameters menu. The parameter dump can be captured to an ASCII file and later restored to the system using the Edit Parameters ('''EP''') function in the Supervisory Menu.</p><p>'''Note:''' Version 5.1.1B103 has added capability of dumping parameters to an on-board file.&nbsp;</p><div><p><br></p>
<p>The Initialize Reader ('''IR''') command initializes the Amtech reader hardware. It resets all the reader commands to the required APU-102 settings. Even if the communication parameters have been changed, the APU-102 searches all the available communication parameters to connect to the reader. Using the '''IR''' command is very helpful if the user cannot connect to the reader or there appears to be a problem with the reader card. With one command you may choose to initialize one reader or all readers.</p>
<p>Display Parameters -</p>
<p>Type the '''IR''' command in the following format:</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 1. Session1</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 2. Session2</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 3. Session3</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4. Session4</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 5. LocalSupport</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 6. RemoteSupport</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 7. Acquisition</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 8. Ports</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 9. DiskManager</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; 10. TimeZoneControl</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; 11. DaylightSavings</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; 12. SysDiags</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; 13. DebugFlags</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; 14. NetMenu</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; 15. SupportThreads</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; 16. MoreSessions</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>[D]ump parameters, e[X]it &gt;</p></div><p>Figure 4.23: Display Parameters Menu Screen</p><p>All options may not be available depending on software version</p><p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''DP''' command and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;.</p><p>2)&nbsp; Enter one of the parameter options (1-16) at the screen prompt. Enter any sub-menu options to view the desired parameters.</p><p>3)&nbsp; To initiate a parameter dump, type '''D''' and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. The APU-102 will prompt you to press '''&lt;Enter&gt;''' to start the dump. This gives you an opportunity to start your capture file before starting the dump. The dump can be run from any level where the “[D]ump parameters” prompt shows on the bottom of the screen.</p><p>If 5.1.1B103 or later you can capture your parameter dump to a file on-board the APU-102. This file can be downloaded after completion using a more reliable transfer protocol (such as ZMODEM) Type '''DF''' and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. (The DF option might not be displayed on the prompt) You will be prompted to supply an on-board file name.</p><p>Progress of either dump mode will be displayed.</p><p>4)&nbsp; Type '''X '''and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt; to go up one level, but only when the “e[X]it” prompt shows on the bottom of the screen.</p><p>Press &lt;'''ESC'''&gt;''' '''to go up one level at any time.</p>


=== 4.3.2.19&nbsp; Change to Supervisory Menu ('''C''') ===
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
<p>The Supervisory Menu ('''C''') is submenu of the System Menu and can only be accessed with the proper authority and password. The password assigned for access to the Supervisory Menu may or may not be the same as the System Menu password. It is recommended that the password for the two menus be different in order to limit the number of people that can make changes to the parameters or reset the system. Main Menu commands are accessible from the Supervisor menu.</p><p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''C '''command at the ''APU102XP: &nbsp;Main ''prompt. The date, time, and password field display.</p><p>2)&nbsp; Type the designated Supervisory Menu password and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. Asterisks (*) display as you type the characters.</p><p>3)&nbsp; Type your name and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt; at the ''Enter Your Name ''prompt. If the password was entered correctly, the “Welcome to” message displays and the cursor appears at the ''APU102XP: &nbsp;Change'' prompt.</p><p>4)&nbsp; Type &lt;'''?'''&gt; and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. The Supervisory Menu displays.</p><p><br></p>
 
{|
|-  
|-  
|<p>Tip</p>
| <p>Command Format</p>
 
| <p>Description</p>
|<p>Entering the supervisory password at the initial log on screen will log directly to the Supervisory Menu (version 5.10+).</p><p><br></p>
 
|}<p>For a screen example and information on moving around the'' ''Supervisory Menu, refer to the ''Supervisory Menu'' section later in this chapter.</p>
 
=== 4.3.2.20&nbsp; Display I/O Information ('''I''') ===
<p>The Display I/O Information ('''I''') command displays the state of the Input/Output (I/O) in a real time mode.</p><p><br></p><div>
 
{|
|-  
|-  
|<p>APU102 I/O Status Display</p>
| <p>IR</p>
<p>-------------------------</p>
| <p>Required. Command code.</p>
|-  
|-  
|<p>Block</p>
| <p>0-2, *</p>
|<p>#</p>
| <p>Required. 1-digit reader number (0-2) or asterisk (*) for all readers.</p>
|<p>Label</p>
|}<p>''Example:'' Type '''IR, 0''' to initialize reader number 0.</p>
|<p>I/O</p>
<p>The following message displays the selected reader (or readers):</p>
|<p>State</p>
<p><br></p>
&gt;
<div>&nbsp;</div>
|<p>Block</p>
 
|<p>#</p>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
|<p>Label</p>
|-
|<p>I/O</p>
| style="width: 100%;" | <div><p>Reader #0 initialization complete.</p></div>
|<p>State</p>
<p>APU102XP: Main 1&gt;</p>
|}
<p style="text-align: center;" >Figure 4.30: Initialize Reader Screen</p>
<p><br></p>
 
=== Activate Reader RF ('''RFON''') ===
<p>The Activate Reader RF ('''RFON''') command is a diagnostic tool that allows you to activate the RF of a reader or antenna. Either antenna may be turned on individually or together. Only ''one'' reader can be activated at a time.</p>
<p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''RFON '''command in the following format:</p>
 
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
|-  
|-  
|<p>-----</p>
| style="width: 125px;" | <p>Command Format</p>
|<p>--</p>
| style="width: 412px;" | <p>Description</p>
|<p>---------</p>
|<p>---</p>
|<p>------</p>
|<p>+</p>
|<p>-----</p>
|<p>--</p>
|<p>---------</p>
|<p>---</p>
|<p>------</p>
|-  
|-  
|<p>Main</p>
| style="width: 125px;" | <p>RFON</p>
|<p>&nbsp;7</p>
| style="width: 412px;" | <p>Required. Command code.</p>
|<p>PresIn</p>
|<p>I</p>
|<p>Clear</p>
&gt;
|<p>Main</p>
|<p>&nbsp;9</p>
|<p>PresOut</p>
|<p>O</p>
|<p>Clear</p>
|-  
|-  
|<p>Main</p>
| style="width: 125px;" | <p>0-2</p>
|<p>15</p>
| style="width: 412px;" | <p>Required. 1-digit Amtech reader number.</p>
|<p>DTrkPres</p>
|<p>I</p>
|<p>Clear</p>
&gt;
|<p>Main</p>
|<p>16</p>
|<p>DTrkPres</p>
|<p>O</p>
|<p>Clear</p>
|-  
|-  
|<p>----</p>
| style="width: 125px;" | <p>0-1 or *</p>
|<p>--</p>
| style="width: 412px;" | <p>Required. 1-digit antenna number or asterisk (*) for all antennas.</p>
|<p>WDA</p>
|}<p><br></p>
|<p>I</p>
<p>''Example:'' Type '''RFON, 0, *''' to activate the RF for reader 0 and all antennas.</p>
|<p>0</p>
<p>The APU-102 displays the following message stating what has been turned on and that it is waiting for the antenna to read a tag.</p>
&gt;
<p><br></p>
|<p>Aux1</p>
<div></div>
|<p>&nbsp;7</p>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
|<p>ClkSync</p>
|-
|<p>O</p>
| style="width: 100%;" | <div><p>APU102XP: Main 1&gt;rfon,0,*</p></div>
|<p>1</p>
<p><br></p>
|-  
<p>---------------------------------------</p>
|<p>----</p>
<p>RF Is ON [Reader: 0] [Antenna: 0 & 1].</p>
|<p>--</p>
<p>Press any key to turn RF off...</p>
|<p>WDB</p>
<p>---------------------------------------</p>
|<p>I</p>
<p><br></p>
|<p>0</p>
<p>#*C2??$@:U2H-(4&&lt; NAS&16:52:39.91 12/28/98%00-1-06-F</p>
&gt;
<p>#*C2?0$K8X2G.1=”$ NAS&16:52:59.73 12/28/98%00-0-00-F</p>
|<p>Aux!</p>
<p>#FC$L $&&lt;HAD&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;NAS&16:53:13.74 12/28/98%00-1-05-F</p>
|<p>&nbsp;9</p>
<p>Waiting for tag...</p>
|<p>WatchDog</p>
<p>Flushing Tags...&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</p>
|<p>O</p>
<p>RF Is OFF.&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</p>
|<p>1</p>
<p><br></p>
|-  
<p>APU102XP: Main 1&gt;</p>
|<p>Aux1</p>
|}
|<p>&nbsp;5</p>
<p>After a tag is read, the raw (un-decoded) tag information displays.</p>
|<p>WDC</p>
<p>2)&nbsp; Press any key to remove the tag data from the system and turn off the RF. The following message displays:</p>
|<p>I</p>
 
|<p>0</p>
 
&gt;
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
|<p>Aux2</p>
|-
|<p>&nbsp;9</p>
| style="width: 100%;" | <div><p>Flushing tags.....</p>
|<p>SensorPwr</p>
<p><br></p>
|<p>O</p>
<p>RF Is OFF.</p></div>
|<p>On</p>
|}
|-  
<div></div>
|<p>Aux2</p>
 
|<p>&nbsp;1</p>
=== Reader Interface Self Test ('''RST''') ===<p>Use the Reader Interface Self Test ('''RST''') command to determine if the APU-102 can communicate with any of the readers installed in the system. This screen displays the type of tests and the test results. This can be extremely valuable when troubleshooting a site that is not reading tags. It does NOT activate the RFID subsystem.</p>
|<p>WDD</p>
<p><br></p>
|<p>I</p>
<div>
|<p>0</p>
 
&gt;
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
|<p>Aux2</p>
|<p>11</p>
|<p>SpareOut</p>
|<p>O</p>
|<p>1</p>
|-  
|-  
|<p>----</p>
| style="width: 100%;" | <p>AI1200 Reader Test&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;Status</p>
|<p>--</p>
<p>---------------------------------------------------------------------------</p>
|<p>VTP R0,A0</p>
<p>Reader 0: Communications.............................&nbsp;OK</p>
|<p>I</p>
<p>Reader 0, Antenna 0: Rf Control Line.................OK</p>
|<p>Off</p>
<p>Reader 0, Antenna 1: Rf Control Line.................OK</p>
&gt;
<p>Reader 0, Antenna 0: Antenna Handshake Line..........OK</p>
|<p>----</p>
<p>Reader 0, Antenna 1: Antenna Handshake Line..........OK</p>
|<p>--</p>
<p>All Tests Passed........&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; ........................&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; NORMAL</p>
|<p>RFOn R0,A0</p>
|}
|<p>O</p>
 
|<p>Off</p>
<p><br></p></div>
<p style="text-align: center;">Figure 4.31: Reader Interface Self Test Screen</p>
<p>Type the '''RST''' command in one of the following formats and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;:</p>
<p><br></p>
 
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
|-  
|-  
|<p>----</p>
| style="width: 121px;" | <p>Command Format</p>
|<p>--</p>
| style="width: 460px;" | <p>Description</p>
|<p>VTP R0,A1</p>
|<p>I</p>
|<p>Off</p>
&gt;
|<p>----</p>
|<p>--</p>
|<p>RFOn R0,A1</p>
|<p>O</p>
|<p>Off</p>
|-  
|-  
|<p>----</p>
| style="width: 121px;" | <p>RST</p>
|<p>--</p>
| style="width: 460px;" | <p>Required. Command code.</p>
|<p>VTP R1,A0</p>
|<p>I</p>
|<p>On</p>
&gt;
|<p>----</p>
|<p>--</p>
|<p>RFOn R1,A0</p>
|<p>O</p>
|<p>Off</p>
|-  
|-  
|<p>----</p>
| style="width: 121px;" | <p>0-2, *</p>
|<p>--</p>
| style="width: 460px;" | <p>Required. Selected reader number or asterisk (*) to indicate all readers.</p>
|<p>VTP R1,A1</p>
|}<p><br></p>
|<p>I</p>
<p>''Example'': Type '''RST, 2''' to test the communication between the APU-102 and reader number 2.</p>
|<p>On</p>
===== Data Fields =====
&gt;
<p><br></p>
|<p>----</p>
 
|<p>--</p>
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
|<p>RFOn R1,A1</p>
|<p>O</p>
|<p>Off</p>
|-  
|-  
|<p>Aux2</p>
| style="width: 129px;" | <p>Field</p>
|<p>&nbsp;7</p>
| style="width: 441px;" | <p>Description</p>
|<p>VTP R2,A0</p>
|<p>I</p>
|<p>Off</p>
&gt;
|<p>Aux2</p>
|<p>15</p>
|<p>RFOn R2,A0</p>
|<p>O</p>
|<p>On</p>
|-  
|-  
|<p>Aux2</p>
| style="width: 129px;" | <p>AI1200 Reader Test</p>
|<p>&nbsp;5</p>
| style="width: 441px;" | <p>Displays the reader number (0-3) and the type of test being reported.</p>
|<p>VTP R2,A1</p>
|<p>I</p>
|<p>Off</p>
&gt;
|<p>Aux2</p>
|<p>13</p>
|<p>RFOn R2,A1</p>
|<p>O</p>
|<p>On</p>
|-  
|-  
|<p>Main</p>
| style="width: 129px;" | <p>Status</p>
|<p>11</p>
| style="width: 441px;" | <p>Displays the results of the test.</p>
|<p>24VAC</p>
|<p>I</p>
|<p>Fail</p>
&gt;
|<p>----</p>
|<p>--</p>
|<p>Sys LED</p>
|<p>O</p>
|<p>On</p>
|-
|<p>Aux1</p>
|<p>&nbsp;3</p>
|<p>Progrmble</p>
|<p>I</p>
|<p>Clear</p>
&gt;
|<p>----</p>
|<p>--</p>
|<p>Sys Button</p>
|<p>I</p>
|<p>Out</p>
|-
|<p>----</p>
|<p>--</p>
|<p>RsrfcSens</p>
|<p>I</p>
|<p>1</p>
&gt;
|<p>----</p>
|<p>--</p>
|<p>SW3 Button</p>
|<p>I</p>
|<p>Out</p>
|-
|<p>Aux2</p>
|<p>&nbsp;3</p>
|<p>24VDC</p>
|<p>I</p>
|<p>Ok</p>
&gt;
|<p>----</p>
|<p>--</p>
|<p>SW2 Button</p>
|<p>I</p>
|<p>Out</p>
|-
|<p>----</p>
|<p>--</p>
|<p>Phone Sel</p>
|<p>O</p>
|<p>Line 1</p>
&gt;
|<p>----</p>
|<p>--</p>
|<p>SW1 Button</p>
|<p>I</p>
|<p>Out</p>
|}
|}
</div><p>Figure 4.24: APU102 I/0 Status Display Screen</p><p>Type the '''I''' command in one of the following formats and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt; at the APU102XP: &nbsp;Main prompt.</p><p><br></p>


{|
=== Print Match List '''(MA)''' ===
|-
<p>Print Match List (MA) is used in Distributed Processing Systems. Any time a new local train is recorded, the software must scan all trains it received from other sites that are within a defined “time window” looking for matches.</p><p><br></p><p>Refer to the ''APU103 Installation & Operation Manual'''' ''for additional information.</p>
|<p>Command Format</p>


|<p>Description</p>
=== Compare Two Trains '''(CMP)''' ===
<p>Compare Two Trains '''(CMP) '''is a diagnostic tool used in Distributed Processing Systems. It does a car-by-car comparison of 2 trains to help determine why a match was not found.</p><p><br></p><p>Refer to the ''APU103 Installation & Operation Manual'''' ''for additional information.</p>


|-
=== Main Help Screen '''(?)''' ===
|<p>I</p>
<p>Type '''?''' to re-display the current menu screen.</p>


|<p>Required.''' '''Displays the standard I/O.</p>
=== Confidence Logic Parameters ('''CNF''') ===
<p>This function displays how the Confidence Logic Parameters are configured for the current session. Changes are made in the appropriate session’s AEI Report Option parameters.</p>
<p><br></p>
<div>
<p>&nbsp;</p>


{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
|-  
|-  
|<p>I,C</p>
| style="width: 100%;" | <div><p style="text-align: center;">'''AEI CONFIDENCE LOGIC PARAMETERS'''</p>
 
|<p>Optional.''' '''Displays configurable inputs and counters, if present.</p>
 
|}<p><br></p><p><br></p><div><p><br></p>
<p>There are no special inputs configured.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>There are no special counters configured.</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; The following parameters are used to filter AEI data from outgoing consists</p>
<p>based on software comparisons between AEI tag information and axle generated</p>
<p>car information.</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Current Settings</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; ------------------------------------------------</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Default Confidence Level :&nbsp; 3</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Double Track Active Confidence Level :&nbsp; 2</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; ITC Failure Confidence Level :&nbsp; 1</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>There are no alarms configured.</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Conditional Options&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;&nbsp; Confidence Level Options</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>-----------------------------------&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;-------------------------------------</p>
<p>APU102XP: Main 1&gt;_</p>
<p>D - Default. Used when no abnormal&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0 - Tags are not reported.</p>
<p><br></p></div><p>Figure 4.25: I,C Command Display (No Inputs, Counters, or Alarms Configured)</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; conditions exist.&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;&nbsp; 1 - Tag is reported only if both left</p>
<p>T - Double Track Active. Used when&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; and right tags were read.</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; train is active on adjacent track.&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; 2 - Single tags are reported only if</p>
<p>F - Intertrack Communications Failure.&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; no discrepancies exist between</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Used when APU cannot access data&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; car and tag information.</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; on adjacent track's APU.&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;&nbsp; 3 - All tags are reported.</p></div>
|}
</div>
 
= Supervisory Menu =
== Overview ==
<p>The Supervisory Menu allows you to change parameters, run diagnostic tests, and reset the APU-102. It is password-protected and should only be used by persons authorized to make parameter changes that are vital to the APU-102. '''Note:''' Main Menu commands (and help) are accessible from the Supervisory Menu.</p>


<br><p>Header Fields</p><p>This screen has no standard header fields.</p><p>Data Fields</p><p>The following table defines the data fields on the APU102 I/0 Status Display screen.</p><p><br></p>


{| style="height: 168px;"
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 574px; height: 619px; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
|- style="height: 51px;"
! style="height: 51px; width: 568px;" colspan="2" | APU102<br>SUPERVISORY MENU
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 266.766px;" | HR&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Host Reporting Options
| style="height: 28px; width: 296.234px;" | *MR&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;Master System Reset
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="width: 266.766px; height: 28px;" | *EMS&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Edit Message Status
| style="width: 296.234px; height: 28px;" | *SR&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; System Status Reset
|- style="height: 28px;"
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 35.2344px;" |<p>Field</p>
| style="width: 266.766px; height: 28px;" | *VM&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Version Maintenance
 
| style="width: 296.234px; height: 28px;" | RMS&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;Reset Maintenance Sequence
| style="height: 28px; width: 906.906px;" |<p>Description</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
 
| style="width: 266.766px; height: 28px;" | SYS&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; System Status Info
| style="width: 296.234px; height: 28px;" | *R&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;Reboot Unit
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="width: 266.766px; height: 28px;" | DIR&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;Directory Listing
| style="width: 296.234px; height: 28px;" | *WT&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Watchdog Test
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="width: 266.766px; height: 28px;" | TYPE&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Type a File
| style="width: 296.234px; height: 28px;" | ZSEND&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;Zmodem Send File(s)
|- style="height: 51px;"
| style="width: 266.766px; height: 51px;" | ZREC&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Zmodem Receive File(s)
| style="width: 296.234px; height: 51px;" | ZSENDMA&nbsp; Zmodem Train and Matched Files
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="width: 266.766px; height: 28px;" | ZRECR&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Zmodem Receive Restart
| style="width: 296.234px; height: 28px;" | XSEND&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;Xmodem Send File
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="width: 266.766px; height: 28px;" | XREC&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Xmodem Receive File
| style="width: 296.234px; height: 28px;" | XSEND1k&nbsp; &nbsp;Xmodem1k Send File
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="width: 266.766px; height: 28px;" | ZPUT&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;Local ethernet file xfer
| style="width: 296.234px; height: 28px;" | ZGET&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Local ethernet file xfer
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="width: 266.766px; height: 28px;" | IPCONFIG&nbsp; &nbsp;Check Network Settings
| style="width: 296.234px; height: 28px;" | PING&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;Packet Internet Groper
|- style="height: 28px;"
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 35.2344px;" |<p>Block</p>
| style="width: 266.766px; height: 28px;" | *T&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;Set Date/Time
 
| style="width: 296.234px; height: 28px;" | RA&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;Reassociate all Trains
| style="height: 28px; width: 906.906px;" |<p>Connection block for DC power, wheel detectors, and AC monitoring or input/output channels. (Green connector blocks on bottom of APU-102)</p>
 
|- style="height: 28px;"
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 35.2344px;" |<p>#</p>
| style="width: 266.766px; height: 28px;" | X&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Exit to Main Menu
 
| style="width: 296.234px; height: 28px;" | SHELL&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; DOS Command
| style="height: 28px; width: 906.906px;" |<p>Block pin number.</p>
 
|- style="height: 28px;"
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 35.2344px;" |<p>Label</p>
| style="width: 266.766px; height: 28px;" | *RHS&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;Run Hardware Setup
 
| style="width: 296.234px; height: 28px;" | MAIN?&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Main Menu Help
| style="height: 28px; width: 906.906px;" |<p>Name for input or output signal.</p>
 
|- style="height: 28px;"
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 35.2344px;" |<p>I/O</p>
| style="width: 266.766px; height: 28px;" | EP&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;Edit Parameters
 
| style="width: 296.234px; height: 28px;" | ?&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;This Screen
| style="height: 28px; width: 906.906px;" |<p>Indicates whether the signal is an input or an output. (I or O)</p>
 
|- style="height: 28px;"
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 35.2344px;" |<p>State</p>
| style="width: 266.766px; height: 28px;" | CLEAN&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; System cleanup
| style="width: 296.234px; height: 28px;" | <br>
|- style="height: 97px;"
| style="height: 97px; width: 568px;" colspan="2" | For help on a command, enter the command followed by a '?'<br>All main menu commands are available as well, type MAIN? for help<br><br>* - Available to Session #1 Only
|}


| style="height: 28px; width: 906.906px;" |<p>The condition of the signal.</p>
<span style="font-size: 14.4px;">Figure 4.32: Supervisory Menu</span>
<p style="text-align: center;" >Menu may vary depending on AEI Application version. If not detailed in this text, refer to the on-board help.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''C''' command at the ''APU102XP: &nbsp;Main'' prompt from the System Menu screen''. ''The APU-102 requests password entry.</p>
<p>2)&nbsp; Type the Supervisory Menu password and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;.'' ''If you enter an invalid password, the “Invalid Password” message displays.</p>
<p>3)&nbsp; Type your name and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;.'' ''A “Welcome To” message displays, followed by the ''APU102XP: &nbsp;Change'' prompt.</p>
<p>4)&nbsp; Type '''&lt;?&gt;''' and press '''&lt;Enter&gt; '''to display the Supervisory Menu.</p>
<p>The Supervisory Menu is the same for all sessions except the items with the asterisk (*).'' ''These items are only accessible from if logged into Session 1.'' ''The information displays in the format selected for that particular session.</p>


|}<p><br></p>
== Supervisory Menu Screens ==
 
=== Host Reporting Options ('''HR''') ===
=== 4.3.2.21&nbsp; Train Logger Reports ('''TL''') ===
<p>The Host Reporting Options ('''HR''') command displays or changes host reporting with several different options. All are specific to the session you are logged into.</p>
<p>Using the Train Logger Reports ('''TL''') command with a valid extension displays a log of train related events, consist host transaction events, and maintenance host transaction events for a specific train or all trains.''' '''The displayed information defaults to the most recent train. Type the '''TL''' command in one of the following formats:</p><p><br></p><div>
<p>1)&nbsp; To view or change Host Reporting options, select one of the following command format options and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;.</p>
<p><br></p>


{|
{| style="border-collapse: collapse;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
|-  
|-  
|<p>Command Format</p>
| <p>Command Format</p>
|<p>Description</p>
| <p>Description</p>
|-
| <p>HR</p>
| <p>Required. Displays current host reporting status, either “Activated” or “Deactivated”. This command does not change the status of the host reporting option.</p>
|-
| <p>HR,OFF</p>
| <p>Optional. Turns off host reporting.'' ''This command suspends reporting of any train information to host system.'' ''New train entries will be stored with a report status in the train directory of “N”, for NO report sent.</p>
|-
| <p>HR,INI</p>
| <p>Optional. Initialize or change the host password for COMPASS reports.</p>
|-
| <p>HR,ON,N</p>
| <p>Optional. Activate host reporting; report only new trains.</p>
|-
| <p>HR,ON,A</p>
| <p>Optional. Activate host reporting; report all trains.</p>
|-  
|-  
|<p>TL(Extension)</p>
| <p>HR,ON,#</p>
|<p>Required. Command code followed by the selected extension.</p>
| <p>Optional. Activate host reporting with Age Threshold. # = Age Threshold in hours (0-9).</p>
<p>Valid extensions:</p>
<p>T = Train related events.</p>
<p>C = Consist host transaction events.</p>
<p>M = Maintenance host transaction events.</p>
|-  
|-  
|<p>TL(Extension), Sequence #</p>
| <p>HR,####</p>
|<p>Optional. Transaction events for a specific sequence number.</p>
| <p>Optional. Requests re-transmission of a particular train.'' ''#### = Sequence number of the requested train.'' ''By entering a sequence number after the HR command, the requested train sequence number is placed in the queue for reporting. This feature will not operate unless host reporting is enabled and the train falls within reporting options.</p>
|-  
|-  
|<p>TL(Extension),*</p>
| <p>HR,NOW</p>
|<p>Optional. Transaction events for all trains.</p>
| <p>Suppresses reporting wait times from consist and maintenance processes and causes immediate transmissions of pending reports. (Version 5.10B2 or later)</p>
|}<p><br></p>
<p>A screen message displays the action taken on the Host Reporting Option. The following example shows a screen display if '''HR''' is entered.</p>
<div></div>
 
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
|-
| style="width: 100%;" | <div><p>APU102XP: Change 1&gt;hr</p>
<p>*********** Host Reporting Activated ***********</p>
<p>APU102XP: Change 1&gt;</p></div>
|}
|}
</div><p><br></p><p>Optional Formats</p><p>Below are the optional formats and their command code.</p><p>Train Log - Train Events ('''TLT''')</p><p>The Train Log - Train Events ('''TLT''') command lists the standard train header followed by an event log listing events associated with the train selected.''' '''Use this command to determine if anything occurred to affect the consist and to dump an event log associated with the train.''' '''Except for specific messages that are always logged in the train log, this information is only available if enabled with the ''DiskManager.TrainLogEnable'' parameter.''' '''(See below for list of these messages that are always on.)''' '''The format of the listing is similar to that viewed with the SYS command in the Supervisory Menu.</p><p><br></p><div><p>Nicholson Ave&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; MP: 0000.0 Station 00001&nbsp; Reader 1</p>
 
<p>Train Seq #0005&nbsp;&nbsp; Date: 02-22-96&nbsp;&nbsp; Time: 16:46:06</p>
=== Edit Message Status (*'''EMS''') ===
<p>&nbsp; ENG: ENG&nbsp;&nbsp; 1&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Dir: S&nbsp;&nbsp; MPH: 024&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Axles: 0024</p>
<p>The Edit Message Status ('''EMS''') command allows you to remotely change (enable or disable) the reporting status of messages in maintenance reports. Some critical messages are always logged and cannot be disabled with this function. This function has no effect on the messages appearing in the system status log.</p>
<p>&nbsp; WDA = 024&nbsp;&nbsp; WDB = 024&nbsp;&nbsp; WDAB = 000&nbsp;&nbsp; WDBA = 024</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; HOST REPORT:&nbsp; ON&nbsp;&nbsp; : * :00-00-00&nbsp; 00:00:00/00:00:00</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp; Loco Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 02&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 01&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Xtags: 01</p>
<div>
<p>&nbsp; Car Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 003&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Xtags: 003</p>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
<p>&nbsp; Container:&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Chassis:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Trailer:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000</p>
|-
<p>&nbsp; Lost Axles: 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Lost Tags:&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Other Tags: 00</p>
| style="width: 100%;" | <p>MSG #000: Unit Startup ENABLED</p>
<p>&lt;E&gt;nable or &lt;D&gt;isable or &lt;ENTER&gt; for current status:</p>
<p>MSG #001: User Abort ENABLED</p>
<p>&lt;E&gt;nable or &lt;D&gt;isable or &lt;ENTER&gt; for current status:</p>
<p>MSG #002: APUERROR.DAT #2 ENABLED</p>
<p>&lt;E&gt;nable or &lt;D&gt;isable or &lt;ENTER&gt; for current status:</p>
<p>MSG #003: APUERROR.DAT #3 ENABLED</p>
<p>&lt;E&gt;nable or &lt;D&gt;isable or &lt;ENTER&gt; for current status:</p>
<p>MSG #004: Presence Startup ENABLED</p>
<p>&lt;E&gt;nable or &lt;D&gt;isable or &lt;ENTER&gt; for current status:</p>
<p>MSG #005: Presence Clear ENABLED</p>
<p>&lt;E&gt;nable or &lt;D&gt;isable or &lt;ENTER&gt; for current status:</p>
<p>msg #006: Process Startup ENABLED</p>
<p>&lt;E&gt;nable or &lt;D&gt;isable or &lt;ENTER&gt; for current status:</p>
<p>MSG #007: APUERROR.DAT #7 ENABLED</p>
<p>&lt;E&gt;nable or &lt;D&gt;isable or &lt;ENTER&gt; for current status:</p>
<p>MSG #008: Dos Error ENABLED</p>
<p>&lt;E&gt;nable or &lt;D&gt;isable or &lt;ENTER&gt; for current status:</p>
|}
</div>
<p style="text-align: center;" >Figure 4.33: Edit Message Status</p>
<p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''EMS''' command and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. The first message displays and requests you to select &lt;'''E'''&gt; to enable, &lt;'''D'''&gt; to disable, or &lt;'''Enter'''&gt; to bypass.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>96-02-22 16:45:54 REMOTE&nbsp; 0005 ST Function&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; name</p>
<div>
<p>96-02-22 16:45:56 RECORD&nbsp; 0005 Record Complete&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0000 0276</p>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto; height: 201px;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
<p>96-02-22 16:46:07 RECORD&nbsp; 0005 Simulated Event&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0000 0000</p>
|- style="height: 201px;"
<p>96-02-22 16:46:10 RECORD&nbsp; 0005 Presence Clear&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0018 0005</p>
| style="width: 100%; height: 201px;" | <p>MSG #000: Unit Startup ENABLED</p>
<p>&lt;E&gt;nable or &lt;D&gt;isable or &lt;ENTER&gt; for current status:</p>
<p>MSG #001: User Abort ENABLED</p>
<p>&lt;E&gt;nable or &lt;D&gt;isable or &lt;ENTER&gt; for current status:</p>
<p>MSG #002: APUERROR.DAT #2 DISABLED</p>
<p>&lt;E&gt;nable or &lt;D&gt;isable or &lt;ENTER&gt; for current status: E</p>
<p>Status change to ENABLED</p>
|}
</div>
<p style="text-align: center;" >Figure 4.34: Example: MSG #002 Changed to ENABLED</p>
<p>2)&nbsp; Select &lt;'''E'''&gt;, &lt;'''D'''&gt; or press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. The next message and its associated number display.</p>
<p>3)&nbsp; Continue enable/disable selections for each message that displays.</p>
<p>4)&nbsp; Press '''&lt;ESC&gt; '''to exit the '''EMS''' command.</p>
 
=== Version Maintenance (*'''VM''')&nbsp;(not implemented for version 5.0+) ===
<p>Use the Version Maintenance ('''VM''') command to change the software version running on the APU-102. If for some reason the software needs to be changed, the VM command displays the software versions that are available.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp; End List 0005</p>
<div>
 
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
|-
| style="width: 100%;" | <p>Version Maintenance (VM) Menu</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; END</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>APU102XP: Main 1&gt;</p></div><p>Figure 4.26: Train Log - Train Events Screen</p><p>The following messages are always logged in the system log, regardless of the parameter setting.</p>
<p>#&nbsp; Cur&nbsp; Version&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Run File&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Description</p>
 
<p>-&nbsp; ---&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;-------&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;------------&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;----------------------------------</p>
*Pres Circuit Failure
<p>1&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4.20&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; APUV4_20&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; T94 4.12 + Zmodem reporting</p>
*Pres Circuit Warning
<p>2&nbsp;&nbsp; *&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4.23&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; AP423&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; APU102 V4.23 (Base), T94 V4.12</p>
*Wheel Det Failure
*Wheel Det Warning
*Antenna Failure
*Antenna Fail Warning
*Extern Com Failure
*Extern Com Warning
*AEI Reader Failure
*AEI Reader Restored
 
<br><p>Train Log - Consist Host Transaction Events ('''TLC''')</p><p>Lists the communications events that occurred as the APU-102 reported the specified train(s) to the host. Log is maintained relative to the train sequence when communications occur (time period from the last train to completion of this train). If no log is present, host transaction logging is probably turned off or consist communications did not occur during the logging period. This information is available only if the ''AEIReportOpts.TransactionLogger'' parameter is enabled for the specific session. Set this parameter to '''0''' to turn host report logging off.</p><p><br></p><div><p>Nicholson Ave&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; MP: 0000.0 Station 00001&nbsp; Reader 1</p>
<p>&nbsp;Train Seq #0005&nbsp;&nbsp; Date: 02-22-96&nbsp;&nbsp; Time: 16:46:06</p>
<p>&nbsp; ENG: ENG&nbsp;&nbsp; 1&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Dir: S&nbsp;&nbsp; MPH: 024&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Axles: 0024</p>
<p>&nbsp; WDA = 024&nbsp;&nbsp; WDB = 024&nbsp;&nbsp; WDAB = 000&nbsp;&nbsp; WDBA = 024</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; HOST REPORT:&nbsp; ON&nbsp;&nbsp; : * :00-00-00&nbsp; 00:00:00/00:00:00</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp; Loco Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 02&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 01&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Xtags: 01</p>
<p>&nbsp; Car Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 003&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Xtags: 003</p>
<p>&nbsp; Container:&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Chassis:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Trailer:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000</p>
<p>&nbsp; Lost Axles: 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Lost Tags:&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Other Tags: 00</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Event log file not found.</p>
<p>Options</p>
<p>------------------------------</p>
<p>V - Change current version</p>
<p>C - Clear changes</p>
<p>D - Delete version</p>
<p>X - Return to previous menu</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp; End List 0005</p>
<p>Enter option:</p>
|}
</div>
<p style="text-align: center;">Figure 4.35: Version Maintenance Screen</p>
<p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''VM '''command''' '''and press '''&lt;Enter&gt;.''' The Version Maintenance menu displays.</p>
<p>2)&nbsp; Enter a number that corresponds to the desired version. Within the VM command, all sub-commands are hot-keyed (no need to follow with '''&lt;Enter&gt;''')'''.'''&nbsp; Valid values are:</p>
<p>V - Change current version.</p>
<p>C - Clear changes.</p>
<p>D - Delete version.</p>
<p>X - Return to previous menu.</p>
<p>3)&nbsp; You will be presented with choices depending on command selected. Answer as appropriate.</p>
 
=== System Status Info ('''SYS''') ===
<p>The System Status Info ('''SYS''') command displays the system status log. This log provides a list of all APU-102 activities. The size of the System Status Info file is limited and can fill quickly if the site is very busy or has a problem. If the site is not very active and everything is working well, the log may contain information for several days. The size of the log file can be specified by the '''SR''' command.</p>
<p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''SYS '''command to bring up the Process Identification Menu (PID).</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; END</p>
<div>
<p><br></p>
<p>APU102XP: Main 1&gt;</p></div><p>Figure 4.27: Train Log - Consist Host Transaction Events Screen</p><p>Usually disabled so log file doesn’t exist</p><p>Train Log - Maintenance Host Transaction Events ('''TLM''')</p><p>Lists the communications events that occurred as the APU-102 reported maintenance information around the time of the current train to the maintenance host. Log is maintained relative to the train sequence when communications occur (time period from the last train to completion of this train). If no log is present, host report logging is probably turned off or maintenance host communications did not occur during the logging period. Set this parameter to '''0''' to turn maintenance report logging off. This information is available only if the ''MaintReportOpts.TransactionLogger'' parameter is enabled for the specific session.</p>


<br><p><br></p><div><p>Nicholson Ave&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; MP: 0000.0 Station 00001&nbsp; Reader 1</p>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
<p>&nbsp;Train Seq #0005&nbsp;&nbsp; Date: 02-22-96&nbsp;&nbsp; Time: 16:46:06</p>
|-
<p>&nbsp; ENG: ENG&nbsp;&nbsp; 1&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Dir: S&nbsp;&nbsp; MPH: 024&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Axles: 0024</p>
| style="width: 100%;" | <p>PID&nbsp;&nbsp; Process&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; PID&nbsp;&nbsp; Process</p>
<p>&nbsp; WDA = 024&nbsp;&nbsp; WDB = 024&nbsp;&nbsp; WDAB = 000&nbsp;&nbsp; WDBA = 024</p>
<p>-------------------------------------------</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; HOST REPORT:&nbsp; ON&nbsp;&nbsp; : * :00-00-00&nbsp; 00:00:00/00:00:00</p>
<p>0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; ALL&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;&nbsp; |&nbsp; 11&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; REPORT1</p>
<p>1&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; MAIN&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; |&nbsp; 12&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; REPORT2</p>
<p>2&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; RECORD&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;|&nbsp; 13&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; REPORT3</p>
<p>3&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; FSB&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; |&nbsp; 14&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; REPORT4</p>
<p>4&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; CLOCK&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; |&nbsp; 15&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; MAINT1</p>
<p>5&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; REMOTE&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;|&nbsp; 16&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; MAINT2</p>
<p>6&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; LOCAL&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; |&nbsp; 17&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; MAINT3</p>
<p>7&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; AVI1&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; |&nbsp; 18&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; MAINT4</p>
<p>8&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; AVI2&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;|&nbsp; 19&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; AXLE</p>
<p>9&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; AVI3&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;|&nbsp; 20&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; DISKMGR</p>
<p>10&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; AVI4&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;&nbsp;|</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp; Loco Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 02&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 01&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Loco Xtags: 01</p>
<p>Enter the appropriate PID Number:</p>
<p>&nbsp; Car Cnt:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 003&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Tags:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Car Xtags: 003</p>
|}
<p>&nbsp; Container:&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Chassis:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Trailer:&nbsp;&nbsp; 000</p>
</div>
<p>&nbsp; Lost Axles: 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Lost Tags:&nbsp; 000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Other Tags: 00</p>
<p style="text-align: center;">Figure 4.36: Process Identification Menu</p>
<p>PID menu may vary depending on AEI Application version. Example is version 4.25</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Event log file not found.</p>
<p>2)&nbsp; Select the type of status log, or PID, to review. Software is under constant development and options may be added or reassigned.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp; End List 0005</p>
<p>3)&nbsp; The APU-102 prompts you to select (C)ontinuous or (P)aused display. Type '''C''' or '''P.''' The selected status log displays the available records.</p>
<p>In the following screen example, the Main process (PID #1) in Paused (P) display was selected:</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; END</p>
<div>
<p><br></p>
<p>APU102XP: Main 1&gt;</p></div><p>Figure 4.28: Train Log - Maintenance Host Transaction Events</p><p>(Usually disabled so log file doesn’t exist)</p>


=== 4.3.2.22&nbsp; Pass-through to Port ('''PT''') ===
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
<p>This function allows the operator to establish a connection directly to the port specified in the port parameter file if it is not in use by another process.</p><p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''PT''' command in the following format:</p><p><br></p>
 
{|
|-  
|-  
|<p>Command Format</p>
| style="width: 100%;" | <p>Comet Electronics</p>
 
<p>Automatic Equipment Identification System</p>
|<p>Description</p>
<p>APU Software Version 4.23</p>
 
<p>AMTECH Model AI1200 Ver 2.80 SN97514</p>
|-
<p>Wed 06/30/04&nbsp; 16:43:26</p>
|<p>PT</p>
<p>Host Reporting: On, All</p>
 
<p>Last LOGON: Wed 06/30/04&nbsp; 16:37:45</p>
|<p>Required. Command code.</p>
<p>05-16-04 10:29:41 MAIN&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0000 Clock Resync&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; ASCII Data</p>
 
<p>Time before sync Sun May 16 10:29:39 2004</p>
|-  
<p>05-16-04 10:29:41 MAIN&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0001 Unit Startup&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; ASCII Data</p>
|<p>Port parameter filename</p>
<p>&nbsp;Halli&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; APUV4_20 03-03-1998 04:20:00</p>
 
<p>05-16-04 10:36:27 MAIN&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0001 Unit Startup&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; ASCII Data</p>
|<p>Required. The parameter filename of the port.</p>
<p>Halli:AP43 09-02-1998 04:23:00</p>
 
<p><br></p>
|}<p><br></p><p>The following message displays:</p><p><br></p><div><p>Remote passthru session established.</p>
<p>&nbsp; End of System Status</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; END</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Press &lt;ESC C&gt; to terminate session.</p></div><p><br></p><p>2) Press &lt;'''Esc'''&gt; then uppercase &lt;'''C'''&gt; to terminate. If idle, the session automatically terminates after five minutes. The following message displays:</p><p><br></p><div><p><br></p>
<p>APU102XP: Change 1&gt;</p>
<p>Remote passthru session terminated.</p>
|}
<p>APU102XP: Main 1&gt;</p>
</div>
<p><br></p></div><p><br></p><p>Command Examples:</p><p><br></p><p>PT,$REMPORT.DAT - Connect to the modem port.</p><p>PT,$LOCPORT.DAT - Connect to the external LOCAL port.</p><p>PT,AVI1PORT.DAT - Connect to the reader 0 port.</p><p>PT,AVI2PORT.DAT - Connect to the reader 1 port.</p><p>PT,AUX1PORT.DAT - Connect to the external AUX DATA-1 port.</p><p>PT,AUX2PORT.DAT - Connect to the external AUX DATA-2 port.</p><p>PT,NETMODEM,IP&nbsp; - Connect to the another port on the network.</p><p>PT,ETHERNET,IP &nbsp;- Connect to the another port on the network.</p><p>4.3.2.23&nbsp; Pass-through to Reader ('''AMT''')</p><p>The Pass-through to Reader ('''AMT''') command allows you connect directly to the reader card and, if necessary, make changes to the reader card programming. This command should not be used without knowledge of the APU-102 software and the AI1200 reader card command set. All reader related commands will not operate if the reader is currently servicing a train.</p><p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''AMT '''command in the following format:</p><p><br></p>
<p style="text-align: center;" >Figure 4.37: System Status Info Screen</p>
<p>It is possible that the status log will not have any records for the selection made. The APU-102 then displays the header information and the ''END'' statement.</p>


{|
=== Archived System Status Info ('''ASYS''') Version 5.2+ ===
|-
<p>'''Still under development to SQLite database and command structure is likely to change.'''</p>
|<p>Command Format</p>
<p>The Archived System Status Info ('''ASYS''') command is like the standard SYS log, but for archived files. You will be prompted for PID and starting/ending date and times. This report provides a list of all APU-102 activities for the specified PID and date/time range.</p>
 
|<p>Description</p>
 
|-
|<p>AMT</p>
 
|<p>Required. Command code.</p>
 
|-
|<p>0-2</p>
 
|<p>Required. The 1-digit reader number.</p>
 
|}<p><br></p><p>The following message displays:</p><p><br></p><div><p>Remote passthru session established.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Press &lt;ESC C&gt; to terminate session.</p></div><p><br></p><p>2)&nbsp; Press &lt;'''Esc'''&gt; then uppercase &lt;'''C'''&gt; to terminate the session. If idle, the session automatically terminates after five minutes. The following message displays:</p><p><br></p><div><p>Remote passthru session terminated.</p>
<div>
<p>APU102XP: Main 1&gt;</p></div><p><br></p>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
 
|-
=== 4.3.2.24&nbsp; Check Tag Sequence ('''CT''') ===
| style="width: 100%;" | <p>PID&nbsp; Process&nbsp; PID&nbsp; Process&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; PID Process&nbsp;&nbsp; PID Process</p>
<p>The Check Tag Sequence ('''CT''') command provides a way of verifying that the antennas, RF unit, and reader card are working correctly. When using the '''CT''' command locally and the Sonalert is on, you hear a beep when each check-tag is read and visually, the appropriate reader’s LOCK LED will light.</p><p><br></p><div><p><br></p>
<p>-------------------------------------------------------</p>
<p>Check Tag [Reader: 0] [Antenna: 0] [Status : OK]</p>
<p>&nbsp;0&nbsp;&nbsp; ALL&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; | 24&nbsp; ERROR&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; | 81&nbsp; XTRKSERV |</p>
<p>Check Tag Data:&nbsp; 0000000000000&nbsp;&nbsp; 00&12:54:09.17 05/31/95</p>
<p>&nbsp;1&nbsp;&nbsp; MAIN&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; | 25&nbsp; GEHBD&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; | 82&nbsp; XTRKMON&nbsp; |</p>
<p>Check Tag [Reader: 0] [Antenna: 1] [Status : OK]</p>
<p>&nbsp;2&nbsp;&nbsp; RECORD&nbsp; | 26&nbsp; ETHOBS&nbsp;&nbsp; |&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; |</p>
<p>Check Tag Data:&nbsp; 1111111111111&nbsp;&nbsp; 00&12:54:10.47 05/31/95</p>
<p>&nbsp;3&nbsp;&nbsp; FSB&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; | 27&nbsp; ODM&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; |&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; |</p>
<p>Reader #1 is not in current configuration.</p>
<p>&nbsp;4&nbsp;&nbsp; CLOCK&nbsp;&nbsp; | 28&nbsp; IDM&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; |&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; |</p>
<p>Reader #2 is not in current configuration.</p>
<p>&nbsp;5&nbsp;&nbsp; REMOTE&nbsp; | 29&nbsp; TALKER&nbsp;&nbsp; |&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; |</p>
<p><br></p></div><p>Figure 4.29: Check Tag Sequence Screen</p><p>Type the '''CT''' command in one of the following formats and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;:</p><p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;6&nbsp;&nbsp; LOCAL&nbsp;&nbsp; | 30&nbsp; NTP&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; | 101 REPORT1&nbsp; | 111 MAINT1</p>
<p>&nbsp;7&nbsp;&nbsp; AVI1&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; | 31-36 TELNET | 102 REPORT2&nbsp; | 112 MAINT2</p>
<p>&nbsp;8&nbsp;&nbsp; AVI2&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; | 41-50 DETECT | 103 REPORT3&nbsp; | 113 MAINT3</p>
<p>&nbsp;9&nbsp;&nbsp; AVI3&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; | 51-60 XTRACK | 104 REPORT4&nbsp; | 114 MAINT4</p>
<p>&nbsp;10&nbsp; AVI4&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; | 61-70 NETMDM | 105 REPORT5&nbsp; | 115 MAINT5</p>
<p>&nbsp;19&nbsp; AXLE&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; | 71&nbsp; XTPMON&nbsp;&nbsp; | 106 REPORT6&nbsp; | 116 MAINT6</p>
<p>&nbsp;20&nbsp; DISKMGR | 72&nbsp; XTP&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; | 107 REPORT7&nbsp; | 117 MAINT7</p>
<p>&nbsp;21&nbsp; SCALE&nbsp;&nbsp; | 73-76 COMBOM | 108 REPORT8&nbsp; | 118 MAINT8</p>
<p>&nbsp;22&nbsp; WDOG&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; | 77&nbsp; CAH&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; | 109 REPORT9&nbsp; | 111 MAINT9</p>
<p>&nbsp;23&nbsp; ITC&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; | 78&nbsp; ACQPROC&nbsp; | 110 REPORT10 | 120 MAINT10</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Enter the appropriate PID Number: 2</p>
<p>Display entire archive contents? (if Y, bypasses Date/Time entries)</p>
<p>Beginning date and time of archive:</p>
<p>Enter New Date mm/dd/yyyy &gt;01/01/2012</p>
<p>Enter New Time hh:mm:ss&nbsp;&nbsp; &gt;00:00</p>
<p>Ending date and time of archive:</p>
<p>Enter New Date mm/dd/yyyy &gt;01/02/2012</p>
<p>Enter New Time hh:mm:ss&nbsp;&nbsp; &gt;23:59</p>
<p>(C)ontinuous or (P)aused display? :</p>
|}
</div>
<p style="text-align: center;" >Figure 4.38: Process Identification Menu PID menu may vary depending on AEI Application version. Example is version 5.2+</p>


{|
<br>
|-
|<p>Command Format</p>


|<p>Description</p>
=== Directory Listing (DIR) ===
<p>The Directory Listing ('''DIR''') command displays the file directory on the APU-102 with wildcard support.</p>
<p>Type the '''DIR '''command in the following format:</p>
<p><br></p>


{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
|-  
|-  
|<p>CT</p>
| style="background-color: rgb(12, 71, 157); width: 121px;" | <p><span style="color: rgb(255, 255, 255);" >Command Format</span></p>
 
| style="background-color: rgb(12, 71, 157); width: 738px;" | <p><span style="color: rgb(255, 255, 255);" >Description</span></p>
|<p>Required. Command code.</p>
 
|-  
|-  
|<p>0 - 2, or *</p>
| style="width: 121px;" |  <p>DIR</p>
 
| style="width: 738px;" |  <p>Required. Command code will display the entire file directory for all files.</p>
|<p>Required. Selected reader number. The asterisk (*) specifies all readers.</p>
 
|-  
|-  
|<p>0, 1, or *</p>
| style="width: 121px;" |  <p>DIR ''filespec''</p>
 
| style="width: 738px;" |  <p>Optional. Command code and the desired file specification. Displays the file directory specified by filespec.</p>
|<p>Required. Selected antenna number. The asterisk (*) specifies all antennas.</p>
 
|}<p><br></p><p>''Example:'' Type '''CT,0,*''' to activate the Check Tag Sequence for the first reader, both antennas.</p><p><br></p>
 
{|
|-  
|-  
|<p>NOTE</p>
| style="width: 121px;" |  <p>DIR ''filespec /p''</p>
 
<p><br></p>
|<p>A check tag must be installed inside at least one antenna per track covered. It may not indicate a failure if a failure message is returned from the antenna not containing the check tag.</p><p><br></p>
| style="width: 738px;" |  <p>Optional. Displays the directory specified by filespec in paused mode. Press any key to continue through the listing.</p>
 
|}<p><br></p>
|}<p><br></p>
<p>The directory listing displays:</p>


=== 4.3.2.25&nbsp; Initialize Reader ('''IR''') ===
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
<p>The Initialize Reader ('''IR''') command initializes the Amtech reader hardware. It resets all the reader commands to the required APU-102 settings. Even if the communication parameters have been changed, the APU-102 searches all the available communication parameters to connect to the reader. Using the '''IR''' command is very helpful if the user cannot connect to the reader or there appears to be a problem with the reader card. With one command you may choose to initialize one reader or all readers.</p><p>Type the '''IR''' command in the following format:</p><p><br></p>
|-
 
| style="width: 100%;" | <p><br></p>
{|
<div><p>'''&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &lt;'''DIR&gt;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 96-01-17&nbsp; 12:33</p></div>
|-  
<p>'''&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &lt;'''DIR&gt;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 96-01-17&nbsp; 12:33</p>
|<p>Command Format</p>
<p>DM144S&nbsp; INI&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 441&nbsp;&nbsp; 95-06-26&nbsp; 11:39</p>
 
<p>SPT94&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; CFG&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 741&nbsp; 95-04-19&nbsp; 16:33</p>
|<p>Description</p>
<p>APUV4_14 EXE&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 157440&nbsp; 95-11-03&nbsp;&nbsp; 8:40</p>
 
<p>TERMINAL ACC&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 125&nbsp; 95-05-10&nbsp; 13:14</p>
|-  
<p>TERMSTAT ACC&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 125&nbsp; 95-05-10&nbsp;&nbsp; 8:55</p>
|<p>IR</p>
<p>SPHOST&nbsp;&nbsp; ACC&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 167&nbsp; 94-03-22&nbsp; 13:19</p>
<p>CRMAINT&nbsp; ACC&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 162&nbsp; 94-08-08&nbsp; 10:45</p>
<p>CPMAINT&nbsp; ACC&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 361&nbsp; 95-08-07&nbsp; 15:19</p>
<p>ATSRPRT&nbsp; CFG&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 742&nbsp; 95-04-19&nbsp; 16:35</p>
<p>UP&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; TLR&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 2&nbsp; 95-04-21&nbsp;&nbsp; 8:28</p>
<p>UPT94&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; CFG&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 740&nbsp; 95-06-30&nbsp;&nbsp; 7:53</p>
<p>CRT94&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; CFG&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 741&nbsp; 95-04-19&nbsp; 16:33</p>
<p>BNMAINT&nbsp; ACC&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 223&nbsp; 95-05-10&nbsp;&nbsp; 8:56</p>
<p>MAINTERM ACC&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 125&nbsp; 95-05-10&nbsp;&nbsp; 8:55</p>
<p>KCSFEP&nbsp;&nbsp; ACC&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 243&nbsp; 94-08-08&nbsp; 10:43</p>
<p>MCM2400&nbsp; INI&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 584&nbsp; 93-11-01&nbsp; 13:22</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 132 file(s)&nbsp; 261750 bytes&nbsp; 725504 bytes free</p>
|}
<p style="text-align: center;" >Figure 4.39: Directory Listing Screen (excerpt)</p>
<p>The filespec may contain asterisk &lt;*&gt; or question mark &lt;'''?'''&gt; wildcard characters. Press '''&lt;ESC&gt; '''twice to quit the directory listing. Typing &lt;'''/p'''&gt; after the command displays the directory listing in paused mode. The size and timestamp of each file are displayed. At the end of each directory listing is a summary including the number of files in the listing, the total number of bytes in the files listed and the bytes available on the disk.</p>


|<p>Required. Command code.</p>
<br><p><br></p>
 
=== Type a File ('''TYPE''') ===
<p>The Type a File ('''TYPE''') command displays the contents of specific files on the APU-102. Large files may scroll off the screen.</p>
<p><br></p>
<div>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
|-
| style="width: 100%;" | <p>APU102XP: Change 1&gt;type modem.ini</p>
<p>ATZS0=0</p>
<p>ATE0</p>
<p>ATV0</p>
<p>AT&C1</p>
<p>AT&D2</p>
<p>AT\N3</p>
<p>ATS7=60</p>
<p>ATX1</p>
<p>ATS0=1</p>
|}
</div>
<p style="text-align: center;" >Figure 4.40: Type a File Screen</p>
<p>1)&nbsp; Enter the '''TYPE''' command in the following format:</p>
<p><br></p>


{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto; width: 808px;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
|-
| style="background-color: rgb(12, 71, 157); width: 190.234px;" | <p><span style="color: rgb(255, 255, 255);" >Command Format</span></p>
| style="background-color: rgb(12, 71, 157); width: 606.766px;" | <p><span style="color: rgb(255, 255, 255);" >Description</span></p>
|-
| style="width: 190.234px;" |  <p>TYPE</p>
| style="width: 606.766px;" |  <p>Required. Command code.</p>
|-  
|-  
|<p>0-2, *</p>
| style="width: 190.234px;" |  <p>Filename for contents display</p>
| style="width: 606.766px;" |  <p>Required. The name of the APU-102 file for which you want to display contents.</p>
|}<p><br></p>
<p>2)&nbsp; For more convenient viewing of larger files, you may capture the output to a log file or download with ZSEND.</p>


|<p>Required. 1-digit reader number (0-2) or asterisk (*) for all readers.</p>
=== Zmodem Receive File(s)'' ''('''ZREC''') ===
 
<p>The Zmodem Receive File(s) ('''ZREC''') command places the APU-102 in Zmodem receive mode. Zmodem can receive multiple files.</p><p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''ZREC '''command in the following format:</p><p><br></p>
|}<p>''Example:'' Type '''IR, 0''' to initialize reader number 0.</p><p>The following message displays the selected reader (or readers):</p><p><br></p><div><p>Reader #0 initialization complete.</p>
<p>APU102XP: Main 1&gt;</p></div><p>Figure 4.30: Initialize Reader Screen</p><p><br></p>
 
=== 4.3.2.26&nbsp; Activate Reader RF ('''RFON''') ===
<p>The Activate Reader RF ('''RFON''') command is a diagnostic tool that allows you to activate the RF of a reader or antenna. Either antenna may be turned on individually or together. Only ''one'' reader can be activated at a time.</p><p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''RFON '''command in the following format:</p>


{|
{|
|-  
|-  
| '''<br>'''<p>Command Format</p>
|<p>Command Format</p>


|<p>Description</p>
|<p>Description</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>RFON</p>
|<p>ZREC</p>


|<p>Required. Command code.</p>
|<p>Required. Command code.</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>0-2</p>
|<p>Path</p>


|<p>Required. 1-digit Amtech reader number.</p>
|<p>Optional. The file path must be specified if directory location of the file to be received is not in the default directory.</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>0-1 or *</p>
|
 
<br>
|<p>Required. 1-digit antenna number or asterisk (*) for all antennas.</p>
|
 
<br>
|}<p><br></p><p>''Example:'' Type '''RFON, 0, *''' to activate the RF for reader 0 and all antennas.</p><p>The APU-102 displays the following message stating what has been turned on and that it is waiting for the antenna to read a tag.</p><p><br></p><div><p>APU102XP: Main 1&gt;rfon,0,*</p>
|
<p><br></p>
<br>
<p>---------------------------------------</p>
|}<p>'''Note:''' The path option is not available on application versions prior to 5.0. Files are received into the default path only.</p><p>The message “Ready to receive” displays.</p><p>2)&nbsp; Once the APU-102 is in the receive mode, use the Zmodem protocol on your communications program to initiate a file transfer or a file upload. Use wildcards (* or ?) to upload multiple files. Refer to your communications software package for instructions on sending the file.</p><p>After file is received, the message ''N'' file(s) received successfully” displays. (''N'' representing the number of files.)</p><p>If there are errors in the modem’s transmission, one or all of the following messages may display (where ''N'' represents the number of files).</p><p><br></p>
<p>RF Is ON [Reader: 0] [Antenna: 0 & 1].</p>
<p>Press any key to turn RF off...</p>
<p>---------------------------------------</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>#*C2??$@:U2H-(4&&lt; NAS&16:52:39.91 12/28/98%00-1-06-F</p>
<p>#*C2?0$K8X2G.1=”$ NAS&16:52:59.73 12/28/98%00-0-00-F</p>
<p>#FC$L $&&lt;HAD&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;NAS&16:53:13.74 12/28/98%00-1-05-F</p>
<p>Waiting for tag...</p>
<p>Flushing Tags...&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</p>
<p>RF Is OFF.&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>APU102XP: Main 1&gt;</p></div><p><br></p><p>After a tag is read, the raw (un-decoded) tag information displays.</p><p>2)&nbsp; Press any key to remove the tag data from the system and turn off the RF. The following message displays:</p><p><br></p><div><p>Flushing tags.....</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>RF Is OFF.</p></div><p><br></p>
 
=== 4.3.2.27&nbsp; Reader Interface Self Test ('''RST''') ===
<p>Use the Reader Interface Self Test ('''RST''') command to determine if the APU-102 can communicate with any of the readers installed in the system. This screen displays the type of tests and the test results. This can be extremely valuable when troubleshooting a site that is not reading tags. It does NOT activate the RFID subsystem.</p><p><br></p><div><p>AI1200 Reader Test&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Status</p>
<p>---------------------------------------------------------------</p>
<p>Reader 0: Communications.............................&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; OK</p>
<p>Reader 0, Antenna 0: Rf Control Line.................&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; OK</p>
<p>Reader 0, Antenna 1: Rf Control Line.................&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; OK</p>
<p>Reader 0, Antenna 0: Antenna Handshake Line..........&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; OK</p>
<p>Reader 0, Antenna 1: Antenna Handshake Line..........&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; OK</p>
<p>All Tests Passed........&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; ........................&nbsp;&nbsp; NORMAL</p>
<p><br></p></div><p>Figure 4.31: Reader Interface Self Test Screen</p><p>Type the '''RST''' command in one of the following formats and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;:</p><p><br></p>


{|
{|
|-  
|-  
|<p>Command Format</p>
|<p>N port overrun errors</p>


|<p>Description</p>
|<p>Serial port has at least one overrun.</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>RST</p>
|<p>N byte framing errors</p>


|<p>Required. Command code.</p>
|<p>Serial port has at least one framing error.</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>0-2, *</p>
|<p>N parity errors</p>


|<p>Required. Selected reader number or asterisk (*) to indicate all readers.</p>
|<p>Serial port has at least one parity error.</p>


|}<p><br></p><p>''Example'': Type '''RST, 2''' to test the communication between the APU-102 and reader number 2.</p><p>Data Fields</p><p><br></p>
|}<p><br></p><p>These errors are normal and the Zmodem protocol is designed to correct for them. If they become excessive, you may need to repair either the serial port or the modem.</p>


{|
=== Zmodem Receive Resume ('''ZRECR''') ===
<p>The Zmodem Receive Resume ('''ZRECR''') command places the APU-102 in Zmodem receive restart mode to resume a failed file transfer. Zmodem can receive multiple files. If a file already exists on the unit, Zmodem resumes transfer of the existing file at the point where the previous transfer was interrupted. With '''ZRECR''', previously interrupted transmissions can continue, which saves time.</p>
<p>'''Note:''' The resume is done blindly, with no checks to ensure that the existing file has the same contents (up to the point of interruption) as the sent file. This means that if the file is a different version, the new file may be corrupted. Only use ZRECR on file transfers that you know were previously interrupted.</p>
<p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''ZRECR '''command in the following format:</p>
<p><br></p>
 
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
|-
| style="background-color: rgb(12, 71, 157); width: 125px;" mwt-preservehtml="" | <span style="color: rgb(255, 255, 255);">Command Format</span>
| style="background-color: rgb(12, 71, 157); width: 721px;" mwt-preservehtml="" | <span style="color: rgb(255, 255, 255);">Description</span>
|-
| style="width: 125px;" | <p>ZRECR</p>
| style="width: 721px;" | <p>Required. Command code.</p>
|-  
|-  
|<p>Field</p>
| style="width: 125px;" | <p>Path</p>
| style="width: 721px;" | <p>Optional. The fill path must be specified if directory location of the file to be received is not in the default directory.</p>
|}<p>'''Note:''' The path option is not available on application versions prior to 5.0. Files are received into the default path only.</p>
<p>The message “Ready to receive” displays.</p>
<p>2)&nbsp; Once the APU-102 is in the receive mode, use the Zmodem protocol on your communications program to initiate a file transfer or a file upload. Use wildcards (* or ?) to upload multiple files. Refer to your communications software package for instructions on sending the file.</p>
<p>After file is received, the message “''N'' file(s) received successfully” displays. (''N'' representing the number of files.)</p>
<p>If there are errors in the modem’s transmission, one or all of the following messages may display (where ''N'' represents the number of files).</p>
<p><br></p>
 
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; height: 84px; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 135.25px;" | <p>N port overrun errors</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 260.938px;" | <p>Serial port has at least one overrun.</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 135.25px;" | <p>N byte framing errors</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 260.938px;" | <p>Serial port has at least one framing error.</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 135.25px;" | <p>N parity errors</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 260.938px;" | <p>Serial port has at least one parity error.</p>
|}<p><br></p>
<p>These errors are normal and the Zmodem protocol is designed to correct for them. If they become excessive, you may need to repair either the serial port or the modem.</p>


|<p>Description</p>
=== Xmodem Receive File ('''XREC''') ===
<p>The Xmodem Receive File ('''XREC''') command allows files to be transferred to the APU-102 using the Xmodem protocol.</p>
<p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''XREC '''command in the following format:</p>
<p><br></p>


{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
|-  
|-  
|<p>AI1200 Reader Test</p>
| style="background-color: rgb(12, 71, 157); width: 125px;" mwt-preservehtml="" | <span style="color: rgb(255, 255, 255);" >Command Format</span>
 
| style="background-color: rgb(12, 71, 157); width: 722px;" mwt-preservehtml="" | <span style="color: rgb(255, 255, 255);" >Description</span>
|<p>Displays the reader number (0-3) and the type of test being reported.</p>
|-
 
| style="width: 125px;" |  <p>XREC</p>
| style="width: 722px;" |  <p>Required. Command code. Places the APU-102 in Xmodem receive mode.</p>
|-
| style="width: 125px;" |  <p>Path</p>
| style="width: 722px;" |  <p>Optional The file path must be specified if directory location of the file to be received is not in the default directory.</p>
|-  
|-  
|<p>Status</p>
| style="width: 125px;" |  <p>Filename</p>
 
| style="width: 722px;" |  <p>Required. The filename that the transferred file assumes.</p>
|<p>Displays the results of the test.</p>
 
|}<p><br></p>
|}<p><br></p>
<p>The message “Ready to receive”''' '''displays.</p>
<p>2)&nbsp; Once the APU-102 is in the receive mode, use the Xmodem protocol to initiate a file transfer or a file upload.</p>
<p>3)&nbsp; Refer to your communications software package for instructions on sending the file.</p>
<p><br></p>


<br>
<br>
=== 4.3.2.28&nbsp; Print Match List '''(MA)''' ===
<p>Print Match List (MA) is used in Distributed Processing Systems. Any time a new local train is recorded, the software must scan all trains it received from other sites that are within a defined “time window” looking for matches.</p><p><br></p><p>Refer to the ''APU103 Installation & Operation Manual'''' ''for additional information.</p>


=== 4.3.2.29&nbsp; Compare Two Trains '''(CMP)''' ===
=== Local Ethernet File Transmit ('''ZPUT''') &nbsp; ===
<p>Compare Two Trains '''(CMP) '''is a diagnostic tool used in Distributed Processing Systems. It does a car-by-car comparison of 2 trains to help determine why a match was not found.</p><p><br></p><p>Refer to the ''APU103 Installation & Operation Manual'''' ''for additional information.</p>
<p>This command is used to transfer a single file between units residing on the same network. This similar to the ZSend function, except that it is only available to perform network transfers. This command ALWAYS send the entire file from the beginning (ZPutR can be used to resume transfers that were interrupted).</p>
<p>Type the '''ZPUT '''command in the following format:</p>
<p><br></p>


=== 4.3.2.30&nbsp; Main Help Screen '''(?)''' ===
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
<p>Type '''?''' to re-display the current menu screen.</p>
|- <td style="background-color: rgb(12, 71, 157);  > <p class=" mwt-preservehtml=""><span style="color: rgb(255, 255, 255);" >Command Format</span></td><td style="background-color: rgb(12, 71, 157);  > <p class=" mwt-preservehtml=""><span style="color: rgb(255, 255, 255);" >Description</span></td>
 
|-
=== 4.3.2.31&nbsp; Confidence Logic Parameters ('''CNF''') ===
<p>ZPUT</p>
<p>This function displays how the Confidence Logic Parameters are configured for the current session. Changes are made in the appropriate session’s AEI Report Option parameters.</p><p><br></p><div><p>'''AEI CONFIDENCE LOGIC PARAMETERS'''</p>
<p>Required. Command code.</p>
<p><br></p>
|-
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; The following parameters are used to filter AEI data from outgoing consists</p>
<p>Filename for transfer</p>
<p>based on software comparisons between AEI tag information and axle generated</p>
<p>Required. The file specification of the APU-102 file send to another unit on the local network. Wildcards are not permitted.&nbsp; Use caution with this command as it will overwrite an existing destination file.</p>
<p>car information.</p>
|-
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Current Settings</p>
<p>IPAddressOrURL</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; ------------------------------------------------</p>
<p>Required. Network address of destination computer.</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Default Confidence Level :&nbsp; 3</p>
|-
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Double Track Active Confidence Level :&nbsp; 2</p>
<p>IPPort</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; ITC Failure Confidence Level :&nbsp; 1</p>
<p>Optional. IP Port on the destination computer. Defaults to 23 on the APU.</p>
|}
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Conditional Options&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Confidence Level Options</p>
<p>-----------------------------------&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; -------------------------------------</p>
<p>D - Default. Used when no abnormal&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0 - Tags are not reported.</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; conditions exist.&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 1 - Tag is reported only if both left</p>
<p>T - Double Track Active. Used when&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; and right tags were read.</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; train is active on adjacent track.&nbsp; 2 - Single tags are reported only if</p>
<p>F - Intertrack Communications Failure.&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; no discrepancies exist between</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Used when APU cannot access data&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; car and tag information.</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; on adjacent track's APU.&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 3 - All tags are reported.</p></div>


<br>
=== Local Ethernet File Transmit Resume ('''ZPUTR''') &nbsp; ===
= Supervisory Menu =
<p>This command can be used to resume a ZPUT file transfer that was interrupted.</p>
== Overview ==
<p>'''Note:''' The resume is done blindly, with no checks to ensure that the existing file has the same contents (up to the point of interruption) as the partial file. This means that if the file is a different version, the new file may be corrupted. Only use ZPUTR on file transfers that you know were previously interrupted.</p>
<p>The Supervisory Menu allows you to change parameters, run diagnostic tests, and reset the APU-102. It is password-protected and should only be used by persons authorized to make parameter changes that are vital to the APU-102. '''Note:''' Main Menu commands (and help) are accessible from the Supervisory Menu.</p><p><br></p><div><p><br></p>
<p>Type the '''ZPUTR '''command in the following format:</p>
<p>APU102</p>
<p>SUPERVISORY MENU</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;HR&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Host Reporting Options&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; | *MR&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Master System Reset&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</p>
<p>*EMS&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Edit Message Status&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; | *SR&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; System Status Reset&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</p>
<p>*VM&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Version Maintenance&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; |&nbsp; RMS&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Reset Maintenance Sequence&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</p>
<p>&nbsp;SYS&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; System Status Info&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; | *R&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Reboot Unit&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</p>
<p>&nbsp;DIR&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Directory Listing&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; | *WT&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Watchdog Test&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</p>
<p>&nbsp;TYPE&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Type a File&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; |&nbsp; ZSEND&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Zmodem Send File(s)&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</p>
<p>&nbsp;ZREC&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Zmodem Receive File(s)&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; |&nbsp; ZSENDMA&nbsp; Zmodem Train and Matched Files</p>
<p>&nbsp;ZRECR&nbsp;&nbsp; Zmodem Receive Restart&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; |&nbsp; XSEND&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Xmodem Send File&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</p>
<p>&nbsp;XREC&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Xmodem Receive File&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; |&nbsp; XSEND1K&nbsp; Xmodem1K Send File</p>
<p>&nbsp;ZPUT&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Local ethernet file xfer&nbsp;&nbsp; |&nbsp; ZGET&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Local ethernet file xfer</p>
<p>IPCONFIG Check network Settings&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; |&nbsp; PING&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Packet Internet Groper</p>
<p>*T&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Set Date/Time&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; |&nbsp; RA&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Reassociate all Trains</p>
<p>&nbsp;X&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Exit to Main Menu&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; |&nbsp; SHELL&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Dos Command&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</p>
<p>*RHS&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Run Hardware Setup&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; |&nbsp; MAIN?&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Main Menu Help&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</p>
<p>&nbsp;EP&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Edit Parameters&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; |&nbsp; ?&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; This Screen</p>
<p>&nbsp;CLEAN&nbsp;&nbsp; System cleanup&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; |</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;For help on a command, enter the command followed by a '?'</p>
<p>&nbsp;All main menu commands are available as well, type MAIN? for help</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>* - Available to Session #1 Only</p></div><p>Figure 4.32: Supervisory Menu</p><p>Menu may vary depending on AEI Application version. If not detailed in this text, refer to the on-board help.</p><p><br></p><p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''C''' command at the ''APU102XP: &nbsp;Main'' prompt from the System Menu screen''. ''The APU-102 requests password entry.</p><p>2)&nbsp; Type the Supervisory Menu password and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;.'' ''If you enter an invalid password, the “Invalid Password” message displays.</p><p>3)&nbsp; Type your name and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;.'' ''A “Welcome To” message displays, followed by the ''APU102XP: &nbsp;Change'' prompt.</p><p>4)&nbsp; Type '''&lt;?&gt;''' and press '''&lt;Enter&gt; '''to display the Supervisory Menu.</p><p>The Supervisory Menu is the same for all sessions except the items with the asterisk (*).'' ''These items are only accessible from if logged into Session 1.'' ''The information displays in the format selected for that particular session.</p>


== 4.4.2&nbsp; Supervisory Menu Screens ==
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; height: 163px; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
=== 4.4.2.1&nbsp; Host Reporting Options ('''HR''') ===
|- style="height: 28px;"
<p>The Host Reporting Options ('''HR''') command displays or changes host reporting with several different options. All are specific to the session you are logged into.</p><p>1)&nbsp; To view or change Host Reporting options, select one of the following command format options and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;.</p><p><br></p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 126.484px;" | <p>Command Format</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 1071.52px;" | <p>Description</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 126.484px;" | <p>ZPUTR</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 1071.52px;" | <p>Required. Command code.</p>
|- style="height: 51px;"
| style="height: 51px; width: 126.484px;" | <p>Filename for transfer</p>
| style="height: 51px; width: 1071.52px;" | <p>Required. The file specification of the APU-102 file send to another unit on the local network. Wildcards are not permitted.&nbsp; Use caution with this command as it may overwrite or corrupt an existing destination file. (see note above).</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 126.484px;" | <p>IPAddressOrURL</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 1071.52px;" | <p>Required. Network address of destination computer.</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 126.484px;" | <p>IPPort</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 1071.52px;" | <p>Optional. IP Port on the destination computer. Defaults to 23 on the APU.</p>
|}<p><br></p>


{|
=== Check Network Settings '''(IPCONFIG)''' ===
|-
<p>Identical to the simple Windows command line IPCONFIG (no options).</p>
|<p>Command Format</p>
<p>Type the '''IPCONFIG '''command''' '''and press '''&lt;Enter&gt;'''.</p>
 
<p><br></p>
|<p>Description</p>


{| style="border-collapse: collapse; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
|-  
|-  
|<p>HR</p>
| <p>ipconfig &lt; y.dat 1&gt; dosshell.txt 2&gt; dosshll2.txt</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Windows IP Configuration</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Connection-specific DNS Suffix&nbsp; . :</p>
<p>IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : 192.168.1.102</p>
<p>Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 255.255.0.0</p>
<p>Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . : 192.168.1.1</p>
<p><br></p>
|}<p style="text-align: center;" >Figure 4.41: Sample IPCONFIG Response Screen</p>
<p>For advanced options and switches, run IPCONFIG under the SHELL command.</p>


|<p>Required. Displays current host reporting status, either “Activated” or “Deactivated”. This command does not change the status of the host reporting option.</p>
=== Set Date/Time (*'''T''') ===
<p>The Set Date/Time ('''T''') command displays and sets the APU-102 date and time.</p>


|-  
<br>
|<p>HR,OFF</p>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
|-
| style="width: 100%;" | <p>Current time Sun Jun 01&nbsp; 13:30:18 2004</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Enter New Date mm/dd/yyyy &gt;06/01/2004</p>
<p>Enter New Time hh:mm:ss&nbsp;&nbsp; &gt;13:30:18</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>New time Sun Jun 01 13:45:00</p>
|}
<div>
<p style="text-align: center;" ><span style="font-size: 14.4px;">Figure 4.42: Set Date/Time Screen</span><br></p></div>
<p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''T '''command''' '''and press '''&lt;Enter&gt;'''.</p>
<p>2)&nbsp; Type the date in the format indicated and press '''&lt;Enter&gt;'''.</p>
<p>3)&nbsp; Enter the time in military time format (24-hour clock, hh:mm:ss) and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. The new date and time you established displays at the bottom of the screen.</p>
<p>'''Note:''' The time zone is set using the Edit Parameters (EP) command and selecting ''TimeZoneControl.''</p>


|<p>Optional. Turns off host reporting.'' ''This command suspends reporting of any train information to host system.'' ''New train entries will be stored with a report status in the train directory of “N”, for NO report sent.</p>
=== Exit to Main Menu ('''X''') ===
<p>Type the '''X''' command to exit the Supervisory Menu and return to the System Menu.</p>
=== Run Hardware Setup ('''RHS''')&nbsp;LPMTX with 5.0+ only ===
<p>The Run Hardware Setup ('''RHS''') utility is used whenever the hardware in the APU changes. The Windows XPe Operating System needs to identify hardware changes independent of the AEI application parameters. Select this function to set the APU-102 to run the Hardware Setup routine at next power up. The Startup ROM must be disabled to run the routine.</p>
<p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''RHS''' command''' '''and press '''&lt;Enter&gt;'''. The following warning message displays and offers a chance to abort the command.</p>
<p><br></p>
<div>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
|-
| style="width: 100%;" | WARNING: THIS WILL SET THE UNIT TO RUN HARDWARE SETUP. Continue (Y/N)?
|}
</div>
<p><br></p>
<p>2)&nbsp; Press &lt;'''N'''&gt; to cancel and return to the ''APU102XP: &nbsp;Change'' prompt or press &lt;'''Y'''&gt; to continue. If &lt;Y&gt; is selected, the following message displays:</p>


|-
|<p>HR,INI</p>


|<p>Optional. Initialize or change the host password for COMPASS reports.</p>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
|-
| style="width: 100%;" | <p>THE APU HAS BEEN SET TO RUN HARDWARE SETUP</p>
<p>PLEASE POWER OFF UNIT AND FOLLOW HARDWARE SETUP PROCEDURE.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>TYPE "RHS?" FOR MORE INFORMATION.</p>
|}


|-  
<p>Hardware Setup Procedure (following RHS command):</p>
|<p>HR,ON,N</p>
<p>1)&nbsp; Power off the APU.</p>
<p>2)&nbsp; Remove the LPM-TX Pentium card.</p>
<p>3)&nbsp; Remove the Startup ROM at U1 on the PCM-SSD card (daughter-card on Pentium card). Refer to Appendix F for ROM location</p>
<p>4)&nbsp; Reinstall the LPM-TX Pentium card.</p>
<p>5)&nbsp; Power on the APU. The hardware setup program runs automatically. The APU will reboot itself during the process and when completed, will indicate with a 3-blink, pause, and repeat pattern on the SYS LED. If Watchdog timer reboots the APU, it will return to this state.</p>
<p>6)&nbsp; Power off the APU.</p>
<p>7)&nbsp; &nbsp;Reinstall the Startup ROM at U1 on the PCM-SSD card removed earlier.</p>
<p>8)&nbsp; Reinstall the LPM-TX Pentium card.</p>
<p>9)&nbsp; Power on the APU to restore normal operation.</p>


|<p>Optional. Activate host reporting; report only new trains.</p>
=== Edit Parameters ('''EP''') ===
<p>The Edit Parameters screen is a sub-menu of the Supervisory Menu that may be used to view and edit the parameters. The Edit Parameters command provides access to all the configuration parameters of the APU-102 if logged in under Session 1. Logging into other sessions allows access the parameters that affect their session only. (For parameter definitions and default values, refer to ''Appendix A: System Parameters''.)</p>
<p>Groups of parameters can be dumped all at once by using the Dump Parameters (D) option. This allows you to capture the information to a log file providing a record of the site's configuration should it need to be reconfigured or the information is lost. The parameter information can also be loaded back to the site using the Load Parameters (L) option.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>'''Note:''' Version 5.1.1B103 has added capability of dumping or loading parameters to/from an on-board file.&nbsp; Refer to the ''4.5 Edit'' ''Parameters (EP) Menu'' for more information.</p>


{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
|-  
|-  
|<p>HR,ON,A</p>
| style="width: 100%;" |
Edit Parameters -
 
1. Session1<br>&nbsp; 2. Session2<br>&nbsp; 3. Session3<br>&nbsp; 4. Session4<br>&nbsp; 5. LocalSupport<br>&nbsp; 6. RemoteSupport<br>&nbsp; 7. Acquisition<br>&nbsp; 8. Ports<br>&nbsp; 9. DiskManager<br>&nbsp;10. TimeZoneControl<br>&nbsp;11. DaylightSavings<br>&nbsp;12. SysDiags<br>&nbsp;13. DebugFlags<br>&nbsp;14. NetMenu<br>&nbsp;15. SupportThreads<br>&nbsp;16. MoreSessions


|<p>Optional. Activate host reporting; report all trains.</p>


|-
|<p>HR,ON,#</p>


|<p>Optional. Activate host reporting with Age Threshold. # = Age Threshold in hours (0-9).</p>
[D]ump or [L]oad parameters, e[X]it &gt;<br>
|}


|-  
<p style="text-align: center;">Figure 4.43: Edit Parameters Menu</p>
|<p>HR,####</p>
<p style="text-align: center;">All options may not be available depending on software version</p>
<p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''EP''' command and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. The parameters display in logical groups that can be accessed via the EP menu system.</p>
<p>2)&nbsp; Type the number corresponding to the parameter group you want to edit. Either a list of the parameters within that group or an additional, second-level parameter group displays.</p>
<p>If the option you select on the ''Edit Parameters'' menu displays an additional, second-level parameter group, select the desired group to access to the desired parameter list.</p>
<p>3)&nbsp; To keep the current parameter value, press '''&lt;Enter&gt;''' to move to the next displayed value.</p>
<p>To change a displayed value, enter the new value opposite the current value prompt and press '''&lt;''''''Enter&gt;'''. If the new value entered is out of range or invalid, either an error message displays or the system redisplays the previous value when you reboot.</p>
<p>4)&nbsp; To dump groups of parameters and allow you to capture the information to the log file, select the '''D'''(ump). To load parameter information back to the site, select the '''L'''(oad) option.</p>
<p>Press the '''&lt;ESC&gt; '''key to exit the current level at any time. The &lt;'''X'''&gt; key will also exit the current level. Use the &lt;'''X'''&gt; key with caution and '''ONLY''' when the "'''X'''" option is displayed.</p>
<p>5)&nbsp; Reboot the APU-102 when finished to ensure that the new parameters have taken effect.</p>
<p>For on-screen help, position your cursor at the parameter value and press &lt;'''Ctrl'''&gt;&lt;'''U'''&gt;. To move backward, press &lt;'''Ctrl'''&gt;&lt;'''B'''&gt;.</p>
<p>'''Note: '''The PARM.HLP file must be maintained in your system files; otherwise the parameter help will not be available.</p>
<p>For more information about the parameter editor interface, refer to the ''4.5 Edit'' ''Parameters (EP) Menu''.</p>


|<p>Optional. Requests re-transmission of a particular train.'' ''#### = Sequence number of the requested train.'' ''By entering a sequence number after the HR command, the requested train sequence number is placed in the queue for reporting. This feature will not operate unless host reporting is enabled and the train falls within reporting options.</p>
=== System Cleanup ('''CLEAN''') ===
<p>The System Cleanup command '''(CLEAN)''' is used to eliminate unnecessary files from the APU-102. This command does NOT eliminate train files.</p>
<p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''CLEAN''' command''' '''and press '''&lt;Enter&gt;'''.''' '''The following warning message displays and offers a chance to abort the reboot.</p>
<p><br></p>
<div>


{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
|-  
|-  
|<p>HR,NOW</p>
| style="width: 100%;" | <p>CLEAN - System Cleanup Command.</p>
<p>-------------------------------</p>
<p>This function will remove unnecessary data and log files from the system.</p>
<p>This function does NOT remove any trains!</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Continue? (Y/N)?</p>
|}
</div>
<p>2)&nbsp; Press &lt;'''N'''&gt; to cancel and return to the ''APU102XP:&nbsp; Change'' prompt or press &lt;'''Y'''&gt; to continue.</p>


|<p>Suppresses reporting wait times from consist and maintenance processes and causes immediate transmissions of pending reports. (Version 5.10B2 or later)</p>
=== Backup Parameters '''(BP)''' (5.09+) ===
<p>This function is used to create an on-board backup copy of your system data files. These backup parameters will be automatically reloaded by the software when corrupt parameters files are detected. An initial backup parameter set is created the first time 5.09+ is booted. It is important to create a current backup set when parameters are changed. Verify the parameters are correct and the APU-102 is operational before executing the BP command.</p>
<p>1)&nbsp; Type the BP command and press &lt;ENTER&gt;.</p>
<p>The APU-102 replies with a warning and confirmation to execute.</p>
<p>2)&nbsp; Press &lt;N&gt; to cancel and return to the APU102 Change prompt or press &lt;Y&gt; to Continue.</p>


|}<p><br></p><p>A screen message displays the action taken on the Host Reporting Option. The following example shows a screen display if '''HR''' is entered.</p>
=== Master System Reset (*'''MR''') ===
<p>The Master System Reset ('''MR''') command removes all previously recorded trains from the APU-102.''' '''This process also uses the parameter DiskManager.MaxTrains to determine how many trains will now be maintained by the APU-102, assuming sufficient disk space.''' '''The APU-102 responds to the '''MR''' command with a warning statement and a chance for the user to abort the reset.''' '''The '''Continue? (Y/N) &nbsp;'''response provides additional options to perform when the train files are deleted. Using this command is recommended when an APU-102 is put into service or after a problem has been solved.''' '''It is also useful to free up disk space or to remove old trains from drives that are swapped between units.</p>
<p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''MR '''command and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;.''' '''The Master System Reset warning screen displays.</p>
<p><br></p>
<div>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
|-
| style="width: 100%;" | <p>************Warning!!! Master Reset Initiated**********</p>
<p>**********All Train Information will be flushed********</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Continue? (Y/N)</p>
|}


<br><p><br></p><div><p>APU102XP: Change 1&gt;hr</p>
<p><br></p></div>
<p>*********** Host Reporting Activated ***********</p>
<p>2)&nbsp; Type &lt;'''N'''&gt; to cancel or &lt;'''Y'''&gt; to continue and delete all trains on the unit. <br>The display will move to the following prompt.</p>
<p>APU102XP: Change 1&gt;</p></div><p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<div>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
|-
| style="width: 100%;" | “Reset train sequence number to 1? (Y/N)”
|}


=== 4.4.2.2&nbsp; Edit Message Status (*'''EMS''') ===
<p><br></p></div>
<p>The Edit Message Status ('''EMS''') command allows you to remotely change (enable or disable) the reporting status of messages in maintenance reports. Some critical messages are always logged and cannot be disabled with this function. This function has no effect on the messages appearing in the system status log.</p><p><br></p><div><p>MSG #000: Unit Startup ENABLED</p>
<p>3)&nbsp; Type &lt;'''N'''&gt; to maintain current train sequence numbering or type &lt;'''Y'''&gt; to reset the train sequence to 1. The display will move to the following prompt. (depending on software version)</p>
<p>&lt;E&gt;nable or &lt;D&gt;isable or &lt;ENTER&gt; for current status:</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>MSG #001: User Abort ENABLED</p>
<div>
<p>&lt;E&gt;nable or &lt;D&gt;isable or &lt;ENTER&gt; for current status:</p>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
<p>MSG #002: APUERROR.DAT #2 ENABLED</p>
|-
<p>&lt;E&gt;nable or &lt;D&gt;isable or &lt;ENTER&gt; for current status:</p>
| style="width: 100%;" | Starting sequence number &lt;1-9999&gt;:
<p>MSG #003: APUERROR.DAT #3 ENABLED</p>
|}
<p>&lt;E&gt;nable or &lt;D&gt;isable or &lt;ENTER&gt; for current status:</p>
 
<p>MSG #004: Presence Startup ENABLED</p>
<p><br></p></div>
<p>&lt;E&gt;nable or &lt;D&gt;isable or &lt;ENTER&gt; for current status:</p>
<p>4)&nbsp; Type the sequence number you’d like to start with if not 1 and press &lt;ENTER&gt;. The display will move to the following prompt.</p>
<p>MSG #005: Presence Clear ENABLED</p>
<p>&lt;E&gt;nable or &lt;D&gt;isable or &lt;ENTER&gt; for current status:</p>
<p>msg #006: Process Startup ENABLED</p>
<p>&lt;E&gt;nable or &lt;D&gt;isable or &lt;ENTER&gt; for current status:</p>
<p>MSG #007: APUERROR.DAT #7 ENABLED</p>
<p>&lt;E&gt;nable or &lt;D&gt;isable or &lt;ENTER&gt; for current status:</p>
<p>MSG #008: Dos Error ENABLED</p>
<p>&lt;E&gt;nable or &lt;D&gt;isable or &lt;ENTER&gt; for current status:</p></div><p>Figure 4.33: Edit Message Status</p><p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''EMS''' command and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. The first message displays and requests you to select &lt;'''E'''&gt; to enable, &lt;'''D'''&gt; to disable, or &lt;'''Enter'''&gt; to bypass.</p><p><br></p><div><p>MSG #000: Unit Startup ENABLED</p>
<p>&lt;E&gt;nable or &lt;D&gt;isable or &lt;ENTER&gt; for current status:</p>
<p>MSG #001: User Abort ENABLED</p>
<p>&lt;E&gt;nable or &lt;D&gt;isable or &lt;ENTER&gt; for current status:</p>
<p>MSG #002: APUERROR.DAT #2 DISABLED</p>
<p>&lt;E&gt;nable or &lt;D&gt;isable or &lt;ENTER&gt; for current status: E</p>
<p>Status change to ENABLED</p></div><p>Figure 4.34: Example: MSG #002 Changed to ENABLED</p><p>2)&nbsp; Select &lt;'''E'''&gt;, &lt;'''D'''&gt; or press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. The next message and its associated number display.</p><p>3)&nbsp; Continue enable/disable selections for each message that displays.</p><p>4)&nbsp; Press '''&lt;ESC&gt; '''to exit the '''EMS''' command.</p><p>4.4.2.3&nbsp; Version Maintenance (*'''VM''')&nbsp;(not implemented for version 5.0+)</p><p>Use the Version Maintenance ('''VM''') command to change the software version running on the APU-102. If for some reason the software needs to be changed, the VM command displays the software versions that are available.</p><p><br></p><div><p>Version Maintenance (VM) Menu</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<div>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
|-
| style="width: 100%;" | Reboot after trains are removed? (Y/N)
|}
<p><br></p></div>
<p>5)&nbsp; Type &lt;'''N'''&gt; to delete trains only or type &lt;'''Y'''&gt; to reboot after the trains are removed. The APU will display the following message. &nbsp;</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>#&nbsp; Cur&nbsp; Version&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Run File&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Description</p>
<div>
<p>-&nbsp; ---&nbsp; -------&nbsp; ------------&nbsp; ----------------------------------</p>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
<p>1&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4.20&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; APUV4_20&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; T94 4.12 + Zmodem reporting</p>
|-
<p>2&nbsp;&nbsp; *&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4.23&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; AP423&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; APU102 V4.23 (Base), T94 V4.12</p>
| style="width: 100%;" | **********&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Master Reset In Progress&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; **************
|}
 
<p><br></p></div>
<p>The APU will display the following message if reboot requested.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<div>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
|-
| style="width: 100%;" | REMOTE REBOOT IN PROGRESS…
|}
</div>
<p>Pressing '''&lt;ESC&gt; '''before the reboot prompt will abort the '''MR''' command.</p>
=== Master Reset and Restart (*'''MRR''') 5.2+ ===
<p>Similar to MR, except it also deletes all known log files, reset train sequence number to 1 and restarts the AEI application.</p>
<p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''MRR '''command and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;.''' '''The Master Reset and Restart warning screen displays.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Options</p>
<div>
<p>------------------------------</p>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: #ecf0f1; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
<p>V - Change current version</p>
|-  
<p>C - Clear changes</p>
| style="width: 100%;" | <p><span style="font-size: 14.4px;">!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!</span></p>
<p>D - Delete version</p>
<div><p>!!!!!!!!&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; WARNING&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; !!!!!!!</p><p>!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!</p><p><br></p><p>This function will remove ALL unnecessary files from the unit</p><p>and will automatically restart the app. All trains will be deleted</p><p>and the train sequence number will be reset to 1. Also, all log files</p><p>will be removed.</p><p>Continue? (Y/N)</p></div>
<p>X - Return to previous menu</p>
|}
<p><br></p>
</div>
<p>Enter option:</p></div><p>Figure 4.35: Version Maintenance Screen</p><p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''VM '''command''' '''and press '''&lt;Enter&gt;.''' The Version Maintenance menu displays.</p><p>2)&nbsp; Enter a number that corresponds to the desired version. Within the VM command, all sub-commands are hot-keyed (no need to follow with '''&lt;Enter&gt;''')'''.'''&nbsp; Valid values are:</p><p>V - Change current version.</p><p>C - Clear changes.</p><p>D - Delete version.</p><p>X - Return to previous menu.</p><p>3)&nbsp; You will be presented with choices depending on command selected. Answer as appropriate.</p>
<p><br>2)&nbsp; Type &lt;'''N'''&gt; to cancel or &lt;'''Y'''&gt; to continue.</p>


=== 4.4.2.4&nbsp; System Status Info ('''SYS''') ===
=== System Status Reset ('''*SR''') ===
<p>The System Status Info ('''SYS''') command displays the system status log. This log provides a list of all APU-102 activities. The size of the System Status Info file is limited and can fill quickly if the site is very busy or has a problem. If the site is not very active and everything is working well, the log may contain information for several days. The size of the log file can be specified by the '''SR''' command.</p><p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''SYS '''command to bring up the Process Identification Menu (PID).</p><p><br></p><div><p>PID&nbsp;&nbsp; Process&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; PID&nbsp;&nbsp; Process</p>
<p>Use the System Status Reset ('''*SR''') command to delete the system status information from the APU-102.</p>
<p>-------------------------------------------</p>
 
<p>0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; ALL&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; |&nbsp; 11&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; REPORT1</p>
<br><p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''SR '''command in one of the following formats:</p>
<p>1&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; MAIN&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; |&nbsp; 12&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; REPORT2</p>
<p>2&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; RECORD&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; |&nbsp; 13&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; REPORT3</p>
<p>3&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; FSB&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; |&nbsp; 14&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; REPORT4</p>
<p>4&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; CLOCK&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; |&nbsp; 15&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; MAINT1</p>
<p>5&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; REMOTE&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; |&nbsp; 16&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; MAINT2</p>
<p>6&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; LOCAL&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; |&nbsp; 17&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; MAINT3</p>
<p>7&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; AVI1&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; |&nbsp; 18&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; MAINT4</p>
<p>8&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; AVI2&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; |&nbsp; 19&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; AXLE</p>
<p>9&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; AVI3&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; |&nbsp; 20&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; DISKMGR</p>
<p>10&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; AVI4&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; |</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Enter the appropriate PID Number:</p></div><p>Figure 4.36: Process Identification Menu</p><p>PID menu may vary depending on AEI Application version. Example is version 4.25</p><p><br></p><p>2)&nbsp; Select the type of status log, or PID, to review. Software is under constant development and options may be added or reassigned.</p><p><br></p><p>3)&nbsp; The APU-102 prompts you to select (C)ontinuous or (P)aused display. Type '''C''' or '''P.''' The selected status log displays the available records.</p><p>In the following screen example, the Main process (PID #1) in Paused (P) display was selected:</p><p><br></p><div><p>Comet Electronics</p>
<p>Automatic Equipment Identification System</p>
<p>APU Software Version 4.23</p>
<p>AMTECH Model AI1200 Ver 2.80 SN97514</p>
<p>Wed 06/30/04&nbsp; 16:43:26</p>
<p>Host Reporting: On, All</p>
<p>Last LOGON: Wed 06/30/04&nbsp; 16:37:45</p>
<p>05-16-04 10:29:41 MAIN&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0000 Clock Resync&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; ASCII Data</p>
<p>Time before sync Sun May 16 10:29:39 2004</p>
<p>05-16-04 10:29:41 MAIN&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0001 Unit Startup&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; ASCII Data</p>
<p>&nbsp;Halli&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; APUV4_20 03-03-1998 04:20:00</p>
<p>05-16-04 10:36:27 MAIN&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0001 Unit Startup&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; ASCII Data</p>
<p>Halli:AP43 09-02-1998 04:23:00</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp; End of System Status</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; END</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>APU102XP: Change 1&gt;</p></div><p>Figure 4.37: System Status Info Screen</p><p>It is possible that the status log will not have any records for the selection made. The APU-102 then displays the header information and the ''END'' statement.</p>


=== 4.4.2.5&nbsp; Archived System Status Info ('''ASYS''') Version 5.2+ ===
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
<p>'''Still under development to SQLite database and command structure is likely to change.'''</p><p>The Archived System Status Info ('''ASYS''') command is like the standard SYS log, but for archived files. You will be prompted for PID and starting/ending date and times. This report provides a list of all APU-102 activities for the specified PID and date/time range.</p><p><br></p><div><p>PID&nbsp; Process&nbsp; PID&nbsp; Process&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; PID Process&nbsp;&nbsp; PID Process</p>
|-  
<p>-------------------------------------------------------</p>
| <p>Command Format</p>
<p>&nbsp;0&nbsp;&nbsp; ALL&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; | 24&nbsp; ERROR&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; | 81&nbsp; XTRKSERV |</p>
| <p>Description</p>
<p>&nbsp;1&nbsp;&nbsp; MAIN&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; | 25&nbsp; GEHBD&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; | 82&nbsp; XTRKMON&nbsp; |</p>
|-
<p>&nbsp;2&nbsp;&nbsp; RECORD&nbsp; | 26&nbsp; ETHOBS&nbsp;&nbsp; |&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; |</p>
| <p>SR</p>
<p>&nbsp;3&nbsp;&nbsp; FSB&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; | 27&nbsp; ODM&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; |&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; |</p>
| <p>Required. Command code.</p>
<p>&nbsp;4&nbsp;&nbsp; CLOCK&nbsp;&nbsp; | 28&nbsp; IDM&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; |&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; |</p>
|-
<p>&nbsp;5&nbsp;&nbsp; REMOTE&nbsp; | 29&nbsp; TALKER&nbsp;&nbsp; |&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; |</p>
| <p>SR, 2 -15</p>
<p>&nbsp;6&nbsp;&nbsp; LOCAL&nbsp;&nbsp; | 30&nbsp; NTP&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; | 101 REPORT1&nbsp; | 111 MAINT1</p>
| <p>Optional. Specifies the new size of the system status log file in Kbytes. Default size = 5 Kbytes.</p>
<p>&nbsp;7&nbsp;&nbsp; AVI1&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; | 31-36 TELNET | 102 REPORT2&nbsp; | 112 MAINT2</p>
|}<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;8&nbsp;&nbsp; AVI2&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; | 41-50 DETECT | 103 REPORT3&nbsp; | 113 MAINT3</p>
<div>&nbsp;</div>
<p>&nbsp;9&nbsp;&nbsp; AVI3&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; | 51-60 XTRACK | 104 REPORT4&nbsp; | 114 MAINT4</p>
 
<p>&nbsp;10&nbsp; AVI4&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; | 61-70 NETMDM | 105 REPORT5&nbsp; | 115 MAINT5</p>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
<p>&nbsp;19&nbsp; AXLE&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; | 71&nbsp; XTPMON&nbsp;&nbsp; | 106 REPORT6&nbsp; | 116 MAINT6</p>
|-
<p>&nbsp;20&nbsp; DISKMGR | 72&nbsp; XTP&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; | 107 REPORT7&nbsp; | 117 MAINT7</p>
| style="width: 100%;" | <div><p>APU102XP: Change 1&gt;sr 10</p></div>
<p>&nbsp;21&nbsp; SCALE&nbsp;&nbsp; | 73-76 COMBOM | 108 REPORT8&nbsp; | 118 MAINT8</p>
<p>&nbsp;22&nbsp; WDOG&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; | 77&nbsp; CAH&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; | 109 REPORT9&nbsp; | 111 MAINT9</p>
<p>&nbsp;23&nbsp; ITC&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; | 78&nbsp; ACQPROC&nbsp; | 110 REPORT10 | 120 MAINT10</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Enter the appropriate PID Number: 2</p>
<p>*******Warning!!!! System Status Reset Initiated*******</p>
<p>Display entire archive contents? (if Y, bypasses Date/Time entries)</p>
<p>********All Status Information will be flushed*********</p>
<p>Beginning date and time of archive:</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Enter New Date mm/dd/yyyy &gt;01/01/2012</p>
<p>Continue? (Y/N)</p>
<p>Enter New Time hh:mm:ss&nbsp;&nbsp; &gt;00:00</p>
|}
<p>Ending date and time of archive:</p>
 
<p>Enter New Date mm/dd/yyyy &gt;01/02/2012</p>
<p style="text-align: center;" >&nbsp;<span style="text-align: center; font-size: 14.4px;">Figure 4.44: System Status Reset Warning Screen</span></p><p>In the above example, a reset to a 10-kilobyte system status file has been selected. Resetting the system status log is recommended when an APU-102 is put into service or after a problem has been solved.''' '''This removes old information that might be confusing.</p>
<p>Enter New Time hh:mm:ss&nbsp;&nbsp; &gt;23:59</p>
<p>2)&nbsp; Type &lt;'''Y'''&gt; to continue with the reset or &lt;'''N'''&gt; to cancel and return to the ''APU102XP: &nbsp;Change ''prompt.</p>
<p>(C)ontinuous or (P)aused display? :</p></div><p>Figure 4.38: Process Identification Menu PID menu may vary depending on AEI Application version. Example is version 5.2+</p>
 
=== Reset Maintenance Sequence ('''RMS''') ===
<p>The Reset Maintenance Sequence ('''RMS''') command resets the maintenance report sequence number back to one for the current session.''' '''Resetting the maintenance report sequence number is recommended when an APU-102 is put into service.''' '''This removes old information that might be confusing.</p>
<p>1)&nbsp; Type '''RMS''' and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;.''' '''The following message displays:</p>
<div>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
|
<p>APU102XP: Change 1&gt;rms<br>Reset maintenance report sequence number to 1?&nbsp; (Y.N)</p>
|}


<br>
</div>
=== 4.4.2.6&nbsp; Directory Listing (DIR) ===
<p>2)&nbsp; Select '''Y'''(es) or '''N'''(or).''' '''The ''APU102XP: &nbsp;Change&gt;'' prompt redisplays.</p>
<p>The Directory Listing ('''DIR''') command displays the file directory on the APU-102 with wildcard support.</p><p>Type the '''DIR '''command in the following format:</p><p><br></p>


{|
=== Reboot Unit '''(*R)''' ===
|-
<p>The Reboot Unit (R) command is tied to the reset line of the APU-102. When executed, the computer in the APU-102 restarts and the boot process begins. (Version 5.0+ closes files and shuts down Windows XP before resetting the computer.) All the external hardware and software is reinitialized. This is very helpful in the case of an inadvertent lock up of the reader board or I/O card, however the R command can be a very detrimental command, especially on 486 class APUs.''' '''Once the reboot is initiated, ''all'' acquisition, ''all'' communications with the APU-102, local or remote, will be lost.''' '''To prevent losing train data, avoid the reboot command while a train is passing the site.''' '''While a train is recording, a message is displayed with the command prompt.</p>
|<p>Command Format</p>
<div>


|<p>Description</p>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: #ecf0f1; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
| **********Train Recording (24 axles)**********
|}


|-  
<p><br></p></div>
|<p>DIR</p>
<p>A train must completely finish recording and appear in the train directory in order to be saved.''' '''Since the APU-102 cannot acquire data until the startup sequence is complete, it is impossible to generate an accurate consist from a train entering the site during that time.</p>
<p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''R''' command''' '''and press '''&lt;Enter&gt;'''.''' '''The following warning message displays and offers a chance to abort the reboot.</p>


|<p>Required. Command code will display the entire file directory for all files.</p>


|-  
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: #ecf0f1; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
|<p>DIR ''filespec''</p>
| WARNING: This function will cause the remote unit to reboot. Continue (Y.N)?
|}


|<p>Optional. Command code and the desired file specification. Displays the file directory specified by filespec.</p>
<div><p><br></p></div>
<p>2)&nbsp; Press &lt;'''N'''&gt; to cancel and return to the ''APU102XP: &nbsp;Change'' prompt or press &lt;'''Y'''&gt; to continue and reboot the APU-102.</p>
<p><br></p>


{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
|-  
|-  
|<p>DIR ''filespec /p''</p><p><br></p>
| style="width: 68.625px;" |  <p style="text-align: center;" >NOTE</p>
| style="width: 850.375px;" |  <p>Version 5.09+ has additional reboot options.</p>
<p>R,M reboots the APU directly to ROMSHELL mode (or NetMRS if applicable).</p>
<p>R,F performs a “fast” reboot. It shuts down and restarts the AEI application only. This option only takes a few seconds and is helpful when parameters have been changed that require a reboot. The computer P.O.S.T is not performed, nor are many “housekeeping” functions, such as code loading.</p>
<p>R,T (5.2+) will execute a full reboot after the next train clears.</p>
<p>R,C (5.2+, LX-800 processor only)</p>
<p>The LX-800 processor uses a protected partition for the embedded operating system. Some parameter changes made are kept on the protected partition. The R,C command was added to update these changes to the protected partition. You will be prompted when the R,C reboot is necessary.</p>
<p><br></p>
|}<p><br></p>
<br>


|<p>Optional. Displays the directory specified by filespec in paused mode. Press any key to continue through the listing.</p>
=== Watchdog Test (*'''WT''') ===
<p>The Watchdog Test ('''WT''') command tests the operation of the unit's watchdog timer circuit.''' '''The watchdog thread is placed in a "HALT" state (simulating a failure).''' '''If the watchdog circuit is operating properly, the unit restarts in less than four minutes (before “Seconds to failure” reaches .0).</p>
<p><br></p>


|}<p><br></p><p>The directory listing displays:</p><p><br></p><div><p>'''&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &lt;'''DIR&gt;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 96-01-17&nbsp; 12:33</p>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: #ecf0f1; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
<p>'''&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &lt;'''DIR&gt;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 96-01-17&nbsp; 12:33</p>
|
<p>DM144S&nbsp; INI&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 441&nbsp;&nbsp; 95-06-26&nbsp; 11:39</p>
<p>---------------------------------------</p>
<p>SPT94&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; CFG&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 741&nbsp; 95-04-19&nbsp; 16:33</p>
<p>!! Watchdog Circuit Test in Progress !!</p>
<p>APUV4_14 EXE&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 157440&nbsp; 95-11-03&nbsp;&nbsp; 8:40</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>TERMINAL ACC&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 125&nbsp; 95-05-10&nbsp; 13:14</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Press any key to stop test...</p>
<p>TERMSTAT ACC&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 125&nbsp; 95-05-10&nbsp;&nbsp; 8:55</p>
<p>---------------------------------------</p>
<p>SPHOST&nbsp;&nbsp; ACC&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 167&nbsp; 94-03-22&nbsp; 13:19</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>CRMAINT&nbsp; ACC&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 162&nbsp; 94-08-08&nbsp; 10:45</p>
<p>Test is successful if the APU reboots</p>
<p>CPMAINT&nbsp; ACC&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 361&nbsp; 95-08-07&nbsp; 15:19</p>
<p>before "Seconds to failure" reaches 0.</p>
<p>ATSRPRT&nbsp; CFG&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 742&nbsp; 95-04-19&nbsp; 16:35</p>
<p>The counter will stop when rebooting.</p>
<p>UP&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; TLR&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 2&nbsp; 95-04-21&nbsp;&nbsp; 8:28</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>UPT94&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; CFG&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 740&nbsp; 95-06-30&nbsp;&nbsp; 7:53</p>
<p>Seconds to failure : 078....</p>
<p>CRT94&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; CFG&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 741&nbsp; 95-04-19&nbsp; 16:33</p>
|}
<p>BNMAINT&nbsp; ACC&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 223&nbsp; 95-05-10&nbsp;&nbsp; 8:56</p>
<p>MAINTERM ACC&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 125&nbsp; 95-05-10&nbsp;&nbsp; 8:55</p>
<p>KCSFEP&nbsp;&nbsp; ACC&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 243&nbsp; 94-08-08&nbsp; 10:43</p>
<p>MCM2400&nbsp; INI&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 584&nbsp; 93-11-01&nbsp; 13:22</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 132 file(s)&nbsp; 261750 bytes&nbsp; 725504 bytes free</p></div><p>Figure 4.39: Directory Listing Screen (excerpt)</p><p>The filespec may contain asterisk &lt;*&gt; or question mark &lt;'''?'''&gt; wildcard characters. Press '''&lt;ESC&gt; '''twice to quit the directory listing. Typing &lt;'''/p'''&gt; after the command displays the directory listing in paused mode. The size and timestamp of each file are displayed. At the end of each directory listing is a summary including the number of files in the listing, the total number of bytes in the files listed and the bytes available on the disk.</p>


<br><p><br></p>
<div></div>
<p style="text-align: center;" >Figure 4.45: Watchdog Test Screen</p>
<p>1)&nbsp; To begin the test, type the '''WT '''command and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;.</p>
<p>2)&nbsp; To stop the test before it is completed, press any key. The message “Test aborted by user” displays.</p>


=== 4.4.2.7&nbsp; Type a File ('''TYPE''') ===
=== Zmodem Send File(s) ('''ZSEND''') ===
<p>The Type a File ('''TYPE''') command displays the contents of specific files on the APU-102. Large files may scroll off the screen.</p><p><br></p><div><p>APU102XP: Change 1&gt;type modem.ini</p>
<p>The Zmodem Send File(s) ('''ZSEND''') command places the APU-102 in Zmodem send mode. Zmodem can send multiple files.</p>
<p>ATZS0=0</p>
<p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''ZSEND '''command in the following format:</p>
<p>ATE0</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>ATV0</p>
<p>AT&C1</p>
<p>AT&D2</p>
<p>AT\N3</p>
<p>ATS7=60</p>
<p>ATX1</p>
<p>ATS0=1</p></div><p>Figure 4.40: Type a File Screen</p><p>1)&nbsp; Enter the '''TYPE''' command in the following format:</p><p><br></p>


{|
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; height: 112px; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
|-  
|- style="height: 28px;"
|<p>Command Format</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 132.859px;" | <p>Command Format</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 884.969px;" | <p>Description</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 132.859px;" | <p>ZSEND</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 884.969px;" | <p>Required. Command code.</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 132.859px;" | <p>Path</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 884.969px;" | <p>Optional. The file path must be specified if directory location of the file to be transferred is not in the default directory.</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 132.859px;" | <p>Filename for transfer</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 884.969px;" | <p>Required. The file specification of the APU-102 file (or files) you want to send using Zmodem. Use wildcards (* or ?) to upload multiple files.</p>
|}<p>'''Note:''' The path option is not available on application versions prior to 5.0. Files are sent from the default path only.</p>
<p>2)&nbsp; Refer to your communications software package for instructions on receiving the file. Most programs will auto-receive, but have differing options when receiving a duplicate file. Insure your program does not blindly “resume” when receiving a duplicate file. After file has been sent, the message “''N'' file(s) sent successfully” displays (where ''N'' = number of files).</p>
 
=== Xmodem Send File ('''XSEND''') ===
<p>The Xmodem Send File ('''XSEND''') command transfers files from the APU-102 using the Xmodem protocol. When the APU-102 is in send mode, you can initiate a file transfer or a file download using the Xmodem protocol.</p>


|<p>Description</p>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: #ecf0f1; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
|
<p>File length: 125</p>
<p>Ready to send</p>
|}
<p style="text-align: center;" >Figure 4.46: Xmodem Send File Screen</p>
<p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''XSEND '''command in the following format:</p>
<p><br></p>


{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
|-  
|-  
|<p>TYPE</p>
| <p>Command Format</p>
| <p>Description</p>
|-
| <p>XSEND</p>
| <p>Required. Command code.</p>
|-
| <p>Path</p>
| <p>Optional. The file path must be specified if directory location of the file to be transferred is not in the default directory.</p>
|-
| <p>Filename for transfer</p>
| <p>Required. The name of the APU-102 file you want to transfer in Xmodem send mode.</p>
|}<p><br></p>
<p>2)&nbsp; The message “Ready to send” displays. Refer to your communications software package for instructions on receiving the file.</p>
<p>If no action is taken to send the file, an XSEND error message “Local timeout” displays and you are returned to the ''APU102XP: &nbsp;Change'' prompt.</p>


|<p>Required. Command code.</p>
=== Xmodem1K Send File ('''XSEND1K''') ===
<p>The Xmodem1K Send File command allows files to be transferred from the APU-102 using the Xmodem1K protocol. When the APU-102 is in send mode, you can initiate a file transfer or a file download using the Xmodem1K protocol.</p>
<p><br></p>


|-  
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: #ecf0f1; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
|<p>Filename for contents display</p>
|
<p>File length: 741</p>
<p>Ready to send</p>
|}


|<p>Required. The name of the APU-102 file for which you want to display contents.</p>
<p style="text-align: center;" >Figure 4.47: Xmodem1K Send File Screen</p>


|}<p><br></p><p>2)&nbsp; For more convenient viewing of larger files, you may capture the output to a log file or download with ZSEND.</p>
<br><p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''XSEND1K '''command in the following format:</p>
<p><br></p>


=== 4.4.2.8&nbsp; Zmodem Receive File(s)'' ''('''ZREC''') ===
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
<p>The Zmodem Receive File(s) ('''ZREC''') command places the APU-102 in Zmodem receive mode. Zmodem can receive multiple files.</p><p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''ZREC '''command in the following format:</p><p><br></p>
|-
 
<p>Command Format</p>
{|
<p>Description</p>
|-
|  <p>XSEND1K</p>
<p>Required. Command code.</p>
|-  
|-  
|<p>Command Format</p>
| <p>Path</p>
 
| <p>Optional. The file path must be specified if directory location of the file to be transferred is not in the default directory.</p>
|<p>Description</p>
 
|-  
|-  
|<p>ZREC</p>
| <p>Filename for transfer</p>
|  <p>Required. The name of the APU-102 file you want to transfer in Xmodem1K send mode.</p>
|}<p>2)&nbsp; Refer to your communications software package for instructions on receiving the file.</p>
<p>If no action is taken to send the file, an XSEND error message “Local timeout” displays and you are returned to the ''APU102XP: &nbsp;Change'' prompt.</p>


|<p>Required. Command code.</p>
=== Local Ethernet File Receive ('''ZGET''') ===
<p>This command is used to transfer a single file between units residing on the same network. This similar to the ZRec function, except that it is only available to perform network transfers. This command ALWAYS gets the entire file from the beginning (ZGetR can be used to resume transfers that were interrupted).</p>
<p>Type the '''ZGET '''command in the following format:</p>
<p><br></p>


|-  
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; height: 163px; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
|<p>Path</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 129.016px;" | <p>Command Format</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 1068.98px;" | <p>Description</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 129.016px;" | <p>ZGET</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 1068.98px;" | <p>Required. Command code.</p>
|- style="height: 51px;"
| style="height: 51px; width: 129.016px;" | <p>Filename for transfer</p>
| style="height: 51px; width: 1068.98px;" | <p>Required. The file specification of the APU-102 file get from another unit on the local network. Wildcards are not permitted. Use caution with this command as it will overwrite an existing destination file.</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 129.016px;" | <p>IPAddressOrURL</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 1068.98px;" | <p>Required. Network address of source computer.</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 129.016px;" | <p>IPPort</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 1068.98px;" | <p>Optional. IP Port on the destination computer. Defaults to 23 on the APU.</p>
|}<p><br></p>


|<p>Optional. The file path must be specified if directory location of the file to be received is not in the default directory.</p>
=== Local Ethernet File Receive Resume ('''ZGETR''') ===
<p>This command can be used to resume a ZGET file transfer that was interrupted.</p>
<p>'''Note:''' The resume is done blindly, with no checks to ensure that the existing file has the same contents (up to the point of interruption) as the partial file. This means that if the file is a different version, the new file may be corrupted. Only use ZGETR on file transfers that you know were previously interrupted.</p>
<p>Type the '''ZGETR '''command in the following format:</p>
<p><br></p>


{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
|-  
|-  
|
| <p>Command Format</p>
<br>
| <p>Description</p>
|
|-
<br>
| <p>ZGETR</p>
|
| <p>Required. Command code.</p>
<br>
|-
|}<p>'''Note:''' The path option is not available on application versions prior to 5.0. Files are received into the default path only.</p><p>The message “Ready to receive” displays.</p><p>2)&nbsp; Once the APU-102 is in the receive mode, use the Zmodem protocol on your communications program to initiate a file transfer or a file upload. Use wildcards (* or ?) to upload multiple files. Refer to your communications software package for instructions on sending the file.</p><p>After file is received, the message “''N'' file(s) received successfully” displays. (''N'' representing the number of files.)</p><p>If there are errors in the modem’s transmission, one or all of the following messages may display (where ''N'' represents the number of files).</p><p><br></p>
| <p>Filename for transfer</p>
 
| <p>Required. The file specification of the APU-102 file get from another unit on the local network. Wildcards are not permitted. Use caution with this command as it may overwrite or corrupt an existing destination file. (see note above).</p>
{|
|-
| <p>IPAddressOrURL</p>
| <p>Required. Network address of source computer.</p>
|-  
|-  
|<p>N port overrun errors</p>
| <p>IPPort</p>
| <p>Optional. IP Port on the destination computer. Defaults to 23 on the APU.</p>
|}


|<p>Serial port has at least one overrun.</p>
=== Packet Internet Groper ('''PING)'''''' ''' ===
<p>This command works just like the basic Windows command line PING command.</p>
<p><br></p>


{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
|-  
|-  
|<p>N byte framing errors</p>
| <p>Command Format</p>
 
| <p>Description</p>
|<p>Serial port has at least one framing error.</p>
 
|-  
|-  
|<p>N parity errors</p>
| <p>PING</p>
 
| <p>Required. Command code.</p>
|<p>Serial port has at least one parity error.</p>
|-
| <p>IPAddressOrURL</p>
| <p>Required. Network address of destination computer. (192.168.0.12 in example below)</p>
|}<p><br></p>
<div>&nbsp;</div>
 
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto; height: 23px;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
|- style="height: 23px;"
| style="width: 100%; height: 23px;" | <div><p>ping&nbsp; 192.168.0.12 &lt; y.dat 1&gt; dosshell.txt 2&gt; dosshll2.txt</p></div>
<p><br></p>
<p>Pinging 192.168.0.12 with 32 bytes of data:</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Reply from 192.168.0.12: bytes=32 time=1ms TTL=128</p>
<p>Reply from 192.168.0.12: bytes=32 time&lt;1ms TTL=128</p>
<p>Reply from 192.168.0.12: bytes=32 time&lt;1ms TTL=128</p>
<p>Reply from 192.168.0.12: bytes=32 time&lt;1ms TTL=128</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Ping statistics for 192.168.0.12:</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss),</p>
<p>Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds:</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 1ms, Average = 0ms</p>
|}
<p style="text-align: center;" >Figure 4.48: Sample Ping Response Screen</p>
<p>For advanced options and switches, run PING under the SHELL command.</p>


|}<p><br></p><p>These errors are normal and the Zmodem protocol is designed to correct for them. If they become excessive, you may need to repair either the serial port or the modem.</p>
<br>


=== 4.4.2.9&nbsp; Zmodem Receive Resume ('''ZRECR''') ===
=== Network Time Protocol ('''NTP)''' '''&nbsp;''' ===
<p>The Zmodem Receive Resume ('''ZRECR''') command places the APU-102 in Zmodem receive restart mode to resume a failed file transfer. Zmodem can receive multiple files. If a file already exists on the unit, Zmodem resumes transfer of the existing file at the point where the previous transfer was interrupted. With '''ZRECR''', previously interrupted transmissions can continue, which saves time.</p><p>'''Note:''' The resume is done blindly, with no checks to ensure that the existing file has the same contents (up to the point of interruption) as the sent file. This means that if the file is a different version, the new file may be corrupted. Only use ZRECR on file transfers that you know were previously interrupted.</p><p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''ZRECR '''command in the following format:</p><p><br></p>
<p>This command initiates a time sync request with a Network Time Protocol server (if configured in system parameters).</p><p><br></p>


{|
=== Reassociate Trains ('''RA)''' ===
|-
<p>Reassociate Trains is used in Distributed Processing Systems. The RA command reassociates all local trains to remote trains.</p><p><br></p><p>Refer to the ''APU103 Installation & Operation Manual'''' ''for additional information.</p>
|<p>Command Format</p>


|<p>Description</p>
=== Command Shell '''(SHELL)''' ===
<h5 class="mwt-heading" >SHELL ''command argument switches''</h5>
<p>Any commands entered after the SHELL command will be sent to DOS command shell and treated as a DOS command. Batch files and DOS programs resident on the APU-102 can be executed as well as commands embedded in the DOS command interpreter, such as COPY, ECHO, REN, DIR (with switches), etc.</p>
<p><br></p>


{| style="border-collapse: collapse;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
|-  
|-  
|<p>ZRECR</p>
| style="width: 63.8594px;" | <p style="text-align: center;" >Caution</p>
| style="width: 1127.14px;" | <p>Use extreme caution with the SHELL command. Any command issued must NOT require any user intervention to complete the command or the APU-102 will be inaccessible via the current port until it is rebooted (for example, “Overwrite file Y/N?”). Some commands could even hang the AEI application in a manner that prevents a watchdog recovery. Shell commands should only be used by experienced users. In version 5.2, a timeout function was added to exit a hung Shell command.</p>
|}<p><br></p>
<p>Example:</p>
<p>SHELL COPY SPECIAL.BAT SPECIAL.BAK /y</p>


|<p>Required. Command code.</p>
=== Main Menu Help ('''MAIN?''') ===
<p>Main Menu commands (and help) are accessible from the Supervisor menu.</p><p>This command displays the Main Menu (or System Menu). All Main Menu functions can be executed from the Supervisory level.</p>


|-
=== Supervisory Help Screen ('''?''') ===
|<p>Path</p>
<p>Type '''?''' to re-display the current menu screen.</p>


|<p>Optional. The fill path must be specified if directory location of the file to be received is not in the default directory.</p>
==  Additional commands ==
<p><br></p>


|}<p>'''Note:''' The path option is not available on application versions prior to 5.0. Files are received into the default path only.</p><p>The message “Ready to receive” displays.</p><p>2)&nbsp; Once the APU-102 is in the receive mode, use the Zmodem protocol on your communications program to initiate a file transfer or a file upload. Use wildcards (* or ?) to upload multiple files. Refer to your communications software package for instructions on sending the file.</p><p>After file is received, the message “''N'' file(s) received successfully” displays. (''N'' representing the number of files.)</p><p>If there are errors in the modem’s transmission, one or all of the following messages may display (where ''N'' represents the number of files).</p><p><br></p>
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; height: 28px; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 57px;" | <p style="text-align: center;">Caution</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 607px;" | <p>For skilled administrators only. Improper use of these commands can make APU-102 inoperable.</p>
|}<p><br></p>
=== Delete File(s) ('''REMOVE''') &nbsp; ===
<p>Used to manually delete files. Works similar to DOS DEL command. You will be prompted for confirmation to execute the file deletion. After command execution, a summary of deleted files displays.</p>
<p><br></p>


{|
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto; width: 508px;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
|-  
|-  
|<p>N port overrun errors</p>
| style="width: 120.438px;" |    <p>Command Format</p>
 
| style="width: 376.562px;" |    <p>Description</p>
|<p>Serial port has at least one overrun.</p>
 
|-  
|-  
|<p>N byte framing errors</p>
| style="width: 120.438px;" |    <p>REMOVE</p>
 
| style="width: 376.562px;" |    <p>Required. Command.</p>
|<p>Serial port has at least one framing error.</p>
 
|-  
|-  
|<p>N parity errors</p>
| style="width: 120.438px;" |    <p>FILENAME.EXT</p>
| style="width: 376.562px;" |    <p>Required. File(s) to delete.</p>
<p>Must specify both basefile name and extension. <br>Wildcards ? and * allowed</p>
|}


|<p>Serial port has at least one parity error.</p>
=== External Temperature Probe Commands ===
<p>Used when external Rail Temperature Probe is properly installed and configured.</p>
<p>Force TempProbe Reading ('''XTPNOW)'''</p>
<p>Display Last TempProbe Reading''' (''''''XTPDEBUG)'''</p>


|}<p><br></p><p>These errors are normal and the Zmodem protocol is designed to correct for them. If they become excessive, you may need to repair either the serial port or the modem.</p>
=== Acquisition Process Info''' (''''''ACQ''')&nbsp; ===
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: #ecf0f1; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
|
<p>ACQ Report is not running</p>
<p>Next ACQ sequence will be 1013</p>
|}


=== 4.4.2.10&nbsp; Xmodem Receive File ('''XREC''') ===
<div>
<p>The Xmodem Receive File ('''XREC''') command allows files to be transferred to the APU-102 using the Xmodem protocol.</p><p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''XREC '''command in the following format:</p><p><br></p>
</div>


{|
=== Cubic Acoustic History''' (''''''CAHHISTORY)''' ===
|-
===  Modem Stats''' (''''''MDMS''') ===
|<p>Command Format</p>
<p>Display modem statistics including reset, initialization, connection, and disconnection stats.</p>


|<p>Description</p>
<br>
===  Reset Modem Stats (MDMS,R) ===
<p>Resets the Modem Statistic file.</p>


|-
===  Site Notepad (NOTE) 5.2+ ===
|<p>XREC</p>
<p>Used to manage banner messages that appear during the login process.</p>
<p>Usage: NOTE ''Option Argument''</p>


|<p>Required. Command code. Places the APU-102 in Xmodem receive mode.</p>
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; height: 197px;"
 
|- style="height: 28px;"
|-  
| style="height: 28px; width: 262px;" |    <p>Option [Argument]:</p>
|<p>Path</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 296.953px;" |    <p><br></p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 262px;" |    <p>&nbsp; A [message]&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 296.953px;" |    <p>&nbsp;Add a message</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 262px;" |    <p>&nbsp; D [message number]&nbsp;</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 296.953px;" |    <p>&nbsp;Delete message number</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 262px;" |    <p>&nbsp; C&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 296.953px;" |    <p>&nbsp;Clear all messages</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 262px;" |    <p>&nbsp; P&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 296.953px;" |    <p>&nbsp;Print all messages</p>
|- style="height: 57px;"
| style="height: 57px; width: 262px;" |    <p>&nbsp; L&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</p>
| style="height: 57px; width: 296.953px;" |    <p>&nbsp;Toggle whether to display notes at user login</p>
<p><br></p>
|}<div>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: #ecf0f1; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
|
<div><p>COMET ELECTRONICS</p></div>
<p>Automatic Equipment Identification System</p>
<p>APU Software Version: 5.2.0.4</p>
<p>CPU Type: LPMTX</p>
<p>AMTECH Model AI1200 Ver 2.90 SN41656</p>
<p>Reader #1 is not in current configuration</p>
<p>Thu 02/11/2015&nbsp;&nbsp; 08:59:03</p>
<p>Host Reporting: On, All</p>
<p>Last LOGON: Wed 02/10/15&nbsp;&nbsp; 15:06:30</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>'''================== Site Notes ==================='''</p>
<p>'''1)&nbsp; Updated to 5.2.0.4 12/11/2014 @ 11:22'''</p>
<p>'''================================================='''</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>USID:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; COMET00001</p>
<p>Site Name:&nbsp; TEST UNIT</p>
<p>Display help command - "?"</p>
<p>APU102XP:Main 1&gt;</p>
|}
</div>
<p style="text-align: center;" >Sample login screen with Note shown.</p>


|<p>Optional The file path must be specified if directory location of the file to be received is not in the default directory.</p>
=== Set debug flags (SET) ===
<p>Communications Logging</p>
<p>&nbsp; '''SET LOGCOM 1''' Turns com logging on</p>
<p>&nbsp; '''SET LOGCOM 0''' Turns com logging off</p>
<p>All communications are logged to text files, outbound communications are logged to [port file].TX, inbound communications are logged to [port file].RX</p>
<p>'''''WARNING:'''''&nbsp; These log files are not managed by the Disk Manager and will continue to grow in size indefinitely!!! DO NOT leave logging active for an extended period of time!!!</p>
<p>Manually delete the *.TX and *.RX files when done.</p>
<p>Telnet Escape Characters enable/disable</p>
<p>&nbsp; '''SET TELNET 1''' Turns on escape characters</p>
<p>&nbsp; '''SET TELNET 0''' Turns off escape characters</p>


|-
=== User Access Account Management ('''USER''') 5.2+ ===
|<p>Filename</p>
<p>User level access control. Higher security''' '''than standard 2 level APU security.</p>
<p>Usage:''' User [option] [parameters]'''</p>
<p>Options [Parameters]</p>
<p>add&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; [username] [password]</p>
<p>remove&nbsp;&nbsp; [username]</p>
<p>show</p>
<p>Note: To change the password of an existing user, simply add the user again, but with the new password.</p>
<p>'''&nbsp;'''</p>


|<p>Required. The filename that the transferred file assumes.</p>
=== View Channel Info''' (''''''VCI)''' ===
<p>Lists all currently used ports and displays diagnostic data.</p>
<div>


|}<p><br></p><p>The message “Ready to receive”''' '''displays.</p><p>2)&nbsp; Once the APU-102 is in the receive mode, use the Xmodem protocol to initiate a file transfer or a file upload.</p><p>3)&nbsp; Refer to your communications software package for instructions on sending the file.</p><p><br></p>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 100%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
|-
| style="width: 100%;" | <p><br></p>
<div><p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; --- Locked --- -Depacket-</p>
<p>#&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Name&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; PID&nbsp;&nbsp; Dev&nbsp; Port&nbsp; Baud Ctrl Stat #S&nbsp;&nbsp; By&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Sec&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Run? State</p>
<p>-- ----------- ----- ----- ----- ---- ---- ---- --- ----- -------- ---- -----</p>
<p>0&nbsp; $REMPORT&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp; COMN&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 1 6&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0002 0020&nbsp;&nbsp; 3&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Y&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4</p>
<p>1&nbsp; $LOCPORT&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp; COMN&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 2 3&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0003 0005&nbsp;&nbsp; 2&nbsp;&nbsp; 05&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0000&nbsp;&nbsp; Y&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4</p>
<p>2&nbsp; ETHERNET01&nbsp;&nbsp; 30&nbsp;&nbsp; TCPIP&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 23 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0002 0000&nbsp;&nbsp; 1&nbsp;&nbsp; 30&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0000&nbsp;&nbsp; Y&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4</p>
<p>3&nbsp; ETHERNET02&nbsp;&nbsp; 31&nbsp;&nbsp; TCPIP&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 23 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0002 0001&nbsp;&nbsp; 1&nbsp;&nbsp; 31&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0742&nbsp;&nbsp; Y&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4</p>
<p>12 AVI1PORT&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 1&nbsp;&nbsp; COMN&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4 4&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0003 0001&nbsp;&nbsp; 1&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Y&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4</p></div>
|}
</div>
<p style="text-align: center;" >Sample VCI</p>
<p><br></p>


<br>
=== XTrack Log''' (''''''XTL)''' – Currently not available (Comet Engineering use only). ===
=== 4.4.2.11&nbsp; Local Ethernet File Transmit ('''ZPUT''') &nbsp; ===
=== Watchdog Monitor Stats''' (''''''WDM)''' ===
<p>This command is used to transfer a single file between units residing on the same network. This similar to the ZSend function, except that it is only available to perform network transfers. This command ALWAYS send the entire file from the beginning (ZPutR can be used to resume transfers that were interrupted).</p><p>Type the '''ZPUT '''command in the following format:</p><p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Displays stats for the software watchdog.</p>


{|
<div>
|-  
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
|<p>Command Format</p>
|-
| style="width: 100%;" | <p><br></p>
<div><p>PID&nbsp; Timeout&nbsp;&nbsp; Low Mark</p>
<p>===&nbsp; ========&nbsp; ========</p>
<p>&nbsp;23&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 60000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 45000</p>
<p>&nbsp; 2&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 30000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 25000</p>
<p>100&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 300000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 295000</p>
<p>114&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 300000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 295000</p>
<p>113&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 300000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 121000</p>
<p>112&nbsp; &nbsp;&nbsp;300000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 121000</p>
<p>111&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 300000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 295000</p>
<p>110&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 300000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 295000</p>
<p>104&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 300000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 112000</p>
<p>103&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 300000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 112000</p>
<p>102&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 300000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 112000</p>
<p>101&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 300000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 112000</p>
<p>&nbsp; 1&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 300000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 295000</p></div>
|}
</div>
<p style="text-align: center;" >Sample WDM</p>


|<p>Description</p>
=== Test FTP Connection''' ''''''(FTP)''' ===
<p>Attempts to open a socket on port 22 at the specified IP address or host name and reports back success or failure.</p>
<p>Usage: '''FTP [IP Address or Host Name]'''</p>


|-  
=== Restart Network ('''STARTNET)''' (5.2+) ===
|<p>ZPUT</p>
Restarts network to apply network related parameter changes without rebooting the APU-102
=== Switch Session ===
<p>Switches to the next session without logging out to session selection screen and choosing a different session. Must be initially logged into Session1, Supervisory level to use. At last Session, command will return to Session 1.</p>
<p>Switch session &lt;CTRL&gt;-G, followed by &lt;ENTER&gt;</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>


|<p>Required. Command code.</p>
<br>


|-
= Edit Parameters ('''EP''') Menu =
|<p>Filename for transfer</p>
<p>The Edit Parameters Menu allows those with Supervisory Menu access to view and update current APU-102 parameters. As explained in the ''Supervisory Menu Commands'' section, type the EP command at the ''APU102XP: &nbsp;Change'' prompt on the Supervisory Menu to access the Edit Parameters menu.</p>


|<p>Required. The file specification of the APU-102 file send to another unit on the local network. Wildcards are not permitted.&nbsp; Use caution with this command as it will overwrite an existing destination file.</p>
== Parameter Editing Methods ==
 
<p>Interactive Method</p>
|-  
<p>This method allows you to select a parameter group and view and/or edit its parameters using a simple menu style interface.</p>
|<p>IPAddressOrURL</p>
<p>''Example'': Follow the steps below to give the site a new session name using the interactive method:</p>
<p>1)&nbsp; Enter the '''EP '''command at the ''APU102XP: &nbsp;Change'' prompt. The Edit Parameters menu displays. See screen sample in [[#Edit_Parameters_(EP)|Edit Parameters (EP)]].</p>
<p>2)&nbsp; Type 1 for Session1 because you know that the "Session1" parameter group contains the site name. ''The Edit Parameters – Session 1'' screen displays:</p>
<p><br></p>
<div>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
|-
| style="width: 100%;" | <p>Edit Parameters -</p>
<p>&nbsp; 1. Session1</p>
<p>&nbsp; 2. Session2</p>
<p>&nbsp; 3. Session3</p>
<p>&nbsp; 4. Session4</p>
<p>&nbsp; 5. LocalSupport</p>
<p>&nbsp; 6. RemoteSupport</p>
<p>&nbsp; 7. Acquisition</p>
<p>&nbsp; 8. Ports</p>
<p>&nbsp; 9. DiskManager</p>
<p>&nbsp;10. TimeZoneControl</p>
<p>&nbsp;11. DaylightSavings</p>
<p>&nbsp;12. SysDiags</p>
<p>&nbsp;13. DebugFlags</p>
<p>&nbsp;14. NetMenu</p>
<p>&nbsp;15. SupportThreads</p>
<p>&nbsp;16. MoreSessions</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>[D]ump or [L]oad parameters, e[X]it &gt;</p>
|}
</div>
<p><br></p>
<p>3)&nbsp; Select '''1. SiteInformation.''' The following screen displays, showing that the current setting of this parameter is “Misc Railroad”:</p>
<div><p><br></p></div>


|<p>Required. Network address of destination computer.</p>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
 
|-
|-
| style="width: 100%;" | <div>
|<p>IPPort</p>
<p>Edit Parameters - Session1</p>
 
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; 1. SiteInformation</p>
|<p>Optional. IP Port on the destination computer. Defaults to 23 on the APU.</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; 2. AEIReportOpts</p>
 
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; 3. AEIReportConnect</p>
|}<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; 4. MaintReportOpts</p>
 
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; 5. MaintReportConnect</p>
=== 4.4.2.12&nbsp; Local Ethernet File Transmit Resume ('''ZPUTR''') &nbsp; ===
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; 6. Security</p>
<p>This command can be used to resume a ZPUT file transfer that was interrupted.</p><p>'''Note:''' The resume is done blindly, with no checks to ensure that the existing file has the same contents (up to the point of interruption) as the partial file. This means that if the file is a different version, the new file may be corrupted. Only use ZPUTR on file transfers that you know were previously interrupted.</p><p>Type the '''ZPUTR '''command in the following format:</p><p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; 7. T94</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; 8. CP</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; 9. CR160</p>
<p>&nbsp; 10. EarlyWarning</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;[D]ump or [L]oad parameters, e[X]it &gt;1</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;Editing Session1.SiteInformation</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;Ctrl-B MOVES BACKWARDS</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;SalutationMessage = My Railroad &gt;</p></div>
|}
<p>4)&nbsp; Press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt; to advance to the next parameter of the group without changing the current setting.</p>
<p>-'' or -''</p>
<p>Type the new session name and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt; to change the setting. The ''SalutationMessage'' field displays the new entry and you automatically advance to the next parameter of the group, if any.</p>
<p>'''Note:'''&nbsp; No need to burrow to the end of a group if you do not want to make any more changes, press '''&lt;ESC&gt; '''to return to go up to the group menu.</p>
<p>If you want to modify a parameter in the group that you have already bypassed, press &lt;'''Ctrl&gt;&lt;''''''B'''&gt; until you return to the desired parameter.</p>
<h5 class="mwt-heading" >Command Line Method</h5>
<p>Each parameter group has a name, as does each individual parameter in a group. In the above example, we interactively changed the "SalutationMessage" parameter. We set “Session1.SalutationMessage” to “My Railroad," with the EP function guiding us. The parameter could have also been changed at the EP command line by typing “Session1.SalutationMessage=My Railroad” and pressing &lt;Enter&gt;. Parameters are represented as statements rather than menu selections, which allow the entire parameter set to be “batched.”</p>
<h5 class="mwt-heading" >Batch Operations</h5>
<p>Batching allows parameters to be uploaded or downloaded in groups, as opposed to one-by-one using the interactive method. In our applications, batching allows you to gather and store all parameters for the site in one file. Because the file is human readable and editable using any text editor, viewing and/or modifying the system parameters from a remote site is a simple process. It also allows a site to be duplicated easily in the event of a complete system failure. While reloading code to a site may be a simple operation, reconfiguring the site exactly as it was (i.e. parameters) is not.</p>
<p>''Example: Replacing Sites;'' The solid state disk needs to be replaced due to an upgrade. Fortunately, you logged an EP dump of the site parameters just after the site went into operation. After the local technician put the unconfigured spare unit in place at the site, connect and upload the EP dump back to the site. Reboot the APU-102 when finished to ensure that the new parameters have taken effect. When appropriate (depending on AEI application version), log back in and do parameter backup (BP) and update the system mirror image for accurate system recovery. .</p>
<p>''Example: Cloning Sites'' Batch operations are useful for duplicating sites. For example, if another unit is added at another location, everything at the new site is identical, except for the name, number, etc. Simply edit the captured dump file to make appropriate changes and upload to the new site with the modified version.</p>
<h5 class="mwt-heading" >Editing Parameter Groups</h5>
<p>Each parameter group on the Edit Parameters menu contains a list of individual parameters that may be edited. For parameter descriptions, valid values, and default values, refer to ''Appendix A: System Parameters''.</p>


{| style="height: 163px;"
=== Downloading Parameters ===
|- style="height: 28px;"
<p>To download (or dump) all parameter statements for the system:</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 126.484px;" |<p>Command Format</p>
<p>1)&nbsp; Enter the '''EP '''command at the ''APU102XP:&nbsp; Change'' prompt. The Edit Parameters menu displays. See screen sample in [[#Edit_Parameters_(EP)|Edit Parameters (EP)]].</p>
<p>2)&nbsp; Type &lt;'''D'''&gt; for Dump at the ''Edit Parameters'' menu command prompt. The “Press enter to start…” prompt allows you to start a capture file on the communications package you are using to store the parameters.</p>
<p>3)&nbsp; The '''EP''' command then downloads the parameter statements to you. When the last parameter displays, you can press &lt;ESC&gt; to return to the previous parameter listing menu or wait for the inactivity timeout to do the same.</p>
<p>The following is an example of a parameter dump from a sample APU-102 application:</p>
<p><br></p>
<div></div>


| style="height: 28px; width: 1071.52px;" |<p>Description</p>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
 
|-
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="width: 100%;" | <div><p>TimeZoneControl.ReferenceTimeZone=6</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 126.484px;" |<p>ZPUTR</p>
<p>TimeZoneControl.TimeSyncWithHost=1</p>
 
<p>SysDiags.PresenceLoop.MinAxles=3</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 1071.52px;" |<p>Required. Command code.</p>
<p>SysDiags.PresenceLoop.LowSpeedThresh=4</p>
 
<p>SysDiags.PresenceLoop.HighSpeedThresh=15</p>
|- style="height: 51px;"
<p>SysDiags.PresenceLoop.PresTimeOutAboveSpeed=15</p>
| style="height: 51px; width: 126.484px;" |<p>Filename for transfer</p>
<p>SysDiags.PresenceLoopPresenceTimeoutSeconds=30</p>
 
<p>SysDiags.PresenceLoop.SecondsBetweenTrains=20</p>
| style="height: 51px; width: 1071.52px;" |<p>Required. The file specification of the APU-102 file send to another unit on the local network. Wildcards are not permitted.&nbsp; Use caution with this command as it may overwrite or corrupt an existing destination file. (see note above).</p>
<p>SysDiags.Antenna.ConsecutiveTrains=1</p>
 
<p>SysDiags.Antenna.MinTrainLength=10</p>
|- style="height: 28px;"
<p>SysDiags.Antenna.FatalTagPercent=1</p>
| style="height: 28px; width: 126.484px;" |<p>IPAddressOrURL</p>
<p>SysDiags.Antenna.WarningTagPercent=50</p>
<p>SysDiags.WheelDet.ConsecutiveTrains=1</p>
<p>SysDiags.WheelDet.MinValidTagPairs=3</p>
<p>SysDiags.WheelDet.TrainsToReview=0</p>
<p>SysDiags.WheelDet.AxlesToReview=0</p>
<p>SysDiags.WheelDet.Mismatch=0</p>
<p>SysDiags.WheelDet.LowtoleranceMismatch=0</p>
<p>SysDiags.WheelDet.LowToleranceSpeed=0</p></div>
|}
<p class="mwt-heading" style="text-align: center;" >Figure 4.49: Parameter Dump Example (partial)</p>
=== Uploading Parameters ===
<p>Before you can do a parameter upload, you will need a file containing the parameters. The easiest way to obtain a parameter file is to create one using the download procedure described above.</p>
<p>To upload a parameter file, enter &lt;'''L'''&gt; for Load at the EP prompt and send the file to the unit using your communications package’s “RAW ASCII TRANSMIT” or “TEXT” command. EP echoes back to you the parameter statements it receives as well as a message indicating how well it digested each message. If the EP command does not like a parameter or setting, it will let you know. (It’s a good idea to log the message stream). When the last parameter displays, you can press &lt;ESC&gt; to return to the previous parameter listing menu or wait for the inactivity timeout to do the same.</p>
<p><br></p>


| style="height: 28px; width: 1071.52px;" |<p>Required. Network address of destination computer.</p>
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
|-
| style="width: 59.8906px;" | <p style="text-align: center;" >Caution</p>
| style="width: 1131.11px;" | <p>Pay attention to the responses. As the number of parameters grow with the application development, it is possible to over-run the buffer on the APU-102, especially if using the Local Port, resulting in parameters not getting updated as desired.</p>
|}<p>Some communications programs will allow you to “paste” text to the screen and can be a handy method of loading partial parameter files.</p>
<p>Reboot the APU-102 when finished to ensure that the new parameters have taken effect. When appropriate (depending on AEI application version), log back in and do parameter backup (BP) and update the system mirror image for accurate system recovery.</p>
===  Dumping Parameters to on-board file (5.1.1B103 or later) ===
<p>To download (or dump) all parameter statements for the system:</p>
<p>1)&nbsp; Enter the '''EP '''command at the ''APU102XP:&nbsp; Change'' prompt. The Edit Parameters menu displays. See screen sample in [[#Edit_Parameters_(EP)|Edit Parameters (EP)]].</p>
<p>2)&nbsp; Type &lt;'''DF'''&gt; for Dump File at the ''Edit Parameters'' menu command prompt. You will be prompted for a file to capture the parameters to. This file will be on the APU and it can be downloaded to your PC via any available file transfer methods on the APU102, i.e., Zmodem, Xmodem, FTP, etc.</p>
<p>3)&nbsp; The '''EP''' command then dumps the parameter statements to that file. The parameter listing will be refreshed when the process is done. If the file already exists, you will be prompted to overwrite it.</p>


|- style="height: 28px;"
=== Loading Parameters from on-board file (5.1.1B103 or later) ===
| style="height: 28px; width: 126.484px;" |<p>IPPort</p>
<p>Before you can do a parameter upload, you will need a file containing the parameters. The easiest way to obtain a parameter file is to create one using the download procedure described above.</p>
<p>To load parameters from a file, it must be resident on the APU-102. The file can be uploaded from your PC via any available file transfer methods on the APU-102, i.e., Zmodem, Xmodem, FTP, ZPUT, ZGET, etc.</p>
<p>1)&nbsp; &nbsp;Enter the '''EP '''command at the ''APU102XP:&nbsp; Change'' prompt. The Edit Parameters menu displays. See screen sample in [[#Edit_Parameters_(EP)|Edit Parameters (EP)]].</p>
<p>2)&nbsp; Type &lt;'''LF'''&gt; for Load File at the ''Edit Parameters'' menu command prompt. You will be prompted for the file to load the parameters from.&nbsp;</p>
<p>3)&nbsp; The '''EP''' command then loads the parameter statements from that file. Progress will look like the standard “L” load or may show progress bar on later versions of software.</p>
<p>'''Note:''' A log file (PED.LOG) will be created of the complete parameter load noting errors. It is a text file that can be downloaded or viewed on-line with the TYPE command.</p>
<p>4)&nbsp; Reboot the APU-102 when finished to ensure that the new parameters have taken effect. When appropriate (depending on AEI application version), log back in and do parameter backup (BP) and update the system mirror image for accurate system recovery.</p>


| style="height: 28px; width: 1071.52px;" |<p>Optional. IP Port on the destination computer. Defaults to 23 on the APU.</p>
<br>


|}<p><br></p>
= ROMSHELL User Interface (Optional) =
== Overview ==
<p>ROMSHELL&nbsp;is an alternate operating mode of the APU-102 that is hard coded into the Startup ROM (drive A of the USSD/PSSD). Not applicable for L-Series APU-102 (LX-800 equipped). It has diagnostic functionality superior to Mini-Remote Support (MRS). Benefits of the ROMSHELL user interface include:</p><p>Loading Code via Zmodem</p><p>Versions of the AEI code prior to 4.20 do not support Zmodem file transfers. Xmodem will pad the file to an even 128 bytes, and that padding may make some files unstable or unusable. Formerly, Remote Support and a “Back Door” connection had to be used to load these files. With ROMSHELL, they can be loaded via Zmodem.</p><p>Restoring site operation when USSD is blank</p><p>The USSD may be blank due to onboard battery failure coupled with power loss to APU-102. It may also be cleared intentionally by removing battery jumpers or issuing a remote format command. This is usually done if a corrupt file structure is suspected or field upgrade of a card is desired. With ROMSHELL, the site can be restored to operation.</p><p>Additional Benefits:</p>


=== 4.4.2.13&nbsp; Check Network Settings '''(IPCONFIG)''' ===
*Zmodem file transfer protocol. Does not require a special communication software package, as with MRS.
<p>Identical to the simple Windows command line IPCONFIG (no options).</p><p>Type the '''IPCONFIG '''command''' '''and press '''&lt;Enter&gt;'''.</p><p><br></p>
*ROMSHELL identifies the modem and initializes it with the highest possible connection rate. (independent of the AEI application)
*Local port initialization at 2400 or 9600 baud depending on version (detailed below in [[Local_Port_Connection_and_Logon|Local Port Connection and Logon]]). (independent of the AEI application)
*Password protection. (independent of the AEI application)
*ROMSHELL activity is logged to a text file on the APU-102’s “disk”.
*Contains many DOS-like commands.
*MS-DOS commands, including COMMAND.COM embedded commands can be performed through the shell.
*PORTATTACH utility that does not require port-specific portfile or initialization files.
*Watchdog timer reboots the APU-102 after 20 minutes.
*Real-time verification of file transfers.
*Automatic compact flash recovery if corruption is detected.<p>(Version 5.4 for LPMTX only! Requires CF imaged with mirror partition. Refer to document 385-0010-00, APU102 Auto-Recovery Quick Start Guide for LPM-TX for detailed operation)</p><p>Why is ROMSHELL Running?</p><p>The APU-102 boots to ROMSHELL every fifth time the APU-102 is hard booted by power reset or watchdog timer reboot. The APU-102 can be forced to boot to ROMSHELL for diagnostics. The APU-102 also boots to ROMSHELL under the following additional circumstances:</p><p>The application boot-up sequence fails. This can be caused by corrupt or missing files, incorrect parameter setup, or loss of all files from the static RAM of the USSD (C: drive).</p><p>The following files are required to boot to the DOS version AEI consist application:</p>


{|
*SPECIAL.BAT (Executes commands preparing the APU-102 to run the application.)
|-
*APUEXEC.BAT or other batch file to load the application. (Its contents must contain the file name of the Application Executable.)
|<p>ipconfig &lt; y.dat 1&gt; dosshell.txt 2&gt; dosshll2.txt</p><p><br></p><p>Windows IP Configuration</p><p><br></p><p>Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:</p><p><br></p><p>Connection-specific DNS Suffix&nbsp; . :</p><p>IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : 192.168.1.102</p><p>Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 255.255.0.0</p><p>Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . : 192.168.1.1</p><p><br></p>
*SYSPARMS.DAT
 
*$REMPORT.DAT
|}<p>Figure 4.41: Sample IPCONFIG Response Screen</p><p>For advanced options and switches, run IPCONFIG under the SHELL command.</p><p><br></p>
*$REMPARM.DAT
 
*$LOCPORT.DAT
=== 4.4.2.14&nbsp; Set Date/Time (*'''T''') ===
*$LOCPARM.DAT
<p>The Set Date/Time ('''T''') command displays and sets the APU-102 date and time.</p>
*SAAEI.EXE
*Modem INI file identified in $REMPORT.DAT
*Application Executable file (e.g. AP423.EXE)<p>'''Note:''' File requirements vary for other DOS APU-102 applications, such as Tracker and ACQ.</p><p>'''XP '''version APU-102 have file requirements that are too complex to detail here.</p><p>The application fails to initialize some of the hardware, particularly Modem and Local Ports. A possible cause could be an error in following parameter files:</p>


<br><p><br></p><div><p><br></p>
*$REMPORT.DAT (Particularly Modem INI file specified correctly, and the file must be on the disk)
<p>Current time Sun Jun 01&nbsp; 13:30:18 2004</p>
*$REMPARM.DAT (Tells the APU-102 which port file to use for remote access. Usually modem port is $REMPORT.DAT.)
<p><br></p>
*$LOCPORT.DAT
<p>Enter New Date mm/dd/yyyy &gt;06/01/2004</p>
*$LOCPARM.DAT (Tells the APU-102 which port file to use for local access. Usually local port is $LOCPORT.DAT.)<p>Other potential file problems include:</p>
<p>Enter New Time hh:mm:ss&nbsp;&nbsp; &gt;13:30:18</p>
 
<p><br></p>
*F.BAT (run once BAT file) has invalid commands that prevent it from fully executing such as those requiring user input.
<p>New time Sun Jun 01 13:45:00</p></div><p>Figure 4.42: Set Date/Time Screen</p><p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''T '''command''' '''and press '''&lt;Enter&gt;'''.</p><p>2)&nbsp; Type the date in the format indicated and press '''&lt;Enter&gt;'''.</p><p>3)&nbsp; Enter the time in military time format (24-hour clock, hh:mm:ss) and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. The new date and time you established displays at the bottom of the screen.</p><p>'''Note:''' The time zone is set using the Edit Parameters (EP) command and selecting ''TimeZoneControl.''</p><p>4.4.2.15&nbsp; Exit to Main Menu ('''X''')</p><p>Type the '''X''' command to exit the Supervisory Menu and return to the System Menu.</p><p>4.4.2.16&nbsp; Run Hardware Setup ('''RHS''')&nbsp;LPMTX with 5.0+ only</p><p>The Run Hardware Setup ('''RHS''') utility is used whenever the hardware in the APU changes. The Windows XPe Operating System needs to identify hardware changes independent of the AEI application parameters. Select this function to set the APU-102 to run the Hardware Setup routine at next power up. The Startup ROM must be disabled to run the routine.</p><p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''RHS''' command''' '''and press '''&lt;Enter&gt;'''. The following warning message displays and offers a chance to abort the command.</p><p><br></p><div><p>WARNING: THIS WILL SET THE UNIT TO RUN HARDWARE SETUP. Continue (Y/N)?</p></div><p><br></p><p>2)&nbsp; Press &lt;'''N'''&gt; to cancel and return to the ''APU102XP: &nbsp;Change'' prompt or press &lt;'''Y'''&gt; to continue. If &lt;Y&gt; is selected, the following message displays:</p><p><br></p><div><p>THE APU HAS BEEN SET TO RUN HARDWARE SETUP</p>
*SPECIAL.BAT does not fully execute.
<p>PLEASE POWER OFF UNIT AND FOLLOW HARDWARE SETUP PROCEDURE.</p>
*APUEXEC.BAT (or other batch file to load the application) does not contain the file name of the Application Executable.
<p><br></p>
== ROMSHELL Operation ==
<p>TYPE "RHS?" FOR MORE INFORMATION.</p></div><p>Hardware Setup Procedure (following RHS command):</p><p>1)&nbsp; Power off the APU.</p><p>2)&nbsp; Remove the LPM-TX Pentium card.</p><p>3)&nbsp; Remove the Startup ROM at U1 on the PCM-SSD card (daughter-card on Pentium card). Refer to Appendix F for ROM location</p><p>4)&nbsp; Reinstall the LPM-TX Pentium card.</p><p>5)&nbsp; Power on the APU. The hardware setup program runs automatically. The APU will reboot itself during the process and when completed, will indicate with a 3-blink, pause, and repeat pattern on the SYS LED. If Watchdog timer reboots the APU, it will return to this state.</p><p>6)&nbsp; Power off the APU.</p><p>7)&nbsp; &nbsp;Reinstall the Startup ROM at U1 on the PCM-SSD card removed earlier.</p><p>8)&nbsp; Reinstall the LPM-TX Pentium card.</p><p>9)&nbsp; Power on the APU to restore normal operation.</p>
=== Local Port Connection and Logon ===
<p>1)&nbsp; Attach a PC or data terminal to the “LOCAL” communications port of the APU-102 unit. The APU-102 is configured as a DTE with a female 25-pin “D” RS-232 connector. Communications parameters for Startup ROM version 5.3+ are controlled by a flag file ('''96.DAT''') in the APU’s AEI directory. If the file is present, the local port is initialized at 9600 baud. If the file is absent, the port initializes at 2400. Version 5.1 is fixed at 2400 baud. Other prior versions are fixed at 9600 baud. All utilize 8 data bits, no parity, and one stop bit. These parameters are independent of the AEI application and may be different. Setup your communications program to match.</p><p>2)&nbsp; Press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt; and the ''ROMSHELL'' responds with the Password prompt.</p><p>3)&nbsp; Type your password and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. The default password is “SECRET” but can be changed. (Refer to '''Password''' command) You will see a prompt similar to the following example. From here you can enter any of the ''ROMSHELL'' commands.</p><p><br></p><p>-RS- A:\&gt;</p><p>'''Note''': The prompt will reflect the current working directory; in this case, the root of “A.</p>
=== Dial-up Connection ===
<p>1)&nbsp; Dial the site with any commercial communication package, and the modems will negotiate the best connection.</p><p>2)&nbsp; Once connected, press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt; and the ''ROMSHELL'' responds with the Password prompt.</p><p>3)&nbsp; Type your password and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. The default password is “SECRET” but can be changed as. (Refer to '''Password''' command) You will see a prompt similar to the following example. From here you can enter any of the ''ROMSHELL'' commands.</p><p><br></p><p>-RS- A:\&gt;</p><p>'''Note: '''The prompt will reflect the current working directory, in this case, the root of “A.”</p>
== ROMSHELL System Commands ==
<p>Type &lt;'''?'''&gt; and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt; to display a list of available ''ROMSHELL ''commands. A list of the commands displays.</p>
<h5 class="mwt-heading" >Command Listing</h5>
 
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: #ecf0f1; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
|
---------------<br>?<br>HELP<br>EXIT<br>CLS<br>DIR<br>TYPE<br>DEL<br>/<br>REBOOT<br>SHELL<br>PORTVIEW<br>ZSEND<br>ZREC<br>ZRECR<br>TIME<br>DATE<br>CD<br>ATTACH<br>PORTATTACH<br>VER<br>L<br>FORMATUSSD<br>PASSWORD<br>TTL<br>HDTOOL<br>
|}
 
=== Command Definitions ===
<p>The following defines and explains how to use each ROMSHELL command. Type &lt;'''?'''&gt; and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt; (or HELP and &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;)&nbsp; to display a list of available commands.</p><p>?</p><p>Displays the ''ROMSHELL'' command listing.</p><p>/</p><p>Displays information on available system memory.</p><p><br></p><p><br></p><div>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: #ecf0f1; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
|
Free Mem : 445856, Free Disk : 1121792


=== 4.4.2.17&nbsp; Edit Parameters ('''EP''') ===
&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Stack Usage Information<br>&nbsp; &nbsp;Name &nbsp; &nbsp;Id &nbsp; &nbsp;Base &nbsp; &nbsp; Size &nbsp; Free<br>---------- -- &nbsp;--------- &nbsp;----- &nbsp;----<br>Main &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; 00 &nbsp;25DE:0BF6 &nbsp;29240 &nbsp;17133&nbsp;<br>$locport &nbsp; 04 &nbsp;25DE:7296 &nbsp;3000 &nbsp; 1667 &nbsp;<br>$remport &nbsp; 05 &nbsp;25DE:66D4 &nbsp;3000 &nbsp; 1891 &nbsp;<br>conport &nbsp; &nbsp;06 &nbsp;25DE:5B12 &nbsp;3000 &nbsp; 2055 &nbsp;<br>DOG &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;07 &nbsp;25DE:4F50 &nbsp;3000 &nbsp; 2351 &nbsp;
<p>The Edit Parameters screen is a sub-menu of the Supervisory Menu that may be used to view and edit the parameters. The Edit Parameters command provides access to all the configuration parameters of the APU-102 if logged in under Session 1. Logging into other sessions allows access the parameters that affect their session only. (For parameter definitions and default values, refer to ''Appendix A: System Parameters''.)</p><p>Groups of parameters can be dumped all at once by using the Dump Parameters (D) option. This allows you to capture the information to a log file providing a record of the site's configuration should it need to be reconfigured or the information is lost. The parameter information can also be loaded back to the site using the Load Parameters (L) option.</p><p><br></p><p>'''Note:''' Version 5.1.1B103 has added capability of dumping or loading parameters to/from an on-board file.&nbsp; Refer to the ''4.5 Edit'' ''Parameters (EP) Menu'' for more information.</p>


<br><p><br></p><p><br></p><div><p>Edit Parameters -</p>
&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;Memory<br>Fragment Information<br># &nbsp; &nbsp;Address &nbsp; &nbsp;Len<br>-- &nbsp;--------- &nbsp;-----<br>01 &nbsp;3325:0000 &nbsp;445856<br>02 &nbsp;2EA6:0000 &nbsp;80 &nbsp;<br>03 &nbsp;2FF0:0000 &nbsp;48 &nbsp;
<p><br></p>
 
<p>&nbsp; 1. Session1</p>
Total free: 445984 (bytes)
<p>&nbsp; 2. Session2</p>
<p>&nbsp; 3. Session3</p>
<p>&nbsp; 4. Session4</p>
<p>&nbsp; 5. LocalSupport</p>
<p>&nbsp; 6. RemoteSupport</p>
<p>&nbsp; 7. Acquisition</p>
<p>&nbsp; 8. Ports</p>
<p>&nbsp; 9. DiskManager</p>
<p>&nbsp;10. TimeZoneControl</p>
<p>&nbsp;11. DaylightSavings</p>
<p>&nbsp;12. SysDiags</p>
<p>&nbsp;13. DebugFlags</p>
<p>&nbsp;14. NetMenu</p>
<p>&nbsp;15. SupportThreads</p>
<p>&nbsp;16. MoreSessions</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>[D]ump or [L]oad parameters, e[X]it &gt;</p></div><p>Figure 4.43: Edit Parameters Menu</p><p>All options may not be available depending on software version</p><p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''EP''' command and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. The parameters display in logical groups that can be accessed via the EP menu system.</p><p>2)&nbsp; Type the number corresponding to the parameter group you want to edit. Either a list of the parameters within that group or an additional, second-level parameter group displays.</p><p>If the option you select on the ''Edit Parameters'' menu displays an additional, second-level parameter group, select the desired group to access to the desired parameter list.</p><p>3)&nbsp; To keep the current parameter value, press '''&lt;Enter&gt;''' to move to the next displayed value.</p><p>To change a displayed value, enter the new value opposite the current value prompt and press '''&lt;''''''Enter&gt;'''. If the new value entered is out of range or invalid, either an error message displays or the system redisplays the previous value when you reboot.</p><p>4)&nbsp; To dump groups of parameters and allow you to capture the information to the log file, select the '''D'''(ump). To load parameter information back to the site, select the '''L'''(oad) option.</p><p>Press the '''&lt;ESC&gt; '''key to exit the current level at any time. The &lt;'''X'''&gt; key will also exit the current level. Use the &lt;'''X'''&gt; key with caution and '''ONLY''' when the "'''X'''" option is displayed.</p><p>5)&nbsp; Reboot the APU-102 when finished to ensure that the new parameters have taken effect.</p><p>For on-screen help, position your cursor at the parameter value and press &lt;'''Ctrl'''&gt;&lt;'''U'''&gt;. To move backward, press &lt;'''Ctrl'''&gt;&lt;'''B'''&gt;.</p><p>'''Note: '''The PARM.HLP file must be maintained in your system files; otherwise the parameter help will not be available.</p><p>For more information about the parameter editor interface, refer to the ''4.5 Edit'' ''Parameters (EP) Menu''.</p>


=== 4.4.2.18&nbsp; System Cleanup ('''CLEAN''') ===
Example: / Command<br>
<p>The System Cleanup command '''(CLEAN)''' is used to eliminate unnecessary files from the APU-102. This command does NOT eliminate train files.</p><p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''CLEAN''' command''' '''and press '''&lt;Enter&gt;'''.''' '''The following warning message displays and offers a chance to abort the reboot.</p><p><br></p><div><p>CLEAN - System Cleanup Command.</p>
|}
<p>-------------------------------</p>
<p>This function will remove unnecessary data and log files from the system.</p>
<p>This function does NOT remove any trains!</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Continue? (Y/N)?</p></div><p>2)&nbsp; Press &lt;'''N'''&gt; to cancel and return to the ''APU102XP:&nbsp; Change'' prompt or press &lt;'''Y'''&gt; to continue.</p><p><br></p>


=== 4.4.2.19&nbsp; Backup Parameters '''(BP)''' (5.09+) ===
<p><br></p></div>
<p>This function is used to create an on-board backup copy of your system data files. These backup parameters will be automatically reloaded by the software when corrupt parameters files are detected. An initial backup parameter set is created the first time 5.09+ is booted. It is important to create a current backup set when parameters are changed. Verify the parameters are correct and the APU-102 is operational before executing the BP command.</p>


<br><p>1)&nbsp; Type the BP command and press &lt;ENTER&gt;.</p><p>The APU-102 replies with a warning and confirmation to execute.</p><p>2)&nbsp; Press &lt;N&gt; to cancel and return to the APU102 Change prompt or press &lt;Y&gt; to Continue.</p>
===== ATTACH Portfile =====
<p>Attaches to defined ports ($REMPORT.DAT and $LOCPORT.DAT). For example, if logged into the local port, you could attach to the modem port ($REMPORT.DAT) and execute Hayes commands to the modem. Control-Z exits the attach utility.</p><p>'''Note:'''&nbsp; Legacy ports only-not compatible with ports 3-6 on network capable APU-102s.</p><p><br></p>


=== 4.4.2.20&nbsp; Master System Reset (*'''MR''') ===
===== CD path =====
<p>The Master System Reset ('''MR''') command removes all previously recorded trains from the APU-102.''' '''This process also uses the parameter DiskManager.MaxTrains to determine how many trains will now be maintained by the APU-102, assuming sufficient disk space.''' '''The APU-102 responds to the '''MR''' command with a warning statement and a chance for the user to abort the reset.''' '''The '''Continue? (Y/N) &nbsp;'''response provides additional options to perform when the train files are deleted. Using this command is recommended when an APU-102 is put into service or after a problem has been solved.''' '''It is also useful to free up disk space or to remove old trains from drives that are swapped between units.</p><p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''MR '''command and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;.''' '''The Master System Reset warning screen displays.</p><p><br></p><div><p>************Warning!!! Master Reset Initiated**********</p>
<p>Works like a DOS CD command. It changes to the specified directory and displays the ''-RS- (path)&gt;'' prompt, reflecting the now current working directory.</p><p>'''Note''': You can also change to a different drive as you would in DOS. Example: Type C: and press &lt;Enter&gt; to change to the “C” drive.</p>
<p>**********All Train Information will be flushed********</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Continue? (Y/N)</p>
<p><br></p></div><p>2)&nbsp; Type &lt;'''N'''&gt; to cancel or &lt;'''Y'''&gt; to continue and delete all trains on the unit. <br>The display will move to the following prompt.</p><p><br></p><div><p><br></p>
<p>“Reset train sequence number to 1? (Y/N)”</p>
<p><br></p></div><p>3)&nbsp; Type &lt;'''N'''&gt; to maintain current train sequence numbering or type &lt;'''Y'''&gt; to reset the train sequence to 1. The display will move to the following prompt. (depending on software version)</p><p><br></p><div><p><br></p>
<p>Starting sequence number &lt;1-9999&gt;:</p>
<p><br></p></div><p>4)&nbsp; Type the sequence number you’d like to start with if not 1 and press &lt;ENTER&gt;. The display will move to the following prompt.</p><p><br></p><div><p><br></p>
<p>Reboot after trains are removed? (Y/N)</p>
<p><br></p></div><p>5)&nbsp; Type &lt;'''N'''&gt; to delete trains only or type &lt;'''Y'''&gt; to reboot after the trains are removed. The APU will display the following message. &nbsp;</p><p><br></p><div><p><br></p>
<p>**********&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Master Reset In Progress&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; **************</p>
<p><br></p></div><p>The APU will display the following message if reboot requested.</p><p><br></p><div><p>REMOTE REBOOT IN PROGRESS…</p></div><p>Pressing '''&lt;ESC&gt; '''before the reboot prompt will abort the '''MR''' command.</p>


=== 4.4.2.21&nbsp; Master Reset and Restart (*'''MRR''') 5.2+ ===
===== CLS =====
<p>Similar to MR, except it also deletes all known log files, reset train sequence number to 1 and restarts the AEI application.</p><p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''MRR '''command and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;.''' '''The Master Reset and Restart warning screen displays.</p><p><br></p><div><p>!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!</p>
<p>Clears the screen and displays the ''-RS- (path)&gt;'' prompt.</p>
<p>!!!!!!!!&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; WARNING&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; !!!!!!!</p>
<p>!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>This function will remove ALL unnecessary files from the unit</p>
<p>and will automatically restart the app. All trains will be deleted</p>
<p>and the train sequence number will be reset to 1. Also, all log files</p>
<p>will be removed.</p>
<p>Continue? (Y/N)</p></div><p>2)&nbsp; Type &lt;'''N'''&gt; to cancel or &lt;'''Y'''&gt; to continue.</p>


=== 4.4.2.22&nbsp; System Status Reset ('''*SR''') ===
===== DATE =====
<p>Use the System Status Reset ('''*SR''') command to delete the system status information from the APU-102.</p>
<p>Displays the following prompt with the current ''ROMSHELL'' site system date. To change the date, enter the new date using the format displayed in parentheses. To accept the current date, press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;.</p><p><br></p><p>Current date is 06/01/2004</p><p>Enter new date (mm-dd-yyyy):</p><p><br></p><p>'''Note''': Changing the date or time on the E-Series APU restarts the 20-minute watchdog. The P-Series APU handles time differently and may cause a reboot (time has expired). It is recommended that the system date and time be set with the AEI application. If date/time is set in ROMSHELL and then booted to the application, the time may be off due to time zones or daylight savings time settings. These settings are applied AFTER time is read from the CPU.</p>


<br><p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''SR '''command in one of the following formats:</p><p><br></p>
===== DEL&nbsp; filename =====
<p>Deletes the specified filename from the system.</p>


{|
===== DIR (optional parameters) =====
|-
<p>Use the DIR command alone to display a directory of all files in the current path. To display specific files, add the optional path and filename arguments using standard DOS conventions including wildcard arguments (* or ?). This is not a true DOS DIR command though, therefore do not apply any “/” switches to your command line. If a true DOS DIR is desired, refer to the SHELL command below.</p>
|<p>Command Format</p>


|<p>Description</p>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: #ecf0f1; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
|
Volume in drive A is Ac<br>&nbsp;Volume Serial Number is 0616-1200<br>&nbsp;Directory of A:\


|-  
$LOCPORT DAT &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;76 03-09-00 &nbsp; 1:29p<br>$REMPORT DAT &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;78 03-09-00 &nbsp; 1:30p<br>ANSI &nbsp; &nbsp; SYS &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;9029 04-27-95 &nbsp; 8:10p<br>AUTOEXEC BAT &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;1145 03-16-00 &nbsp; 4:34p<br>CHECKSYS COM &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; 192 04-27-95 &nbsp; 8:12p<br>CHKDSK &nbsp; EXE &nbsp; &nbsp; 16200 04-27-95 &nbsp; 8:10p<br>COMMAND &nbsp;COM &nbsp; &nbsp; 47845 11-11-91 &nbsp; 5:00a<br>CONFIG &nbsp; SYS &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; 152 03-09-00 &nbsp; 2:01p<br>CONPORT &nbsp;DAT &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;78 11-17-95 &nbsp; 5:42p<br>DOG &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;INI &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;82 03-21-00 &nbsp;10:59a<br>DT336 &nbsp; &nbsp;INI &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; 564 03-21-00 &nbsp;10:31a<br>EMM386 &nbsp; EXE &nbsp; &nbsp; 91742 04-27-95 &nbsp; 8:10p<br>HIMEM &nbsp; &nbsp;SYS &nbsp; &nbsp; 11616 04-27-95 &nbsp; 8:10p<br>MCM2496M INI &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;1342 12-17-99 &nbsp;10:05a<br>MDM144S &nbsp;INI &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;1124 03-21-00 &nbsp; 8:19a<br>MODEM &nbsp; &nbsp;INI &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;65 04-27-95 &nbsp; 8:10p<br>MRS &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;BAT &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;52 03-16-00 &nbsp; 4:34p<br>PASSWORD TXT &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; 8 03-16-00 &nbsp;10:19a<br>ROMSHELL EXE &nbsp; &nbsp; 54745 03-21-00 &nbsp;10:50a<br>ROM_VER &nbsp;TXT &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;50 03-20-00 &nbsp; 2:53p<br>SHARE &nbsp; &nbsp;EXE &nbsp; &nbsp; 10912 04-27-95 &nbsp; 8:10p<br>USSD &nbsp; &nbsp; SYS &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;9282 04-27-95 &nbsp; 8:10p<br>&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;22 file(s) &nbsp; &nbsp; 256379 bytes<br>&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;1121792 bytes free<br>
|<p>SR</p>
|}<p>Example: DIR Command of ROMSHELL ROM</p>


|<p>Required. Command code.</p>
===== EXIT =====
<p>Exits the ROMSHELL program. The following message displays:</p><p><br></p><p style="margin-left: 25px;">Terminating Console.&nbsp; Bye…..</p><p style="margin-left: 25px;"><br></p><p>To return to the ''ROMSHELL'' application, press any key to display the''' Password''' field, then reenter your password.</p>


|-
===== FORMATUSSD =====
|<p>SR, 2 -15</p>
<p>This command formats the USSD and reboots the APU-102. A warning and confirmation message is displayed. After the reboot, you will need to reestablish the connection to proceed.</p><p>'''Note''': This command does not function on Pentium Flash disk.</p>


|<p>Optional. Specifies the new size of the system status log file in Kbytes. Default size = 5 Kbytes.</p>
<br>
===== HDTOOL (Romshell 5.4+) =====
<p>Hard drive toolkit. This is a utility used by the system for Compact Flash recovery. Do not use without instruction by Comet Electronics Support personnel who will guide you through command entry.</p>


|}<p><br></p><div><p>APU102XP: Change 1&gt;sr 10</p>
===== HELP =====
<p><br></p>
<p>Displays the ''ROMSHELL'' command listing. Identical to the &lt;'''?'''&gt; command.</p>
<p>*******Warning!!!! System Status Reset Initiated*******</p>
 
<p>********All Status Information will be flushed*********</p>
===== L =====
<p><br></p>
<p>Displays the last command. Press &lt;Enter&gt; to repeat the command or edit as necessary.</p>
<p>Continue? (Y/N)</p></div><p>Figure 4.44: System Status Reset Warning Screen</p><p>In the above example, a reset to a 10-kilobyte system status file has been selected. Resetting the system status log is recommended when an APU-102 is put into service or after a problem has been solved.''' '''This removes old information that might be confusing.</p><p>2)&nbsp; Type &lt;'''Y'''&gt; to continue with the reset or &lt;'''N'''&gt; to cancel and return to the ''APU102XP: &nbsp;Change ''prompt.</p>


=== 4.4.2.23&nbsp; Reset Maintenance Sequence ('''RMS''') ===
===== PASSWORD newpassword =====
<p>The Reset Maintenance Sequence ('''RMS''') command resets the maintenance report sequence number back to one for the current session.''' '''Resetting the maintenance report sequence number is recommended when an APU-102 is put into service.''' '''This removes old information that might be confusing.</p><p>1)&nbsp; Type '''RMS''' and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;.''' '''The following message displays:</p><p><br></p><div><p>APU102XP: Change 1&gt;rms</p>
<p>Changes the ROMSHELL logon password. The system will ask for confirmation of the new password. This command has no effect on the applications password. The password is in the encrypted file “PASSWORD.TXT” on the root of the “C” drive. If the ROMSHELL password is forgotten, it can be reset with a special boot sequence detailed at the end of this section. (Startup ROM version 5.1 and higher)</p>
<p>Reset maintenance report sequence number to 1?&nbsp; (Y.N)</p></div><p><br></p><p>2)&nbsp; Select '''Y'''(es) or '''N'''(or).''' '''The ''APU102XP: &nbsp;Change&gt;'' prompt redisplays.</p>


=== 4.4.2.24&nbsp; Reboot Unit '''(*R)''' ===
===== PORTATTACH PORT BAUD B P S =====
<p>The Reboot Unit (R) command is tied to the reset line of the APU-102. When executed, the computer in the APU-102 restarts and the boot process begins. (Version 5.0+ closes files and shuts down Windows XP before resetting the computer.) All the external hardware and software is reinitialized. This is very helpful in the case of an inadvertent lock up of the reader board or I/O card, however the R command can be a very detrimental command, especially on 486 class APUs.''' '''Once the reboot is initiated, ''all'' acquisition, ''all'' communications with the APU-102, local or remote, will be lost.''' '''To prevent losing train data, avoid the reboot command while a train is passing the site.''' '''While a train is recording, a message is displayed with the command prompt.</p><p><br></p><div><p>**********Train Recording (24 axles)**********</p>
<p>Attaches to undefined ports. Example: PORTATTACH COM4 4800 8 n 1 connects to Comm port 4, 4800 baud, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit. (Default for first reader.) Control-Z exits the PORTATTACH utility and displays the -RS- (path)&gt; prompt.</p><p>'''Note:''' &nbsp;Legacy ports only-not compatible with ports 3-6 on network capable APU-102s.</p>
<p><br></p></div><p>A train must completely finish recording and appear in the train directory in order to be saved.''' '''Since the APU-102 cannot acquire data until the startup sequence is complete, it is impossible to generate an accurate consist from a train entering the site during that time.</p><p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''R''' command''' '''and press '''&lt;Enter&gt;'''.''' '''The following warning message displays and offers a chance to abort the reboot.</p><p><br></p><div><p>WARNING: This function will cause the remote unit to reboot. Continue (Y.N)?</p></div><p><br></p><p>2)&nbsp; Press &lt;'''N'''&gt; to cancel and return to the ''APU102XP: &nbsp;Change'' prompt or press &lt;'''Y'''&gt; to continue and reboot the APU-102.</p><p><br></p>


{|
===== PORTVIEW port number N (or port number N port number N) =====
|-
<p>This is the port-specific version of the IO screen. Displays one or more selected ports to view.</p>
|<p>NOTE</p>


|<p>Version 5.09+ has additional reboot options.</p><p>R,M reboots the APU directly to ROMSHELL mode (or NetMRS if applicable).</p><p>R,F performs a “fast” reboot. It shuts down and restarts the AEI application only. This option only takes a few seconds and is helpful when parameters have been changed that require a reboot. The computer P.O.S.T is not performed, nor are many “housekeeping” functions, such as code loading.</p><p>R,T (5.2+) will execute a full reboot after the next train clears.</p><p>R,C (5.2+, LX-800 processor only)</p><p>The LX-800 processor uses a protected partition for the embedded operating system. Some parameter changes made are kept on the protected partition. The R,C command was added to update these changes to the protected partition. You will be prompted when the R,C reboot is necessary.</p><p><br></p>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: #ecf0f1; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
|<div><p>PORT&nbsp;&nbsp; D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0&nbsp;&nbsp; HEX</p>
<p>-----&nbsp; -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --&nbsp;&nbsp; ----</p>
<p>0x310&nbsp;&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 0&nbsp; 0&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 1&nbsp;&nbsp; 0xF3</p></div><p>Example: PORTVIEW Command</p>


|}<p><br></p>
|}<p class="mwt-heading" style="text-align: center;">Example: PORTVIEW Command</p>


<br>
===== REBOOT =====
=== 4.4.2.25&nbsp; Watchdog Test (*'''WT''') ===
<p>Performs a software reboot. You will be prompted for confirmation. After the reboot, you will need to re-establish the connection to proceed.</p>
<p>The Watchdog Test ('''WT''') command tests the operation of the unit's watchdog timer circuit.''' '''The watchdog thread is placed in a "HALT" state (simulating a failure).''' '''If the watchdog circuit is operating properly, the unit restarts in less than four minutes (before “Seconds to failure” reaches .0).</p><p><br></p><div><p>---------------------------------------</p>
<p>!! Watchdog Circuit Test in Progress !!</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Press any key to stop test...</p>
<p>---------------------------------------</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Test is successful if the APU reboots</p>
<p>before "Seconds to failure" reaches 0.</p>
<p>The counter will stop when rebooting.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Seconds to failure : 078....</p></div><p>Figure 4.45: Watchdog Test Screen</p><p>1)&nbsp; To begin the test, type the '''WT '''command and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;.</p><p>2)&nbsp; To stop the test before it is completed, press any key. The message “Test aborted by user” displays.</p><p><br></p>


=== 4.4.2.26&nbsp; Zmodem Send File(s) ('''ZSEND''') ===
===== SHELL ''command argument switches'' =====
<p>The Zmodem Send File(s) ('''ZSEND''') command places the APU-102 in Zmodem send mode. Zmodem can send multiple files.</p><p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''ZSEND '''command in the following format:</p><p><br></p>
<p>Any commands entered after the SHELL command will be sent to DOS and treated as a DOS command. Batch files and DOS programs can be executed as well as commands embedded in the DOS command interpreter, such as COPY, ECHO, REN, DIR (with switches), etc.</p><p><br></p>


{|
{| style="border-collapse: collapse;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
|-  
|-  
|<p>Command Format</p>
| style="width: 65.8438px;" |<p style="text-align: center;">Caution</p>


|<p>Description</p>
| style="width: 1125.16px;" |<p>Use extreme caution with the SHELL command. Any command issued must NOT require any user intervention to complete the command or the APU will be inaccessible via the current port until it is rebooted. It should only be used by experienced users.</p><p><br></p>


|-
|}<p><br></p><p>Example:</p><p><br></p><p>SHELL COPY SPECIAL.BAT SPECIAL.BAK</p>
|<p>ZSEND</p>


|<p>Required. Command code.</p>
===== TIME =====
<p>Displays the following prompt with the current ROMSHELL site system time. To change the time, enter the new time using the format displayed in parentheses.</p>
<p>To accept the current time, press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;.</p>


|-  
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: #ecf0f1; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
|<p>Path</p>
|
<div><p>Current time is 17:45:45</p></div>
<p>Enter new time (hh:mm:ss):</p>
|}
<div></div>


|<p>Optional. The file path must be specified if directory location of the file to be transferred is not in the default directory.</p>
<p>'''Note''': Changing the date or time on the E-Series APU restarts the 20-minute watchdog. The P-Series APU handles time differently and may cause a reboot (time has expired). It is recommended that the system date and time be set with the AEI application. If date/time is set in ROMSHELL and then booted to the application, the time may be off due to time zones or daylight savings time settings. These settings are applied AFTER time is read from the CPU.</p>


|-
<br>
|<p>Filename for transfer</p>


|<p>Required. The file specification of the APU-102 file (or files) you want to send using Zmodem. Use wildcards (* or ?) to upload multiple files.</p>
===== TTL (Romshell 5.4+) =====
<p>Display or change the current “Time-To-Live” '''(TTL)''' before the watchdog timer reboots the APU-102.</p><p>1)&nbsp; To view or change TTL options, select one of the following command format options and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;.</p><p><br></p>


|}<p>'''Note:''' The path option is not available on application versions prior to 5.0. Files are sent from the default path only.</p><p>2)&nbsp; Refer to your communications software package for instructions on receiving the file. Most programs will auto-receive, but have differing options when receiving a duplicate file. Insure your program does not blindly “resume” when receiving a duplicate file. After file has been sent, the message “''N'' file(s) sent successfully” displays (where ''N'' = number of files).</p><p>4.4.2.27&nbsp; Xmodem Send File ('''XSEND''')</p><p>The Xmodem Send File ('''XSEND''') command transfers files from the APU-102 using the Xmodem protocol. When the APU-102 is in send mode, you can initiate a file transfer or a file download using the Xmodem protocol.</p><p><br></p><div><p>File length: 125</p>
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
<p>Ready to send</p></div><p>Figure 4.46: Xmodem Send File Screen</p><p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''XSEND '''command in the following format:</p><p><br></p>
 
{|
|-  
|-  
|<p>Command Format</p>
|<p>Command Format</p>
Line 3,092: Line 4,174:


|-  
|-  
|<p>XSEND</p>
|<p>TTL</p>


|<p>Required. Command code.</p>
|<p>Required. "Time-To-Live" before the watchdog timer reboots the APU-102. This command does not change the current TTL.</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>Path</p>
|<p>TTL,#</p>


|<p>Optional. The file path must be specified if directory location of the file to be transferred is not in the default directory.</p>
|<p>Optional. Changes “Time-To-Live” (in Seconds) before the watchdog timer reboots the APU-102.</p>


|-
|}<p>The following example shows a screen display if '''TTL''' is entered.</p>
|<p>Filename for transfer</p>


|<p>Required. The name of the APU-102 file you want to transfer in Xmodem send mode.</p>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: rgb(236, 240, 241); margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
| -RS- A:\>TTL<br>
Current Time-To-Live = 1076 (seconds).<br>
-RS- A:\>


|}<p><br></p><p>2)&nbsp; The message “Ready to send” displays. Refer to your communications software package for instructions on receiving the file.</p><p>If no action is taken to send the file, an XSEND error message “Local timeout” displays and you are returned to the ''APU102XP: &nbsp;Change'' prompt.</p>
|}


=== 4.4.2.28&nbsp; Xmodem1K Send File ('''XSEND1K''') ===
===== TYPE filename =====
<p>The Xmodem1K Send File command allows files to be transferred from the APU-102 using the Xmodem1K protocol. When the APU-102 is in send mode, you can initiate a file transfer or a file download using the Xmodem1K protocol.</p><p><br></p><div><p>File length: 741</p>
<p>Displays the contents of the filename entered after the command.<br><br></p>
<p>Ready to send</p></div><p>Figure 4.47: Xmodem1K Send File Screen</p>


<br><p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''XSEND1K '''command in the following format:</p><p><br></p>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: #ecf0f1; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
|
@ECHO OFF<br>@ECHO ----------------------------<br>type rom_ver.txt<br>@ECHO &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;ATS Systems<br>@ECHO ----------------------------<br>path a:\;c:\;c:\aei<br>PROMPT $P$G<br>
|}
<p>Example: TYPE Command with autoexec.bat filename (part of file displayed).</p>


{|
===== VER =====
|-
<p>Displays the ROMSHELL version.</p>
|<p>Command Format</p>


|<p>Description</p>
===== ZREC =====
<p>The Zmodem Receive File(s) (ZREC) command places the APU-102 in Zmodem receive mode. The files will be received into the current working directory. Zmodem can receive multiple files.</p><p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''ZREC '''command and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. The message, “Ready to receive,” displays.</p><p>2)&nbsp; Once the APU-102 is in the receive mode, use the Zmodem protocol on your communications program to initiate a file transfer or a file upload. Use wildcards (* or ?) to upload multiple files. Refer to your communications software package for instructions on sending the file.</p><p>After file is received, the message “N file(s) received successfully” displays (N representing the number of files.) and the -RS- (path)&gt; prompt re-displays.</p><p>If there are errors in the modem’s transmission, one or all of the following messages may display (where N represents the number of files).</p><p><br></p>


{|
|-  
|-  
|<p>XSEND1K</p>
|<p>N port overrun errors</p>


|<p>Required. Command code.</p>
|<p>Serial port has at least one overrun.</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>Path</p>
|<p>N byte framing errors</p>


|<p>Optional. The file path must be specified if directory location of the file to be transferred is not in the default directory.</p>
|<p>Serial port has at least one framing error.</p>


|-  
|-  
|<p>Filename for transfer</p>
|<p>N parity errors</p>


|<p>Required. The name of the APU-102 file you want to transfer in Xmodem1K send mode.</p>
|<p>Serial port has at least one parity error.</p>


|}<p>2)&nbsp; Refer to your communications software package for instructions on receiving the file.</p><p>If no action is taken to send the file, an XSEND error message “Local timeout” displays and you are returned to the ''APU102XP: &nbsp;Change'' prompt.</p>
|}<p><br></p><p>These errors are normal and the Zmodem protocol is designed to correct for them. If they become excessive, you may need to repair either the serial port or the modem.</p>


=== 4.4.2.29&nbsp; Local Ethernet File Receive ('''ZGET''') ===
===== ZRECR =====
<p>This command is used to transfer a single file between units residing on the same network. This similar to the ZRec function, except that it is only available to perform network transfers. This command ALWAYS gets the entire file from the beginning (ZGetR can be used to resume transfers that were interrupted).</p><p>Type the '''ZGET '''command in the following format:</p><p><br></p>
<p>The Zmodem Receive Resume ('''ZRECR''') command places the APU-102 in Zmodem receive restart mode. The files will be received into the current working directory. Zmodem can receive multiple files. If a file already exists on the unit, Zmodem will resume transfer of the existing file at the point where the previous transfer was interrupted. With ZRECR, previously interrupted transmissions can continue, which saves time.</p>
<p>'''Note''': The resume is done blindly, with no checks to ensure that the existing file has the same contents (up to the point of interruption) as the sent file. This means that if the file is a different version, the new file may be corrupted. Only use ZRECR on file transfers that you know were previously interrupted.</p>
<p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''ZRECR '''command and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. The message, “Ready to receive,” displays.</p>
<p>2)&nbsp; Once the APU-102 is in the receive mode, use the Zmodem protocol on your communications program to initiate a file transfer or a file upload. Use wildcards (* or ?) to upload multiple files. Refer to your communications software package for instructions on sending the file.</p>
<p>After file is received, the message “N file(s) received successfully” displays (N representing the number of files.) and the -RS- (path)&gt; prompt re-displays.</p>
<p>If there are errors in the modem’s transmission, one or all of the following messages may display (where N represents the number of files).</p>
<p><br></p>


{|
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
|-
| <p>N port overrun errors</p>
| <p>Serial port has at least one overrun.</p>
|-  
|-  
|<p>Command Format</p>
| <p>N byte framing errors</p>
 
| <p>Serial port has at least one framing error.</p>
|<p>Description</p>
 
|-  
|-  
|<p>ZGET</p>
| <p>N parity errors</p>
| <p>Serial port has at least one parity error.</p>
|}<p><br></p>
<p>These errors are normal and the Zmodem protocol is designed to correct for them. If they become excessive, you may need to repair either the serial port or the modem.</p>


|<p>Required. Command code.</p>
===== ZSEND filename =====
<p>The Zmodem Send File(s) ('''ZSEND''') command places the APU-102 in Zmodem send mode. Zmodem can send multiple files.</p><p>The message, “Ready to send,” displays. Use wild cards (* and ?) to send multiple files. Refer to your communications software package for instructions on receiving the file. Most programs will auto-receive, but have differing options when receiving a duplicate file. Insure your program does not blindly “resume” when receiving a duplicate file. After file has been sent, the message “N file(s) sent successfully” displays (where N = number of files) and the -RS- (path)&gt; prompt redisplays.</p><p>'''Note''': Refer to your communications software package for instructions on receiving the file.</p>


|-
===== Additional Commands (Not in HELP file) =====
|<p>Filename for transfer</p>
<p>You can change to a different drive as you would in DOS. Example: Type C: and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt; to change to the “C” drive.</p>


|<p>Required. The file specification of the APU-102 file get from another unit on the local network. Wildcards are not permitted. Use caution with this command as it will overwrite an existing destination file.</p>
=== Forcing the APU-102 to boot to ROMSHELL ===
<p>1)&nbsp; Power the APU off.</p>
<p>2)&nbsp; Power the APU on.</p>
<p>3)&nbsp; Immediately press and hold the SYS button on the front panel.</p>
<p>4)&nbsp; About 30 seconds after power up, the SYS LED will blink rapidly. Continue holding the SYS button until the rapid blink stops.</p>
<p>5)&nbsp; Release the SYS button. ROMSHELL will load in about 30 more seconds, indicated by a slow blinking SYS LED.</p>


|-
=== Resetting ROMSHELL Password (Startup ROM version 5.1 and higher) ===
|<p>IPAddressOrURL</p>
<p>'''Note''': Does not reset application password.</p>
<p>1)&nbsp; Power the APU off.</p>
<p>2)&nbsp; Power the APU on.</p>
<p>3)&nbsp; Immediately press and hold the SYS button on the front panel.<br>About 30 seconds after power up, the SYS LED will blink rapidly.</p>
<p>4)&nbsp; Release the SYS button and immediately press and hold for second blink sequence (about 5 sec).</p>
<p>5)&nbsp; Continue holding the SYS button until the second rapid blink sequence stops.</p>
<p>6)&nbsp; Release the SYS button. ROMSHELL will load in about 30 seconds, indicated by a slow blinking SYS LED. The password will be reset to the default (SECRET)</p>


|<p>Required. Network address of source computer.</p>
= NetMRS User Interface (Optional) =
== Overview ==
<p>NetMRS&nbsp;is an alternate operating mode of the APU-102 that runs under XPe and is preloaded to the compact flash. It has diagnostic functionality similar to ROMSHELL, but has added network connectivity. The L-Series APU (LX-800 equipped) only has[RCT4]&nbsp;[DDC5]&nbsp; NetMRS.&nbsp; Benefits of the NetMRS user interface include:</p><p>Additional Benefits:</p>


|-  
*Does not require a special communication software package, as with MRS.
|<p>IPPort</p>
*Modem port initialization is the same as specified in the AEI application’s parameters.
*Local port initialization [DDC6]independent of the AEI application and may be different. The baud rate is controlled by a flag file in the APU’s AEI directory. Refer to [[#Local_Port_Connection_and_Logon|Local Port Connection and Logon]] in the next section
*Network port initialization is the same as specified in the AEI application’s Ethernet parameters for telnet connectivity.<p>Why is NetMRS Running?</p><p>NetMRS follows most of the same rules as ROMSHELL. It has different file requirements as well as the capability of checking the integrity of key files. On P-Series APU-102 (LPMTX processor[RCT7]&nbsp;[DDC8]&nbsp;), there is currently no method to force NetMRS operation other than a R,M command from the AEI application.</p><p>Beginning with 5.1.1 Build 117, an L-Series APU-102 can be booted to NetMRS by holding the SYS button on power up in the same manner as LPMTX (P-series) and 486 (E-Series) APUs are forced to ROMSHELL.</p>
== NetMRS Operation ==
=== Local Port Connection and Logon ===
<p>1)&nbsp; Attach a PC or data terminal to the “LOCAL” communications port of the APU-102 unit. The APU-102 is configured as a DTE with a female 25-pin “D” RS-232 connector. It will use 8 data bits, no parity, and one stop bit. The baud rate is controlled by a flag file ('''96.DAT''') in the APU’s AEI directory. If the file is present, the local port is initialized at 9600 baud. If the file is absent, the port initializes at 2400. Setup your communications program to match[RCT9]&nbsp;[DDC10]&nbsp;.</p><p>2)&nbsp; Press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt; and the ''NetMRS'' responds with following login:</p><p>APU102XP NetMRS 1.2</p><p>Password:</p><p>3)&nbsp; Type your password and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. The default password is “SECRET[RCT11]&nbsp;[DDC12]&nbsp;” but can be changed. (Refer to '''Password''' command) You will see a prompt similar to the following example. From here you can enter any of the ''NetMRS'' commands.</p><p><br></p><p>-NetMRS- C:\AEI&gt;</p><p>'''Note''': The prompt will reflect the current working directory; in this case, the AEI directory on the “C” drive. The LX-800 CF is configured differently and the default AEI Application directory on it will be D:\AEI.</p>
=== Dial-up Connection ===
<p>1)&nbsp; Dial the site with any commercial communication package, and the modems will negotiate the best connection.</p><p>2)&nbsp; Press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt; and the ''NetMRS'' responds with following login:</p><p>APU102XP NetMRS 1.2</p><p>Password:</p><p>3)&nbsp; Type your password and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. The default password is “SECRET” but can be changed. (Refer to '''Password''' command) You will see a prompt similar to the following example. From here you can enter any of the ''NetMRS'' commands.</p><p><br></p><p>-NetMRS- C:\AEI&gt;</p><p>'''Note:''' The prompt will reflect the current working directory; in this case, the AEI directory on the “C” drive. The LX-800 CF is configured differently and the default AEI Application directory on it will be D:\AEI.</p>
=== Telnet Connection ===
<p>1)&nbsp; Connect to the site with any [RCT13]&nbsp;commercial communication package that supports telnet. You must have a valid connection path to the APU-102 to connect. You will need to specify the IP address and optionally, the port number. The APU-102 uses the default telnet port 23 unless specified differently in the AEI Application’s Ethernet port parameters.</p><p>2)&nbsp; Press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt; and the ''NetMRS'' responds with following login:</p><p>APU102XP NetMRS 1.2</p><p>Password:</p><p>3)&nbsp; Type your password and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. The default password is “SECRET” but can be changed. (Refer to '''Password''' command) You will see a prompt similar to the following example. From here you can enter any of the ''NetMRS'' commands.</p><p>-NetMRS- C:\AEI&gt;</p><p>'''Note''': The prompt will reflect the current working directory; in this case, the AEI directory on the “C” drive. The LX-800 CF is configured differently and the default AEI Application directory on it will be D:\AEI.</p>
== NetMRS System Commands ==
<p>Type &lt;'''?'''&gt; and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt; (or HELP and &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;) to display a list of available ''NetMRS ''commands. A list of the commands displays.</p>
<h5 class="mwt-heading" >Command Listing</h5>
<p><br></p>
<div>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: #ecf0f1; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
|
---------------<br>?<br>HELP<br>EXIT<br>CLS<br>DIR<br>TYPE<br>DEL<br>/<br>REBOOT<br>SHELL<br>ZSEND<br>ZREC<br>ZRECR<br>T<br>CD<br>VER<br>L<br>PASSWORD<br>PT<br>IPCONFIG<br>PING<br>
|}
</div>


|<p>Optional. IP Port on the destination computer. Defaults to 23 on the APU.</p>
=== Command Definitions ===
<p>The following defines and explains how to use each ''NetMRS'' command. The associated parameters appear in italics after the command, where applicable.</p>
<p><br></p>
<h5 class="mwt-heading" >?</h5>
<p>Displays the ''NetMRS'' command listing.</p>
<h5 class="mwt-heading" >/</h5>
<p>Displays APUINFO.DAT file and system metrics if available.</p>


|}<p><br></p>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: #ecf0f1; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
|
APU-102 Equipment Identifier V1.02


=== 4.4.2.30&nbsp; Local Ethernet File Receive Resume ('''ZGETR''') ===
<p>This command can be used to resume a ZGET file transfer that was interrupted.</p><p>'''Note:''' The resume is done blindly, with no checks to ensure that the existing file has the same contents (up to the point of interruption) as the partial file. This means that if the file is a different version, the new file may be corrupted. Only use ZGETR on file transfers that you know were previously interrupted.</p><p>Type the '''ZGETR '''command in the following format:</p><p><br></p>


{|
|-
|<p>Command Format</p>


|<p>Description</p>
PROCESSOR: &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;Pentium<br>BIOS CHKSUM: &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;0xA7BA<br>CONVENTIONAL MEMORY: &nbsp; &nbsp;640 KBytes<br>EXTENDED MEMORY: &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;N/A KBytes<br>COM1 FOUND: &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; PORT = 0x03F8 IRQ = 4<br>COM2 FOUND: &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; PORT = 0x02F8 IRQ = 3<br>COM3 FOUND: &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; PORT = 0x0380 IRQ = 10<br>COM4 FOUND: &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; PORT = 0x0388 IRQ = 10<br>COM5 FOUND: &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; PORT = 0x0288 IRQ = 10<br>COM6 FOUND: &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; PORT = 0x0230 IRQ = 10<br>COM CARD: &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; COM4 Card<br>MODEM TYPE: &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; 56000<br>SSD TYPE: &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; PCM-SSD<br>READER VERSION: &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; 2.80<br>APU SOFTWARE VERSION: &nbsp; 5.11 B101<br>STARTUP ROM VERSION: &nbsp; &nbsp;5.4<br>DOS VERSION: &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;5.00


|-
Free Mem: 27,140,096, Free Disk: 53,743,616 KB
|<p>ZGETR</p>


|<p>Required. Command code.</p>
<br>Metric &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Value<br>------------------------------ ----------<br>Startup....................... 285<br>SpontaneousBoot............... 279<br>SoftBoot...................... 0<br>Trains........................ 0<br>FileReadbackSizeMismatch...... 0<br>FileReadbackDataMismatch...... 0<br>SystemParameterRestores....... 1<br>SystemParameterNoRecover...... 0<br>
|}
<p><br></p>
<h5 class="mwt-heading" >CD path</h5>
<p>Works like a DOS CD command. It changes to the specified directory and displays the ''-NetMRS- (path)&gt;'' prompt, reflecting the now current working directory.</p>
<h5 class="mwt-heading" >CLS</h5>
<p>Clears the screen and displays the ''-NetMRS- (path)&gt;'' prompt.</p>
<h5 class="mwt-heading" >DIR (optional parameters)</h5>
<p>Use the DIR command alone to display a directory of all files in the current path. To display specific files, add the optional path and filename arguments using standard DOS conventions including wildcard arguments (* or ?). This is not a true DOS DIR command though, therefore do not apply any “/” switches to your command line. If a true DOS DIR is desired, refer to the SHELL command below.</p>


|-  
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: #ecf0f1; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
|<p>Filename for transfer</p>
|
-NetMRS- C:\AEI&gt;dir m*.ini<br>M144-12 &nbsp;INI &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;890 &nbsp;10-25-11 &nbsp;12:54&nbsp;<br>M144-144 INI &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;724 &nbsp;10-25-11 &nbsp;12:54&nbsp;<br>M144-24 &nbsp;INI &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;815 &nbsp;10-25-11 &nbsp;12:54&nbsp;<br>M144-3 &nbsp; INI &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;886 &nbsp;10-25-11 &nbsp;12:54&nbsp;<br>M144-48 &nbsp;INI &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;814 &nbsp;10-25-11 &nbsp;12:54&nbsp;<br>M144-96 &nbsp;INI &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;814 &nbsp;10-25-11 &nbsp;12:54&nbsp;<br>MCM1414V INI &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;1,187 &nbsp;10-25-11 &nbsp;12:54&nbsp;<br>MCM2400 &nbsp;INI &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;649 &nbsp;10-25-11 &nbsp;12:54&nbsp;<br>MCM2496M INI &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;1,381 &nbsp;10-25-11 &nbsp;12:54&nbsp;<br>MDM144 &nbsp; INI &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;684 &nbsp;10-25-11 &nbsp;12:54&nbsp;<br>MDM144BN INI &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;801 &nbsp;10-25-11 &nbsp;12:54&nbsp;<br>MDM144S &nbsp;INI &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;1,125 &nbsp;10-25-11 &nbsp;12:54&nbsp;<br>MODEM &nbsp; &nbsp;INI &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; 65 &nbsp;10-25-11 &nbsp;12:54&nbsp;<br>&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;13 file(s) &nbsp;10,835 bytes &nbsp;98,451,456 bytes free<br>
|}
<div>
</div>
<h5 class="mwt-heading" >DEL&nbsp; filename</h5>
<p>Deletes the specified filename from the system. Wildcards (*) and (?) are permitted to delete multiple files.</p>
<h5 class="mwt-heading" >EXIT</h5>
<p>Exits the NetMRS program. Disconnects without displaying any messages.</p>
<h5 class="mwt-heading" >HELP</h5>
<p>Displays the ''NetMRS'' command listing. Identical to the &lt;'''?'''&gt; command.</p>
<p><br></p>
<h5 class="mwt-heading" >IPCONFIG</h5>
<p>This command works just like the basic DOS IPCONFIG command. For advanced options and switches, run IPCONFIG under the SHELL command</p>


|<p>Required. The file specification of the APU-102 file get from another unit on the local network. Wildcards are not permitted. Use caution with this command as it may overwrite or corrupt an existing destination file. (see note above).</p>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: #ecf0f1; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
|
ipconfig &lt; y.dat &gt; dosshell.txt


|-
<br>Windows IP Configuration
|<p>IPAddressOrURL</p>


|<p>Required. Network address of source computer.</p>
<br>Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:


|-  
&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Connection-specific DNS Suffix &nbsp;. :&nbsp;<br>&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : 192.168.0.2<br>&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 255.255.255.0<br>&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . : 192.168.0.12<br>
|<p>IPPort</p>
|}
<h5 class="mwt-heading" >L</h5>
<p>Displays the last command. Press &lt;Enter&gt; to execute the command or edit as necessary.</p>
<h5 class="mwt-heading" >PASSWORD newpassword</h5>
<p>Changes the NetMRS logon password. The system will ask for confirmation of the new password. This command has no effect on the applications password. The password is in the encrypted file “PASSWORD.TXT” on the root of the AEI Application drive.</p>
<h5 class="mwt-heading" >PING</h5>
<p>This command works just like the basic DOS PING command. For advanced options and switches, run PING under the SHELL command.</p>
<p><br></p>
<div>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: #ecf0f1; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
|
ping 192.168.0.12 &lt; y.dat &gt; dosshell.txt


|<p>Optional. IP Port on the destination computer. Defaults to 23 on the APU.</p>
<br>Pinging 192.168.0.12 with 32 bytes of data:


|}<p>4.4.2.31&nbsp; Packet Internet Groper ('''PING)'''''' '''</p><p>This command works just like the basic Windows command line PING command.</p><p><br></p>
Reply from 192.168.0.12: bytes=32 time=1ms TTL=128<br>Reply from 192.168.0.12: bytes=32 time&lt;1ms TTL=128<br>Reply from 192.168.0.12: bytes=32 time&lt;1ms TTL=128<br>Reply from 192.168.0.12: bytes=32 time&lt;1ms TTL=128


{|
Ping statistics for 192.168.0.12:<br>&nbsp; &nbsp; Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss),<br>Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds:<br>&nbsp; &nbsp; Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 1ms, Average = 0ms<br>
|-  
|}
|<p>Command Format</p>
</div>
 
<h5 class="mwt-heading" >PT Portfile</h5>
|<p>Description</p>
<p>Attaches to defined ports. For example, if logged into the local port, you could attach to the modem port ($REMPORT.DAT) and execute AT commands to the modem. &lt;ESC&gt;-C exits the PT attach utility.''' '''</p>
<p>'''Note:'''&nbsp; Legacy ports only-not compatible with ports 3-6 on network capable APU-102s.</p>
<h5 class="mwt-heading" >REBOOT</h5>
<p>Performs a software reboot. You will be prompted for confirmation. After the reboot, you will need to re-establish the connection to proceed.</p>
<h5 class="mwt-heading" >SHELL ''command argument switches''</h5>
<p>Any commands entered after the SHELL command will be sent to DOS command shell and treated as a DOS command. Batch files and DOS programs can be executed as well as commands embedded in the DOS command interpreter, such as COPY, ECHO, REN, DIR (with switches), etc.</p>
<p><br></p>


{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
|-  
|-  
|<p>PING</p>
| <p>Caution</p>
| <p>Use extreme caution with the SHELL command. Any command issued must NOT require any user intervention to complete the command or the APU will be inaccessible via the current port until it is rebooted. Some commands could even hang the NetMRS application. Shell commands should only be used by experienced users. Additionally, NetMRS emulates Windows XP version of DOS and has different options than ROMSHELL which is DOS 5.0. Without the “/y” switch to force an over-write in the following example, Windows DOS would prompt the user to confirm the over-write an existing file, and would hang the port.</p>
|}<p>Example:</p>
<p>SHELL COPY SPECIAL.BAT SPECIAL.BAK /y</p>
<h5 class="mwt-heading" >T</h5>
<p>The Set Date/Time ('''T''') command displays and sets the APU-102 date and time.</p>


|<p>Required. Command code.</p>


|-  
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: #ecf0f1; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
|<p>IPAddressOrURL</p>
|
Current time Sun Jun 01 &nbsp;13:30:18 2004


|<p>Required. Network address of destination computer. (192.168.0.12 in example below)</p>
Enter New Date mm/dd/yyyy &gt;06/01/2004<br>Enter New Time hh:mm:ss &nbsp; &gt;13:30:18


|}<p><br></p><div><p>ping&nbsp; 192.168.0.12 &lt; y.dat 1&gt; dosshell.txt 2&gt; dosshll2.txt</p>
New time Sun Jun 01 13:45:00<br>
|}
<p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''T '''command''' '''and press '''&lt;Enter&gt;'''.</p>
<p>2)&nbsp; Type the date in the format indicated and press '''&lt;Enter&gt;'''.</p>
<p>3)&nbsp; Enter the time in military time format (24-hour clock, hh:mm:ss) and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. The new date and time you established displays at the bottom of the screen.</p>
<h5 class="mwt-heading" >TYPE filename</h5>
<p>Displays the contents of the filename entered after the command.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Pinging 192.168.0.12 with 32 bytes of data:</p>
<div>
{| class="wikitable" style="border-collapse: collapse; width: 60%; background-color: #ecf0f1; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="2px" cellpadding="4px"
|
-NetMRS- C:\AEI&gt;dir m*.ini
 
ATZS0=0<br>ATE0<br>ATV0<br>AT&C1<br>AT&D2<br>AT\N3<br>ATS7=60<br>ATX1<br>ATS0=1<br>
|}
</div>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Reply from 192.168.0.12: bytes=32 time=1ms TTL=128</p>
<p>Example: TYPE Command with MODEM.INI filename</p>
<p>Reply from 192.168.0.12: bytes=32 time&lt;1ms TTL=128</p>
<h5 class="mwt-heading" >VER</h5>
<p>Reply from 192.168.0.12: bytes=32 time&lt;1ms TTL=128</p>
<p>Displays the NetMRS version.</p>
<p>Reply from 192.168.0.12: bytes=32 time&lt;1ms TTL=128</p>
<h5 class="mwt-heading" >ZREC</h5>
<p>The Zmodem Receive File(s) (ZREC) command places the APU-102 in Zmodem receive mode. The files will be received into the current working directory. Zmodem can receive multiple files.</p>
<p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''ZREC '''command and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. The message, “Ready to receive,” displays.</p>
<p>2)&nbsp; Once the APU-102 is in the receive mode, use the Zmodem protocol on your communications program to initiate a file transfer or a file upload. Use wildcards (* or ?) to upload multiple files. Refer to your communications software package for instructions on sending the file.</p>
<p>After file is received, the message “N file(s) received successfully” displays (N representing the number of files.) and the -NetMRS- (path)&gt; prompt re-displays.</p>
<p>If there are errors in the modem’s transmission, one or all of the following messages may display (where N represents the number of files).</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Ping statistics for 192.168.0.12:</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss),</p>
<p>Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds:</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 1ms, Average = 0ms</p></div><p>Figure 4.48: Sample Ping Response Screen</p><p>For advanced options and switches, run PING under the SHELL command.</p>


<br>
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
=== 4.4.2.32&nbsp; Network Time Protocol ('''NTP)''' '''&nbsp;''' ===
|-
<p>This command initiates a time sync request with a Network Time Protocol server (if configured in system parameters).</p><p><br></p>
| <p>N port overrun errors</p>
 
| <p>Serial port has at least one overrun.</p>
=== 4.4.2.33&nbsp; Reassociate Trains ('''RA)''' ===
|-
<p>Reassociate Trains is used in Distributed Processing Systems. The RA command reassociates all local trains to remote trains.</p><p><br></p><p>Refer to the ''APU103 Installation & Operation Manual'''' ''for additional information.</p>
| <p>N byte framing errors</p>
 
| <p>Serial port has at least one framing error.</p>
=== 4.4.2.34&nbsp; Command Shell '''(SHELL)''' ===
<p>SHELL ''command argument switches''</p><p>Any commands entered after the SHELL command will be sent to DOS command shell and treated as a DOS command. Batch files and DOS programs resident on the APU-102 can be executed as well as commands embedded in the DOS command interpreter, such as COPY, ECHO, REN, DIR (with switches), etc.</p><p><br></p>
 
{|
|-  
|-  
|<p>Caution</p>
| <p>N parity errors</p>
 
| <p>Serial port has at least one parity error.</p>
|<p>Use extreme caution with the SHELL command. Any command issued must NOT require any user intervention to complete the command or the APU-102 will be inaccessible via the current port until it is rebooted (for example, “Overwrite file Y/N?”). Some commands could even hang the AEI application in a manner that prevents a watchdog recovery. Shell commands should only be used by experienced users. In version 5.2, a timeout function was added to exit a hung Shell command.</p>
|}<p><br></p>
 
<p>These errors are normal and the Zmodem protocol is designed to correct for them. If they become excessive, you may need to repair either the serial port or the modem.</p>
|}<p><br></p><p>Example:</p><p><br></p><p>SHELL COPY SPECIAL.BAT SPECIAL.BAK /y</p>
<h5 class="mwt-heading" >ZRECR</h5>
 
<p>The Zmodem Receive Resume ('''ZRECR''') command places the APU-102 in Zmodem receive restart mode. The files will be received into the current working directory. Zmodem can receive multiple files. If a file already exists on the unit, Zmodem will resume transfer of the existing file at the point where the previous transfer was interrupted. With ZRECR, previously interrupted transmissions can continue, which saves time.</p>
=== 4.4.2.35&nbsp; Main Menu Help ('''MAIN?''') ===
<p>'''Note''': The resume is done blindly, with no checks to ensure that the existing file has the same contents (up to the point of interruption) as the sent file. This means that if the file is a different version, the new file may be corrupted. Only use ZRECR on file transfers that you know were previously interrupted.</p>
<p>Main Menu commands (and help) are accessible from the Supervisor menu.</p><p>This command displays the Main Menu (or System Menu). All Main Menu functions can be executed from the Supervisory level.</p>
<p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''ZRECR '''command and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. The message, “Ready to receive,” displays.</p>
 
<p>2)&nbsp; Once the APU-102 is in the receive mode, use the Zmodem protocol on your communications program to initiate a file transfer or a file upload. Use wildcards (* or ?) to upload multiple files. Refer to your communications software package for instructions on sending the file.</p>
=== 4.4.2.36&nbsp; Supervisory Help Screen ('''?''') ===
<p>After file is received, the message “N file(s) received successfully” displays (N representing the number of files.) and the -NetMRS- (path)&gt; prompt re-displays.</p>
<p>Type '''?''' to re-display the current menu screen.</p>
<p>If there are errors in the modem’s transmission, one or all of the following messages may display (where N represents the number of files).</p>
 
== 4.4.3&nbsp; Additional commands ==
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
 
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"  
{| style="height: 28px;"
|- style="height: 28px;"
| style="height: 28px; width: 49.6406px;" |<p>Caution</p>
 
| style="height: 28px; width: 615.234px;" |<p>For skilled administrators only. Improper use of these commands can make APU-102 inoperable.</p>
 
|}<p><br></p>
 
=== 4.4.3.1&nbsp; Delete File(s) ('''REMOVE''') &nbsp; ===
<p>Used to manually delete files. Works similar to DOS DEL command. You will be prompted for confirmation to execute the file deletion. After command execution, a summary of deleted files displays.</p><p><br></p>
 
{|
|-  
|-  
|<p>Command Format</p>
| <p>N port overrun errors</p>
 
| <p>Serial port has at least one overrun.</p>
|<p>Description</p>
 
|-  
|-  
|<p>REMOVE</p>
| <p>N byte framing errors</p>
 
| <p>Serial port has at least one framing error.</p>
|<p>Required. Command.</p>
 
|-  
|-  
|<p>FILENAME.EXT</p>
| <p>N parity errors</p>
 
| <p>Serial port has at least one parity error.</p>
|<p>Required. File(s) to delete.</p><p>Must specify both basefile name and extension.</p><p>Wildcards ? and * allowed</p>
|}<p><br></p>
 
<p>These errors are normal and the Zmodem protocol is designed to correct for them. If they become excessive, you may need to repair either the serial port or the modem.</p>
|}
<h5 class="mwt-heading" >ZSEND filename</h5>
 
<p>The Zmodem Send File(s) ('''ZSEND''') command places the APU-102 in Zmodem send mode. Zmodem can send multiple files.</p>
=== 4.4.3.2&nbsp; External Temperature Probe Commands ===
<p>The message, “Ready to send,” displays. Use wild cards (* and ?) to send multiple files. Refer to your communications software package for instructions on receiving the file. Most programs will auto-receive, but have differing options when receiving a duplicate file. Insure your program does not blindly “resume” when receiving a duplicate file. After file has been sent, the message “N file(s) sent successfully” displays (where N = number of files) and the -NetMRS- (path)&gt; prompt redisplays.</p>
<p>Used when external Rail Temperature Probe is properly installed and configured.</p><p>Force TempProbe Reading ('''XTPNOW)'''</p><p>Display Last TempProbe Reading''' (''''''XTPDEBUG)'''</p>
<p>'''Note''': Refer to your communications software package for instructions on receiving the file.</p>
 
<h5 class="mwt-heading" >Additional Commands (Not in HELP file)</h5>
=== 4.4.3.3&nbsp; Acquisition Process Info''' (''''''ACQ''')[SAS3]&nbsp; ===
<p>You can change to a different drive as you would in DOS. Example: Type D: and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt; to change to the “D” drive.</p>
<p><br></p><div><p>ACQ Report is not running</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Next ACQ sequence will be 1013</p></div>
{| style="border-collapse: collapse; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;" border="1px" cellpadding="2px"
 
=== 4.4.3.4&nbsp; Cubic Acoustic History''' (''''''CAHHISTORY)''' ===
=== 4.4.3.5&nbsp; Modem Stats''' (''''''MDMS''') ===
<p>Display modem statistics including reset, initialization, connection, and disconnection stats.</p>
 
<br>
=== 4.4.3.6&nbsp; Reset Modem Stats''' (''''''MDMS,R''') ===
<p>Resets the Modem Statistic file.</p>
 
=== 4.4.3.7&nbsp; Site Notepad''' (''''''NOTE) 5.2+''' ===
<p>Used to manage banner messages that appear during the login process.</p><p>Usage: NOTE ''Option Argument''</p>
 
{|
|-
|<p>Option [Argument]:</p>
 
|<p><br></p>
 
|-
|<p>&nbsp; A [message]&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</p>
 
|<p>&nbsp;Add a message</p>
 
|-
|<p>&nbsp; D [message number]&nbsp;</p>
 
|<p>&nbsp;Delete message number</p>
 
|-
|<p>&nbsp; C&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</p>
 
|<p>&nbsp;Clear all messages</p>
 
|-
|<p>&nbsp; P&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</p>
 
|<p>&nbsp;Print all messages</p>
 
|-
|<p>&nbsp; L&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</p>
 
|<p>&nbsp;Toggle whether to display notes at user login</p><p><br></p>
 
|}<div><p>COMET ELECTRONICS</p>
<p>Automatic Equipment Identification System</p>
<p>APU Software Version: 5.2.0.4</p>
<p>CPU Type: LPMTX</p>
<p>AMTECH Model AI1200 Ver 2.90 SN41656</p>
<p>Reader #1 is not in current configuration</p>
<p>Thu 02/11/2015&nbsp;&nbsp; 08:59:03</p>
<p>Host Reporting: On, All</p>
<p>Last LOGON: Wed 02/10/15&nbsp;&nbsp; 15:06:30</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>'''================== Site Notes ==================='''</p>
<p>'''1)&nbsp; Updated to 5.2.0.4 12/11/2014 @ 11:22'''</p>
<p>'''================================================='''</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>USID:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; COMET00001</p>
<p>Site Name:&nbsp; TEST UNIT</p>
<p>Display help command - "?"</p>
<p>APU102XP:Main 1&gt;</p></div><p>Sample login screen with Note shown.</p><p>4.4.3.8&nbsp; Set debug flags''' (''''''SET)'''</p><p>Communications Logging</p><p>&nbsp; '''SET LOGCOM 1''' Turns com logging on</p><p>&nbsp; '''SET LOGCOM 0''' Turns com logging off</p><p>All communications are logged to text files, outbound communications are logged to [port file].TX, inbound communications are logged to [port file].RX</p><p>'''''WARNING:'''''&nbsp; These log files are not managed by the Disk Manager and will continue to grow in size indefinitely!!! DO NOT leave logging active for an extended period of time!!!</p><p>Manually delete the *.TX and *.RX files when done.</p><p>Telnet Escape Characters enable/disable</p><p>&nbsp; '''SET TELNET 1''' Turns on escape characters</p><p>&nbsp; '''SET TELNET 0''' Turns off escape characters</p><p>4.4.3.9&nbsp; User Access Account Management ('''USER''') 5.2+</p><p>User level access control. Higher security''' '''than standard 2 level APU security.</p><p>Usage:''' User [option] [parameters]'''</p><p>Options [Parameters]</p><p>add&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; [username] [password]</p><p>remove&nbsp;&nbsp; [username]</p><p>show</p><p>Note: To change the password of an existing user, simply add the user again, but with the new password.</p><p>'''&nbsp;'''</p>
 
=== 4.4.3.10&nbsp; View Channel Info''' (''''''VCI)''' ===
<p>Lists all currently used ports and displays diagnostic data.</p><p><br></p><div><p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; --- Locked --- -Depacket-</p>
<p>#&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Name&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; PID&nbsp;&nbsp; Dev&nbsp; Port&nbsp; Baud Ctrl Stat #S&nbsp;&nbsp; By&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Sec&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Run? State</p>
<p>-- ----------- ----- ----- ----- ---- ---- ---- --- ----- -------- ---- -----</p>
<p>0&nbsp; $REMPORT&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp; COMN&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 1 6&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0002 0020&nbsp;&nbsp; 3&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Y&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4</p>
<p>1&nbsp; $LOCPORT&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0&nbsp;&nbsp; COMN&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 2 3&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0003 0005&nbsp;&nbsp; 2&nbsp;&nbsp; 05&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0000&nbsp;&nbsp; Y&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4</p>
<p>2&nbsp; ETHERNET01&nbsp;&nbsp; 30&nbsp;&nbsp; TCPIP&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 23 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0002 0000&nbsp;&nbsp; 1&nbsp;&nbsp; 30&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0000&nbsp;&nbsp; Y&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4</p>
<p>3&nbsp; ETHERNET02&nbsp;&nbsp; 31&nbsp;&nbsp; TCPIP&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 23 0&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0002 0001&nbsp;&nbsp; 1&nbsp;&nbsp; 31&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0742&nbsp;&nbsp; Y&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4</p>
<p>12 AVI1PORT&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 1&nbsp;&nbsp; COMN&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4 4&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0003 0001&nbsp;&nbsp; 1&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Y&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 4</p></div><p>Sample VCI</p><p><br></p>
 
=== 4.4.3.11&nbsp; XTrack Log''' (''''''XTL)''' – Currently not available (Comet Engineering use only). ===
=== 4.4.3.12&nbsp; Watchdog Monitor Stats''' (''''''WDM)''' ===
<p><br></p><p>Displays stats for the software watchdog.</p><p><br></p><div><p>PID&nbsp; Timeout&nbsp;&nbsp; Low Mark</p>
<p>===&nbsp; ========&nbsp; ========</p>
<p>&nbsp;23&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 60000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 45000</p>
<p>&nbsp; 2&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 30000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 25000</p>
<p>100&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 300000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 295000</p>
<p>114&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 300000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 295000</p>
<p>113&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 300000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 121000</p>
<p>112&nbsp; &nbsp;&nbsp;300000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 121000</p>
<p>111&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 300000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 295000</p>
<p>110&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 300000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 295000</p>
<p>104&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 300000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 112000</p>
<p>103&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 300000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 112000</p>
<p>102&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 300000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 112000</p>
<p>101&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 300000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 112000</p>
<p>&nbsp; 1&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 300000&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 295000</p></div><p>Sample WDM</p>
 
=== 4.4.3.13&nbsp; Test FTP Connection''' ''''''(FTP)''' ===
<p>Attempts to open a socket on port 22 at the specified IP address or host name and reports back success or failure.</p><p>Usage: '''FTP [IP Address or Host Name]'''</p>
 
=== 4.4.3.14&nbsp; Restart Network ('''STARTNET)''' (5.2+) ===
Restarts network to apply network related parameter changes without rebooting the APU-102
=== 4.4.3.15&nbsp; Switch Session ===
<p>Switches to the next session without logging out to session selection screen and choosing a different session. Must be initially logged into Session1, Supervisory level to use. At last Session, command will return to Session 1.</p><p>Switch session &lt;CTRL&gt;-G, followed by &lt;ENTER&gt;</p><p><br></p><p><br></p>
 
<br>
= Edit Parameters ('''EP''') Menu =
<p>The Edit Parameters Menu allows those with Supervisory Menu access to view and update current APU-102 parameters. As explained in the ''Supervisory Menu Commands'' section, type the EP command at the ''APU102XP: &nbsp;Change'' prompt on the Supervisory Menu to access the Edit Parameters menu.</p>
 
== 4.5.1&nbsp; Parameter Editing Methods ==
<p>Interactive Method</p><p>This method allows you to select a parameter group and view and/or edit its parameters using a simple menu style interface.</p><p>''Example'': Follow the steps below to give the site a new session name using the interactive method:</p><p>1)&nbsp; Enter the '''EP '''command at the ''APU102XP: &nbsp;Change'' prompt. The Edit Parameters menu displays. See screen sample in 4.4.2.12 Edit Parameters (EP).</p><p>2)&nbsp; Type 1 for Session1 because you know that the "Session1" parameter group contains the site name. ''The Edit Parameters – Session 1'' screen displays:</p><p><br></p><div><p>Edit Parameters -</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp; 1. Session1</p>
<p>&nbsp; 2. Session2</p>
<p>&nbsp; 3. Session3</p>
<p>&nbsp; 4. Session4</p>
<p>&nbsp; 5. LocalSupport</p>
<p>&nbsp; 6. RemoteSupport</p>
<p>&nbsp; 7. Acquisition</p>
<p>&nbsp; 8. Ports</p>
<p>&nbsp; 9. DiskManager</p>
<p>&nbsp;10. TimeZoneControl</p>
<p>&nbsp;11. DaylightSavings</p>
<p>&nbsp;12. SysDiags</p>
<p>&nbsp;13. DebugFlags</p>
<p>&nbsp;14. NetMenu</p>
<p>&nbsp;15. SupportThreads</p>
<p>&nbsp;16. MoreSessions</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>[D]ump or [L]oad parameters, e[X]it &gt;</p></div><p><br></p><p>3)&nbsp; Select '''1. SiteInformation.''' The following screen displays, showing that the current setting of this parameter is “Misc Railroad”:</p>
 
<br><p><br></p><div><p><br></p>
<p>Edit Parameters - Session1</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; 1. SiteInformation</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; 2. AEIReportOpts</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; 3. AEIReportConnect</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; 4. MaintReportOpts</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; 5. MaintReportConnect</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; 6. Security</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; 7. T94</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; 8. CP</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; 9. CR160</p>
<p>&nbsp; 10. EarlyWarning</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;[D]ump or [L]oad parameters, e[X]it &gt;1</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;Editing Session1.SiteInformation</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;Ctrl-B MOVES BACKWARDS</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;SalutationMessage = My Railroad &gt;</p></div><p><br></p><p>4)&nbsp; Press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt; to advance to the next parameter of the group without changing the current setting.</p><p>-'' or -''</p><p>Type the new session name and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt; to change the setting. The ''SalutationMessage'' field displays the new entry and you automatically advance to the next parameter of the group, if any.</p><p>'''Note:'''&nbsp; No need to burrow to the end of a group if you do not want to make any more changes, press '''&lt;ESC&gt; '''to return to go up to the group menu.</p><p>If you want to modify a parameter in the group that you have already bypassed, press &lt;'''Ctrl&gt;&lt;''''''B'''&gt; until you return to the desired parameter.</p><p>Command Line Method</p><p>Each parameter group has a name, as does each individual parameter in a group. In the above example, we interactively changed the "SalutationMessage" parameter. We set “Session1.SalutationMessage” to “My Railroad," with the EP function guiding us. The parameter could have also been changed at the EP command line by typing “Session1.SalutationMessage=My Railroad” and pressing &lt;Enter&gt;. Parameters are represented as statements rather than menu selections, which allow the entire parameter set to be “batched.”</p><p>Batch Operations</p><p>Batching allows parameters to be uploaded or downloaded in groups, as opposed to one-by-one using the interactive method. In our applications, batching allows you to gather and store all parameters for the site in one file. Because the file is human readable and editable using any text editor, viewing and/or modifying the system parameters from a remote site is a simple process. It also allows a site to be duplicated easily in the event of a complete system failure. While reloading code to a site may be a simple operation, reconfiguring the site exactly as it was (i.e. parameters) is not.</p><p>''Example: Replacing Sites;'' The solid state disk needs to be replaced due to an upgrade. Fortunately, you logged an EP dump of the site parameters just after the site went into operation. After the local technician put the unconfigured spare unit in place at the site, connect and upload the EP dump back to the site. Reboot the APU-102 when finished to ensure that the new parameters have taken effect. When appropriate (depending on AEI application version), log back in and do parameter backup (BP) and update the system mirror image for accurate system recovery. .</p><p>''Example: Cloning Sites'' Batch operations are useful for duplicating sites. For example, if another unit is added at another location, everything at the new site is identical, except for the name, number, etc. Simply edit the captured dump file to make appropriate changes and upload to the new site with the modified version.</p><p>Editing Parameter Groups</p><p>Each parameter group on the Edit Parameters menu contains a list of individual parameters that may be edited. For parameter descriptions, valid values, and default values, refer to ''Appendix A: System Parameters''.</p>
 
=== 4.5.1.1&nbsp; Downloading Parameters ===
<p>To download (or dump) all parameter statements for the system:</p><p>1)&nbsp; Enter the '''EP '''command at the ''APU102XP:&nbsp; Change'' prompt. The Edit Parameters menu displays. See screen sample in 4.4.2.12 Edit Parameters (EP).</p><p>2)&nbsp; Type &lt;'''D'''&gt; for Dump at the ''Edit Parameters'' menu command prompt. The “Press enter to start…” prompt allows you to start a capture file on the communications package you are using to store the parameters.</p><p>3)&nbsp; The '''EP''' command then downloads the parameter statements to you. When the last parameter displays, you can press &lt;ESC&gt; to return to the previous parameter listing menu or wait for the inactivity timeout to do the same.</p><p>The following is an example of a parameter dump from a sample APU-102 application:</p><p><br></p><div><p>TimeZoneControl.ReferenceTimeZone=6</p>
<p>TimeZoneControl.TimeSyncWithHost=1</p>
<p>SysDiags.PresenceLoop.MinAxles=3</p>
<p>SysDiags.PresenceLoop.LowSpeedThresh=4</p>
<p>SysDiags.PresenceLoop.HighSpeedThresh=15</p>
<p>SysDiags.PresenceLoop.PresTimeOutAboveSpeed=15</p>
<p>SysDiags.PresenceLoopPresenceTimeoutSeconds=30</p>
<p>SysDiags.PresenceLoop.SecondsBetweenTrains=20</p>
<p>SysDiags.Antenna.ConsecutiveTrains=1</p>
<p>SysDiags.Antenna.MinTrainLength=10</p>
<p>SysDiags.Antenna.FatalTagPercent=1</p>
<p>SysDiags.Antenna.WarningTagPercent=50</p>
<p>SysDiags.WheelDet.ConsecutiveTrains=1</p>
<p>SysDiags.WheelDet.MinValidTagPairs=3</p>
<p>SysDiags.WheelDet.TrainsToReview=0</p>
<p>SysDiags.WheelDet.AxlesToReview=0</p>
<p>SysDiags.WheelDet.Mismatch=0</p>
<p>SysDiags.WheelDet.LowtoleranceMismatch=0</p>
<p>SysDiags.WheelDet.LowToleranceSpeed=0</p></div><p>Figure 4.49: Parameter Dump Example (partial)</p>
 
=== 4.5.1.2&nbsp; Uploading Parameters ===
<p>Before you can do a parameter upload, you will need a file containing the parameters. The easiest way to obtain a parameter file is to create one using the download procedure described above.</p><p>To upload a parameter file, enter &lt;'''L'''&gt; for Load at the EP prompt and send the file to the unit using your communications package’s “RAW ASCII TRANSMIT” or “TEXT” command. EP echoes back to you the parameter statements it receives as well as a message indicating how well it digested each message. If the EP command does not like a parameter or setting, it will let you know. (It’s a good idea to log the message stream). When the last parameter displays, you can press &lt;ESC&gt; to return to the previous parameter listing menu or wait for the inactivity timeout to do the same.</p><p><br></p>
 
{|
|-
|<p>Caution</p>
 
|<p>Pay attention to the responses. As the number of parameters grow with the application development, it is possible to over-run the buffer on the APU-102, especially if using the Local Port, resulting in parameters not getting updated as desired.</p>
 
|}<p>Some communications programs will allow you to “paste” text to the screen and can be a handy method of loading partial parameter files.</p><p>Reboot the APU-102 when finished to ensure that the new parameters have taken effect. When appropriate (depending on AEI application version), log back in and do parameter backup (BP) and update the system mirror image for accurate system recovery.</p>
=== 4.5.2.1  Dumping Parameters to on-board file (5.1.1B103 or later) ===
<p>To download (or dump) all parameter statements for the system:</p><p>1)&nbsp; Enter the '''EP '''command at the ''APU102XP:&nbsp; Change'' prompt. The Edit Parameters menu displays. See screen sample in 4.4.2.12 Edit Parameters (EP).</p><p>2)&nbsp; Type &lt;'''DF'''&gt; for Dump File at the ''Edit Parameters'' menu command prompt. You will be prompted for a file to capture the parameters to. This file will be on the APU and it can be downloaded to your PC via any available file transfer methods on the APU102, i.e., Zmodem, Xmodem, FTP, etc.</p><p>3)&nbsp; The '''EP''' command then dumps the parameter statements to that file. The parameter listing will be refreshed when the process is done. If the file already exists, you will be prompted to overwrite it.</p>
=== 4.5.2.2  Loading Parameters from on-board file (5.1.1B103 or later) ===
<p>Before you can do a parameter upload, you will need a file containing the parameters. The easiest way to obtain a parameter file is to create one using the download procedure described above.</p><p>To load parameters from a file, it must be resident on the APU-102. The file can be uploaded from your PC via any available file transfer methods on the APU-102, i.e., Zmodem, Xmodem, FTP, ZPUT, ZGET, etc.</p><p>1)&nbsp; &nbsp;Enter the '''EP '''command at the ''APU102XP:&nbsp; Change'' prompt. The Edit Parameters menu displays. See screen sample in 4.4.2.12 Edit Parameters (EP).</p><p>2)&nbsp; Type &lt;'''LF'''&gt; for Load File at the ''Edit Parameters'' menu command prompt. You will be prompted for the file to load the parameters from.&nbsp;</p><p>3)&nbsp; The '''EP''' command then loads the parameter statements from that file. Progress will look like the standard “L” load or may show progress bar on later versions of software.</p><p>'''Note:''' A log file (PED.LOG) will be created of the complete parameter load noting errors. It is a text file that can be downloaded or viewed on-line with the TYPE command.</p><p>4)&nbsp; Reboot the APU-102 when finished to ensure that the new parameters have taken effect. When appropriate (depending on AEI application version), log back in and do parameter backup (BP) and update the system mirror image for accurate system recovery.</p>
 
<br>
= ROMSHELL User Interface (Optional) =
== 4.6.1  Overview ==
<p>ROMSHELL&nbsp;is an alternate operating mode of the APU-102 that is hard coded into the Startup ROM (drive A of the USSD/PSSD). Not applicable for L-Series APU-102 (LX-800 equipped). It has diagnostic functionality superior to Mini-Remote Support (MRS). Benefits of the ROMSHELL user interface include:</p><p>Loading Code via Zmodem</p><p>Versions of the AEI code prior to 4.20 do not support Zmodem file transfers. Xmodem will pad the file to an even 128 bytes, and that padding may make some files unstable or unusable. Formerly, Remote Support and a “Back Door” connection had to be used to load these files. With ROMSHELL, they can be loaded via Zmodem.</p><p>Restoring site operation when USSD is blank</p><p>The USSD may be blank due to onboard battery failure coupled with power loss to APU-102. It may also be cleared intentionally by removing battery jumpers or issuing a remote format command. This is usually done if a corrupt file structure is suspected or field upgrade of a card is desired. With ROMSHELL, the site can be restored to operation.</p><p>Additional Benefits:</p>
 
*Zmodem file transfer protocol. Does not require a special communication software package, as with MRS.
*ROMSHELL identifies the modem and initializes it with the highest possible connection rate. (independent of the AEI application)
*Local port initialization at 2400 or 9600 baud depending on version (detailed below in section 4.6.2.1). (independent of the AEI application)
*Password protection. (independent of the AEI application)
*ROMSHELL activity is logged to a text file on the APU-102’s “disk”.
*Contains many DOS-like commands.
*MS-DOS commands, including COMMAND.COM embedded commands can be performed through the shell.
*PORTATTACH utility that does not require port-specific portfile or initialization files.
*Watchdog timer reboots the APU-102 after 20 minutes.
*Real-time verification of file transfers.
*Automatic compact flash recovery if corruption is detected.<p>(Version 5.4 for LPMTX only! Requires CF imaged with mirror partition. Refer to document 385-0010-00, APU102 Auto-Recovery Quick Start Guide for LPM-TX for detailed operation)</p><p>Why is ROMSHELL Running?</p><p>The APU-102 boots to ROMSHELL every fifth time the APU-102 is hard booted by power reset or watchdog timer reboot. The APU-102 can be forced to boot to ROMSHELL for diagnostics. The APU-102 also boots to ROMSHELL under the following additional circumstances:</p><p>The application boot-up sequence fails. This can be caused by corrupt or missing files, incorrect parameter setup, or loss of all files from the static RAM of the USSD (C: drive).</p><p>The following files are required to boot to the DOS version AEI consist application:</p>
 
*SPECIAL.BAT (Executes commands preparing the APU-102 to run the application.)
*APUEXEC.BAT or other batch file to load the application. (Its contents must contain the file name of the Application Executable.)
*SYSPARMS.DAT
*$REMPORT.DAT
*$REMPARM.DAT
*$LOCPORT.DAT
*$LOCPARM.DAT
*SAAEI.EXE
*Modem INI file identified in $REMPORT.DAT
*Application Executable file (e.g. AP423.EXE)<p>'''Note:''' File requirements vary for other DOS APU-102 applications, such as Tracker and ACQ.</p><p>'''XP '''version APU-102 have file requirements that are too complex to detail here.</p><p>The application fails to initialize some of the hardware, particularly Modem and Local Ports. A possible cause could be an error in following parameter files:</p>
 
*$REMPORT.DAT (Particularly Modem INI file specified correctly, and the file must be on the disk)
*$REMPARM.DAT (Tells the APU-102 which port file to use for remote access. Usually modem port is $REMPORT.DAT.)
*$LOCPORT.DAT
*$LOCPARM.DAT (Tells the APU-102 which port file to use for local access. Usually local port is $LOCPORT.DAT.)<p>Other potential file problems include:</p>
 
*F.BAT (run once BAT file) has invalid commands that prevent it from fully executing such as those requiring user input.
*SPECIAL.BAT does not fully execute.
*APUEXEC.BAT (or other batch file to load the application) does not contain the file name of the Application Executable.
== 4.6.2  ROMSHELL Operation ==
=== 4.6.2.1  Local Port Connection and Logon ===
<p>1)&nbsp; Attach a PC or data terminal to the “LOCAL” communications port of the APU-102 unit. The APU-102 is configured as a DTE with a female 25-pin “D” RS-232 connector. Communications parameters for Startup ROM version 5.3+ are controlled by a flag file ('''96.DAT''') in the APU’s AEI directory. If the file is present, the local port is initialized at 9600 baud. If the file is absent, the port initializes at 2400. Version 5.1 is fixed at 2400 baud. Other prior versions are fixed at 9600 baud. All utilize 8 data bits, no parity, and one stop bit. These parameters are independent of the AEI application and may be different. Setup your communications program to match.</p><p>2)&nbsp; Press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt; and the ''ROMSHELL'' responds with the Password prompt.</p><p>3)&nbsp; Type your password and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. The default password is “SECRET” but can be changed. (Refer to '''Password''' command) You will see a prompt similar to the following example. From here you can enter any of the ''ROMSHELL'' commands.</p><p><br></p><p>-RS- A:\&gt;</p><p>'''Note''': The prompt will reflect the current working directory; in this case, the root of “A.”</p>
=== 4.6.2.2  Dial-up Connection ===
<p>1)&nbsp; Dial the site with any commercial communication package, and the modems will negotiate the best connection.</p><p>2)&nbsp; Once connected, press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt; and the ''ROMSHELL'' responds with the Password prompt.</p><p>3)&nbsp; Type your password and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. The default password is “SECRET” but can be changed as. (Refer to '''Password''' command) You will see a prompt similar to the following example. From here you can enter any of the ''ROMSHELL'' commands.</p><p><br></p><p>-RS- A:\&gt;</p><p>'''Note: '''The prompt will reflect the current working directory, in this case, the root of “A.”</p><p>4.6.3&nbsp; ROMSHELL System Commands</p><p>Type &lt;'''?'''&gt; and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt; to display a list of available ''ROMSHELL ''commands. A list of the commands displays.</p><p>Command Listing</p><p><br></p><div><p>---------------</p>
<p>?</p>
<p>HELP</p>
<p>EXIT</p>
<p>CLS</p>
<p>DIR</p>
<p>TYPE</p>
<p>DEL</p>
<p>/</p>
<p>REBOOT</p>
<p>SHELL</p>
<p>PORTVIEW</p>
<p>ZSEND</p>
<p>ZREC</p>
<p>ZRECR</p>
<p>TIME</p>
<p>DATE</p>
<p>CD</p>
<p>ATTACH</p>
<p>PORTATTACH</p>
<p>VER</p>
<p>L</p>
<p>FORMATUSSD</p>
<p>PASSWORD</p>
<p>TTL</p>
<p>HDTOOL</p></div><p><br></p>
 
<br>
=== 4.6.3.1  Command Definitions ===
<p>The following defines and explains how to use each ROMSHELL command. Type &lt;'''?'''&gt; and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt; (or HELP and &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;)&nbsp; to display a list of available commands.</p><p>?</p><p>Displays the ''ROMSHELL'' command listing.</p><p>/</p><p>Displays information on available system memory.</p><p><br></p><p><br></p><div><p>Free Mem : 445856, Free Disk : 1121792</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Stack Usage Information</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp; Name&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Id&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Base&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Size&nbsp;&nbsp; Free</p>
<p>---------- --&nbsp; ---------&nbsp; -----&nbsp; ----</p>
<p>Main&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 00&nbsp; 25DE:0BF6&nbsp; 29240&nbsp; 17133</p>
<p>$locport&nbsp;&nbsp; 04&nbsp; 25DE:7296&nbsp; 3000&nbsp;&nbsp; 1667&nbsp;</p>
<p>$remport&nbsp;&nbsp; 05&nbsp; 25DE:66D4&nbsp; 3000&nbsp;&nbsp; 1891&nbsp;</p>
<p>conport&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 06&nbsp; 25DE:5B12&nbsp; 3000&nbsp;&nbsp; 2055&nbsp;</p>
<p>DOG&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 07&nbsp; 25DE:4F50&nbsp; 3000&nbsp;&nbsp; 2351&nbsp;</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Memory</p>
<p>Fragment Information</p>
<p>#&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Address&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Len</p>
<p>--&nbsp; ---------&nbsp; -----</p>
<p>01&nbsp; 3325:0000&nbsp; 445856</p>
<p>02&nbsp; 2EA6:0000&nbsp; 80&nbsp;</p>
<p>03&nbsp; 2FF0:0000&nbsp; 48&nbsp;</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Total free: 445984 (bytes)</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Example: / Command</p>
<p><br></p></div><p><br></p><p>ATTACH Portfile</p><p>Attaches to defined ports ($REMPORT.DAT and $LOCPORT.DAT). For example, if logged into the local port, you could attach to the modem port ($REMPORT.DAT) and execute Hayes commands to the modem. Control-Z exits the attach utility.</p><p>'''Note:'''&nbsp; Legacy ports only-not compatible with ports 3-6 on network capable APU-102s.</p><p><br></p><p>CD path</p><p>Works like a DOS CD command. It changes to the specified directory and displays the ''-RS- (path)&gt;'' prompt, reflecting the now current working directory.</p><p>'''Note''': You can also change to a different drive as you would in DOS. Example: Type C: and press &lt;Enter&gt; to change to the “C” drive.</p><p>CLS</p><p>Clears the screen and displays the ''-RS- (path)&gt;'' prompt.</p><p>DATE</p><p>Displays the following prompt with the current ''ROMSHELL'' site system date. To change the date, enter the new date using the format displayed in parentheses. To accept the current date, press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;.</p><p><br></p><p>Current date is 06/01/2004</p><p>Enter new date (mm-dd-yyyy):</p><p><br></p><p>'''Note''': Changing the date or time on the E-Series APU restarts the 20-minute watchdog. The P-Series APU handles time differently and may cause a reboot (time has expired). It is recommended that the system date and time be set with the AEI application. If date/time is set in ROMSHELL and then booted to the application, the time may be off due to time zones or daylight savings time settings. These settings are applied AFTER time is read from the CPU.</p><p>DEL&nbsp; filename</p><p>Deletes the specified filename from the system.</p><p>DIR (optional parameters)</p><p>Use the DIR command alone to display a directory of all files in the current path. To display specific files, add the optional path and filename arguments using standard DOS conventions including wildcard arguments (* or ?). This is not a true DOS DIR command though, therefore do not apply any “/” switches to your command line. If a true DOS DIR is desired, refer to the SHELL command below.</p>
 
<br><p><br></p><div><p>Volume in drive A is Ac</p>
<p>&nbsp;Volume Serial Number is 0616-1200</p>
<p>&nbsp;Directory of A:\</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>$LOCPORT DAT&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 76 03-09-00&nbsp;&nbsp; 1:29p</p>
<p>$REMPORT DAT&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 78 03-09-00&nbsp;&nbsp; 1:30p</p>
<p>ANSI&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; SYS&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 9029 04-27-95&nbsp;&nbsp; 8:10p</p>
<p>AUTOEXEC BAT&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 1145 03-16-00&nbsp;&nbsp; 4:34p</p>
<p>CHECKSYS COM&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 192 04-27-95&nbsp;&nbsp; 8:12p</p>
<p>CHKDSK&nbsp;&nbsp; EXE&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 16200 04-27-95&nbsp;&nbsp; 8:10p</p>
<p>COMMAND&nbsp; COM&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 47845 11-11-91&nbsp;&nbsp; 5:00a</p>
<p>CONFIG&nbsp;&nbsp; SYS&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 152 03-09-00&nbsp;&nbsp; 2:01p</p>
<p>CONPORT&nbsp; DAT&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 78 11-17-95&nbsp;&nbsp; 5:42p</p>
<p>DOG&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; INI&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 82 03-21-00&nbsp; 10:59a</p>
<p>DT336&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; INI&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 564 03-21-00&nbsp; 10:31a</p>
<p>EMM386&nbsp;&nbsp; EXE&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 91742 04-27-95&nbsp;&nbsp; 8:10p</p>
<p>HIMEM&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; SYS&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 11616 04-27-95&nbsp;&nbsp; 8:10p</p>
<p>MCM2496M INI&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 1342 12-17-99&nbsp; 10:05a</p>
<p>MDM144S&nbsp; INI&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 1124 03-21-00&nbsp;&nbsp; 8:19a</p>
<p>MODEM&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; INI&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 65 04-27-95&nbsp;&nbsp; 8:10p</p>
<p>MRS&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; BAT&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 52 03-16-00&nbsp;&nbsp; 4:34p</p>
<p>PASSWORD TXT&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 8 03-16-00&nbsp; 10:19a</p>
<p>ROMSHELL EXE&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 54745 03-21-00&nbsp; 10:50a</p>
<p>ROM_VER&nbsp; TXT&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 50 03-20-00&nbsp;&nbsp; 2:53p</p>
<p>SHARE&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; EXE&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 10912 04-27-95&nbsp;&nbsp; 8:10p</p>
<p>USSD&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; SYS&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 9282 04-27-95&nbsp;&nbsp; 8:10p</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 22 file(s)&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 256379 bytes</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 1121792 bytes free</p></div><p>Example: DIR Command of ROMSHELL ROM</p><p>EXIT</p><p>Exits the ROMSHELL program. The following message displays:</p><p><br></p><p>Terminating Console.&nbsp; Bye…..</p><p><br></p><p>To return to the ''ROMSHELL'' application, press any key to display the''' Password''' field, then reenter your password.</p><p>FORMATUSSD</p><p>This command formats the USSD and reboots the APU-102. A warning and confirmation message is displayed. After the reboot, you will need to reestablish the connection to proceed.</p><p>'''Note''': This command does not function on Pentium Flash disk.</p>
 
<br><p>HDTOOL (Romshell 5.4+)</p><p>Hard drive toolkit. This is a utility used by the system for Compact Flash recovery. Do not use without instruction by Comet Electronics Support personnel who will guide you through command entry.</p><p>HELP</p><p>Displays the ''ROMSHELL'' command listing. Identical to the &lt;'''?'''&gt; command.</p><p>L</p><p>Displays the last command. Press &lt;Enter&gt; to repeat the command or edit as necessary.</p><p>PASSWORD newpassword</p><p>Changes the ROMSHELL logon password. The system will ask for confirmation of the new password. This command has no effect on the applications password. The password is in the encrypted file “PASSWORD.TXT” on the root of the “C” drive. If the ROMSHELL password is forgotten, it can be reset with a special boot sequence detailed at the end of this section. (Startup ROM version 5.1 and higher)</p><p>PORTATTACH PORT BAUD B P S</p><p>Attaches to undefined ports. Example: PORTATTACH COM4 4800 8 n 1 connects to Comm port 4, 4800 baud, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit. (Default for first reader.) Control-Z exits the PORTATTACH utility and displays the -RS- (path)&gt; prompt.</p><p>'''Note:''' &nbsp;Legacy ports only-not compatible with ports 3-6 on network capable APU-102s.</p><p>PORTVIEW port number N (or port number N port number N)</p><p>This is the port-specific version of the IO screen. Displays one or more selected ports to view.</p><p><br></p><div><p>PORT&nbsp;&nbsp; D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0&nbsp;&nbsp; HEX</p>
<p>-----&nbsp; -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --&nbsp;&nbsp; ----</p>
<p>0x310&nbsp;&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 0&nbsp; 0&nbsp; 1&nbsp; 1&nbsp;&nbsp; 0xF3</p></div><p>Example: PORTVIEW Command</p>
 
<br><p>REBOOT</p><p>Performs a software reboot. You will be prompted for confirmation. After the reboot, you will need to re-establish the connection to proceed.</p><p>SHELL ''command argument switches''</p><p>Any commands entered after the SHELL command will be sent to DOS and treated as a DOS command. Batch files and DOS programs can be executed as well as commands embedded in the DOS command interpreter, such as COPY, ECHO, REN, DIR (with switches), etc.</p><p><br></p>
 
{|
|-
|<p>Caution</p>
 
|<p>Use extreme caution with the SHELL command. Any command issued must NOT require any user intervention to complete the command or the APU will be inaccessible via the current port until it is rebooted. It should only be used by experienced users.</p><p><br></p>
 
|}<p><br></p><p>Example:</p><p><br></p><p>SHELL COPY SPECIAL.BAT SPECIAL.BAK</p><p>TIME</p><p>Displays the following prompt with the current ROMSHELL site system time. To change the time, enter the new time using the format displayed in parentheses.</p><p>To accept the current time, press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;.</p><p><br></p><div><p>Current time is 17:45:45</p>
<p>Enter new time (hh:mm:ss):</p></div><p><br></p><p>'''Note''': Changing the date or time on the E-Series APU restarts the 20-minute watchdog. The P-Series APU handles time differently and may cause a reboot (time has expired). It is recommended that the system date and time be set with the AEI application. If date/time is set in ROMSHELL and then booted to the application, the time may be off due to time zones or daylight savings time settings. These settings are applied AFTER time is read from the CPU.</p>
 
<br><p>TTL (Romshell 5.4+)</p><p>Display or change the current “Time-To-Live” '''(TTL)''' before the watchdog timer reboots the APU-102.</p><p>1)&nbsp; To view or change TTL options, select one of the following command format options and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;.</p><p><br></p>
 
{|
|-
|<p>Command Format</p>
 
|<p>Description</p>
 
|-
|<p>TTL</p>
 
|<p>Required. "Time-To-Live" before the watchdog timer reboots the APU-102. This command does not change the current TTL.</p>
 
|-
|<p>TTL,#</p>
 
|<p>Optional. Changes “Time-To-Live” (in Seconds) before the watchdog timer reboots the APU-102.</p>
 
|}<p>The following example shows a screen display if '''TTL''' is entered.</p><p><br></p><div><p>-RS- A:\&gt;TTL</p>
<p>Current Time-To-Live = 1076 (seconds).</p>
<p>-RS- A:\&gt;</p></div><p>TYPE filename</p><p>Displays the contents of the filename entered after the command.</p><p><br></p><div><p>@ECHO OFF</p>
<p>@ECHO ----------------------------</p>
<p>type rom_ver.txt</p>
<p>@ECHO&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; ATS Systems</p>
<p>@ECHO ----------------------------</p>
<p>path a:\;c:\;c:\aei</p>
<p>PROMPT $P$G</p></div><p><br></p><p>Example: TYPE Command with autoexec.bat filename (part of file displayed).</p><p>VER</p><p>Displays the ROMSHELL version.</p><p>ZREC</p><p>The Zmodem Receive File(s) (ZREC) command places the APU-102 in Zmodem receive mode. The files will be received into the current working directory. Zmodem can receive multiple files.</p><p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''ZREC '''command and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. The message, “Ready to receive,” displays.</p><p>2)&nbsp; Once the APU-102 is in the receive mode, use the Zmodem protocol on your communications program to initiate a file transfer or a file upload. Use wildcards (* or ?) to upload multiple files. Refer to your communications software package for instructions on sending the file.</p><p>After file is received, the message “N file(s) received successfully” displays (N representing the number of files.) and the -RS- (path)&gt; prompt re-displays.</p><p>If there are errors in the modem’s transmission, one or all of the following messages may display (where N represents the number of files).</p><p><br></p>
 
{|
|-
|<p>N port overrun errors</p>
 
|<p>Serial port has at least one overrun.</p>
 
|-
|<p>N byte framing errors</p>
 
|<p>Serial port has at least one framing error.</p>
 
|-
|<p>N parity errors</p>
 
|<p>Serial port has at least one parity error.</p>
 
|}<p><br></p><p>These errors are normal and the Zmodem protocol is designed to correct for them. If they become excessive, you may need to repair either the serial port or the modem.</p><p>ZRECR</p><p>The Zmodem Receive Resume ('''ZRECR''') command places the APU-102 in Zmodem receive restart mode. The files will be received into the current working directory. Zmodem can receive multiple files. If a file already exists on the unit, Zmodem will resume transfer of the existing file at the point where the previous transfer was interrupted. With ZRECR, previously interrupted transmissions can continue, which saves time.</p><p>'''Note''': The resume is done blindly, with no checks to ensure that the existing file has the same contents (up to the point of interruption) as the sent file. This means that if the file is a different version, the new file may be corrupted. Only use ZRECR on file transfers that you know were previously interrupted.</p><p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''ZRECR '''command and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. The message, “Ready to receive,” displays.</p><p>2)&nbsp; Once the APU-102 is in the receive mode, use the Zmodem protocol on your communications program to initiate a file transfer or a file upload. Use wildcards (* or ?) to upload multiple files. Refer to your communications software package for instructions on sending the file.</p><p>After file is received, the message “N file(s) received successfully” displays (N representing the number of files.) and the -RS- (path)&gt; prompt re-displays.</p><p>If there are errors in the modem’s transmission, one or all of the following messages may display (where N represents the number of files).</p><p><br></p>
 
{|
|-
|<p>N port overrun errors</p>
 
|<p>Serial port has at least one overrun.</p>
 
|-
|<p>N byte framing errors</p>
 
|<p>Serial port has at least one framing error.</p>
 
|-
|<p>N parity errors</p>
 
|<p>Serial port has at least one parity error.</p>
 
|}<p><br></p><p>These errors are normal and the Zmodem protocol is designed to correct for them. If they become excessive, you may need to repair either the serial port or the modem.</p><p>ZSEND filename</p><p>The Zmodem Send File(s) ('''ZSEND''') command places the APU-102 in Zmodem send mode. Zmodem can send multiple files.</p><p>The message, “Ready to send,” displays. Use wild cards (* and ?) to send multiple files. Refer to your communications software package for instructions on receiving the file. Most programs will auto-receive, but have differing options when receiving a duplicate file. Insure your program does not blindly “resume” when receiving a duplicate file. After file has been sent, the message “N file(s) sent successfully” displays (where N = number of files) and the -RS- (path)&gt; prompt redisplays.</p><p>'''Note''': Refer to your communications software package for instructions on receiving the file.</p><p>Additional Commands (Not in HELP file)</p><p>You can change to a different drive as you would in DOS. Example: Type C: and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt; to change to the “C” drive.</p>
=== 4.6.3.2  Forcing the APU-102 to boot to ROMSHELL ===
<p>1)&nbsp; Power the APU off.</p><p>2)&nbsp; Power the APU on.</p><p>3)&nbsp; Immediately press and hold the SYS button on the front panel.</p><p>4)&nbsp; About 30 seconds after power up, the SYS LED will blink rapidly. Continue holding the SYS button until the rapid blink stops.</p><p>5)&nbsp; Release the SYS button. ROMSHELL will load in about 30 more seconds, indicated by a slow blinking SYS LED.</p>
=== 4.6.3.3  Resetting ROMSHELL Password (Startup ROM version 5.1 and higher) ===
<p>'''Note''': Does not reset application password.</p><p>1)&nbsp; Power the APU off.</p><p>2)&nbsp; Power the APU on.</p><p>3)&nbsp; Immediately press and hold the SYS button on the front panel.<br>About 30 seconds after power up, the SYS LED will blink rapidly.</p><p>4)&nbsp; Release the SYS button and immediately press and hold for second blink sequence (about 5 sec).</p><p>5)&nbsp; Continue holding the SYS button until the second rapid blink sequence stops.</p><p>6)&nbsp; Release the SYS button. ROMSHELL will load in about 30 seconds, indicated by a slow blinking SYS LED. The password will be reset to the default (SECRET)</p>
= 4.7  NetMRS User Interface (Optional) =
== 4.7.1  Overview ==
<p>NetMRS&nbsp;is an alternate operating mode of the APU-102 that runs under XPe and is preloaded to the compact flash. It has diagnostic functionality similar to ROMSHELL, but has added network connectivity. The L-Series APU (LX-800 equipped) only has[RCT4]&nbsp;[DDC5]&nbsp; NetMRS.&nbsp; Benefits of the NetMRS user interface include:</p><p>Additional Benefits:</p>
 
*Does not require a special communication software package, as with MRS.
*Modem port initialization is the same as specified in the AEI application’s parameters.
*Local port initialization [DDC6]independent of the AEI application and may be different. The baud rate is controlled by a flag file in the APU’s AEI directory. Refer to Local Port Connection in the next section
*Network port initialization is the same as specified in the AEI application’s Ethernet parameters for telnet connectivity.<p>Why is NetMRS Running?</p><p>NetMRS follows most of the same rules as ROMSHELL. It has different file requirements as well as the capability of checking the integrity of key files. On P-Series APU-102 (LPMTX processor[RCT7]&nbsp;[DDC8]&nbsp;), there is currently no method to force NetMRS operation other than a R,M command from the AEI application.</p><p>Beginning with 5.1.1 Build 117, an L-Series APU-102 can be booted to NetMRS by holding the SYS button on power up in the same manner as LPMTX (P-series) and 486 (E-Series) APUs are forced to ROMSHELL.</p>
== 4.7.2  NetMRS Operation ==
=== 4.7.2.1  Local Port Connection and Logon ===
<p>1)&nbsp; Attach a PC or data terminal to the “LOCAL” communications port of the APU-102 unit. The APU-102 is configured as a DTE with a female 25-pin “D” RS-232 connector. It will use 8 data bits, no parity, and one stop bit. The baud rate is controlled by a flag file ('''96.DAT''') in the APU’s AEI directory. If the file is present, the local port is initialized at 9600 baud. If the file is absent, the port initializes at 2400. Setup your communications program to match[RCT9]&nbsp;[DDC10]&nbsp;.</p><p>2)&nbsp; Press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt; and the ''NetMRS'' responds with following login:</p><p>APU102XP NetMRS 1.2</p><p>Password:</p><p>3)&nbsp; Type your password and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. The default password is “SECRET[RCT11]&nbsp;[DDC12]&nbsp;” but can be changed. (Refer to '''Password''' command) You will see a prompt similar to the following example. From here you can enter any of the ''NetMRS'' commands.</p><p><br></p><p>-NetMRS- C:\AEI&gt;</p><p>'''Note''': The prompt will reflect the current working directory; in this case, the AEI directory on the “C” drive. The LX-800 CF is configured differently and the default AEI Application directory on it will be D:\AEI.</p>
=== 4.7.2.2  Dial-up Connection ===
<p>1)&nbsp; Dial the site with any commercial communication package, and the modems will negotiate the best connection.</p><p>2)&nbsp; Press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt; and the ''NetMRS'' responds with following login:</p><p>APU102XP NetMRS 1.2</p><p>Password:</p><p>3)&nbsp; Type your password and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. The default password is “SECRET” but can be changed. (Refer to '''Password''' command) You will see a prompt similar to the following example. From here you can enter any of the ''NetMRS'' commands.</p><p><br></p><p>-NetMRS- C:\AEI&gt;</p><p>'''Note:''' The prompt will reflect the current working directory; in this case, the AEI directory on the “C” drive. The LX-800 CF is configured differently and the default AEI Application directory on it will be D:\AEI.</p>
=== 4.7.2.3  Telnet Connection ===
<p>1)&nbsp; Connect to the site with any [RCT13]&nbsp;commercial communication package that supports telnet. You must have a valid connection path to the APU-102 to connect. You will need to specify the IP address and optionally, the port number. The APU-102 uses the default telnet port 23 unless specified differently in the AEI Application’s Ethernet port parameters.</p><p>2)&nbsp; Press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt; and the ''NetMRS'' responds with following login:</p><p>APU102XP NetMRS 1.2</p><p>Password:</p><p>3)&nbsp; Type your password and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. The default password is “SECRET” but can be changed. (Refer to '''Password''' command) You will see a prompt similar to the following example. From here you can enter any of the ''NetMRS'' commands.</p><p>-NetMRS- C:\AEI&gt;</p><p>'''Note''': The prompt will reflect the current working directory; in this case, the AEI directory on the “C” drive. The LX-800 CF is configured differently and the default AEI Application directory on it will be D:\AEI.</p>
== 4.7.3  NetMRS System Commands ==
<p>Type &lt;'''?'''&gt; and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt; (or HELP and &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;) to display a list of available ''NetMRS ''commands. A list of the commands displays.</p><p>Command Listing</p><p><br></p><div><p>---------------</p>
<p>?</p>
<p>HELP</p>
<p>EXIT</p>
<p>CLS</p>
<p>DIR</p>
<p>TYPE</p>
<p>DEL</p>
<p>/</p>
<p>REBOOT</p>
<p>SHELL</p>
<p>ZSEND</p>
<p>ZREC</p>
<p>ZRECR</p>
<p>T</p>
<p>CD</p>
<p>VER</p>
<p>L</p>
<p>PASSWORD</p>
<p>PT</p>
<p>IPCONFIG</p>
<p>PING</p></div><p><br></p>
=== 4.7.3.1  Command Definitions ===
<p>The following defines and explains how to use each ''NetMRS'' command. The associated parameters appear in italics after the command, where applicable.</p><p><br></p><p>?</p><p>Displays the ''NetMRS'' command listing.</p><p>/</p><p>Displays APUINFO.DAT file and system metrics if available.</p><p><br></p><div><p>APU-102 Equipment Identifier V1.02</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>PROCESSOR:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Pentium</p>
<p>BIOS CHKSUM:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 0xA7BA</p>
<p>CONVENTIONAL MEMORY:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 640 KBytes</p>
<p>EXTENDED MEMORY:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; N/A KBytes</p>
<p>COM1 FOUND:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; PORT = 0x03F8 IRQ = 4</p>
<p>COM2 FOUND:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; PORT = 0x02F8 IRQ = 3</p>
<p>COM3 FOUND:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; PORT = 0x0380 IRQ = 10</p>
<p>COM4 FOUND:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; PORT = 0x0388 IRQ = 10</p>
<p>COM5 FOUND:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; PORT = 0x0288 IRQ = 10</p>
<p>COM6 FOUND:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; PORT = 0x0230 IRQ = 10</p>
<p>COM CARD:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; COM4 Card</p>
<p>MODEM TYPE:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 56000</p>
<p>SSD TYPE:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; PCM-SSD</p>
<p>READER VERSION:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 2.80</p>
<p>APU SOFTWARE VERSION:&nbsp;&nbsp; 5.11 B101</p>
<p>STARTUP ROM VERSION:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 5.4</p>
<p>DOS VERSION:&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 5.00</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Free Mem: 27,140,096, Free Disk: 53,743,616 KB</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Metric&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Value</p>
<p>------------------------------ ----------</p>
<p>Startup....................... 285</p>
<p>SpontaneousBoot............... 279</p>
<p>SoftBoot...................... 0</p>
<p>Trains........................ 0</p>
<p>FileReadbackSizeMismatch...... 0</p>
<p>FileReadbackDataMismatch...... 0</p>
<p>SystemParameterRestores....... 1</p>
<p>SystemParameterNoRecover...... 0</p></div><p><br></p><p>CD path</p><p>Works like a DOS CD command. It changes to the specified directory and displays the ''-NetMRS- (path)&gt;'' prompt, reflecting the now current working directory.</p><p>CLS</p><p>Clears the screen and displays the ''-NetMRS- (path)&gt;'' prompt.</p><p>DIR (optional parameters)</p><p>Use the DIR command alone to display a directory of all files in the current path. To display specific files, add the optional path and filename arguments using standard DOS conventions including wildcard arguments (* or ?). This is not a true DOS DIR command though, therefore do not apply any “/” switches to your command line. If a true DOS DIR is desired, refer to the SHELL command below.</p><p><br></p><div><p>-NetMRS- C:\AEI&gt;dir m*.ini</p>
<p>M144-12&nbsp; INI&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 890&nbsp; 10-25-11&nbsp; 12:54</p>
<p>M144-144 INI&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 724&nbsp; 10-25-11&nbsp; 12:54</p>
<p>M144-24&nbsp; INI&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 815&nbsp; 10-25-11&nbsp; 12:54</p>
<p>M144-3&nbsp;&nbsp; INI&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 886&nbsp; 10-25-11&nbsp; 12:54</p>
<p>M144-48&nbsp; INI&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 814&nbsp; 10-25-11&nbsp; 12:54</p>
<p>M144-96&nbsp; INI&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 814&nbsp; 10-25-11&nbsp; 12:54</p>
<p>MCM1414V INI&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 1,187&nbsp; 10-25-11&nbsp; 12:54</p>
<p>MCM2400&nbsp; INI&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 649&nbsp; 10-25-11&nbsp; 12:54</p>
<p>MCM2496M INI&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 1,381&nbsp; 10-25-11&nbsp; 12:54</p>
<p>MDM144&nbsp;&nbsp; INI&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 684&nbsp; 10-25-11&nbsp; 12:54</p>
<p>MDM144BN INI&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 801&nbsp; 10-25-11&nbsp; 12:54</p>
<p>MDM144S&nbsp; INI&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 1,125&nbsp; 10-25-11&nbsp; 12:54</p>
<p>MODEM&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; INI&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 65&nbsp; 10-25-11&nbsp; 12:54</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; 13 file(s)&nbsp; 10,835 bytes&nbsp; 98,451,456 bytes free</p></div><p>DEL&nbsp; filename</p><p>Deletes the specified filename from the system. Wildcards (*) and (?) are permitted to delete multiple files.</p><p>EXIT</p><p>Exits the NetMRS program. Disconnects without displaying any messages.</p><p>HELP</p><p>Displays the ''NetMRS'' command listing. Identical to the &lt;'''?'''&gt; command.</p><p><br></p><p>IPCONFIG</p><p>This command works just like the basic DOS IPCONFIG command. For advanced options and switches, run IPCONFIG under the SHELL command</p><p><br></p><div><p>ipconfig &lt; y.dat &gt; dosshell.txt</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Windows IP Configuration</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Connection-specific DNS Suffix&nbsp; . :</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : 192.168.0.2</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 255.255.255.0</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . : 192.168.0.12</p>
<p><br></p></div><p>L</p><p>Displays the last command. Press &lt;Enter&gt; to execute the command or edit as necessary.</p><p>PASSWORD newpassword</p><p>Changes the NetMRS logon password. The system will ask for confirmation of the new password. This command has no effect on the applications password. The password is in the encrypted file “PASSWORD.TXT” on the root of the AEI Application drive.</p><p>PING</p><p>This command works just like the basic DOS PING command. For advanced options and switches, run PING under the SHELL command.</p><p><br></p><div><p>ping 192.168.0.12 &lt; y.dat &gt; dosshell.txt</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Pinging 192.168.0.12 with 32 bytes of data:</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Reply from 192.168.0.12: bytes=32 time=1ms TTL=128</p>
<p>Reply from 192.168.0.12: bytes=32 time&lt;1ms TTL=128</p>
<p>Reply from 192.168.0.12: bytes=32 time&lt;1ms TTL=128</p>
<p>Reply from 192.168.0.12: bytes=32 time&lt;1ms TTL=128</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Ping statistics for 192.168.0.12:</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss),</p>
<p>Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds:</p>
<p>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 1ms, Average = 0ms</p></div><p>PT Portfile</p><p>Attaches to defined ports. For example, if logged into the local port, you could attach to the modem port ($REMPORT.DAT) and execute AT commands to the modem. &lt;ESC&gt;-C exits the PT attach utility.''' '''</p><p>'''Note:'''&nbsp; Legacy ports only-not compatible with ports 3-6 on network capable APU-102s.</p><p>REBOOT</p><p>Performs a software reboot. You will be prompted for confirmation. After the reboot, you will need to re-establish the connection to proceed.</p><p>SHELL ''command argument switches''</p><p>Any commands entered after the SHELL command will be sent to DOS command shell and treated as a DOS command. Batch files and DOS programs can be executed as well as commands embedded in the DOS command interpreter, such as COPY, ECHO, REN, DIR (with switches), etc.</p><p><br></p>
 
{|
|-
|<p>Caution</p>
 
|<p>Use extreme caution with the SHELL command. Any command issued must NOT require any user intervention to complete the command or the APU will be inaccessible via the current port until it is rebooted. Some commands could even hang the NetMRS application. Shell commands should only be used by experienced users. Additionally, NetMRS emulates Windows XP version of DOS and has different options than ROMSHELL which is DOS 5.0. Without the “/y” switch to force an over-write in the following example, Windows DOS would prompt the user to confirm the over-write an existing file, and would hang the port.</p><p><br></p>
 
|}<p>Example:</p><p>SHELL COPY SPECIAL.BAT SPECIAL.BAK /y</p><p>T</p><p>The Set Date/Time ('''T''') command displays and sets the APU-102 date and time.</p><p><br></p><div><p><br></p>
<p>Current time Sun Jun 01&nbsp; 13:30:18 2004</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Enter New Date mm/dd/yyyy &gt;06/01/2004</p>
<p>Enter New Time hh:mm:ss&nbsp;&nbsp; &gt;13:30:18</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>New time Sun Jun 01 13:45:00</p></div><p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''T '''command''' '''and press '''&lt;Enter&gt;'''.</p><p>2)&nbsp; Type the date in the format indicated and press '''&lt;Enter&gt;'''.</p><p>3)&nbsp; Enter the time in military time format (24-hour clock, hh:mm:ss) and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. The new date and time you established displays at the bottom of the screen.</p><p>TYPE filename</p><p>Displays the contents of the filename entered after the command.</p><p><br></p><div><p>-NetMRS- C:\AEI&gt;dir m*.ini</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>ATZS0=0</p>
<p>ATE0</p>
<p>ATV0</p>
<p>AT&C1</p>
<p>AT&D2</p>
<p>AT\N3</p>
<p>ATS7=60</p>
<p>ATX1</p>
<p>ATS0=1</p></div><p><br></p><p>Example: TYPE Command with MODEM.INI filename</p><p>VER</p><p>Displays the NetMRS version.</p><p>ZREC</p><p>The Zmodem Receive File(s) (ZREC) command places the APU-102 in Zmodem receive mode. The files will be received into the current working directory. Zmodem can receive multiple files.</p><p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''ZREC '''command and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. The message, “Ready to receive,” displays.</p><p>2)&nbsp; Once the APU-102 is in the receive mode, use the Zmodem protocol on your communications program to initiate a file transfer or a file upload. Use wildcards (* or ?) to upload multiple files. Refer to your communications software package for instructions on sending the file.</p><p>After file is received, the message “N file(s) received successfully” displays (N representing the number of files.) and the -NetMRS- (path)&gt; prompt re-displays.</p><p>If there are errors in the modem’s transmission, one or all of the following messages may display (where N represents the number of files).</p><p><br></p>
 
{|
|-
|<p>N port overrun errors</p>
 
|<p>Serial port has at least one overrun.</p>
 
|-
|<p>N byte framing errors</p>
 
|<p>Serial port has at least one framing error.</p>
 
|-
|<p>N parity errors</p>
 
|<p>Serial port has at least one parity error.</p>
 
|}<p><br></p><p>These errors are normal and the Zmodem protocol is designed to correct for them. If they become excessive, you may need to repair either the serial port or the modem.</p><p>ZRECR</p><p>The Zmodem Receive Resume ('''ZRECR''') command places the APU-102 in Zmodem receive restart mode. The files will be received into the current working directory. Zmodem can receive multiple files. If a file already exists on the unit, Zmodem will resume transfer of the existing file at the point where the previous transfer was interrupted. With ZRECR, previously interrupted transmissions can continue, which saves time.</p><p>'''Note''': The resume is done blindly, with no checks to ensure that the existing file has the same contents (up to the point of interruption) as the sent file. This means that if the file is a different version, the new file may be corrupted. Only use ZRECR on file transfers that you know were previously interrupted.</p><p>1)&nbsp; Type the '''ZRECR '''command and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt;. The message, “Ready to receive,” displays.</p><p>2)&nbsp; Once the APU-102 is in the receive mode, use the Zmodem protocol on your communications program to initiate a file transfer or a file upload. Use wildcards (* or ?) to upload multiple files. Refer to your communications software package for instructions on sending the file.</p><p>After file is received, the message “N file(s) received successfully” displays (N representing the number of files.) and the -NetMRS- (path)&gt; prompt re-displays.</p><p>If there are errors in the modem’s transmission, one or all of the following messages may display (where N represents the number of files).</p><p><br></p>
 
{|
|-  
|-  
|<p>N port overrun errors</p>
| <p>Note</p>
 
| <p>On the L-Series APU-102, the AEI application files are on the D drive. The Operating System files are on the protected C drive.</p>
|<p>Serial port has at least one overrun.</p>
 
|-
|<p>N byte framing errors</p>
 
|<p>Serial port has at least one framing error.</p>
 
|-
|<p>N parity errors</p>
 
|<p>Serial port has at least one parity error.</p>
 
|}<p><br></p><p>These errors are normal and the Zmodem protocol is designed to correct for them. If they become excessive, you may need to repair either the serial port or the modem.</p><p>ZSEND filename</p><p>The Zmodem Send File(s) ('''ZSEND''') command places the APU-102 in Zmodem send mode. Zmodem can send multiple files.</p><p>The message, “Ready to send,” displays. Use wild cards (* and ?) to send multiple files. Refer to your communications software package for instructions on receiving the file. Most programs will auto-receive, but have differing options when receiving a duplicate file. Insure your program does not blindly “resume” when receiving a duplicate file. After file has been sent, the message “N file(s) sent successfully” displays (where N = number of files) and the -NetMRS- (path)&gt; prompt redisplays.</p><p>'''Note''': Refer to your communications software package for instructions on receiving the file.</p><p>Additional Commands (Not in HELP file)</p><p>You can change to a different drive as you would in DOS. Example: Type D: and press &lt;'''Enter'''&gt; to change to the “D” drive.</p><p><br></p>
 
{|
|-
|<p>Note</p><p><br></p>
 
|<p>On the L-Series APU-102, the AEI application files are on the D drive. The Operating System files are on the protected C drive.</p>
 
|}<p><br></p>
|}<p><br></p>
<br>
<br>

Latest revision as of 20:24, 22 December 2025

This chapter discusses the APU application software and local and remote user access to the APU-102 via the System Menu and Supervisory Menu. Through these menus you may view train information received from the APU-102.

APU Application Software Overview

User Access

There are three types of user access available, local, remote, and network. Local access requires a computer equipped with a standard communications package and a null-modem cable from the local port of the APU-102 to the computer. Remote access requires a computer equipped with a Hayes compatible modem and a standard communications package. Telnet connection requires that the APU-102 has network capable hardware and software as well as a valid network path to the APU-102, via WAN remotely or LAN at the site.

The factory default communications settings are:


Type

Baud Rate

Word Length

Parity

Stop Bits

Local

2400

8

N

1

Remote

Modems will negotiate best speed

8

N

1

Network

Handled by TCP/IP protocol









Communications Settings

Main Menu Options

There are two APU-102 Menu options: the System Menu and the Supervisory Menu.

The System Menu (aka Main Menu) functions provide accessibility to a wide range of reports and other information that can be generated from the stored data.

The Supervisory Menu (aka Change Menu) provides functions to reconfigure the operational parameters of the APU-102 as well as clear the APU-102 of all trains and status information. The same data is available whether accessing the APU-102 from a remote site via the modem or on-site via the local communications port or via a telnet connection. For detailed information about these menus, see the System Menu and Supervisory Menu sections later in this chapter.

Software Programs

The APU-102 uses up to three different software programs. The first is the APU application software, which runs the APU-102’s normal functions. Comet Electronics incorporates its standard remote support into this application software. The second is a standalone “fail-safe” software program, used mainly for recovery and diagnostics. There are various versions of the fail-safe program depending on configuration of the APU-102. Mini Remote Support (MRS, Start-up ROM version 4.1) or ROMSHELL (Start-up ROM version 5.0+). When the SYS light (LED) is on steadily, the APU-102 is running the APU application software. When the SYS light (LED) is flashing, the APU-102 is running MRS/ROMSHELL.

With addition of network connections to the APU-102, NetMRS, a network capable version of ROMSHELL was created. It has all the functions/commands of ROMSHELL, with local and remote connectivity. Additionally, it has network connectivity using the AEI Application’s networking parameter set.

APU Application Software

The APU application software is the heart of the APU-102. It is stored on the solid state disk along with the train information. It logs the train axles, correlates the axles into cars, and puts the tags with the cars. It is a multitasking (or multi-threaded) program that allows the system to record a train, share live acquisition data to external devices, transmit consists and maintenance reports to multiple hosts, and allow remote diagnostic access.

When the APU application software is running, you connect to the APU-102 via the User Interface or “Front Door.” Connecting via the Front Door allows you to define the system parameters and individual session parameters, view train data, delete trains, and view the systems logs, etc. The Front Door is generally used unless there is a problem with the APU application software.

Mini Remote Support (MRS), ROMSHELL, and NetMRS

Mini Remote Support (MRS) Start-up ROM 4.1 and earlier

Mini Remote Support (MRS) is a version of the Video Masters (VMI) Remote Support software. When this program or the APU application software is running (version 4.x only), you can log into the APU site’s Back Door. Logging into the Back Door via the MRS program allows you to connect to the APU locally or via dial-up modem, transfer individual files, and download new code. However, these functions are not menu-driven. A special communication program, “Remote Support,” is required to connect to an APU-102 to use MRS’s features. Remote Support is a communications utility developed by VMI. It also requires legacy serial ports and modems and must be run under MS-DOS. It is not compatible with Windows operating system or most modern PC’s ports or modems.

MRS was programmed or burned into an EPROM before the unit was shipped to the customer. The use of the EPROM means the software cannot be erased. The APU-102 boots to the EPROM first, then looks to see if the APU application software is available. If there is any problem with the APU application software, the APU-102 loads the MRS program. Every fifth time the APU hard boots (power reset or watchdog timer reboot), the MRS program is loaded, stays in MRS mode for 20 minutes, then reboots. To boot the APU-102 directly into the MRS mode, press and hold the SYS button, then turn on the APU-102. A short time after power up, the Startup ROM checks the status of the SYS button and will flash rapidly (about 4 times per second) during this check. Release the SYS button anytime after the rapid flash stops. When the MRS application is ready, the SYS LED will flash slowly (about once per second).

The EPROM is located on the USSD card and can be identified by the name "Start-up ROM", version and USSD capacity. The capacity of the USSD is in a system file on the ROM and must match the configured SRAM memory on the USSD.

Note: The reboot command from the Front Door (soft boot) does not increment the MRSCOUNT counter.

ROMSHELL Start-up ROM version 5.0 or higher

ROMSHELL (Start-up ROM version 5.0+) replaces MRS. It has expanded functionality compared to MRS listed above and is accessible with any commercial communication software program. The ROMSHELL interface is detailed in ROMSHELL User Interface (Optional).

The EPROM is located on the USSD or PCM-SSD card in a Pentium class APU-102 and can be identified by the name "Startup ROM", version and USSD capacity. The capacity of the USSD is in a system file on the ROM and must match the configured memory on the USSD. The PCM-SSD does not use SRAM so capacity is irrelevant. Startup ROM is not used in the LX-800 equipped APU-102.

NetMRS

NetMRS is a network-capable version of ROMSHELL. It is not loaded from the Startup ROM, but is an application running from the XPe kernel on the system’s Flash memory. It has some additional capabilities compared to ROMSHELL. The NetMRS interface is detailed in NetMRS User Interface (Optional)

Multiple Sessions

The APU-102 supports numerous virtual APU's. (pre 5.2 supports four. 5.2+ supports up to ten) Each virtual APU, called a "session," can be configured individually according to the needs of the railroad it supports.

Current versions of the AEI application include a new feature, NetMenu. It allows multiple devices to be accessed via one external connection. You may be presented with a menu BEFORE getting the session menu of the APU-102. NetMenu is detailed later in this text.

When accessing the site, the first question the APU-102 software asks is which APU session you want to access. The Session Menu will only show 4 sessions unless more are configured. Each session has its own password protection, just like each physical APU would. (See Passwords.) Once you gain access to a session (other than Session 1), any parameters you change affect only that session.

Each session on the APU-102 is capable of reporting consist and maintenance reports to the host of your choice. Sessions can be configured for different purposes. For example, a customer may set up Session 1 for standard consist and maintenance reporting to its normal host system, then configure Session 2 to report different types of information (such as scale reports) to other facilities on the railroad. This often happens when the host system to which the AEI reports are sent cannot handle the type of data the other facility needs.

Each session uses the same train information but is completely independent when formatting and transmitting the information. The owner of the APU-102 is responsible the initial setup of each session, while the session owner has the ability to customize the individual session. After you select a session, password entry is required.

Passwords

Comet Electronics delivers the systems with default passwords set up in the APU-102. Both the System Menu and the Supervisory Menu are password protected. Also, a password is available for each session’s host interface. The System and Supervisory passwords are only visible under the Supervisory Menu display of the site parameters where separate password fields are maintained. Each session is independent of one another, so passwords for one session would not be available to other session users. The System Menu and the Supervisory Menu require different passwords from the host system. The following are the APU-102 default passwords:[DDC1] 


Default Passwords
System Menu Supervisory Menu
SECRET SUPER

Default Passwords


Tip

Version 5 +

Entering the supervisory password at the initial login screen will login directly to the Supervisory Menu.

User-level security with complex password capability has been added with version 5.2. User-level security is detailed in User Access Account Management (USER) 5.2+, later in this article.

Inactivity Timeouts

There are numerous inactivity timeouts built into the APU-102. Their purpose is to remind the user that action has not been taken for a particular amount of time or to log the user off in case the user has forgotten to do so. At the Session Select menu, the APU-102 pauses for three minutes. The APU-102 then beeps and redisplays the Session Select menu. This represents one timeout period. The table below demonstrates how timeouts work:



Screen

Number of 3-minute Inactivity Timeouts Allowed

Result

Session Select Menu

3

APU-102 logs user off.

Password

2

Returns to Session Select Menu screen.

System Menu

1

APU-102 logs user off and returns to the Session Select Menu screen.

Supervisory Menu

1

Returns to System Menu screen.

Inactivity Timeouts

On-Line Help

Throughout the user command interface in the System Menu or Supervisory Menu, you may type a command followed by <?> to display available information about the command. If you do not remember the command, enter <?> at the command prompt and the software shows what commands you can currently use. Example: Typing <D><?> describes the Directory command and any options available with that command. Features that have been added since publication of this manual will be documented in the APU-102’s on-line help.

Command Formats

When entering commands in a string, always type a comma between them.

Example: To use the Check Tag Sequence (CT) command to verify that Reader0 and all antennas for a particular site are working correctly, enter CT,0,* for the command string.

Note: Applicable only when check tags are part of the hardware components.

Logging On To the APU-102

1)  After connecting to the APU-102 through either the local port, remote port (modem), or telnet, press <Enter> to activate the Session Select menu screen. If you get a “NetMenu Equipment Selection screen”, enter the option for the desired APU-102 to be connected to. Press <Enter> again if necessary to activate the Session Select menu screen and you will get the Session Select menu.


1. Comet Electronics

2. Inactive Session, Not Available for Selection

3. Inactive Session, Not Available for Selection

4. Inactive Session, Not Available for Selection

X. Log Off


Select the Appropriate Session # ( 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5)

Session #: 1


Test  Wed 05/02/11  10:11:12

Password: ******


Figure 4.1: Session Select Menu Screen

Options 1 - 4 on this menu represent the four available sessions in the APU-102. Additional sessions only appear if configured. Option X logs you off the Session Select menu and, if accessed through the remote port, disconnects the modem.

2)  To log on to a session, enter the number corresponding to the desired session. The APU-102 requests the password for that session.

3)  Enter the correct system password. If no password is established for that session, type SECRET, the default password for the System Menu. (Passwords are not case-sensitive) The default security level System and Supervisory password fields are both a maximum of seven ASCII, printable characters. A higher level, user-based security is available and detailed in the “User” section later in this chapter.


Warning

Version 4x

An issue was discovered in Version 4x where the password parameter would allow you to enter 7 characters. The password entry on login only allowed 6 characters, making the APU-102 inaccessible.  It has been corrected in Version 5x.

 

As the password is entered, an asterisk (*) displays where you type the character. After the correct system password is entered and accepted, the Logon menu displays and the cursor flashes at the APU102XP:  Main prompt with the current session number.


Comet Electronics

Automatic Equipment Identification System

APU Software Version 5.1.1.101

AMTECH Model AI1200 Ver 2.80 SN97514

Mon 05/02/11  10:11:12

Host Reporting:  On, All

Last LOGON:  Thu 11/12/10   17:28:40


USID        COMET05150

Site Name:  Test

APU102XP: Main 1>

Figure 4.2: Logon Menu Screen

If a train is being recorded or if an associated APU is recording a train (double-track sites), a “train recording” or “site activity” message will be displayed along with the prompt.

The APU-102 will not transmit critical system messages until the System Menu password is entered. This ensures that the information is available to authorized users only and that the remote terminal is ready to display data from the site.

If the password entered is invalid, the APU-102 displays the message “Invalid Password”. The password field re-displays to allow you a second chance. After 3 failed attempts, you are returned the user to the Session Select menu.

4)  Type <?> at the APU102XP:  Main prompt to display the System Menu.

5)  To enter the Supervisory Menu, type <C> (for Change) at the APU102XP:  Main prompt. The APU-102 requests the Supervisory Menu password for that session.

6)  Enter the correct system password. If no password is established for that session, type SUPER, the default password for the Supervisory Menu. The APU102XP:  Change prompt displays.

7)  Type <?> to display the Supervisory Menu.

The rest of this chapter explains the System and Supervisory menus in detail.


System Menu

Overview

To access the System Menu, type <?> at the APU102XP: Main prompt and press <Enter>. The System Menu displays. The left side of the System Menu shows the command options for displaying train information and the exit command. The right side of the System Menu shows the command options for displaying APU-102 system information and the help command.

 

APU102

SYSTEM MENU

D       Directory

L       List Clean Consist

S       Train Summary

SHS     System Health Summary

/       System Information & Status

MST     Modem Self test (local only)

SP      Toggle Sensor Power

TR      Terminate Recording

ST      Simulate Train

SM      Stimulate Maintenance Report

ODM     Outbound Data Manager

DM     Inbound Data Manager

MAP     Display Likely Matches

X       Exit and Log Out 

 

DD      Dump Raw Data

DP      Display Parameters

C       Change to Supervisory Menu

I       Display I/O Information

TL      Train Logger Reports

PT      Pass-through to Port

AMT     Pass-through to Reader

CT      Check Tag Sequence

IR      Initialize Reader

RFON    Activate Reader RF

RST     Reader Interface Self Test

MA      Print Match List

CMP     Compare two Trains

?       This Screen

 

For help on a command, enter the command followed by a '?'

Figure 4.3: System Menu

Menu and available commands may vary depending on AEI Application version. If not detailed in this text, refer to the on-board help.

System Menu Commands

Each System Menu command initiates a screen on which you may perform APU-102 transactions. The System Menu’s standard header fields are defined in the System Menu Headers section below. Individual screen functionality and data field definitions follow in the System Menu Screens section.

System Menu Headers

Tables 4-1 through 4-3 define the header information that appears on many of the screens. Table 4-1 shows the basic header that displays on all System Menu screens. Each screen description in this chapter refers you back to the appropriate header definition table where necessary.


Header Field

Description

MP:

Mile Post. Represents the mile post location of the site.

STATION:

Station Number. Represents the five-digit station number identifying the site.

READER:

Reader Number. Identifies the specific reader assigned to that station.

Table 4-1: Basic Header Information


Header Field

Description

Train Seq #

Sequence number of the train that is being listed.

DATE:

Date the train passed the site.

TIME:

Arrival time of the train at the site.

ENG:

Lead engine tag number if available. This will be replaced by a zero (0) if no tag is available.

DIR:

Train direction as it entered the site. Stopping and backing have no effect on this field. This is determined by the Transducer Orientation in the Operating Parameters and the Track Orientation in the Session Parameters.

MPH:

Average miles per hour of the train as it passed through the site.

AXLES:

Total number of axles correlated by the APU-102 during the train passage.

WDA

Number of wheel counts received on Wheel Detector A. Includes forward and backing counts.

WDB

Number of wheel counts received on Wheel Detector B. Includes forward and backing counts.

WDAB

Number of wheel transitions from Wheel Detector A to Wheel Detector B if the train was traveling across the sensor in the A to B direction. Otherwise this number will be 000.

WDBA

Number of wheel transitions from Wheel Detector B to Wheel Detector A if the train was traveling across the sensor in the B to A direction. Otherwise this number will be 000.

HOST REPORT

Describes the reporting that was provided to the Host System. The information that displays is:

Host reporting status = ON/OFF

Report status = (Y, N, P, E, X). See the Directory command for an explanation of these. An asterisk (*) displays when Host Reporting is off.

Date of the host system transaction.

Time of the log-on to the host system / Time of the end message from host system.

Table 4-2: Secondary Header Information


Header Field

Description

Loco Cnt:

Count of all locomotives recognized by the APU-102 - tagged and untagged.

Loco Tags:

Count of all locomotives recognized to have at least one AEI tag (EGC = 5).

Loco Xtags:

Untagged Locomotives. Count of locomotives recognized where the APU-102 did not read any AEI tags.

Car Cnt:

Count of all equipment recognized on the train to be a railcar - tagged and untagged. Multiple-platform articulated cars are counted as one (1) car. Cabooses are counted in this field. Lost axles groups are not counted in this field.

Car Tags:

Count of all the railcars recognized to have at least one AEI tag (EGC = 19). EOT tags are not counted in this field.

Car Xtags:

Untagged cars. Count of railcars recognized where the APU-102 did not read any AEI tags. Lost axle groups are not counted in this field.

Containers:

Number of tagged containers found on the train (EGC = 10).

Chassis:

Number of tagged chassis found on the train (EGC = 27).

Trailers:

Number of tagged trailers found on the train (EGC = 21).

Lost Axles:

Count of axles that could not be associated with a recognizable axle pattern. This does not indicate missed axles.

Lost Tags:

Count of tags not associated with a car, locomotive, caboose or EOT device. Test Tags are counted in this group when system testing is being done. This does not indicate missed tags.

Other Tags:

Count of tags other than EGC 5, 6, 10, 14, 19, 21, and 27.

END:

END Statement. After the last line of any train report, a blank line will be sent followed by the "END" Statement.

Table 4-3: Detailed Header Information

System Menu Screens

The following explains the purpose and use of System Menu commands and defines the data fields on the System Menu screens. Where applicable, the Header Fields section refers you to the appropriate header definition table above.

Directory (D)

The Directory (D) command displays the 15 most current trains. If there are less than 15 trains on the APU-102, the complete train list displays. If there are no current trains, the message “There are currently no trains available” displays.

APU102

Nicholson Ave         MP: 0000.0   Station 00001   Reader 1

SEQ

DATE

TIME

RPT

LEAD

ENG

DIR

RT

MPH

AXLES

CARS

TAGS

LEN(FT)

0002

05-02-11

09:02

Y

OICU

812

S

0

024

0024

0005

0001

003007

0001

05-02-11

06:31

Y

ENG

1

S

0

024

0024

0005

0001

003007

APU102XP: Main 1>

Figure 4.4: Directory Screen

1)  Type the D command in one of the following formats:


Command Format

Description

D

Required. Display the 15 most current trains.

D,*

Optional. See all trains (one page at a time if there are more than fifteen).


2)  Press <ESC> to exit or any other key to continue.

Header Fields

Refer to tables 4-1 through 4-3 for header field definitions.


Data Fields

The table below defines the data fields on the Directory screen.


Field

Description

SEQ:

Sequence number assigned by the APU-102 to identify the train file stored on the solid-state disk. This number continues to 9,999 before resetting to 0001. Can be reset to 0001 by using the Master Reset command. Before modifying this field, see the description of the Master Reset command in the Supervisory Menu later in this chapter.

DATE:

Date the train passed the site.

TIME:

Arrival time of the train at the site.

RPT:

Report Status. Indicates the status of the host report for that train.

Y = Train reported OK.

N = Train has not been reported, but will be reported when the APU-102 gets to its sequence number.

P = Train is currently being reported or will be reported next when the telephone line becomes available.

E = Train was reported but an error was found when the APU-102 correlated the axles and tags. This is NOT an error in host communication.

X = Train was not reported due to an inhibit such as the age time-out. (The train was too old.)

F = Train information was not reported due to an unknown condition. This would occur if none of the above conditions could be identified.

LEAD ENG:

Lead Engine Tag ID. Identifies the lead locomotives tag number for that train if it is tagged. If the lead locomotive is not tagged, the field will display the first locomotive tag that was read. If no locomotives are tagged, the field will be filled with 4 blanks and 6 zeros.

DIR:

The train direction as it entered the site. Stopping and backing have no effect on this field. This is determined by the Transducer Orientation in the Operating Parameters and the Track Orientation in the Session Parameters.

RT

Indicates the route the train is taking.

MPH:

Average miles per hour of the train as it passed through the site.

AXLES:

Total number of axles detected by the APU-102 during the train passage.

CARS:

Total number of railcars recognized by the APU-102. An engine is listed as a car here. An articulated car (3 or 5 pack) will be recognized as one car in this count. An untagged caboose will be recognized as a railcar. Unidentified cars are NOT reported in the car count.

TAGS:

Total of all read tagged units on the train. A tag count preceded by a minus sign (-) indicates that only a Train Summary remains for that train.

LEN (FT)

Total of all the calculated car lengths in the train. If the length is enclosed with brackets, [00486], one or more cars in the train had a length above 100 feet. This could indicate that the train had stopped, which would make the length of the car inaccurate. This length is approximate and should never be used for train movement operations. i.e., “will this train fit in a siding?”

An asterisk (*) indicates the other track was active on a double-track site.


List Clean Consist (L)

The List Clean Consist (L) command lists the most recent train in a generic format.


Nicholson Ave        MP: 0000.0 Station 00001  Reader 1

 Train Seq #0002   Date: 05-02-11   Time: 09:02:35

  ENG: OICU 812     Dir: S   MPH: 024    Axles: 0024

  WDA = 024   WDB = 024   WDAB = 000   WDBA = 024

     HOST REPORT:  ON  : * :05-02-11  09:04:52/09:05:01


  Loco Cnt:    02    Loco Tags:   01     Loco Xtags: 01

  Car Cnt:    003    Car Tags:   000     Car Xtags: 003

  Container:     000    Chassis:     000     Trailer:  000

  Lost Axles:      000    Lost Tags:     000     Other Tags: 00


    D001  OICU   812   N    0/ 14

  @ D002      000000   C          (6)

  @ R003      000000   C          (4)

  @ R004      000000   C          (4)

  @ R005      000000   C          (4)


  End List 0002


     END


APU102XP: Main 1>

Figure 4.5: List Clean Consist Screen

1)  Type the L command in one of the following formats:


Command Format

Description

By information:


L

Required. Lists the most current train in generic format.

L,*

Optional. Lists all trains.

L, Sequence #

Optional. Displays information for the specified sequence number.

By format:

Many formats no longer used

LC

Optional. COMPASS format. No Longer used.

LT

Optional. TCS format. No Longer used.

LT94

Optional. T94 format.

LF

Optional. Full consist format.

Each time you enter the L command, the APU-102 prompts you to select a C (Continuous) or P (Paused) screen display. Selecting the Continuous display scrolls through all of the requested information without stopping. Selecting (P)aused scrolls through the data one screen at a time.

2)  Enter C or P.

If you selected Paused and there are more screens to display, the APU-102 prompts you to press <'C>' to change to Continuous display, press <ESC> to exit the list, or press any other key to continue the Paused display. This process continues until all the requested data has been displayed or a different selection is made.

If there are no additional screens, the APU102XP:  Main prompt displays.

Header Fields

Refer to tables 2, 3, and 4 for header field definitions.

Optional Formats

The LC, LT, LF, and LT94 commands list train information in specific formats. Below are the optional formats and their command code.

List Clean Consist - Compass Format (LC)

The List Clean Consist - Compass Format command generates and displays a train consist listing in the COMPASS format. For information on Compass Record format processing, refer to Header and Tag Formats in 2.0 AEI Site Operation. For Compass Record header and tag formats, refer to Appendix B.


 

Nicholson Ave        MP: 0000.0 Station 00001  Reader 1

 Train Seq #0002   Date: 05-02-11   Time: 09:02:35

  ENG: OICU 812     Dir: S   MPH: 024    Axles: 0024

  WDA = 024   WDB = 024   WDAB = 000   WDBA = 024

     HOST REPORT:  ON  : * :05-02-11  09:04:52/09:05:01


  Loco Cnt:    02    Loco Tags:   01     Loco Xtags: 01

  Car Cnt:    003    Car Tags:   000     Car Xtags: 003

  Container:     000    Chassis:     000     Trailer:   000

  Lost Axles:       000    Lost Tags:    000     Other Tags:  00


4O2 1 00001S1996013116020001000003000000000000

 05 OICU  812C0X

 19    000000C0X

 19    000000C0X

 19    000000C0X

 AVI

  End List 0002

Figure 4.6: List Clean Consist - Compass Format Screen

List Clean Consist - TCS Format (LT)

The List Clean Consist - TSC Format (LT) generates and displays a train consist listing in the TCS format. For information on the TCS format processing, refer to Header and Tag Formats. For TSC header and tag formats, refer to Appendix B: Host Reporting Formats.


Nicholson Ave        MP: 0000.0 Station 00001  Reader 1

 Train Seq #0002   Date: 05-02-11   Time: 09:02:35

  ENG: OICU 812     Dir: S   MPH: 024    Axles: 0024

  WDA = 024   WDB = 024   WDAB = 000   WDBA = 024

     HOST REPORT:  ON  : * :05-02-11  09:04:52/09:05:01


  Loco Cnt:    02    Loco Tags:   01     Loco Xtags:  01

  Car Cnt:    003    Car Tags:   000     Car Xtags:  003

  Container:     000    Chassis:   000     Trailer:   000

  Lost Axles:      000    Lost Tags:     000     Other Tags:  00


=#@001000000test      199601311602002000003000000000000S   

0000000G000216020030

7024

001D OICU    812     00000024

002D    000000     00000024


  End List 0002


     END

Figure 4.7: List Clean Consist - TCS Format Screen

List Clean Consist - Full Consist Format (LF)

The List Clean Consist - Full Consist Format (LF) command generates and displays a train consist listing in the Full Consist format. For information on the Full Consist format processing, refer to Header and Tag Formats in 2.0 AEI Site Operation. For Full Consist header and tag formats, refer to Appendix B: Host Reporting Formats.



Nicholson Ave        MP: 0000.0 Station 00001  Reader 1

 Train Seq #0002   Date: 05-02-11   Time: 09:02:35

  ENG: OICU 812     Dir: S   MPH: 024    Axles: 0024

  WDA = 024   WDB = 024   WDAB = 000   WDBA = 024

     HOST REPORT:  ON  : * :05-02-11  09:04:52/09:05:01


  Loco Cnt:    02    Loco Tags:   01     Loco Xtags: 01

  Car Cnt:    003    Car Tags:   000     Car Xtags: 003

  Container:     000    Chassis:     000     Trailer:   000

  Lost Axles:       000    Lost Tags:    000     Other Tags:  00

Full Consist Listing


Car EGC   Car ID    Ts Or Ax  LenFT MPH   Tr PC Pp A0  A1  Fuel(L) Spare

--- --- ----------- -- -- --- ----- ----  -- -- -- --- --- ------- -------

1   5   OICU000812  L  A  6   61    24.7  -  -  -  -   14  ------- -------

2   5   ----------  U  -  6   61    24.7  -  -  -  -   -   ------- -------

3   19  ----------  U  -  4   62    24.7  -  -  -  -   -   ------- -------

End List 0002


     END


APU102XP: Main 1>

Figure 4.8: List Clean Consist - Full Consist Format Screen

List Clean Consist - T94 Format (LT94, AAR standard S918A)

The List Clean Consist - T94 Format (LT94) generates and displays a train consist listing in the T94 format. T94 is the most common host reporting format. For information on T94 format processing, refer to Header and Tag Formats in 2.0 AEI Site Operation. For T94 header and tag formats, refer to Appendix B: Host Reporting Formats.


Nicholson Ave        MP: 0000.0 Station 00001  Reader 1

 Train Seq #0002   Date: 05-02-11   Time: 09:02:35

  ENG: OICU 812     Dir: S   MPH: 024    Axles: 0024

  WDA = 024   WDB = 024   WDAB = 000   WDBA = 024

     HOST REPORT:  ON  : * :05-02-11  09:04:52/09:05:01


  Loco Cnt:    02    Loco Tags:   01     Loco Xtags: 01

  Car Cnt:    003    Car Tags:   000     Car Xtags: 003

  Container:     000    Chassis:   000     Trailer:   000

  Lost Axles:      000    Lost Tags:     000     Other Tags:  00


AEM     COMET00515011050206021602060N4110002GGS0E024024024??FN00307G02000030000024

RRE001D    OICU000812A GLK00014240601

THI001OICU0000000812?????0000?00000000??????0?0014????

RTD2A453C29502020243252452058585858204E415300

RRE002D    0000000000U GNK00000240601

RRE003R    0000000000U GNK00000240401

RRE004R    0000000000U GNK00000240401

RRE005R    0000000000U GNK00000240401

EOC0000000378


  End List 0002


     END


APU102XP: Main 1>

Figure 4.9: List Clean Consist - T94 Format Screen

Train Summary (S)

The Train Summary (S) command provides the train header and the equipment and tag summary without the consist information. A recap of the equipment that moved across the site is provided. This includes the number and types of equipment that went through the site as well as the number of tags read for some groups.


'Nicholson Ave        MP: 0000.0 Station 00001  Reader 1

 Train Seq #0002   Date: 05-02-11   Time: 09:02:35

  ENG: OICU 812     Dir: S   MPH: 024    Axles: 0024

  WDA = 024   WDB = 024   WDAB = 000   WDBA = 024

     HOST REPORT:  ON  : * :05-02-11  09:04:52/09:05:01


  Loco Cnt:    02    Loco Tags:   01     Loco Xtags: 01

  Car Cnt:    003    Car Tags:   000     Car Xtags: 003

  Container:     000    Chassis:   000     Trailer:   000

  Lost Axles:      000    Lost Tags:     000     Other Tags:  00

End List 0002

     END

APU102XP: Main 1>

Figure 4.10: Train Summary Screen

Type the S command in one of the following formats:


Command Format

Description

S

Required. Summary of most recent train.

S, Sequence #

Optional. Summary for the specified sequence number

S,*

Optional. Summary for all available trains.



Header Fields

Refer to tables 4-1 through 4-3 for header field definitions.

Data Fields

As a summary screen, only header fields displays.

System Health Summary (SHS)

The System Health Summary (SHS) command displays any trains that the APU-102 flags as having potential problems, performs a Reader Interface Self Test (RST) and, if not dialed in with the modem, performs a Modem Self Test (MST). The APU-102 monitors items such as antenna handshakes, wheel detector pulses, modem retries, etc. If a train shows up on the System Health Summary, it should be determined if a problem can be prevented before it happens.



APU102


SYSTEM HEALTH SUMMARY


Condition                                                                       Status


Train #0070   Axle conversion error                           WARNING

Train #0076   Axle conversion error                           WARNING


0 Failure(s), 2 Warning(s).


End of report.


APU102XP: Main 1>

Figure 4.11: System Health Summary Screen

Type the SHS command and press <Enter>.


Header Fields

There are no header fields on this screen.

Data Fields

The table below defines the data fields on the System Health Summary screen.


Field

Description

Condition

Condition of the train. Lists the train sequence number and the diagnosed problem.

Status

Issues a “Warning” or “Failure” status indicating if the problem may be corrected or if system failure has occurred.

# Failure(s)

Lists number of APU-102 system failures.

# Warning(s)

Lists number of APU-102 system warnings.


System Information and Status (/) [Forward Slash]

The System Information and Status (/) command displays the software version, date, and file size. It also displays the available memory and disk space. The status of the Inter-track Communications (ITC), HBD, Scale, REDI, XTrack are displayed, if installed. The status indicator reports the presence of periodic heartbeat messages received from the other connected device.
This report may be updated as improvements are made to the AEI application.

'

Version Date/Time: "AP423.EXE" V4.23 9/2/1998 4:23:0  (180272bytes)


Free Mem: 194160, Free Disk: 431104, Next Handle: 2, Free Handles: 15


ITC Status....... Not Installed

Scale Status..... Not Installed

REDI 1 Status.... Not Installed

REDI 2 Status.... Not Installed

REDI 3 Status.... Not Installed

REDI 4 Status.... Not Installed

Figure 4.12: System Information and Status Screen Version < 5.1.1



Version Date/Time: "APU102.EXE" V5.1.1.102 4/11/2011 11:37:32 (bytes)


Free Mem: 331,169,792, Free Disk: 85,196 KB


ITC Status......... Not Installed.

Scale Status....... Not Installed.

MicroHBD Status.... Not Installed.

Figure 4.13: System Information and Status Screen Version 5.2+

Type the </> command (Forward Slash) and press <Enter>.

Header Fields

Refer to table 4-1 for header field definitions.

Data Fields

The table below defines the data fields on the System Information and Status screen.


Field

Description

Version Date/Time:

Software version, date, and file size.

Free Mem:

Available memory.

Free Disk:

Available disk space.

Next Handle

Next available file handle.

Free Handles

Number of handles available to open files.

ITC Status

Status of the Inter-track Communications (ITC).

Scale Status

Status of the scale.

REDI (1-4) Status

Status of the REDI port(s), if installed.

MicroHBD Status

Status of the MicroHBD, if installed.

XTrack Status

Status of all configured Tracks

Extended System Information and Status (//) [Double Forward Slash] ]

The Extended System Information and Status (//) command (Double Slash) displays debug and self diagnostic information in addition to the standard System Information. It varies from version to version and will not be detailed here.

Display Message Metrics (MM) Version 5.2+

The Display Message Metrics (MM) command displays the count for each system status message. Messages are from APUERROR.DAT file and correspond to messages in SYS report and reports sent to maintenance host. Remove the file "messmet.dat" to reset the Message Metrics count file.


===== Message Metrics =====

Unit Startup                                -

User Abort                                  -

       ************

Presence Startup                       8

Presence Clear                          8

Process Startup                          -

       ************

Pres Circuit Warnin        1

Aborted File Create         -

Figure 4.14: Display Message Metrics Screen (partial) Version 5. 2+

Modem Self Test - Local Only (MST)

The Modem Self Test (MST) command checks the modem setup and operational ability. It does NOT test telephone line connectivity. It can only be run from the local port or telnet and will return the test results in the same format as the Reader Interface Self Test.


Modem Test                  Status

-----------------------------------------------------------  -----

Modem Communications.........................    OK

Modem Carrier.........................................    OK

All Tests Passed.......................................   NORMAL

Figure 4.15: Modem Self Test - Local Only Screen

Type the MST command and press <Enter>.

Data Fields

Field

Description

Modem Test:

Lists the type of modem test being run: Modem Communications and Modem Carrier.

Status

Displays the results of the modem tests.

Toggle Sensor Power (SP)

The Toggle Sensor Power (SP) command allows you to turn the power to the external sensor devices off and on (if the site is equipped with a sensor power relay or LVD-2000).

1)  To turn external sensor power off, type the SP command and press <Enter>. The following message displays:


---------------------------------------

!! External sensor power is now OFF  !!


Press any key to turn power back on...

---------------------------------------

Figure 4.16: Toggle Sensor Power Message

2)  Press any key to turn external sensor power back on. The following message will display.


“External sensor power is now ON”


Note: This usually causes spurious inputs the APU-102 perceives as site activity. The APU-102 may go into acquisition mode. It will timeout.

Terminate Recording (TR)

The Terminate Recording (TR) command terminates the APU-102’s recording of the current train.

1)  Type the TR command and press <Enter>. The following message displays:

"This function will terminate recording of current train. Continue (Y/N)?"

2)  Select Y(es) or N(o). The APU102XP:  Main prompt redisplays.


Simulate Train (ST)

The Simulate Train (ST) command initiates a train test sequence for testing the reporting functions. The simulation cannot exercise the acquisition processes, but can perform post-processing functions and consist reporting. It is assigned a sequence number and will appear in the train directory just like an actual train. If it is undesirable to report simulated trains, a host reporting parameter can be modified to enable/disable reporting for each active session.

1)  Type the ST command and press <Enter>. The APU-102 Main prompt re-displays.

2)  Type D (or any of the available D command formats) to access the Directory command. The Directory screen displays the simulated train.

Simulate Maintenance Report (SM)

The Simulate Maintenance Report (SM) command causes the maintenance reporter process to initiate a maintenance transaction with the host by issuing a "No Activity" message to the system logger for the session you are logged into. If maintenance is enabled, it goes through its normal reporting processes. This function has no effect if the maintenance reporter is not activated.


No Activity" message has been logged.

Maintenance report is now pending...


APU102XP: Change 1>

Figure 4.17: Simulate Maintenance Report Screen

Type the SM command and press <Enter>.

Outbound Data Manager (ODM)

Outbound Data Manager is used in Distributed Processing Systems. AEI information from this APU-102 is transmitted to other “readerless” wayside systems, upstream on the same corridor, to match to axle data on those systems. This allows those systems to send tagged consists with defect data added to their respective hosts.

Refer to the APU103 Installation & Operation Manual' for additional information.


Inbound Data Manager (IDM) ]

Inbound Data Manager is used in Distributed Processing Systems. If this APU-102 was configured as a readerless APU (APU-103) it would be connected to wayside defect detector equipment. Axle data from the Defect Detector would be matched to AEI data received from downstream APU-102s. Its primary use is to show what trains from what remote sites are on the system, specifics about each train, and whether or not it has been matched to a local train.

Refer to the APU103 Installation & Operation Manual' for additional information.

Display Likely Matches (MAP)

MAP used in Distributed Processing Systems. If this APU-102 was configured as a readerless APU (APU-103) it would be connected to wayside defect detector equipment. The MAP command displays potential matches between trains received from downstream readers to local trains acquired by this APU-103.


Refer to the APU103 Installation & Operation Manual' for additional information.

Exit and Log Out (X)

The Exit and Log Out (X) command allows you to exit the current session and return to the Session Select menu.

1)  Type the X command (or “5” if displayed as a choice) at the Session # prompt and press <Enter>. X works regardless of the version.

2)  The system displays site name, the date and time, then logs out.

=== Dump Raw Data (DD) ===

The Dump Raw Data (DD) command dumps the raw data to the requesting terminal.

1)  Type the DD command in one of the following formats.

Note: This command must be entered with one of the valid extensions.



Command Format

Description

DD(Extension)

Required. Raw data for the most recent train.

Valid extensions:

S          Processing Summary

F          Full Composite Listing

T          Raw Tag Data

C          Axle-Car Conversion Data

L          Event Log

W         Wheel Event Log

DD(Extension), Sequence #

Optional. Raw data for the specified sequence number.

DD(Extension), *

Optional. Raw data for all trains.


Example: Type DDS,0002 to receive Processing Summary information for sequence number 0002.

If all screen information has displayed, the APU102XP:  Main prompt displays. If more information is available, you are prompted to select Continuous (C) or Paused (P). The Continuous display screen scrolls all information about the requested train without stopping. The Paused display scrolls through the data one screen at a time.

2)  Type C or P.

If you selected (P)aused and there are more screens to display, the APU-102 prompts you with an option to press <C> to change to Continuous display, press <ESC> to exit the list, or press any other key to continue the Paused display. This process continues until all the train data has been displayed or a different selection is made.

Optional Formats

The functionality of each Dump Raw Data command extension is described below.

Dump Data Processing Summary (DDS)

The Dump Data Processing Summary (DDS) command takes the raw data and sorts it into categories that you can easily identify and use. The information is divided into six groups excluding the train header and equipment and tag summary. The groups include the Train Summary Recap, the Axle Summary, the Speed summary, the Conversion Summary, the Tagged Equipment Summary, and the Reader Summary.


Nicholson Ave        MP: 0000.0 Station 00001  Reader 1

 Train Seq #0002   Date: 05-02-11   Time: 09:02:35

  ENG: OICU 812     Dir: S   MPH: 024    Axles: 0024

  WDA = 024   WDB = 024   WDAB = 000   WDBA = 024

     HOST REPORT:  ON  : * :05-02-11  09:04:52/09:05:01


  Loco Cnt:    02    Loco Tags:   01     Loco Xtags: 01

  Car Cnt:    003    Car Tags:   000     Car Xtags: 003

  Container:     000    Chassis:   000     Trailer:   000

  Lost Axles:      000    Lost Tags:     000     Other Tags:  00


  Site : test                 Lead Engine : ENG0000001    Locomotives : 2

  Time : 16:02:01 01/31/96     Sequence # : 0001             Railcars : 3

   Dir : LtoR (S)                 File ID : 00000001          Unknown : 0

      Axle Summary       Speed Summary   Conversion Summary

       --------            -----------------     ---------------------

   WDA : 24    WDAB : 0        Average : 24          Status  : GOOD

   WDB : 24    WDBA : 24       Maximum : 24         Lost Axles : 0

      C On : 0     C Off: 48        Minimum : 24          Lost Tags  : 0

       Total : 24


       Tagged Equipment Summary

  ----------------------------------

    Locomotive : 0         Tractor : 0

     Railcar : 0       Truck : 0

     Container : 0        Dolly : 0

      Trailer : 0       Non.Rev : 0

     Chassis : 0         EOT : 0

      Other : 0

                              Reader Summary

  ---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    Tier      Tags Read    Avg Handshakes  Pred Handshakes  Performance Index

   -------   --0--  --1--   --0--  --1--    --0--  --1--     --0--  --1--

  Tier  0 :   1  0    0    0     14    0      0     -

  Tier  1 :   0  0    0    0     0    0      -      -

  Tier  2 :   0    0    0    0     0    0      -      -

  Tier  3 :   0  0    0    0     0    0      -      -

  End List 0001


     END


APU102XP: Main 1>

Figure 4.18: Dump Data Processing Summary Screen

Type the DDS command in one of the following formats:


Command Format

Description

DDS

Required. Summary of the most recent train.

DDS, Sequence #

Optional. Summary for the specified sequence number.

DDS,*

Optional. Summaries for all available trains.



Header Fields

Refer to tables 4-1 through 4-3 for header descriptions on this screen.

Data Fields

The tables below define the data fields in the different sections on the Dump Data Processing Summary screen.

Train Summary Recap

Recaps information that identifies the train.


Field

Description

Site

Site name.

Time

Time and date the train entered the site.

Dir

Direction the train was moving.

Lead Engine

Lead engine’s tag number, if read.

Sequence #

Sequence number of the train.

File ID

Permanent file identification number that the APU-102 assigns the train.

Locomotives

Number of locomotives detected.

Railcars

Number of railcars detected.

Unknown

Number of units detected that did not fit into any recognizable pattern.


Axle Summary

Summarizes the axle count for the train.


Field

Description

WDA

Number of wheel counts received on Wheel Detector A. Includes forward and backing counts.

WDB

Number of wheel counts received on Wheel Detector B. Includes forward and backing counts.

C On

Number of “C - On” pulses received over the maximum required for the axle count. Should be 0.

Total

Total number of axles on the train.

WDAB

Number of wheel transitions from Wheel Detector A to Wheel Detector B.

WDBA

Number of wheel transitions from Wheel Detector B to Wheel Detector A.

C Off

Number of “C-Off” pulses received over the maximum required for the axle count. Zero-Speed transducers should = 0; Passive transducers should = total number of A and B pulses (because C-pulse not used).


Speed Summary

Summarizes the train’s speed as it passed the site.


Field

Description

Average

Average speed of the train as it passed the site.

Maximum

Fastest speed of the train as it passed the site.

Minimum

Slowest speed of the train as it passed the site.


Conversion Summary

Summarizes the train conversion.


Field

Description

Status

Status of the way the train correlation ended up.

Good = All axles and tags correlated correctly.

ERR1 = An error was found in the correlation of the car section of the train.

ERR2 = An error was found in the correlation of the locomotive section of the train.

Lost Axles:

Count of axles that could not be associated with a recognizable axle pattern. It does not mean the system missed any axles.

Lost Tags:

Count of tags not associated with a car, locomotive, caboose or EOT device. Test Tags are counted in this group when system testing is being done. It does not mean the system missed any tags.


Tag Equipment Summary

Totals all tags that were read for the train grouped into the following categories:


Locomotive

Chassis

Non-Revenue

Railcar

Tractor

EOT

Container

Truck

Other

Trailer

Dolly



Reader Summary

Summarizes what AEI the readers saw while recording the train.


Field

Description

Tier

Tier on which the tag was read.

0 = railcar                   1 = lower container

2 = upper container    3 = interference reader.

Tags Read

Number of tags read on each antenna where 0 = the near antenna and 1 = the far antenna.

Avg Handshakes

Average number of times the reader read each tag on each antenna where 0 = the near antenna and 1 = the far antenna.

Pred Handshakes

Predicted Handshakes. Number of handshakes the software predicts should be received based on the speed of the train and the width of the lobe.

Performance Index

Determines read performance based on the average handshakes and the predicted handshakes. Average handshakes X 100/predicted handshakes. Maximum = 999.


Dump Data Full Composite Listing (DDF)

The Dump Data Full Composite Listing (DDF) command begins with the standard train header information and continues with the “Composite AEI Listing.” This section is divided into tag-specific and non-tag-specific information for each car on the train. The DDF is a “first run” at processing the train. Further processing may occur before the final consist report is generated for transmission to the host.

                             Composite AEI Listing


                                                     +------------------ First Tag --------------++----------------- Second Tag --------------

Rec# Car EGC   Car ID    Ts Or Pc Ax LenFT MPH  Di Tc Ti   Hnd Pre  Disqual    P# EGC LenFT Ax Pc  Ti   Hnd Pre  Disqual    P# EGC LenFT Ax Pc

---- --- --- ----------- -- -- -- -- ----- ---- -- -- ---- --- --- ----------- -- --- ----- -- -- ----- --- --- ----------- -- --- ----- -- --

1    1   5   COMT000123  G  A  1  6  69    3.8  1  2  R0F- 43  40   ----------- -  5   71    6  -   L1R- 31  26   ----------- -  5   71    6  -  

2    2   5   KCS000659   G  B  1  6  66    3.5  1  2  L0F- 39  40   ----------- -  5   68    6  -   R1R- 16  26   ----------- -  5   68    6  -  

3    3   19  KCS125649   G  A  1  4  64    2.7  1  2  R0F- 64  40   ----------- -  19  67    4  -   L1R- 46  40   ----------- -  19  67    4  -  

4    4   19  TTZX855310  G  A  1  4  73    1.8  1  2  R0F- 90  60   ----------- -  19  79    4  -   L1R- 11  80   ----------- -  19  79    4  -  

5    5   19  KCS711108   G  B  1  4  [100] 1.1  1  2  L0F- 129 120  --L-------- -  19  79    4  -   R1R- 36  255  --L-------- -  19  79    4  -  

6    6   19  UTLX025459  G  A  1  4  42    1.5  1  2  R0F- 93  120  ----------- -  19  43    4  -   L1R- 59  80   ----------- -  19  43    4  -  

7    7   19  MSRC004330  G  B  1  4  62    1.8  1  2  L0F- 95  120  ----------- -  19  67    4  -   R1R- 6   40   ----------- -  19  67    4  -  

8    8   19  GMSR040435  G  A  1  4  64    2.5  1  2  R0F- 87  60   ----------- -  19  67    4  -   L1R- 29  40   ----------- -  19  67    4  -  

9    9   19  KCS125602   G  A  1  4  66    3.1  1  2  R0F- 59  40   ----------- -  19  67    4  -   L1R- 35  26   ----------- -  19  67    4  -  

10   10  19  KCS129103   G  A  1  4  64    3.2  1  2  R0F- 48  30   ----------- -  19  67    4  -   L1R- 27  26   ----------- -  19  67    4  -  

11   11  19  KCS129279   G  A  1  4  65    3.4  1  2  R0F- 59  40   ----------- -  19  67    4  -   L1R- 38  40   ----------- -  19  67    4  -  

12   11  6   KCS925804   G  -  -  -  -     3.4  1  1  -0-- 28  34   ----------- -  6     -   -  -  


  End List 1349


     END



Figure 4.19: Dump Data Full Composite Listing Screen


Type the DDF command in one of the following formats:


Command Format

Description

DDF

Required. Composite information for the most recent train.

DDF, Sequence #

Optional. Composite information for the specified sequence number.

DDF,*

Optional. Composite information for all available trains.


Header Fields

Refer to tables 4-1 through 4-3 for header descriptions on this screen.

Data Fields

The table below defines the data fields on the Dump Data Full Composite Listing screen.

Note: Some communication programs do not support 142 character display width and will word wrap or truncate at 80 (or 136) characters. DDF is best viewed by capturing or logging the display and viewing the file offline at 142 characters width.

Full Composite Listing


Field

Description

Rec#

Record number assigned by the APU-102.

Car

Location of the equipment in the train with zero (0) being the first car.

EGC

The EGC type of the equipment based on the axle pattern or tag.


AAR

Value

Description

1

Railcar Cover

4

Train Number Tag

5/37*

Locomotive  *5 is static tag, 37 is dynamic tag

6

End-of Train Device

8

Generator Set

10

Intermodal Container

14

Reserved (Formerly Non-Revenue Rail)

17

Tractor (Power)

18

Straight Truck

19

Railcar (Includes non-revenue railcars)

20

Dolly

21

Trailer

24

Rail Compatible Multi-Modal Equipment

27

Chassis

28

Passive Alarm Tag

31

Experimental User/Other




Car ID

Owners code (initials) and equipment number.

Ts

Tag status for that piece of equipment.

G =Both sides tagged correctly.

R =Right side tag was not read or missing.

L = Left side tag was not read or missing.

M =The car ID of the tags did not match.

U = Untagged.

E = Extra tag.

Or

Orientation of the equipment with A or B as the leading end.

Pc

Platform count for that piece of equipment based on the axles. This pertains only to multi-platform articulated and fixed draw-bar cars such as cars that carry cargo containers.

Ax

Axle count for that piece of equipment.

LenFT

Length of the car in feet based on the axles. Stopping does affect this field. Any undetermined lengths over 99 feet will be shown as [100].

MPH

Speed the car was traveling through the site. This is the average speed of all the axles.

Di

Direction recorded for that piece of equipment.

Tc

Number of tags that were read.



Tag Details

Information listed for the first and second tags read for each car. Information based on tag information and how the APU-102 interpreted it. 


Field

Description

Ti

Tag information.

First digit represents the tag that was read. (L=Left; R=Right)

Second digit represents the antenna that read the tag. (0 or 1)

Third digit represents the orientation of the car.-(F=Front; R=Rear)

Fourth digit is the tier of the intermodal tag. (T = Top; B = Bottom)

Hnd

Number of handshakes for that tag. The number of times the reader read the tag.

Disqual

List of any reasons that the tag and the car information did not match or a reason that the tag is invalid.


I   - Track Interference

O - Invalid Tag Orientation

P  - Illegal Position

M - Multiple Antenna

L  - Length Mismatch

D - Platform Code Mismatch                                                 

A -  Axle Mismatch

C - Inter track Canceled

E - ECG Mismatch

T - Inter track Comm Failed

F - Invalid Format

P#

Platform code of a multi-platform car determined by the software based on Orientation. This pertains to multi-platform articulated and fixed draw-bar cars such as cars that carry cargo containers. A single platform car does not have a platform code.

EGC

The EGC type of the equipment based on the tag programming.


05 = Locomotive

06 = End of Train device

10 = Intermodal Container

14 = Non-Revenue Railcar

17 = Tractor

19 = Railcar

20 = Dolly

21 = Trailer

27 = Chassis

05 = Dynamic Locomotive


Note: For a complete list of all possible EGC codes, see the EGC field definition in the Full Composite Listing section or the AAR, S918A specification.

LenFT

Length of the car in feet based on the tag programming.  (Stopping does not affect this field as it is read from the tag)

Ax

Axle count for that piece of equipment based on the tag programming.

Pc

Platform code for that piece of equipment based on the tag programming. This pertains to multi-platform articulated and fixed draw-bar cars such as cars that carry cargo containers. A single platform car does not have a platform code, but are sometimes programmed erroneously.


Dump Data Raw Tag Data (DDT)

The Dump Data Raw Tag Data (DDT) command displays raw tag data, which is the uncoded information as read by the APU-102. After the normal heading, there are five groups of information in this listing.


Nicholson Ave        MP: 0000.0 Station 00001  Reader 1

 Train Seq #0002   Date: 01-31-96   Time: 16:02:35

  ENG: ENG   1      Dir: S   MPH: 024    Axles: 0024

  WDA = 024   WDB = 024   WDAB = 000   WDBA = 024

     HOST REPORT:  ON  : * :05-02-11  09:04:52/09:05:01


  Loco Cnt:    02    Loco Tags:   01     Loco Xtags: 01

  Car Cnt:    003    Car Tags:   000     Car Xtags: 003

  Container:  000    Chassis:    000     Trailer:   000

  Lost Axles: 000    Lost Tags:  000     Other Tags: 00


                                Raw AVI Listing


 #     MS   EGC    ID                         RAW TAG

--- ------- --- --------- ----------------------------------------------------

001 00000063 D ENG 000001 #*E<)P  $2RE XXXX NAS&13:58:01.41 09/04/92%00-0-FF-F


  End List 0002


     END


APU102XP: Main 1>

Figure 4.20: Dump Data Raw Tag Data

Type the DDT command in one of the following formats:


Command Format

Description

DDT

Required. Tags for the most recent train.

DDT, Sequence #

Optional. Tags for the specified sequence number.

DDT,*

Optional. Tags for all available trains.

Header Fields

Refer to tables 4-1 through 4-3 for header definitions on this screen.

Data Fields

The table below defines the data fields on the Dump Data Raw Tag Data screen.



Field

Description

#

Sequence number. Order in which the tags were read by the APU-102.

MS

Time in milliseconds that the event occurred in relation to the start of the train.

EGC

EGC code. Equipment group code letter from the tag.

ID

Equipment ID. Decoded owner code (initials) and equipment number.

RAW TAG

Raw, undecoded tag data as read from the AEI reader. Also includes any appended reader data such as time and date, antenna number, and handshakes.


Dump Data Axle-Car Conversion Data (DDC)

The Dump Data Axle-Car Conversion Data (DDC) command lists the standard header and then breaks down each car by axle information only.


Nicholson Ave        MP: 0000.0 Station 00001  Reader 1

 Train Seq #0002   Date: 01-31-96   Time: 16:02:35

  ENG: ENG   1      Dir: S   MPH: 024    Axles: 0024

  WDA = 024   WDB = 024   WDAB = 000   WDBA = 024

     HOST REPORT:  ON  : * :05-02-11  09:04:52/09:05:01


  Loco Cnt:    02    Loco Tags:   01     Loco Xtags: 01

  Car Cnt:    003    Car Tags:   000     Car Xtags: 003

  Container:     000    Chassis:   000     Trailer:   000

  Lost Axles:      000    Lost Tags:     000     Other Tags:  00


                                Car-Axle Listing


Rec#  Car#  Plat#  Start Ax.  End Ax.   Axle Count  Start Time   End Time  Type

-----       -----      ------    ----------       --------            ------------     -----------            ----------        ----


  1    0    -    0      5        6        0     1303  5

  2    1    -    6     11       6    1715      3019  5

  3    2    -     12    15       4    3430      4848  19

  4    3    -     16    19       4    5145      6563  19

  5    4    -     20      23       4    6861      8278  19


  End List 0002


     END


APU102XP: Main 1>

Figure 4.21: Dump Data Axle-Car Conversion Data


Type the DDC command in one of the following formats:


Command Format

Description

DDC

Required. Cars for the most recent train.

DDC, Sequence #

Optional. Cars for the specified sequence number.

DDC,*

Optional. Cars for all available trains.


Header Fields

Refer to tables 4-1 through 4-3 for header definitions on this screen.

Data Fields

The table below defines the data fields on the Dump Data Axle-Car Conversion Data screen.


Field

Description

Rec#

Record number assigned by the APU-102.

Car#

Location of the equipment in the train with zero (0) being the first car.

Plat#

Number of the platform within the car. Articulated cars are divided into platforms that are grouped into one (1) car.

Start Ax.

Axle number in the train that the APU-102 used to begin the car with. The first axle of a train is always zero (0).

End Ax.

Axle number in the train that the APU-102 used to end the car with.

Axle Count

Total axles in the car.

Start Time

Time in the train that the APU-102 identified the first axle of the car. The start time of the first axle is always zero (0).

End Time

Time in the train that the APU-102 identified the last axle of the car.

Type

EGC code of the car as identified by the axles only.


Dump Data Wheel Event Log (DDW)

The Dump Data Wheel Event Log (DDW) command lists transducer activity for the most recent train, all available trains, or a specific train.


Nicholson Ave        MP: 0000.0 Station 00001  Reader 1

 Train Seq #0001   Date: 01-31-96   Time: 16:02:01

  ENG: ENG   1      Dir: S   MPH: 024    Axles: 0024

  WDA = 024   WDB = 024   WDAB = 000   WDBA = 024

     HOST REPORT:  ON  : * :05-02-11  09:04:52/09:05:01


  Loco Cnt:    02    Loco Tags:   01     Loco Xtags: 01

  Car Cnt:    003    Car Tags:   000     Car Xtags: 003

  Container:     000    Chassis:     000     Trailer:   000

  Lost Axles:       000    Lost Tags:    000     Other Tags:  00


Rec#   Tick Count  Disp   Type  Dir  +C   Pres?

----        ------------       -------- ----  ---  ---  -----


1        0        0   B    0    0      Y

2         22        22   A    0    0      Y

3       137        115      B    0    0      Y

4       160        23   A    0    0      Y

5       274        114   B    0    0      Y

6       297        23   A    0    0      Y

7        1029        732   B    0    0      Y

8        1051        22   A    0    0      Y

© for continuous display, (ESC) to exit or any other key to continue

Figure 4.22: Dump Data Wheel Event Log Screen

Type the DDW command in one of the following formats:


Command Format

Description

DDW

Required. Transducer activity for the most recent train.

DDW, Sequence #

Optional. Transducer activity by specific sequence number.

DDW,*

Optional. Transducer activity for all available trains.


Header Fields

Refer to tables 4-1 through 4-3 for header definitions on this screen.

Data Fields

The table below defines the data fields on the Dump Data Wheel Event Log screen.


Field

Description

Rec#

Number assigned to each wheel event.

Tick Count

Incremental time elapsed from the beginning of wheel event recording to the current specified event.

Disp

Time elapsed between one wheel event and the next.

Type

Identifies “A” or “B” segment wheel event.

Dir

Direction of train movement.

+C

Identifies presence of “C” pulse.

Pres?

Identifies state of presence circuit during that axle event


Display Parameters (DP)

The Display Parameters (DP) command displays a sub-menu of all the APU-102 parameter settings. This function is identical to the Display Parameters function in the Supervisory Menu, except passwords are not displayed. Logging into Session 1 gives access to all parameters including the other session parameters. Acquisition and hardware configuration of the equipment is also accessible to Session 1. Logging into other sessions gains access only to that session’s parameters. The Dump parameters (D) option displays at the bottom of all screens within the Display Parameters menu. The parameter dump can be captured to an ASCII file and later restored to the system using the Edit Parameters (EP) function in the Supervisory Menu.

Note: Version 5.1.1B103 has added capability of dumping parameters to an on-board file. 


Display Parameters -


    1. Session1

    2. Session2

    3. Session3

    4. Session4

    5. LocalSupport

    6. RemoteSupport

    7. Acquisition

    8. Ports

    9. DiskManager

   10. TimeZoneControl

   11. DaylightSavings

   12. SysDiags

   13. DebugFlags

   14. NetMenu

   15. SupportThreads

   16. MoreSessions


[D]ump parameters, e[X]it >

Figure 4.23: Display Parameters Menu Screen

All options may not be available depending on software version

1)  Type the DP command and press <Enter>.

2)  Enter one of the parameter options (1-16) at the screen prompt. Enter any sub-menu options to view the desired parameters.

3)  To initiate a parameter dump, type D and press <Enter>. The APU-102 will prompt you to press <Enter> to start the dump. This gives you an opportunity to start your capture file before starting the dump. The dump can be run from any level where the “[D]ump parameters” prompt shows on the bottom of the screen.

If 5.1.1B103 or later you can capture your parameter dump to a file on-board the APU-102. This file can be downloaded after completion using a more reliable transfer protocol (such as ZMODEM) Type DF and press <Enter>. (The DF option might not be displayed on the prompt) You will be prompted to supply an on-board file name.

Progress of either dump mode will be displayed.

4)  Type X and press <Enter> to go up one level, but only when the “e[X]it” prompt shows on the bottom of the screen.

Press <ESC> to go up one level at any time.

Change to Supervisory Menu (C)

The Supervisory Menu (C) is submenu of the System Menu and can only be accessed with the proper authority and password. The password assigned for access to the Supervisory Menu may or may not be the same as the System Menu password. It is recommended that the password for the two menus be different in order to limit the number of people that can make changes to the parameters or reset the system. Main Menu commands are accessible from the Supervisor menu.

1)  Type the C command at the APU102XP:  Main prompt. The date, time, and password field display.

2)  Type the designated Supervisory Menu password and press <Enter>. Asterisks (*) display as you type the characters.

3)  Type your name and press <Enter> at the Enter Your Name prompt. If the password was entered correctly, the “Welcome to” message displays and the cursor appears at the APU102XP:  Change prompt.

4)  Type <?> and press <Enter>. The Supervisory Menu displays.


Tip

Entering the supervisory password at the initial log on screen will log directly to the Supervisory Menu (version 5.10+).


For a screen example and information on moving around the Supervisory Menu, refer to the Supervisory Menu section later in this article.

Display I/O Information (I)

The Display I/O Information (I) command displays the state of the Input/Output (I/O) in a real time mode.


APU102 I/O Status Display

-------------------------

Block

#

Label

I/O

State

>

Block

#

Label

I/O

State

-----

--

---------

---

------

+

-----

--

---------

---

------

Main

 7

PresIn

I

Clear

>

Main

 9

PresOut

O

Clear

Main

15

DTrkPres

I

Clear

>

Main

16

DTrkPres

O

Clear

----

--

WDA

I

0

>

Aux1

 7

ClkSync

O

1

----

--

WDB

I

0

>

Aux!

 9

WatchDog

O

1

Aux1

 5

WDC

I

0

>

Aux2

 9

SensorPwr

O

On

Aux2

 1

WDD

I

0

>

Aux2

11

SpareOut

O

1

----

--

VTP R0,A0

I

Off

>

----

--

RFOn R0,A0

O

Off

----

--

VTP R0,A1

I

Off

>

----

--

RFOn R0,A1

O

Off

----

--

VTP R1,A0

I

On

>

----

--

RFOn R1,A0

O

Off

----

--

VTP R1,A1

I

On

>

----

--

RFOn R1,A1

O

Off

Aux2

 7

VTP R2,A0

I

Off

>

Aux2

15

RFOn R2,A0

O

On

Aux2

 5

VTP R2,A1

I

Off

>

Aux2

13

RFOn R2,A1

O

On

Main

11

24VAC

I

Fail

>

----

--

Sys LED

O

On

Aux1

 3

Progrmble

I

Clear

>

----

--

Sys Button

I

Out

----

--

RsrfcSens

I

1

>

----

--

SW3 Button

I

Out

Aux2

 3

24VDC

I

Ok

>

----

--

SW2 Button

I

Out

----

--

Phone Sel

O

Line 1

>

----

--

SW1 Button

I

Out

Figure 4.24: APU102 I/0 Status Display Screen

Type the I command in one of the following formats and press <Enter> at the APU102XP:  Main prompt.


Command Format

Description

I

Required. Displays the standard I/O.

I,C

Optional. Displays configurable inputs and counters, if present.




There are no special inputs configured.


There are no special counters configured.


There are no alarms configured.


APU102XP: Main 1>_


Figure 4.25: I,C Command Display (No Inputs, Counters, or Alarms Configured)


Header Fields

This screen has no standard header fields.

Data Fields

The following table defines the data fields on the APU102 I/0 Status Display screen.


Field

Description

Block

Connection block for DC power, wheel detectors, and AC monitoring or input/output channels. (Green connector blocks on bottom of APU-102)

#

Block pin number.

Label

Name for input or output signal.

I/O

Indicates whether the signal is an input or an output. (I or O)

State

The condition of the signal.


Train Logger Reports (TL)

Using the Train Logger Reports (TL) command with a valid extension displays a log of train related events, consist host transaction events, and maintenance host transaction events for a specific train or all trains. The displayed information defaults to the most recent train. Type the TL command in one of the following formats:


Command Format

Description

TL(Extension)

Required. Command code followed by the selected extension.

Valid extensions:

T = Train related events.

C = Consist host transaction events.

M = Maintenance host transaction events.

TL(Extension), Sequence #

Optional. Transaction events for a specific sequence number.

TL(Extension),*

Optional. Transaction events for all trains.


Optional Formats

Below are the optional formats and their command code.

Train Log - Train Events (TLT)

The Train Log - Train Events (TLT) command lists the standard train header followed by an event log listing events associated with the train selected. Use this command to determine if anything occurred to affect the consist and to dump an event log associated with the train. Except for specific messages that are always logged in the train log, this information is only available if enabled with the DiskManager.TrainLogEnable parameter. (See below for list of these messages that are always on.) The format of the listing is similar to that viewed with the SYS command in the Supervisory Menu.


Nicholson Ave        MP: 0000.0 Station 00001  Reader 1

Train Seq #0005   Date: 02-22-96   Time: 16:46:06

  ENG: ENG   1      Dir: S   MPH: 024    Axles: 0024

  WDA = 024   WDB = 024   WDAB = 000   WDBA = 024

     HOST REPORT:  ON   : * :00-00-00  00:00:00/00:00:00


  Loco Cnt:    02    Loco Tags:   01     Loco Xtags: 01

  Car Cnt:    003    Car Tags:   000     Car Xtags: 003

  Container:     000    Chassis:     000     Trailer:   000

  Lost Axles:       000    Lost Tags:    000     Other Tags:  00


96-02-22 16:45:54 REMOTE  0005 ST Function          name

96-02-22 16:45:56 RECORD  0005 Record Complete      0000 0276

96-02-22 16:46:07 RECORD  0005 Simulated Event        0000 0000

96-02-22 16:46:10 RECORD  0005 Presence Clear       0018 0005


  End List 0005


     END


APU102XP: Main 1>

Figure 4.26: Train Log - Train Events Screen

The following messages are always logged in the system log, regardless of the parameter setting.

  • Pres Circuit Failure
  • Pres Circuit Warning
  • Wheel Det Failure
  • Wheel Det Warning
  • Antenna Failure
  • Antenna Fail Warning
  • Extern Com Failure
  • Extern Com Warning
  • AEI Reader Failure
  • AEI Reader Restored

Train Log - Consist Host Transaction Events (TLC)

Lists the communications events that occurred as the APU-102 reported the specified train(s) to the host. Log is maintained relative to the train sequence when communications occur (time period from the last train to completion of this train). If no log is present, host transaction logging is probably turned off or consist communications did not occur during the logging period. This information is available only if the AEIReportOpts.TransactionLogger parameter is enabled for the specific session. Set this parameter to 0 to turn host report logging off.


Nicholson Ave        MP: 0000.0 Station 00001  Reader 1

 Train Seq #0005   Date: 02-22-96   Time: 16:46:06

  ENG: ENG   1      Dir: S   MPH: 024    Axles: 0024

  WDA = 024   WDB = 024   WDAB = 000   WDBA = 024

     HOST REPORT:  ON   : * :00-00-00  00:00:00/00:00:00


  Loco Cnt:    02    Loco Tags:   01     Loco Xtags: 01

  Car Cnt:    003    Car Tags:   000     Car Xtags: 003

  Container:     000    Chassis:     000     Trailer:   000

  Lost Axles:      000    Lost Tags:     000     Other Tags:  00


Event log file not found.


  End List 0005


     END


APU102XP: Main 1>

Figure 4.27: Train Log - Consist Host Transaction Events Screen

(Usually disabled so log file doesn’t exist)

Train Log - Maintenance Host Transaction Events (TLM)

Lists the communications events that occurred as the APU-102 reported maintenance information around the time of the current train to the maintenance host. Log is maintained relative to the train sequence when communications occur (time period from the last train to completion of this train). If no log is present, host report logging is probably turned off or maintenance host communications did not occur during the logging period. Set this parameter to 0 to turn maintenance report logging off. This information is available only if the MaintReportOpts.TransactionLogger parameter is enabled for the specific session.



Nicholson Ave        MP: 0000.0 Station 00001  Reader 1

 Train Seq #0005   Date: 02-22-96   Time: 16:46:06

  ENG: ENG   1      Dir: S   MPH: 024    Axles: 0024

  WDA = 024   WDB = 024   WDAB = 000   WDBA = 024

     HOST REPORT:  ON   : * :00-00-00  00:00:00/00:00:00


  Loco Cnt:    02    Loco Tags:   01     Loco Xtags: 01

  Car Cnt:    003    Car Tags:   000     Car Xtags: 003

  Container:  000    Chassis:    000     Trailer:   000

  Lost Axles: 000    Lost Tags:  000     Other Tags: 00


Event log file not found.


  End List 0005


     END


APU102XP: Main 1>

Figure 4.28: Train Log - Maintenance Host Transaction Events

(Usually disabled so log file doesn’t exist)

Pass-through to Port (PT)

This function allows the operator to establish a connection directly to the port specified in the port parameter file if it is not in use by another process.

1)  Type the PT command in the following format:


Command Format

Description

PT

Required. Command code.

Port parameter filename

Required. The parameter filename of the port.


The following message displays:


Remote passthru session established.


Press <ESC C> to terminate session.


2) Press <Esc> then uppercase <C> to terminate. If idle, the session automatically terminates after five minutes. The following message displays:


Remote passthru session terminated.

APU102XP: Main 1>



Command Examples:


PT,$REMPORT.DAT - Connect to the modem port.

PT,$LOCPORT.DAT - Connect to the external LOCAL port.

PT,AVI1PORT.DAT - Connect to the reader 0 port.

PT,AVI2PORT.DAT - Connect to the reader 1 port.

PT,AUX1PORT.DAT - Connect to the external AUX DATA-1 port.

PT,AUX2PORT.DAT - Connect to the external AUX DATA-2 port.

PT,NETMODEM,IP  - Connect to the another port on the network.

PT,ETHERNET,IP  - Connect to the another port on the network.

Pass-through to Reader (AMT)

The Pass-through to Reader (AMT) command allows you connect directly to the reader card and, if necessary, make changes to the reader card programming. This command should not be used without knowledge of the APU-102 software and the AI1200 reader card command set. All reader related commands will not operate if the reader is currently servicing a train.

1)  Type the AMT command in the following format:


Command Format

Description

AMT

Required. Command code.

0-2

Required. The 1-digit reader number.


The following message displays:


Remote passthru session established.


Press <ESC C> to terminate session.


2)  Press <Esc> then uppercase <C> to terminate the session. If idle, the session automatically terminates after five minutes. The following message displays:


Remote passthru session terminated.

APU102XP: Main 1>

Check Tag Sequence (CT)

The Check Tag Sequence (CT) command provides a way of verifying that the antennas, RF unit, and reader card are working correctly. When using the CT command locally and the Sonalert is on, you hear a beep when each check-tag is read and visually, the appropriate reader’s LOCK LED will light.


Check Tag [Reader: 0] [Antenna: 0] [Status : OK]

Check Tag Data:  0000000000000   00&12:54:09.17 05/31/95

Check Tag [Reader: 0] [Antenna: 1] [Status : OK]

Check Tag Data:  1111111111111   00&12:54:10.47 05/31/95

Reader #1 is not in current configuration.

Reader #2 is not in current configuration.

Figure 4.29: Check Tag Sequence Screen

Type the CT command in one of the following formats and press <Enter>:


Command Format

Description

CT

Required. Command code.

0 - 2, or *

Required. Selected reader number. The asterisk (*) specifies all readers.

0, 1, or *

Required. Selected antenna number. The asterisk (*) specifies all antennas.


Example: Type CT,0,* to activate the Check Tag Sequence for the first reader, both antennas.


NOTE

A check tag must be installed inside at least one antenna per track covered. It may not indicate a failure if a failure message is returned from the antenna not containing the check tag.


Initialize Reader (IR)

The Initialize Reader (IR) command initializes the Amtech reader hardware. It resets all the reader commands to the required APU-102 settings. Even if the communication parameters have been changed, the APU-102 searches all the available communication parameters to connect to the reader. Using the IR command is very helpful if the user cannot connect to the reader or there appears to be a problem with the reader card. With one command you may choose to initialize one reader or all readers.

Type the IR command in the following format:


Command Format

Description

IR

Required. Command code.

0-2, *

Required. 1-digit reader number (0-2) or asterisk (*) for all readers.

Example: Type IR, 0 to initialize reader number 0.

The following message displays the selected reader (or readers):


 

Reader #0 initialization complete.

APU102XP: Main 1>

Figure 4.30: Initialize Reader Screen


Activate Reader RF (RFON)

The Activate Reader RF (RFON) command is a diagnostic tool that allows you to activate the RF of a reader or antenna. Either antenna may be turned on individually or together. Only one reader can be activated at a time.

1)  Type the RFON command in the following format:

Command Format

Description

RFON

Required. Command code.

0-2

Required. 1-digit Amtech reader number.

0-1 or *

Required. 1-digit antenna number or asterisk (*) for all antennas.


Example: Type RFON, 0, * to activate the RF for reader 0 and all antennas.

The APU-102 displays the following message stating what has been turned on and that it is waiting for the antenna to read a tag.


APU102XP: Main 1>rfon,0,*


---------------------------------------

RF Is ON [Reader: 0] [Antenna: 0 & 1].

Press any key to turn RF off...

---------------------------------------


#*C2??$@:U2H-(4&< NAS&16:52:39.91 12/28/98%00-1-06-F

#*C2?0$K8X2G.1=”$ NAS&16:52:59.73 12/28/98%00-0-00-F

#FC$L $&<HAD      NAS&16:53:13.74 12/28/98%00-1-05-F

Waiting for tag...

Flushing Tags...                     

RF Is OFF.                  


APU102XP: Main 1>

After a tag is read, the raw (un-decoded) tag information displays.

2)  Press any key to remove the tag data from the system and turn off the RF. The following message displays:


Flushing tags.....


RF Is OFF.

=== Reader Interface Self Test (RST) ===

Use the Reader Interface Self Test (RST) command to determine if the APU-102 can communicate with any of the readers installed in the system. This screen displays the type of tests and the test results. This can be extremely valuable when troubleshooting a site that is not reading tags. It does NOT activate the RFID subsystem.


AI1200 Reader Test                                         Status

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

Reader 0: Communications............................. OK

Reader 0, Antenna 0: Rf Control Line.................OK

Reader 0, Antenna 1: Rf Control Line.................OK

Reader 0, Antenna 0: Antenna Handshake Line..........OK

Reader 0, Antenna 1: Antenna Handshake Line..........OK

All Tests Passed........     ........................      NORMAL


Figure 4.31: Reader Interface Self Test Screen

Type the RST command in one of the following formats and press <Enter>:


Command Format

Description

RST

Required. Command code.

0-2, *

Required. Selected reader number or asterisk (*) to indicate all readers.


Example: Type RST, 2 to test the communication between the APU-102 and reader number 2.

Data Fields


Field

Description

AI1200 Reader Test

Displays the reader number (0-3) and the type of test being reported.

Status

Displays the results of the test.

Print Match List (MA)

Print Match List (MA) is used in Distributed Processing Systems. Any time a new local train is recorded, the software must scan all trains it received from other sites that are within a defined “time window” looking for matches.


Refer to the APU103 Installation & Operation Manual' for additional information.

Compare Two Trains (CMP)

Compare Two Trains (CMP) is a diagnostic tool used in Distributed Processing Systems. It does a car-by-car comparison of 2 trains to help determine why a match was not found.


Refer to the APU103 Installation & Operation Manual' for additional information.

Main Help Screen (?)

Type ? to re-display the current menu screen.

Confidence Logic Parameters (CNF)

This function displays how the Confidence Logic Parameters are configured for the current session. Changes are made in the appropriate session’s AEI Report Option parameters.


 

AEI CONFIDENCE LOGIC PARAMETERS


   The following parameters are used to filter AEI data from outgoing consists

based on software comparisons between AEI tag information and axle generated

car information.

                            Current Settings

            ------------------------------------------------

                         Default Confidence Level :  3

      Double Track Active Confidence Level :  2

                    ITC Failure Confidence Level :  1


        Conditional Options                       Confidence Level Options

-----------------------------------                     -------------------------------------

D - Default. Used when no abnormal      0 - Tags are not reported.

    conditions exist.                                  1 - Tag is reported only if both left

T - Double Track Active. Used when          and right tags were read.

    train is active on adjacent track.          2 - Single tags are reported only if

F - Intertrack Communications Failure.      no discrepancies exist between

    Used when APU cannot access data        car and tag information.

    on adjacent track's APU.                       3 - All tags are reported.

Supervisory Menu

Overview

The Supervisory Menu allows you to change parameters, run diagnostic tests, and reset the APU-102. It is password-protected and should only be used by persons authorized to make parameter changes that are vital to the APU-102. Note: Main Menu commands (and help) are accessible from the Supervisory Menu.


APU102
SUPERVISORY MENU
HR              Host Reporting Options *MR           Master System Reset
*EMS          Edit Message Status *SR            System Status Reset
*VM            Version Maintenance RMS           Reset Maintenance Sequence
SYS            System Status Info *R               Reboot Unit
DIR             Directory Listing *WT            Watchdog Test
TYPE          Type a File ZSEND       Zmodem Send File(s)
ZREC          Zmodem Receive File(s) ZSENDMA  Zmodem Train and Matched Files
ZRECR        Zmodem Receive Restart XSEND       Xmodem Send File
XREC          Xmodem Receive File XSEND1k   Xmodem1k Send File
ZPUT           Local ethernet file xfer ZGET          Local ethernet file xfer
IPCONFIG   Check Network Settings PING           Packet Internet Groper
*T                 Set Date/Time RA               Reassociate all Trains
X                  Exit to Main Menu SHELL        DOS Command
*RHS           Run Hardware Setup MAIN?        Main Menu Help
EP               Edit Parameters ?                 This Screen
CLEAN        System cleanup
For help on a command, enter the command followed by a '?'
All main menu commands are available as well, type MAIN? for help

* - Available to Session #1 Only

Figure 4.32: Supervisory Menu

Menu may vary depending on AEI Application version. If not detailed in this text, refer to the on-board help.


1)  Type the C command at the APU102XP:  Main prompt from the System Menu screen. The APU-102 requests password entry.

2)  Type the Supervisory Menu password and press <Enter>. If you enter an invalid password, the “Invalid Password” message displays.

3)  Type your name and press <Enter>. A “Welcome To” message displays, followed by the APU102XP:  Change prompt.

4)  Type <?> and press <Enter> to display the Supervisory Menu.

The Supervisory Menu is the same for all sessions except the items with the asterisk (*). These items are only accessible from if logged into Session 1. The information displays in the format selected for that particular session.

Supervisory Menu Screens

Host Reporting Options (HR)

The Host Reporting Options (HR) command displays or changes host reporting with several different options. All are specific to the session you are logged into.

1)  To view or change Host Reporting options, select one of the following command format options and press <Enter>.


Command Format

Description

HR

Required. Displays current host reporting status, either “Activated” or “Deactivated”. This command does not change the status of the host reporting option.

HR,OFF

Optional. Turns off host reporting. This command suspends reporting of any train information to host system. New train entries will be stored with a report status in the train directory of “N”, for NO report sent.

HR,INI

Optional. Initialize or change the host password for COMPASS reports.

HR,ON,N

Optional. Activate host reporting; report only new trains.

HR,ON,A

Optional. Activate host reporting; report all trains.

HR,ON,#

Optional. Activate host reporting with Age Threshold. # = Age Threshold in hours (0-9).

HR,####

Optional. Requests re-transmission of a particular train. #### = Sequence number of the requested train. By entering a sequence number after the HR command, the requested train sequence number is placed in the queue for reporting. This feature will not operate unless host reporting is enabled and the train falls within reporting options.

HR,NOW

Suppresses reporting wait times from consist and maintenance processes and causes immediate transmissions of pending reports. (Version 5.10B2 or later)


A screen message displays the action taken on the Host Reporting Option. The following example shows a screen display if HR is entered.

APU102XP: Change 1>hr

*********** Host Reporting Activated ***********

APU102XP: Change 1>

Edit Message Status (*EMS)

The Edit Message Status (EMS) command allows you to remotely change (enable or disable) the reporting status of messages in maintenance reports. Some critical messages are always logged and cannot be disabled with this function. This function has no effect on the messages appearing in the system status log.


MSG #000: Unit Startup ENABLED

<E>nable or <D>isable or <ENTER> for current status:

MSG #001: User Abort ENABLED

<E>nable or <D>isable or <ENTER> for current status:

MSG #002: APUERROR.DAT #2 ENABLED

<E>nable or <D>isable or <ENTER> for current status:

MSG #003: APUERROR.DAT #3 ENABLED

<E>nable or <D>isable or <ENTER> for current status:

MSG #004: Presence Startup ENABLED

<E>nable or <D>isable or <ENTER> for current status:

MSG #005: Presence Clear ENABLED

<E>nable or <D>isable or <ENTER> for current status:

msg #006: Process Startup ENABLED

<E>nable or <D>isable or <ENTER> for current status:

MSG #007: APUERROR.DAT #7 ENABLED

<E>nable or <D>isable or <ENTER> for current status:

MSG #008: Dos Error ENABLED

<E>nable or <D>isable or <ENTER> for current status:

Figure 4.33: Edit Message Status

1)  Type the EMS command and press <Enter>. The first message displays and requests you to select <E> to enable, <D> to disable, or <Enter> to bypass.


MSG #000: Unit Startup ENABLED

<E>nable or <D>isable or <ENTER> for current status:

MSG #001: User Abort ENABLED

<E>nable or <D>isable or <ENTER> for current status:

MSG #002: APUERROR.DAT #2 DISABLED

<E>nable or <D>isable or <ENTER> for current status: E

Status change to ENABLED

Figure 4.34: Example: MSG #002 Changed to ENABLED

2)  Select <E>, <D> or press <Enter>. The next message and its associated number display.

3)  Continue enable/disable selections for each message that displays.

4)  Press <ESC> to exit the EMS command.

Version Maintenance (*VM) (not implemented for version 5.0+)

Use the Version Maintenance (VM) command to change the software version running on the APU-102. If for some reason the software needs to be changed, the VM command displays the software versions that are available.


Version Maintenance (VM) Menu



#  Cur  Version    Run File                Description

-  ---    -------        ------------      ----------------------------------

1        4.20     APUV4_20     T94 4.12 + Zmodem reporting

2   *    4.23     AP423        APU102 V4.23 (Base), T94 V4.12



Options

------------------------------

V - Change current version

C - Clear changes

D - Delete version

X - Return to previous menu


Enter option:

Figure 4.35: Version Maintenance Screen

1)  Type the VM command and press <Enter>. The Version Maintenance menu displays.

2)  Enter a number that corresponds to the desired version. Within the VM command, all sub-commands are hot-keyed (no need to follow with <Enter>).  Valid values are:

V - Change current version.

C - Clear changes.

D - Delete version.

X - Return to previous menu.

3)  You will be presented with choices depending on command selected. Answer as appropriate.

System Status Info (SYS)

The System Status Info (SYS) command displays the system status log. This log provides a list of all APU-102 activities. The size of the System Status Info file is limited and can fill quickly if the site is very busy or has a problem. If the site is not very active and everything is working well, the log may contain information for several days. The size of the log file can be specified by the SR command.

1)  Type the SYS command to bring up the Process Identification Menu (PID).


PID   Process            PID   Process

-------------------------------------------

0      ALL                 |  11    REPORT1

1      MAIN              |  12    REPORT2

2      RECORD       |  13    REPORT3

3      FSB                |  14    REPORT4

4      CLOCK           |  15    MAINT1

5      REMOTE        |  16    MAINT2

6      LOCAL           |  17    MAINT3

7      AVI1               |  18    MAINT4

8      AVI2                |  19    AXLE

9      AVI3                |  20    DISKMGR

10     AVI4               |


Enter the appropriate PID Number:

Figure 4.36: Process Identification Menu

PID menu may vary depending on AEI Application version. Example is version 4.25


2)  Select the type of status log, or PID, to review. Software is under constant development and options may be added or reassigned.


3)  The APU-102 prompts you to select (C)ontinuous or (P)aused display. Type C or P. The selected status log displays the available records.

In the following screen example, the Main process (PID #1) in Paused (P) display was selected:


Comet Electronics

Automatic Equipment Identification System

APU Software Version 4.23

AMTECH Model AI1200 Ver 2.80 SN97514

Wed 06/30/04  16:43:26

Host Reporting: On, All

Last LOGON: Wed 06/30/04  16:37:45

05-16-04 10:29:41 MAIN    0000 Clock Resync           ASCII Data

Time before sync Sun May 16 10:29:39 2004

05-16-04 10:29:41 MAIN    0001 Unit Startup           ASCII Data

 Halli                 APUV4_20 03-03-1998 04:20:00

05-16-04 10:36:27 MAIN    0001 Unit Startup           ASCII Data

Halli:AP43 09-02-1998 04:23:00


  End of System Status


    END


APU102XP: Change 1>

Figure 4.37: System Status Info Screen

It is possible that the status log will not have any records for the selection made. The APU-102 then displays the header information and the END statement.

Archived System Status Info (ASYS) Version 5.2+

Still under development to SQLite database and command structure is likely to change.

The Archived System Status Info (ASYS) command is like the standard SYS log, but for archived files. You will be prompted for PID and starting/ending date and times. This report provides a list of all APU-102 activities for the specified PID and date/time range.


PID  Process  PID  Process    PID Process   PID Process

-------------------------------------------------------

 0   ALL     | 24  ERROR    | 81  XTRKSERV |

 1   MAIN    | 25  GEHBD    | 82  XTRKMON  |

 2   RECORD  | 26  ETHOBS   |              |

 3   FSB     | 27  ODM      |              |

 4   CLOCK   | 28  IDM      |              |

 5   REMOTE  | 29  TALKER   |              |

 6   LOCAL   | 30  NTP      | 101 REPORT1  | 111 MAINT1

 7   AVI1    | 31-36 TELNET | 102 REPORT2  | 112 MAINT2

 8   AVI2    | 41-50 DETECT | 103 REPORT3  | 113 MAINT3

 9   AVI3    | 51-60 XTRACK | 104 REPORT4  | 114 MAINT4

 10  AVI4    | 61-70 NETMDM | 105 REPORT5  | 115 MAINT5

 19  AXLE    | 71  XTPMON   | 106 REPORT6  | 116 MAINT6

 20  DISKMGR | 72  XTP      | 107 REPORT7  | 117 MAINT7

 21  SCALE   | 73-76 COMBOM | 108 REPORT8  | 118 MAINT8

 22  WDOG    | 77  CAH      | 109 REPORT9  | 111 MAINT9

 23  ITC     | 78  ACQPROC  | 110 REPORT10 | 120 MAINT10


Enter the appropriate PID Number: 2

Display entire archive contents? (if Y, bypasses Date/Time entries)

Beginning date and time of archive:

Enter New Date mm/dd/yyyy >01/01/2012

Enter New Time hh:mm:ss   >00:00

Ending date and time of archive:

Enter New Date mm/dd/yyyy >01/02/2012

Enter New Time hh:mm:ss   >23:59

(C)ontinuous or (P)aused display? :

Figure 4.38: Process Identification Menu PID menu may vary depending on AEI Application version. Example is version 5.2+


Directory Listing (DIR)

The Directory Listing (DIR) command displays the file directory on the APU-102 with wildcard support.

Type the DIR command in the following format:


Command Format

Description

DIR

Required. Command code will display the entire file directory for all files.

DIR filespec

Optional. Command code and the desired file specification. Displays the file directory specified by filespec.

DIR filespec /p


Optional. Displays the directory specified by filespec in paused mode. Press any key to continue through the listing.


The directory listing displays:


              <DIR>      96-01-17  12:33

              <DIR>      96-01-17  12:33

DM144S  INI        441   95-06-26  11:39

SPT94    CFG        741  95-04-19  16:33

APUV4_14 EXE     157440  95-11-03   8:40

TERMINAL ACC        125  95-05-10  13:14

TERMSTAT ACC        125  95-05-10   8:55

SPHOST   ACC        167  94-03-22  13:19

CRMAINT  ACC        162  94-08-08  10:45

CPMAINT  ACC        361  95-08-07  15:19

ATSRPRT  CFG        742  95-04-19  16:35

UP       TLR          2  95-04-21   8:28

UPT94    CFG        740  95-06-30   7:53

CRT94    CFG        741  95-04-19  16:33

BNMAINT  ACC        223  95-05-10   8:56

MAINTERM ACC        125  95-05-10   8:55

KCSFEP   ACC        243  94-08-08  10:43

MCM2400  INI        584  93-11-01  13:22

       132 file(s)  261750 bytes  725504 bytes free

Figure 4.39: Directory Listing Screen (excerpt)

The filespec may contain asterisk <*> or question mark <?> wildcard characters. Press <ESC> twice to quit the directory listing. Typing </p> after the command displays the directory listing in paused mode. The size and timestamp of each file are displayed. At the end of each directory listing is a summary including the number of files in the listing, the total number of bytes in the files listed and the bytes available on the disk.



Type a File (TYPE)

The Type a File (TYPE) command displays the contents of specific files on the APU-102. Large files may scroll off the screen.


APU102XP: Change 1>type modem.ini

ATZS0=0

ATE0

ATV0

AT&C1

AT&D2

AT\N3

ATS7=60

ATX1

ATS0=1

Figure 4.40: Type a File Screen

1)  Enter the TYPE command in the following format:


Command Format

Description

TYPE

Required. Command code.

Filename for contents display

Required. The name of the APU-102 file for which you want to display contents.


2)  For more convenient viewing of larger files, you may capture the output to a log file or download with ZSEND.

Zmodem Receive File(s) (ZREC)

The Zmodem Receive File(s) (ZREC) command places the APU-102 in Zmodem receive mode. Zmodem can receive multiple files.

1)  Type the ZREC command in the following format:


Command Format

Description

ZREC

Required. Command code.

Path

Optional. The file path must be specified if directory location of the file to be received is not in the default directory.




Note: The path option is not available on application versions prior to 5.0. Files are received into the default path only.

The message “Ready to receive” displays.

2)  Once the APU-102 is in the receive mode, use the Zmodem protocol on your communications program to initiate a file transfer or a file upload. Use wildcards (* or ?) to upload multiple files. Refer to your communications software package for instructions on sending the file.

After file is received, the message “N file(s) received successfully” displays. (N representing the number of files.)

If there are errors in the modem’s transmission, one or all of the following messages may display (where N represents the number of files).


N port overrun errors

Serial port has at least one overrun.

N byte framing errors

Serial port has at least one framing error.

N parity errors

Serial port has at least one parity error.


These errors are normal and the Zmodem protocol is designed to correct for them. If they become excessive, you may need to repair either the serial port or the modem.

Zmodem Receive Resume (ZRECR)

The Zmodem Receive Resume (ZRECR) command places the APU-102 in Zmodem receive restart mode to resume a failed file transfer. Zmodem can receive multiple files. If a file already exists on the unit, Zmodem resumes transfer of the existing file at the point where the previous transfer was interrupted. With ZRECR, previously interrupted transmissions can continue, which saves time.

Note: The resume is done blindly, with no checks to ensure that the existing file has the same contents (up to the point of interruption) as the sent file. This means that if the file is a different version, the new file may be corrupted. Only use ZRECR on file transfers that you know were previously interrupted.

1)  Type the ZRECR command in the following format:


Command Format Description

ZRECR

Required. Command code.

Path

Optional. The fill path must be specified if directory location of the file to be received is not in the default directory.

Note: The path option is not available on application versions prior to 5.0. Files are received into the default path only.

The message “Ready to receive” displays.

2)  Once the APU-102 is in the receive mode, use the Zmodem protocol on your communications program to initiate a file transfer or a file upload. Use wildcards (* or ?) to upload multiple files. Refer to your communications software package for instructions on sending the file.

After file is received, the message “N file(s) received successfully” displays. (N representing the number of files.)

If there are errors in the modem’s transmission, one or all of the following messages may display (where N represents the number of files).


N port overrun errors

Serial port has at least one overrun.

N byte framing errors

Serial port has at least one framing error.

N parity errors

Serial port has at least one parity error.


These errors are normal and the Zmodem protocol is designed to correct for them. If they become excessive, you may need to repair either the serial port or the modem.

Xmodem Receive File (XREC)

The Xmodem Receive File (XREC) command allows files to be transferred to the APU-102 using the Xmodem protocol.

1)  Type the XREC command in the following format:


Command Format Description

XREC

Required. Command code. Places the APU-102 in Xmodem receive mode.

Path

Optional The file path must be specified if directory location of the file to be received is not in the default directory.

Filename

Required. The filename that the transferred file assumes.


The message “Ready to receive” displays.

2)  Once the APU-102 is in the receive mode, use the Xmodem protocol to initiate a file transfer or a file upload.

3)  Refer to your communications software package for instructions on sending the file.



Local Ethernet File Transmit (ZPUT)  

This command is used to transfer a single file between units residing on the same network. This similar to the ZSend function, except that it is only available to perform network transfers. This command ALWAYS send the entire file from the beginning (ZPutR can be used to resume transfers that were interrupted).

Type the ZPUT command in the following format:


ZPUT

Required. Command code.

Filename for transfer

Required. The file specification of the APU-102 file send to another unit on the local network. Wildcards are not permitted.  Use caution with this command as it will overwrite an existing destination file.

IPAddressOrURL

Required. Network address of destination computer.

IPPort

Optional. IP Port on the destination computer. Defaults to 23 on the APU.


Local Ethernet File Transmit Resume (ZPUTR)  

This command can be used to resume a ZPUT file transfer that was interrupted.

Note: The resume is done blindly, with no checks to ensure that the existing file has the same contents (up to the point of interruption) as the partial file. This means that if the file is a different version, the new file may be corrupted. Only use ZPUTR on file transfers that you know were previously interrupted.

Type the ZPUTR command in the following format:


Command Format

Description

ZPUTR

Required. Command code.

Filename for transfer

Required. The file specification of the APU-102 file send to another unit on the local network. Wildcards are not permitted.  Use caution with this command as it may overwrite or corrupt an existing destination file. (see note above).

IPAddressOrURL

Required. Network address of destination computer.

IPPort

Optional. IP Port on the destination computer. Defaults to 23 on the APU.


Check Network Settings (IPCONFIG)

Identical to the simple Windows command line IPCONFIG (no options).

Type the IPCONFIG command and press <Enter>.


ipconfig < y.dat 1> dosshell.txt 2> dosshll2.txt


Windows IP Configuration


Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:


Connection-specific DNS Suffix  . :

IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : 192.168.1.102

Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 255.255.0.0

Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . : 192.168.1.1


Figure 4.41: Sample IPCONFIG Response Screen

For advanced options and switches, run IPCONFIG under the SHELL command.

Set Date/Time (*T)

The Set Date/Time (T) command displays and sets the APU-102 date and time.


Current time Sun Jun 01  13:30:18 2004


Enter New Date mm/dd/yyyy >06/01/2004

Enter New Time hh:mm:ss   >13:30:18


New time Sun Jun 01 13:45:00

Figure 4.42: Set Date/Time Screen

1)  Type the T command and press <Enter>.

2)  Type the date in the format indicated and press <Enter>.

3)  Enter the time in military time format (24-hour clock, hh:mm:ss) and press <Enter>. The new date and time you established displays at the bottom of the screen.

Note: The time zone is set using the Edit Parameters (EP) command and selecting TimeZoneControl.

Exit to Main Menu (X)

Type the X command to exit the Supervisory Menu and return to the System Menu.

Run Hardware Setup (RHS) LPMTX with 5.0+ only

The Run Hardware Setup (RHS) utility is used whenever the hardware in the APU changes. The Windows XPe Operating System needs to identify hardware changes independent of the AEI application parameters. Select this function to set the APU-102 to run the Hardware Setup routine at next power up. The Startup ROM must be disabled to run the routine.

1)  Type the RHS command and press <Enter>. The following warning message displays and offers a chance to abort the command.


WARNING: THIS WILL SET THE UNIT TO RUN HARDWARE SETUP. Continue (Y/N)?


2)  Press <N> to cancel and return to the APU102XP:  Change prompt or press <Y> to continue. If <Y> is selected, the following message displays:


THE APU HAS BEEN SET TO RUN HARDWARE SETUP

PLEASE POWER OFF UNIT AND FOLLOW HARDWARE SETUP PROCEDURE.


TYPE "RHS?" FOR MORE INFORMATION.

Hardware Setup Procedure (following RHS command):

1)  Power off the APU.

2)  Remove the LPM-TX Pentium card.

3)  Remove the Startup ROM at U1 on the PCM-SSD card (daughter-card on Pentium card). Refer to Appendix F for ROM location

4)  Reinstall the LPM-TX Pentium card.

5)  Power on the APU. The hardware setup program runs automatically. The APU will reboot itself during the process and when completed, will indicate with a 3-blink, pause, and repeat pattern on the SYS LED. If Watchdog timer reboots the APU, it will return to this state.

6)  Power off the APU.

7)   Reinstall the Startup ROM at U1 on the PCM-SSD card removed earlier.

8)  Reinstall the LPM-TX Pentium card.

9)  Power on the APU to restore normal operation.

Edit Parameters (EP)

The Edit Parameters screen is a sub-menu of the Supervisory Menu that may be used to view and edit the parameters. The Edit Parameters command provides access to all the configuration parameters of the APU-102 if logged in under Session 1. Logging into other sessions allows access the parameters that affect their session only. (For parameter definitions and default values, refer to Appendix A: System Parameters.)

Groups of parameters can be dumped all at once by using the Dump Parameters (D) option. This allows you to capture the information to a log file providing a record of the site's configuration should it need to be reconfigured or the information is lost. The parameter information can also be loaded back to the site using the Load Parameters (L) option.


Note: Version 5.1.1B103 has added capability of dumping or loading parameters to/from an on-board file.  Refer to the 4.5 Edit Parameters (EP) Menu for more information.

Edit Parameters -

1. Session1
  2. Session2
  3. Session3
  4. Session4
  5. LocalSupport
  6. RemoteSupport
  7. Acquisition
  8. Ports
  9. DiskManager
 10. TimeZoneControl
 11. DaylightSavings
 12. SysDiags
 13. DebugFlags
 14. NetMenu
 15. SupportThreads
 16. MoreSessions


[D]ump or [L]oad parameters, e[X]it >

Figure 4.43: Edit Parameters Menu

All options may not be available depending on software version

1)  Type the EP command and press <Enter>. The parameters display in logical groups that can be accessed via the EP menu system.

2)  Type the number corresponding to the parameter group you want to edit. Either a list of the parameters within that group or an additional, second-level parameter group displays.

If the option you select on the Edit Parameters menu displays an additional, second-level parameter group, select the desired group to access to the desired parameter list.

3)  To keep the current parameter value, press <Enter> to move to the next displayed value.

To change a displayed value, enter the new value opposite the current value prompt and press <'Enter>'. If the new value entered is out of range or invalid, either an error message displays or the system redisplays the previous value when you reboot.

4)  To dump groups of parameters and allow you to capture the information to the log file, select the D(ump). To load parameter information back to the site, select the L(oad) option.

Press the <ESC> key to exit the current level at any time. The <X> key will also exit the current level. Use the <X> key with caution and ONLY when the "X" option is displayed.

5)  Reboot the APU-102 when finished to ensure that the new parameters have taken effect.

For on-screen help, position your cursor at the parameter value and press <Ctrl><U>. To move backward, press <Ctrl><B>.

Note: The PARM.HLP file must be maintained in your system files; otherwise the parameter help will not be available.

For more information about the parameter editor interface, refer to the 4.5 Edit Parameters (EP) Menu.

System Cleanup (CLEAN)

The System Cleanup command (CLEAN) is used to eliminate unnecessary files from the APU-102. This command does NOT eliminate train files.

1)  Type the CLEAN command and press <Enter>. The following warning message displays and offers a chance to abort the reboot.


CLEAN - System Cleanup Command.

-------------------------------

This function will remove unnecessary data and log files from the system.

This function does NOT remove any trains!


Continue? (Y/N)?

2)  Press <N> to cancel and return to the APU102XP:  Change prompt or press <Y> to continue.

Backup Parameters (BP) (5.09+)

This function is used to create an on-board backup copy of your system data files. These backup parameters will be automatically reloaded by the software when corrupt parameters files are detected. An initial backup parameter set is created the first time 5.09+ is booted. It is important to create a current backup set when parameters are changed. Verify the parameters are correct and the APU-102 is operational before executing the BP command.

1)  Type the BP command and press <ENTER>.

The APU-102 replies with a warning and confirmation to execute.

2)  Press <N> to cancel and return to the APU102 Change prompt or press <Y> to Continue.

Master System Reset (*MR)

The Master System Reset (MR) command removes all previously recorded trains from the APU-102. This process also uses the parameter DiskManager.MaxTrains to determine how many trains will now be maintained by the APU-102, assuming sufficient disk space. The APU-102 responds to the MR command with a warning statement and a chance for the user to abort the reset. The Continue? (Y/N)  response provides additional options to perform when the train files are deleted. Using this command is recommended when an APU-102 is put into service or after a problem has been solved. It is also useful to free up disk space or to remove old trains from drives that are swapped between units.

1)  Type the MR command and press <Enter>. The Master System Reset warning screen displays.


************Warning!!! Master Reset Initiated**********

**********All Train Information will be flushed********


Continue? (Y/N)


2)  Type <N> to cancel or <Y> to continue and delete all trains on the unit.
The display will move to the following prompt.


“Reset train sequence number to 1? (Y/N)”


3)  Type <N> to maintain current train sequence numbering or type <Y> to reset the train sequence to 1. The display will move to the following prompt. (depending on software version)


Starting sequence number <1-9999>:


4)  Type the sequence number you’d like to start with if not 1 and press <ENTER>. The display will move to the following prompt.


Reboot after trains are removed? (Y/N)


5)  Type <N> to delete trains only or type <Y> to reboot after the trains are removed. The APU will display the following message.  


**********    Master Reset In Progress    **************


The APU will display the following message if reboot requested.


REMOTE REBOOT IN PROGRESS…

Pressing <ESC> before the reboot prompt will abort the MR command.

Master Reset and Restart (*MRR) 5.2+

Similar to MR, except it also deletes all known log files, reset train sequence number to 1 and restarts the AEI application.

1)  Type the MRR command and press <Enter>. The Master Reset and Restart warning screen displays.


!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

!!!!!!!!                      WARNING                        !!!!!!!

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!


This function will remove ALL unnecessary files from the unit

and will automatically restart the app. All trains will be deleted

and the train sequence number will be reset to 1. Also, all log files

will be removed.

Continue? (Y/N)


2)  Type <N> to cancel or <Y> to continue.

System Status Reset (*SR)

Use the System Status Reset (*SR) command to delete the system status information from the APU-102.


1)  Type the SR command in one of the following formats:


Command Format

Description

SR

Required. Command code.

SR, 2 -15

Optional. Specifies the new size of the system status log file in Kbytes. Default size = 5 Kbytes.


 

APU102XP: Change 1>sr 10


*******Warning!!!! System Status Reset Initiated*******

********All Status Information will be flushed*********


Continue? (Y/N)

 Figure 4.44: System Status Reset Warning Screen

In the above example, a reset to a 10-kilobyte system status file has been selected. Resetting the system status log is recommended when an APU-102 is put into service or after a problem has been solved. This removes old information that might be confusing.

2)  Type <Y> to continue with the reset or <N> to cancel and return to the APU102XP:  Change prompt.

Reset Maintenance Sequence (RMS)

The Reset Maintenance Sequence (RMS) command resets the maintenance report sequence number back to one for the current session. Resetting the maintenance report sequence number is recommended when an APU-102 is put into service. This removes old information that might be confusing.

1)  Type RMS and press <Enter>. The following message displays:

APU102XP: Change 1>rms
Reset maintenance report sequence number to 1?  (Y.N)

2)  Select Y(es) or N(or). The APU102XP:  Change> prompt redisplays.

Reboot Unit (*R)

The Reboot Unit (R) command is tied to the reset line of the APU-102. When executed, the computer in the APU-102 restarts and the boot process begins. (Version 5.0+ closes files and shuts down Windows XP before resetting the computer.) All the external hardware and software is reinitialized. This is very helpful in the case of an inadvertent lock up of the reader board or I/O card, however the R command can be a very detrimental command, especially on 486 class APUs. Once the reboot is initiated, all acquisition, all communications with the APU-102, local or remote, will be lost. To prevent losing train data, avoid the reboot command while a train is passing the site. While a train is recording, a message is displayed with the command prompt.

**********Train Recording (24 axles)**********


A train must completely finish recording and appear in the train directory in order to be saved. Since the APU-102 cannot acquire data until the startup sequence is complete, it is impossible to generate an accurate consist from a train entering the site during that time.

1)  Type the R command and press <Enter>. The following warning message displays and offers a chance to abort the reboot.


WARNING: This function will cause the remote unit to reboot. Continue (Y.N)?


2)  Press <N> to cancel and return to the APU102XP:  Change prompt or press <Y> to continue and reboot the APU-102.


NOTE

Version 5.09+ has additional reboot options.

R,M reboots the APU directly to ROMSHELL mode (or NetMRS if applicable).

R,F performs a “fast” reboot. It shuts down and restarts the AEI application only. This option only takes a few seconds and is helpful when parameters have been changed that require a reboot. The computer P.O.S.T is not performed, nor are many “housekeeping” functions, such as code loading.

R,T (5.2+) will execute a full reboot after the next train clears.

R,C (5.2+, LX-800 processor only)

The LX-800 processor uses a protected partition for the embedded operating system. Some parameter changes made are kept on the protected partition. The R,C command was added to update these changes to the protected partition. You will be prompted when the R,C reboot is necessary.




Watchdog Test (*WT)

The Watchdog Test (WT) command tests the operation of the unit's watchdog timer circuit. The watchdog thread is placed in a "HALT" state (simulating a failure). If the watchdog circuit is operating properly, the unit restarts in less than four minutes (before “Seconds to failure” reaches .0).


---------------------------------------

!! Watchdog Circuit Test in Progress !!


     Press any key to stop test...

---------------------------------------


Test is successful if the APU reboots

before "Seconds to failure" reaches 0.

The counter will stop when rebooting.


Seconds to failure : 078....

Figure 4.45: Watchdog Test Screen

1)  To begin the test, type the WT command and press <Enter>.

2)  To stop the test before it is completed, press any key. The message “Test aborted by user” displays.

Zmodem Send File(s) (ZSEND)

The Zmodem Send File(s) (ZSEND) command places the APU-102 in Zmodem send mode. Zmodem can send multiple files.

1)  Type the ZSEND command in the following format:


Command Format

Description

ZSEND

Required. Command code.

Path

Optional. The file path must be specified if directory location of the file to be transferred is not in the default directory.

Filename for transfer

Required. The file specification of the APU-102 file (or files) you want to send using Zmodem. Use wildcards (* or ?) to upload multiple files.

Note: The path option is not available on application versions prior to 5.0. Files are sent from the default path only.

2)  Refer to your communications software package for instructions on receiving the file. Most programs will auto-receive, but have differing options when receiving a duplicate file. Insure your program does not blindly “resume” when receiving a duplicate file. After file has been sent, the message “N file(s) sent successfully” displays (where N = number of files).

Xmodem Send File (XSEND)

The Xmodem Send File (XSEND) command transfers files from the APU-102 using the Xmodem protocol. When the APU-102 is in send mode, you can initiate a file transfer or a file download using the Xmodem protocol.

File length: 125

Ready to send

Figure 4.46: Xmodem Send File Screen

1)  Type the XSEND command in the following format:


Command Format

Description

XSEND

Required. Command code.

Path

Optional. The file path must be specified if directory location of the file to be transferred is not in the default directory.

Filename for transfer

Required. The name of the APU-102 file you want to transfer in Xmodem send mode.


2)  The message “Ready to send” displays. Refer to your communications software package for instructions on receiving the file.

If no action is taken to send the file, an XSEND error message “Local timeout” displays and you are returned to the APU102XP:  Change prompt.

Xmodem1K Send File (XSEND1K)

The Xmodem1K Send File command allows files to be transferred from the APU-102 using the Xmodem1K protocol. When the APU-102 is in send mode, you can initiate a file transfer or a file download using the Xmodem1K protocol.


File length: 741

Ready to send

Figure 4.47: Xmodem1K Send File Screen


1)  Type the XSEND1K command in the following format:


Command Format

Description

XSEND1K

Required. Command code.

Path

Optional. The file path must be specified if directory location of the file to be transferred is not in the default directory.

Filename for transfer

Required. The name of the APU-102 file you want to transfer in Xmodem1K send mode.

2)  Refer to your communications software package for instructions on receiving the file.

If no action is taken to send the file, an XSEND error message “Local timeout” displays and you are returned to the APU102XP:  Change prompt.

Local Ethernet File Receive (ZGET)

This command is used to transfer a single file between units residing on the same network. This similar to the ZRec function, except that it is only available to perform network transfers. This command ALWAYS gets the entire file from the beginning (ZGetR can be used to resume transfers that were interrupted).

Type the ZGET command in the following format:


Command Format

Description

ZGET

Required. Command code.

Filename for transfer

Required. The file specification of the APU-102 file get from another unit on the local network. Wildcards are not permitted. Use caution with this command as it will overwrite an existing destination file.

IPAddressOrURL

Required. Network address of source computer.

IPPort

Optional. IP Port on the destination computer. Defaults to 23 on the APU.


Local Ethernet File Receive Resume (ZGETR)

This command can be used to resume a ZGET file transfer that was interrupted.

Note: The resume is done blindly, with no checks to ensure that the existing file has the same contents (up to the point of interruption) as the partial file. This means that if the file is a different version, the new file may be corrupted. Only use ZGETR on file transfers that you know were previously interrupted.

Type the ZGETR command in the following format:


Command Format

Description

ZGETR

Required. Command code.

Filename for transfer

Required. The file specification of the APU-102 file get from another unit on the local network. Wildcards are not permitted. Use caution with this command as it may overwrite or corrupt an existing destination file. (see note above).

IPAddressOrURL

Required. Network address of source computer.

IPPort

Optional. IP Port on the destination computer. Defaults to 23 on the APU.

Packet Internet Groper ('PING)'

This command works just like the basic Windows command line PING command.


Command Format

Description

PING

Required. Command code.

IPAddressOrURL

Required. Network address of destination computer. (192.168.0.12 in example below)


 

ping  192.168.0.12 < y.dat 1> dosshell.txt 2> dosshll2.txt


Pinging 192.168.0.12 with 32 bytes of data:


Reply from 192.168.0.12: bytes=32 time=1ms TTL=128

Reply from 192.168.0.12: bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=128

Reply from 192.168.0.12: bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=128

Reply from 192.168.0.12: bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=128


Ping statistics for 192.168.0.12:

    Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss),

Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds:

    Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 1ms, Average = 0ms

Figure 4.48: Sample Ping Response Screen

For advanced options and switches, run PING under the SHELL command.


Network Time Protocol (NTP)  

This command initiates a time sync request with a Network Time Protocol server (if configured in system parameters).


Reassociate Trains (RA)

Reassociate Trains is used in Distributed Processing Systems. The RA command reassociates all local trains to remote trains.


Refer to the APU103 Installation & Operation Manual' for additional information.

Command Shell (SHELL)

SHELL command argument switches

Any commands entered after the SHELL command will be sent to DOS command shell and treated as a DOS command. Batch files and DOS programs resident on the APU-102 can be executed as well as commands embedded in the DOS command interpreter, such as COPY, ECHO, REN, DIR (with switches), etc.


Caution

Use extreme caution with the SHELL command. Any command issued must NOT require any user intervention to complete the command or the APU-102 will be inaccessible via the current port until it is rebooted (for example, “Overwrite file Y/N?”). Some commands could even hang the AEI application in a manner that prevents a watchdog recovery. Shell commands should only be used by experienced users. In version 5.2, a timeout function was added to exit a hung Shell command.


Example:

SHELL COPY SPECIAL.BAT SPECIAL.BAK /y

Main Menu Help (MAIN?)

Main Menu commands (and help) are accessible from the Supervisor menu.

This command displays the Main Menu (or System Menu). All Main Menu functions can be executed from the Supervisory level.

Supervisory Help Screen (?)

Type ? to re-display the current menu screen.

Additional commands


Caution

For skilled administrators only. Improper use of these commands can make APU-102 inoperable.


Delete File(s) (REMOVE)  

Used to manually delete files. Works similar to DOS DEL command. You will be prompted for confirmation to execute the file deletion. After command execution, a summary of deleted files displays.


Command Format

Description

REMOVE

Required. Command.

FILENAME.EXT

Required. File(s) to delete.

Must specify both basefile name and extension.
Wildcards ? and * allowed

External Temperature Probe Commands

Used when external Rail Temperature Probe is properly installed and configured.

Force TempProbe Reading (XTPNOW)

Display Last TempProbe Reading' ('XTPDEBUG)

Acquisition Process Info' ('ACQ

ACQ Report is not running

Next ACQ sequence will be 1013

Cubic Acoustic History' ('CAHHISTORY)

Modem Stats' ('MDMS)

Display modem statistics including reset, initialization, connection, and disconnection stats.


Reset Modem Stats (MDMS,R)

Resets the Modem Statistic file.

Site Notepad (NOTE) 5.2+

Used to manage banner messages that appear during the login process.

Usage: NOTE Option Argument

Option [Argument]:


  A [message]        

 Add a message

  D [message number] 

 Delete message number

  C                  

 Clear all messages

  P                  

 Print all messages

  L                  

 Toggle whether to display notes at user login


COMET ELECTRONICS

Automatic Equipment Identification System

APU Software Version: 5.2.0.4

CPU Type: LPMTX

AMTECH Model AI1200 Ver 2.90 SN41656

Reader #1 is not in current configuration

Thu 02/11/2015   08:59:03

Host Reporting: On, All

Last LOGON: Wed 02/10/15   15:06:30


================== Site Notes ===================

1)  Updated to 5.2.0.4 12/11/2014 @ 11:22

=================================================


USID:       COMET00001

Site Name:  TEST UNIT

Display help command - "?"

APU102XP:Main 1>

Sample login screen with Note shown.

Set debug flags (SET)

Communications Logging

  SET LOGCOM 1 Turns com logging on

  SET LOGCOM 0 Turns com logging off

All communications are logged to text files, outbound communications are logged to [port file].TX, inbound communications are logged to [port file].RX

WARNING:  These log files are not managed by the Disk Manager and will continue to grow in size indefinitely!!! DO NOT leave logging active for an extended period of time!!!

Manually delete the *.TX and *.RX files when done.

Telnet Escape Characters enable/disable

  SET TELNET 1 Turns on escape characters

  SET TELNET 0 Turns off escape characters

User Access Account Management (USER) 5.2+

User level access control. Higher security than standard 2 level APU security.

Usage: User [option] [parameters]

Options [Parameters]

add    [username] [password]

remove   [username]

show

Note: To change the password of an existing user, simply add the user again, but with the new password.

 

View Channel Info' ('VCI)

Lists all currently used ports and displays diagnostic data.


                                                    --- Locked --- -Depacket-

#     Name      PID   Dev  Port  Baud Ctrl Stat #S   By     Sec    Run? State

-- ----------- ----- ----- ----- ---- ---- ---- --- ----- -------- ---- -----

0  $REMPORT      0   COMN      1 6    0002 0020   3                 Y    4

1  $LOCPORT      0   COMN      2 3    0003 0005   2   05     0000   Y    4

2  ETHERNET01   30   TCPIP    23 0    0002 0000   1   30     0000   Y    4

3  ETHERNET02   31   TCPIP    23 0    0002 0001   1   31     0742   Y    4

12 AVI1PORT      1   COMN      4 4    0003 0001   1                 Y    4

Sample VCI


XTrack Log' ('XTL) – Currently not available (Comet Engineering use only).

Watchdog Monitor Stats' ('WDM)


Displays stats for the software watchdog.


PID  Timeout   Low Mark

===  ========  ========

 23     60000     45000

  2     30000     25000

100    300000    295000

114    300000    295000

113    300000    121000

112    300000    121000

111    300000    295000

110    300000    295000

104    300000    112000

103    300000    112000

102    300000    112000

101    300000    112000

  1    300000    295000

Sample WDM

Test FTP Connection' '(FTP)

Attempts to open a socket on port 22 at the specified IP address or host name and reports back success or failure.

Usage: FTP [IP Address or Host Name]

Restart Network (STARTNET) (5.2+)

Restarts network to apply network related parameter changes without rebooting the APU-102

Switch Session

Switches to the next session without logging out to session selection screen and choosing a different session. Must be initially logged into Session1, Supervisory level to use. At last Session, command will return to Session 1.

Switch session <CTRL>-G, followed by <ENTER>




Edit Parameters (EP) Menu

The Edit Parameters Menu allows those with Supervisory Menu access to view and update current APU-102 parameters. As explained in the Supervisory Menu Commands section, type the EP command at the APU102XP:  Change prompt on the Supervisory Menu to access the Edit Parameters menu.

Parameter Editing Methods

Interactive Method

This method allows you to select a parameter group and view and/or edit its parameters using a simple menu style interface.

Example: Follow the steps below to give the site a new session name using the interactive method:

1)  Enter the EP command at the APU102XP:  Change prompt. The Edit Parameters menu displays. See screen sample in Edit Parameters (EP).

2)  Type 1 for Session1 because you know that the "Session1" parameter group contains the site name. The Edit Parameters – Session 1 screen displays:


Edit Parameters -

  1. Session1

  2. Session2

  3. Session3

  4. Session4

  5. LocalSupport

  6. RemoteSupport

  7. Acquisition

  8. Ports

  9. DiskManager

 10. TimeZoneControl

 11. DaylightSavings

 12. SysDiags

 13. DebugFlags

 14. NetMenu

 15. SupportThreads

 16. MoreSessions


[D]ump or [L]oad parameters, e[X]it >


3)  Select 1. SiteInformation. The following screen displays, showing that the current setting of this parameter is “Misc Railroad”:


Edit Parameters - Session1

   1. SiteInformation

   2. AEIReportOpts

   3. AEIReportConnect

   4. MaintReportOpts

   5. MaintReportConnect

   6. Security

   7. T94

   8. CP

   9. CR160

  10. EarlyWarning


 [D]ump or [L]oad parameters, e[X]it >1


 Editing Session1.SiteInformation


 Ctrl-B MOVES BACKWARDS


 SalutationMessage = My Railroad >

4)  Press <Enter> to advance to the next parameter of the group without changing the current setting.

- or -

Type the new session name and press <Enter> to change the setting. The SalutationMessage field displays the new entry and you automatically advance to the next parameter of the group, if any.

Note:  No need to burrow to the end of a group if you do not want to make any more changes, press <ESC> to return to go up to the group menu.

If you want to modify a parameter in the group that you have already bypassed, press <'Ctrl><'B> until you return to the desired parameter.

Command Line Method

Each parameter group has a name, as does each individual parameter in a group. In the above example, we interactively changed the "SalutationMessage" parameter. We set “Session1.SalutationMessage” to “My Railroad," with the EP function guiding us. The parameter could have also been changed at the EP command line by typing “Session1.SalutationMessage=My Railroad” and pressing <Enter>. Parameters are represented as statements rather than menu selections, which allow the entire parameter set to be “batched.”

Batch Operations

Batching allows parameters to be uploaded or downloaded in groups, as opposed to one-by-one using the interactive method. In our applications, batching allows you to gather and store all parameters for the site in one file. Because the file is human readable and editable using any text editor, viewing and/or modifying the system parameters from a remote site is a simple process. It also allows a site to be duplicated easily in the event of a complete system failure. While reloading code to a site may be a simple operation, reconfiguring the site exactly as it was (i.e. parameters) is not.

Example: Replacing Sites; The solid state disk needs to be replaced due to an upgrade. Fortunately, you logged an EP dump of the site parameters just after the site went into operation. After the local technician put the unconfigured spare unit in place at the site, connect and upload the EP dump back to the site. Reboot the APU-102 when finished to ensure that the new parameters have taken effect. When appropriate (depending on AEI application version), log back in and do parameter backup (BP) and update the system mirror image for accurate system recovery. .

Example: Cloning Sites Batch operations are useful for duplicating sites. For example, if another unit is added at another location, everything at the new site is identical, except for the name, number, etc. Simply edit the captured dump file to make appropriate changes and upload to the new site with the modified version.

Editing Parameter Groups

Each parameter group on the Edit Parameters menu contains a list of individual parameters that may be edited. For parameter descriptions, valid values, and default values, refer to Appendix A: System Parameters.

Downloading Parameters

To download (or dump) all parameter statements for the system:

1)  Enter the EP command at the APU102XP:  Change prompt. The Edit Parameters menu displays. See screen sample in Edit Parameters (EP).

2)  Type <D> for Dump at the Edit Parameters menu command prompt. The “Press enter to start…” prompt allows you to start a capture file on the communications package you are using to store the parameters.

3)  The EP command then downloads the parameter statements to you. When the last parameter displays, you can press <ESC> to return to the previous parameter listing menu or wait for the inactivity timeout to do the same.

The following is an example of a parameter dump from a sample APU-102 application:


TimeZoneControl.ReferenceTimeZone=6

TimeZoneControl.TimeSyncWithHost=1

SysDiags.PresenceLoop.MinAxles=3

SysDiags.PresenceLoop.LowSpeedThresh=4

SysDiags.PresenceLoop.HighSpeedThresh=15

SysDiags.PresenceLoop.PresTimeOutAboveSpeed=15

SysDiags.PresenceLoopPresenceTimeoutSeconds=30

SysDiags.PresenceLoop.SecondsBetweenTrains=20

SysDiags.Antenna.ConsecutiveTrains=1

SysDiags.Antenna.MinTrainLength=10

SysDiags.Antenna.FatalTagPercent=1

SysDiags.Antenna.WarningTagPercent=50

SysDiags.WheelDet.ConsecutiveTrains=1

SysDiags.WheelDet.MinValidTagPairs=3

SysDiags.WheelDet.TrainsToReview=0

SysDiags.WheelDet.AxlesToReview=0

SysDiags.WheelDet.Mismatch=0

SysDiags.WheelDet.LowtoleranceMismatch=0

SysDiags.WheelDet.LowToleranceSpeed=0

Figure 4.49: Parameter Dump Example (partial)

Uploading Parameters

Before you can do a parameter upload, you will need a file containing the parameters. The easiest way to obtain a parameter file is to create one using the download procedure described above.

To upload a parameter file, enter <L> for Load at the EP prompt and send the file to the unit using your communications package’s “RAW ASCII TRANSMIT” or “TEXT” command. EP echoes back to you the parameter statements it receives as well as a message indicating how well it digested each message. If the EP command does not like a parameter or setting, it will let you know. (It’s a good idea to log the message stream). When the last parameter displays, you can press <ESC> to return to the previous parameter listing menu or wait for the inactivity timeout to do the same.


Caution

Pay attention to the responses. As the number of parameters grow with the application development, it is possible to over-run the buffer on the APU-102, especially if using the Local Port, resulting in parameters not getting updated as desired.

Some communications programs will allow you to “paste” text to the screen and can be a handy method of loading partial parameter files.

Reboot the APU-102 when finished to ensure that the new parameters have taken effect. When appropriate (depending on AEI application version), log back in and do parameter backup (BP) and update the system mirror image for accurate system recovery.

  Dumping Parameters to on-board file (5.1.1B103 or later)

To download (or dump) all parameter statements for the system:

1)  Enter the EP command at the APU102XP:  Change prompt. The Edit Parameters menu displays. See screen sample in Edit Parameters (EP).

2)  Type <DF> for Dump File at the Edit Parameters menu command prompt. You will be prompted for a file to capture the parameters to. This file will be on the APU and it can be downloaded to your PC via any available file transfer methods on the APU102, i.e., Zmodem, Xmodem, FTP, etc.

3)  The EP command then dumps the parameter statements to that file. The parameter listing will be refreshed when the process is done. If the file already exists, you will be prompted to overwrite it.

 Loading Parameters from on-board file (5.1.1B103 or later)

Before you can do a parameter upload, you will need a file containing the parameters. The easiest way to obtain a parameter file is to create one using the download procedure described above.

To load parameters from a file, it must be resident on the APU-102. The file can be uploaded from your PC via any available file transfer methods on the APU-102, i.e., Zmodem, Xmodem, FTP, ZPUT, ZGET, etc.

1)   Enter the EP command at the APU102XP:  Change prompt. The Edit Parameters menu displays. See screen sample in Edit Parameters (EP).

2)  Type <LF> for Load File at the Edit Parameters menu command prompt. You will be prompted for the file to load the parameters from. 

3)  The EP command then loads the parameter statements from that file. Progress will look like the standard “L” load or may show progress bar on later versions of software.

Note: A log file (PED.LOG) will be created of the complete parameter load noting errors. It is a text file that can be downloaded or viewed on-line with the TYPE command.

4)  Reboot the APU-102 when finished to ensure that the new parameters have taken effect. When appropriate (depending on AEI application version), log back in and do parameter backup (BP) and update the system mirror image for accurate system recovery.


ROMSHELL User Interface (Optional)

 Overview

ROMSHELL is an alternate operating mode of the APU-102 that is hard coded into the Startup ROM (drive A of the USSD/PSSD). Not applicable for L-Series APU-102 (LX-800 equipped). It has diagnostic functionality superior to Mini-Remote Support (MRS). Benefits of the ROMSHELL user interface include:

Loading Code via Zmodem

Versions of the AEI code prior to 4.20 do not support Zmodem file transfers. Xmodem will pad the file to an even 128 bytes, and that padding may make some files unstable or unusable. Formerly, Remote Support and a “Back Door” connection had to be used to load these files. With ROMSHELL, they can be loaded via Zmodem.

Restoring site operation when USSD is blank

The USSD may be blank due to onboard battery failure coupled with power loss to APU-102. It may also be cleared intentionally by removing battery jumpers or issuing a remote format command. This is usually done if a corrupt file structure is suspected or field upgrade of a card is desired. With ROMSHELL, the site can be restored to operation.

Additional Benefits:

  • Zmodem file transfer protocol. Does not require a special communication software package, as with MRS.
  • ROMSHELL identifies the modem and initializes it with the highest possible connection rate. (independent of the AEI application)
  • Local port initialization at 2400 or 9600 baud depending on version (detailed below in Local Port Connection and Logon). (independent of the AEI application)
  • Password protection. (independent of the AEI application)
  • ROMSHELL activity is logged to a text file on the APU-102’s “disk”.
  • Contains many DOS-like commands.
  • MS-DOS commands, including COMMAND.COM embedded commands can be performed through the shell.
  • PORTATTACH utility that does not require port-specific portfile or initialization files.
  • Watchdog timer reboots the APU-102 after 20 minutes.
  • Real-time verification of file transfers.
  • Automatic compact flash recovery if corruption is detected.

    (Version 5.4 for LPMTX only! Requires CF imaged with mirror partition. Refer to document 385-0010-00, APU102 Auto-Recovery Quick Start Guide for LPM-TX for detailed operation)

    Why is ROMSHELL Running?

    The APU-102 boots to ROMSHELL every fifth time the APU-102 is hard booted by power reset or watchdog timer reboot. The APU-102 can be forced to boot to ROMSHELL for diagnostics. The APU-102 also boots to ROMSHELL under the following additional circumstances:

    The application boot-up sequence fails. This can be caused by corrupt or missing files, incorrect parameter setup, or loss of all files from the static RAM of the USSD (C: drive).

    The following files are required to boot to the DOS version AEI consist application:

  • SPECIAL.BAT (Executes commands preparing the APU-102 to run the application.)
  • APUEXEC.BAT or other batch file to load the application. (Its contents must contain the file name of the Application Executable.)
  • SYSPARMS.DAT
  • $REMPORT.DAT
  • $REMPARM.DAT
  • $LOCPORT.DAT
  • $LOCPARM.DAT
  • SAAEI.EXE
  • Modem INI file identified in $REMPORT.DAT
  • Application Executable file (e.g. AP423.EXE)

    Note: File requirements vary for other DOS APU-102 applications, such as Tracker and ACQ.

    XP version APU-102 have file requirements that are too complex to detail here.

    The application fails to initialize some of the hardware, particularly Modem and Local Ports. A possible cause could be an error in following parameter files:

  • $REMPORT.DAT (Particularly Modem INI file specified correctly, and the file must be on the disk)
  • $REMPARM.DAT (Tells the APU-102 which port file to use for remote access. Usually modem port is $REMPORT.DAT.)
  • $LOCPORT.DAT
  • $LOCPARM.DAT (Tells the APU-102 which port file to use for local access. Usually local port is $LOCPORT.DAT.)

    Other potential file problems include:

  • F.BAT (run once BAT file) has invalid commands that prevent it from fully executing such as those requiring user input.
  • SPECIAL.BAT does not fully execute.
  • APUEXEC.BAT (or other batch file to load the application) does not contain the file name of the Application Executable.

ROMSHELL Operation

Local Port Connection and Logon

1)  Attach a PC or data terminal to the “LOCAL” communications port of the APU-102 unit. The APU-102 is configured as a DTE with a female 25-pin “D” RS-232 connector. Communications parameters for Startup ROM version 5.3+ are controlled by a flag file (96.DAT) in the APU’s AEI directory. If the file is present, the local port is initialized at 9600 baud. If the file is absent, the port initializes at 2400. Version 5.1 is fixed at 2400 baud. Other prior versions are fixed at 9600 baud. All utilize 8 data bits, no parity, and one stop bit. These parameters are independent of the AEI application and may be different. Setup your communications program to match.

2)  Press <Enter> and the ROMSHELL responds with the Password prompt.

3)  Type your password and press <Enter>. The default password is “SECRET” but can be changed. (Refer to Password command) You will see a prompt similar to the following example. From here you can enter any of the ROMSHELL commands.


-RS- A:\>

Note: The prompt will reflect the current working directory; in this case, the root of “A.”

Dial-up Connection

1)  Dial the site with any commercial communication package, and the modems will negotiate the best connection.

2)  Once connected, press <Enter> and the ROMSHELL responds with the Password prompt.

3)  Type your password and press <Enter>. The default password is “SECRET” but can be changed as. (Refer to Password command) You will see a prompt similar to the following example. From here you can enter any of the ROMSHELL commands.


-RS- A:\>

Note: The prompt will reflect the current working directory, in this case, the root of “A.”

ROMSHELL System Commands

Type <?> and press <Enter> to display a list of available ROMSHELL commands. A list of the commands displays.

Command Listing


?
HELP
EXIT
CLS
DIR
TYPE
DEL
/
REBOOT
SHELL
PORTVIEW
ZSEND
ZREC
ZRECR
TIME
DATE
CD
ATTACH
PORTATTACH
VER
L
FORMATUSSD
PASSWORD
TTL
HDTOOL

Command Definitions

The following defines and explains how to use each ROMSHELL command. Type <?> and press <Enter> (or HELP and <Enter>)  to display a list of available commands.

?

Displays the ROMSHELL command listing.

/

Displays information on available system memory.



Free Mem : 445856, Free Disk : 1121792

      Stack Usage Information
   Name    Id    Base     Size   Free
---------- --  ---------  -----  ----
Main       00  25DE:0BF6  29240  17133 
$locport   04  25DE:7296  3000   1667  
$remport   05  25DE:66D4  3000   1891  
conport    06  25DE:5B12  3000   2055  
DOG        07  25DE:4F50  3000   2351  

       Memory
Fragment Information
#    Address    Len
--  ---------  -----
01  3325:0000  445856
02  2EA6:0000  80  
03  2FF0:0000  48  

Total free: 445984 (bytes)

Example: / Command


ATTACH Portfile

Attaches to defined ports ($REMPORT.DAT and $LOCPORT.DAT). For example, if logged into the local port, you could attach to the modem port ($REMPORT.DAT) and execute Hayes commands to the modem. Control-Z exits the attach utility.

Note:  Legacy ports only-not compatible with ports 3-6 on network capable APU-102s.


CD path

Works like a DOS CD command. It changes to the specified directory and displays the -RS- (path)> prompt, reflecting the now current working directory.

Note: You can also change to a different drive as you would in DOS. Example: Type C: and press <Enter> to change to the “C” drive.

CLS

Clears the screen and displays the -RS- (path)> prompt.

DATE

Displays the following prompt with the current ROMSHELL site system date. To change the date, enter the new date using the format displayed in parentheses. To accept the current date, press <Enter>.


Current date is 06/01/2004

Enter new date (mm-dd-yyyy):


Note: Changing the date or time on the E-Series APU restarts the 20-minute watchdog. The P-Series APU handles time differently and may cause a reboot (time has expired). It is recommended that the system date and time be set with the AEI application. If date/time is set in ROMSHELL and then booted to the application, the time may be off due to time zones or daylight savings time settings. These settings are applied AFTER time is read from the CPU.

DEL  filename

Deletes the specified filename from the system.

DIR (optional parameters)

Use the DIR command alone to display a directory of all files in the current path. To display specific files, add the optional path and filename arguments using standard DOS conventions including wildcard arguments (* or ?). This is not a true DOS DIR command though, therefore do not apply any “/” switches to your command line. If a true DOS DIR is desired, refer to the SHELL command below.

Volume in drive A is Ac
 Volume Serial Number is 0616-1200
 Directory of A:\

$LOCPORT DAT        76 03-09-00   1:29p
$REMPORT DAT        78 03-09-00   1:30p
ANSI     SYS      9029 04-27-95   8:10p
AUTOEXEC BAT      1145 03-16-00   4:34p
CHECKSYS COM       192 04-27-95   8:12p
CHKDSK   EXE     16200 04-27-95   8:10p
COMMAND  COM     47845 11-11-91   5:00a
CONFIG   SYS       152 03-09-00   2:01p
CONPORT  DAT        78 11-17-95   5:42p
DOG      INI        82 03-21-00  10:59a
DT336    INI       564 03-21-00  10:31a
EMM386   EXE     91742 04-27-95   8:10p
HIMEM    SYS     11616 04-27-95   8:10p
MCM2496M INI      1342 12-17-99  10:05a
MDM144S  INI      1124 03-21-00   8:19a
MODEM    INI        65 04-27-95   8:10p
MRS      BAT        52 03-16-00   4:34p
PASSWORD TXT         8 03-16-00  10:19a
ROMSHELL EXE     54745 03-21-00  10:50a
ROM_VER  TXT        50 03-20-00   2:53p
SHARE    EXE     10912 04-27-95   8:10p
USSD     SYS      9282 04-27-95   8:10p
       22 file(s)     256379 bytes
                     1121792 bytes free

Example: DIR Command of ROMSHELL ROM

EXIT

Exits the ROMSHELL program. The following message displays:


Terminating Console.  Bye…..


To return to the ROMSHELL application, press any key to display the Password field, then reenter your password.

FORMATUSSD

This command formats the USSD and reboots the APU-102. A warning and confirmation message is displayed. After the reboot, you will need to reestablish the connection to proceed.

Note: This command does not function on Pentium Flash disk.


HDTOOL (Romshell 5.4+)

Hard drive toolkit. This is a utility used by the system for Compact Flash recovery. Do not use without instruction by Comet Electronics Support personnel who will guide you through command entry.

HELP

Displays the ROMSHELL command listing. Identical to the <?> command.

L

Displays the last command. Press <Enter> to repeat the command or edit as necessary.

PASSWORD newpassword

Changes the ROMSHELL logon password. The system will ask for confirmation of the new password. This command has no effect on the applications password. The password is in the encrypted file “PASSWORD.TXT” on the root of the “C” drive. If the ROMSHELL password is forgotten, it can be reset with a special boot sequence detailed at the end of this section. (Startup ROM version 5.1 and higher)

PORTATTACH PORT BAUD B P S

Attaches to undefined ports. Example: PORTATTACH COM4 4800 8 n 1 connects to Comm port 4, 4800 baud, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit. (Default for first reader.) Control-Z exits the PORTATTACH utility and displays the -RS- (path)> prompt.

Note:  Legacy ports only-not compatible with ports 3-6 on network capable APU-102s.

PORTVIEW port number N (or port number N port number N)

This is the port-specific version of the IO screen. Displays one or more selected ports to view.

PORT   D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0   HEX

-----  -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --   ----

0x310   1  1  1  1  0  0  1  1   0xF3

Example: PORTVIEW Command

Example: PORTVIEW Command

REBOOT

Performs a software reboot. You will be prompted for confirmation. After the reboot, you will need to re-establish the connection to proceed.

SHELL command argument switches

Any commands entered after the SHELL command will be sent to DOS and treated as a DOS command. Batch files and DOS programs can be executed as well as commands embedded in the DOS command interpreter, such as COPY, ECHO, REN, DIR (with switches), etc.


Caution

Use extreme caution with the SHELL command. Any command issued must NOT require any user intervention to complete the command or the APU will be inaccessible via the current port until it is rebooted. It should only be used by experienced users.



Example:


SHELL COPY SPECIAL.BAT SPECIAL.BAK

TIME

Displays the following prompt with the current ROMSHELL site system time. To change the time, enter the new time using the format displayed in parentheses.

To accept the current time, press <Enter>.

Current time is 17:45:45

Enter new time (hh:mm:ss):

Note: Changing the date or time on the E-Series APU restarts the 20-minute watchdog. The P-Series APU handles time differently and may cause a reboot (time has expired). It is recommended that the system date and time be set with the AEI application. If date/time is set in ROMSHELL and then booted to the application, the time may be off due to time zones or daylight savings time settings. These settings are applied AFTER time is read from the CPU.


TTL (Romshell 5.4+)

Display or change the current “Time-To-Live” (TTL) before the watchdog timer reboots the APU-102.

1)  To view or change TTL options, select one of the following command format options and press <Enter>.


Command Format

Description

TTL

Required. "Time-To-Live" before the watchdog timer reboots the APU-102. This command does not change the current TTL.

TTL,#

Optional. Changes “Time-To-Live” (in Seconds) before the watchdog timer reboots the APU-102.

The following example shows a screen display if TTL is entered.

-RS- A:\>TTL

Current Time-To-Live = 1076 (seconds).
-RS- A:\>

TYPE filename

Displays the contents of the filename entered after the command.

@ECHO OFF
@ECHO ----------------------------
type rom_ver.txt
@ECHO      ATS Systems
@ECHO ----------------------------
path a:\;c:\;c:\aei
PROMPT $P$G

Example: TYPE Command with autoexec.bat filename (part of file displayed).

VER

Displays the ROMSHELL version.

ZREC

The Zmodem Receive File(s) (ZREC) command places the APU-102 in Zmodem receive mode. The files will be received into the current working directory. Zmodem can receive multiple files.

1)  Type the ZREC command and press <Enter>. The message, “Ready to receive,” displays.

2)  Once the APU-102 is in the receive mode, use the Zmodem protocol on your communications program to initiate a file transfer or a file upload. Use wildcards (* or ?) to upload multiple files. Refer to your communications software package for instructions on sending the file.

After file is received, the message “N file(s) received successfully” displays (N representing the number of files.) and the -RS- (path)> prompt re-displays.

If there are errors in the modem’s transmission, one or all of the following messages may display (where N represents the number of files).


N port overrun errors

Serial port has at least one overrun.

N byte framing errors

Serial port has at least one framing error.

N parity errors

Serial port has at least one parity error.


These errors are normal and the Zmodem protocol is designed to correct for them. If they become excessive, you may need to repair either the serial port or the modem.

ZRECR

The Zmodem Receive Resume (ZRECR) command places the APU-102 in Zmodem receive restart mode. The files will be received into the current working directory. Zmodem can receive multiple files. If a file already exists on the unit, Zmodem will resume transfer of the existing file at the point where the previous transfer was interrupted. With ZRECR, previously interrupted transmissions can continue, which saves time.

Note: The resume is done blindly, with no checks to ensure that the existing file has the same contents (up to the point of interruption) as the sent file. This means that if the file is a different version, the new file may be corrupted. Only use ZRECR on file transfers that you know were previously interrupted.

1)  Type the ZRECR command and press <Enter>. The message, “Ready to receive,” displays.

2)  Once the APU-102 is in the receive mode, use the Zmodem protocol on your communications program to initiate a file transfer or a file upload. Use wildcards (* or ?) to upload multiple files. Refer to your communications software package for instructions on sending the file.

After file is received, the message “N file(s) received successfully” displays (N representing the number of files.) and the -RS- (path)> prompt re-displays.

If there are errors in the modem’s transmission, one or all of the following messages may display (where N represents the number of files).


N port overrun errors

Serial port has at least one overrun.

N byte framing errors

Serial port has at least one framing error.

N parity errors

Serial port has at least one parity error.


These errors are normal and the Zmodem protocol is designed to correct for them. If they become excessive, you may need to repair either the serial port or the modem.

ZSEND filename

The Zmodem Send File(s) (ZSEND) command places the APU-102 in Zmodem send mode. Zmodem can send multiple files.

The message, “Ready to send,” displays. Use wild cards (* and ?) to send multiple files. Refer to your communications software package for instructions on receiving the file. Most programs will auto-receive, but have differing options when receiving a duplicate file. Insure your program does not blindly “resume” when receiving a duplicate file. After file has been sent, the message “N file(s) sent successfully” displays (where N = number of files) and the -RS- (path)> prompt redisplays.

Note: Refer to your communications software package for instructions on receiving the file.

Additional Commands (Not in HELP file)

You can change to a different drive as you would in DOS. Example: Type C: and press <Enter> to change to the “C” drive.

Forcing the APU-102 to boot to ROMSHELL

1)  Power the APU off.

2)  Power the APU on.

3)  Immediately press and hold the SYS button on the front panel.

4)  About 30 seconds after power up, the SYS LED will blink rapidly. Continue holding the SYS button until the rapid blink stops.

5)  Release the SYS button. ROMSHELL will load in about 30 more seconds, indicated by a slow blinking SYS LED.

Resetting ROMSHELL Password (Startup ROM version 5.1 and higher)

Note: Does not reset application password.

1)  Power the APU off.

2)  Power the APU on.

3)  Immediately press and hold the SYS button on the front panel.
About 30 seconds after power up, the SYS LED will blink rapidly.

4)  Release the SYS button and immediately press and hold for second blink sequence (about 5 sec).

5)  Continue holding the SYS button until the second rapid blink sequence stops.

6)  Release the SYS button. ROMSHELL will load in about 30 seconds, indicated by a slow blinking SYS LED. The password will be reset to the default (SECRET)

NetMRS User Interface (Optional)

Overview

NetMRS is an alternate operating mode of the APU-102 that runs under XPe and is preloaded to the compact flash. It has diagnostic functionality similar to ROMSHELL, but has added network connectivity. The L-Series APU (LX-800 equipped) only has[RCT4] [DDC5]  NetMRS.  Benefits of the NetMRS user interface include:

Additional Benefits:

  • Does not require a special communication software package, as with MRS.
  • Modem port initialization is the same as specified in the AEI application’s parameters.
  • Local port initialization [DDC6]independent of the AEI application and may be different. The baud rate is controlled by a flag file in the APU’s AEI directory. Refer to Local Port Connection and Logon in the next section
  • Network port initialization is the same as specified in the AEI application’s Ethernet parameters for telnet connectivity.

    Why is NetMRS Running?

    NetMRS follows most of the same rules as ROMSHELL. It has different file requirements as well as the capability of checking the integrity of key files. On P-Series APU-102 (LPMTX processor[RCT7] [DDC8] ), there is currently no method to force NetMRS operation other than a R,M command from the AEI application.

    Beginning with 5.1.1 Build 117, an L-Series APU-102 can be booted to NetMRS by holding the SYS button on power up in the same manner as LPMTX (P-series) and 486 (E-Series) APUs are forced to ROMSHELL.

NetMRS Operation

Local Port Connection and Logon

1)  Attach a PC or data terminal to the “LOCAL” communications port of the APU-102 unit. The APU-102 is configured as a DTE with a female 25-pin “D” RS-232 connector. It will use 8 data bits, no parity, and one stop bit. The baud rate is controlled by a flag file (96.DAT) in the APU’s AEI directory. If the file is present, the local port is initialized at 9600 baud. If the file is absent, the port initializes at 2400. Setup your communications program to match[RCT9] [DDC10] .

2)  Press <Enter> and the NetMRS responds with following login:

APU102XP NetMRS 1.2

Password:

3)  Type your password and press <Enter>. The default password is “SECRET[RCT11] [DDC12] ” but can be changed. (Refer to Password command) You will see a prompt similar to the following example. From here you can enter any of the NetMRS commands.


-NetMRS- C:\AEI>

Note: The prompt will reflect the current working directory; in this case, the AEI directory on the “C” drive. The LX-800 CF is configured differently and the default AEI Application directory on it will be D:\AEI.

Dial-up Connection

1)  Dial the site with any commercial communication package, and the modems will negotiate the best connection.

2)  Press <Enter> and the NetMRS responds with following login:

APU102XP NetMRS 1.2

Password:

3)  Type your password and press <Enter>. The default password is “SECRET” but can be changed. (Refer to Password command) You will see a prompt similar to the following example. From here you can enter any of the NetMRS commands.


-NetMRS- C:\AEI>

Note: The prompt will reflect the current working directory; in this case, the AEI directory on the “C” drive. The LX-800 CF is configured differently and the default AEI Application directory on it will be D:\AEI.

Telnet Connection

1)  Connect to the site with any [RCT13] commercial communication package that supports telnet. You must have a valid connection path to the APU-102 to connect. You will need to specify the IP address and optionally, the port number. The APU-102 uses the default telnet port 23 unless specified differently in the AEI Application’s Ethernet port parameters.

2)  Press <Enter> and the NetMRS responds with following login:

APU102XP NetMRS 1.2

Password:

3)  Type your password and press <Enter>. The default password is “SECRET” but can be changed. (Refer to Password command) You will see a prompt similar to the following example. From here you can enter any of the NetMRS commands.

-NetMRS- C:\AEI>

Note: The prompt will reflect the current working directory; in this case, the AEI directory on the “C” drive. The LX-800 CF is configured differently and the default AEI Application directory on it will be D:\AEI.

NetMRS System Commands

Type <?> and press <Enter> (or HELP and <Enter>) to display a list of available NetMRS commands. A list of the commands displays.

Command Listing




?
HELP
EXIT
CLS
DIR
TYPE
DEL
/
REBOOT
SHELL
ZSEND
ZREC
ZRECR
T
CD
VER
L
PASSWORD
PT
IPCONFIG
PING

Command Definitions

The following defines and explains how to use each NetMRS command. The associated parameters appear in italics after the command, where applicable.


?

Displays the NetMRS command listing.

/

Displays APUINFO.DAT file and system metrics if available.

APU-102 Equipment Identifier V1.02


PROCESSOR:              Pentium
BIOS CHKSUM:            0xA7BA
CONVENTIONAL MEMORY:    640 KBytes
EXTENDED MEMORY:        N/A KBytes
COM1 FOUND:             PORT = 0x03F8 IRQ = 4
COM2 FOUND:             PORT = 0x02F8 IRQ = 3
COM3 FOUND:             PORT = 0x0380 IRQ = 10
COM4 FOUND:             PORT = 0x0388 IRQ = 10
COM5 FOUND:             PORT = 0x0288 IRQ = 10
COM6 FOUND:             PORT = 0x0230 IRQ = 10
COM CARD:               COM4 Card
MODEM TYPE:             56000
SSD TYPE:               PCM-SSD
READER VERSION:         2.80
APU SOFTWARE VERSION:   5.11 B101
STARTUP ROM VERSION:    5.4
DOS VERSION:            5.00

Free Mem: 27,140,096, Free Disk: 53,743,616 KB


Metric                         Value
------------------------------ ----------
Startup....................... 285
SpontaneousBoot............... 279
SoftBoot...................... 0
Trains........................ 0
FileReadbackSizeMismatch...... 0
FileReadbackDataMismatch...... 0
SystemParameterRestores....... 1
SystemParameterNoRecover...... 0


CD path

Works like a DOS CD command. It changes to the specified directory and displays the -NetMRS- (path)> prompt, reflecting the now current working directory.

CLS

Clears the screen and displays the -NetMRS- (path)> prompt.

DIR (optional parameters)

Use the DIR command alone to display a directory of all files in the current path. To display specific files, add the optional path and filename arguments using standard DOS conventions including wildcard arguments (* or ?). This is not a true DOS DIR command though, therefore do not apply any “/” switches to your command line. If a true DOS DIR is desired, refer to the SHELL command below.

-NetMRS- C:\AEI>dir m*.ini
M144-12  INI        890  10-25-11  12:54 
M144-144 INI        724  10-25-11  12:54 
M144-24  INI        815  10-25-11  12:54 
M144-3   INI        886  10-25-11  12:54 
M144-48  INI        814  10-25-11  12:54 
M144-96  INI        814  10-25-11  12:54 
MCM1414V INI      1,187  10-25-11  12:54 
MCM2400  INI        649  10-25-11  12:54 
MCM2496M INI      1,381  10-25-11  12:54 
MDM144   INI        684  10-25-11  12:54 
MDM144BN INI        801  10-25-11  12:54 
MDM144S  INI      1,125  10-25-11  12:54 
MODEM    INI         65  10-25-11  12:54 
       13 file(s)  10,835 bytes  98,451,456 bytes free

DEL  filename

Deletes the specified filename from the system. Wildcards (*) and (?) are permitted to delete multiple files.

EXIT

Exits the NetMRS program. Disconnects without displaying any messages.

HELP

Displays the NetMRS command listing. Identical to the <?> command.


IPCONFIG

This command works just like the basic DOS IPCONFIG command. For advanced options and switches, run IPCONFIG under the SHELL command

ipconfig < y.dat > dosshell.txt


Windows IP Configuration


Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:

        Connection-specific DNS Suffix  . : 
        IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : 192.168.0.2
        Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 255.255.255.0
        Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . : 192.168.0.12

L

Displays the last command. Press <Enter> to execute the command or edit as necessary.

PASSWORD newpassword

Changes the NetMRS logon password. The system will ask for confirmation of the new password. This command has no effect on the applications password. The password is in the encrypted file “PASSWORD.TXT” on the root of the AEI Application drive.

PING

This command works just like the basic DOS PING command. For advanced options and switches, run PING under the SHELL command.


ping 192.168.0.12 < y.dat > dosshell.txt


Pinging 192.168.0.12 with 32 bytes of data:

Reply from 192.168.0.12: bytes=32 time=1ms TTL=128
Reply from 192.168.0.12: bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=128
Reply from 192.168.0.12: bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=128
Reply from 192.168.0.12: bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=128

Ping statistics for 192.168.0.12:
    Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss),
Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds:
    Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 1ms, Average = 0ms

PT Portfile

Attaches to defined ports. For example, if logged into the local port, you could attach to the modem port ($REMPORT.DAT) and execute AT commands to the modem. <ESC>-C exits the PT attach utility.

Note:  Legacy ports only-not compatible with ports 3-6 on network capable APU-102s.

REBOOT

Performs a software reboot. You will be prompted for confirmation. After the reboot, you will need to re-establish the connection to proceed.

SHELL command argument switches

Any commands entered after the SHELL command will be sent to DOS command shell and treated as a DOS command. Batch files and DOS programs can be executed as well as commands embedded in the DOS command interpreter, such as COPY, ECHO, REN, DIR (with switches), etc.


Caution

Use extreme caution with the SHELL command. Any command issued must NOT require any user intervention to complete the command or the APU will be inaccessible via the current port until it is rebooted. Some commands could even hang the NetMRS application. Shell commands should only be used by experienced users. Additionally, NetMRS emulates Windows XP version of DOS and has different options than ROMSHELL which is DOS 5.0. Without the “/y” switch to force an over-write in the following example, Windows DOS would prompt the user to confirm the over-write an existing file, and would hang the port.

Example:

SHELL COPY SPECIAL.BAT SPECIAL.BAK /y

T

The Set Date/Time (T) command displays and sets the APU-102 date and time.


Current time Sun Jun 01  13:30:18 2004

Enter New Date mm/dd/yyyy >06/01/2004
Enter New Time hh:mm:ss   >13:30:18

New time Sun Jun 01 13:45:00

1)  Type the T command and press <Enter>.

2)  Type the date in the format indicated and press <Enter>.

3)  Enter the time in military time format (24-hour clock, hh:mm:ss) and press <Enter>. The new date and time you established displays at the bottom of the screen.

TYPE filename

Displays the contents of the filename entered after the command.


-NetMRS- C:\AEI>dir m*.ini

ATZS0=0
ATE0
ATV0
AT&C1
AT&D2
AT\N3
ATS7=60
ATX1
ATS0=1


Example: TYPE Command with MODEM.INI filename

VER

Displays the NetMRS version.

ZREC

The Zmodem Receive File(s) (ZREC) command places the APU-102 in Zmodem receive mode. The files will be received into the current working directory. Zmodem can receive multiple files.

1)  Type the ZREC command and press <Enter>. The message, “Ready to receive,” displays.

2)  Once the APU-102 is in the receive mode, use the Zmodem protocol on your communications program to initiate a file transfer or a file upload. Use wildcards (* or ?) to upload multiple files. Refer to your communications software package for instructions on sending the file.

After file is received, the message “N file(s) received successfully” displays (N representing the number of files.) and the -NetMRS- (path)> prompt re-displays.

If there are errors in the modem’s transmission, one or all of the following messages may display (where N represents the number of files).


N port overrun errors

Serial port has at least one overrun.

N byte framing errors

Serial port has at least one framing error.

N parity errors

Serial port has at least one parity error.


These errors are normal and the Zmodem protocol is designed to correct for them. If they become excessive, you may need to repair either the serial port or the modem.

ZRECR

The Zmodem Receive Resume (ZRECR) command places the APU-102 in Zmodem receive restart mode. The files will be received into the current working directory. Zmodem can receive multiple files. If a file already exists on the unit, Zmodem will resume transfer of the existing file at the point where the previous transfer was interrupted. With ZRECR, previously interrupted transmissions can continue, which saves time.

Note: The resume is done blindly, with no checks to ensure that the existing file has the same contents (up to the point of interruption) as the sent file. This means that if the file is a different version, the new file may be corrupted. Only use ZRECR on file transfers that you know were previously interrupted.

1)  Type the ZRECR command and press <Enter>. The message, “Ready to receive,” displays.

2)  Once the APU-102 is in the receive mode, use the Zmodem protocol on your communications program to initiate a file transfer or a file upload. Use wildcards (* or ?) to upload multiple files. Refer to your communications software package for instructions on sending the file.

After file is received, the message “N file(s) received successfully” displays (N representing the number of files.) and the -NetMRS- (path)> prompt re-displays.

If there are errors in the modem’s transmission, one or all of the following messages may display (where N represents the number of files).


N port overrun errors

Serial port has at least one overrun.

N byte framing errors

Serial port has at least one framing error.

N parity errors

Serial port has at least one parity error.


These errors are normal and the Zmodem protocol is designed to correct for them. If they become excessive, you may need to repair either the serial port or the modem.

ZSEND filename

The Zmodem Send File(s) (ZSEND) command places the APU-102 in Zmodem send mode. Zmodem can send multiple files.

The message, “Ready to send,” displays. Use wild cards (* and ?) to send multiple files. Refer to your communications software package for instructions on receiving the file. Most programs will auto-receive, but have differing options when receiving a duplicate file. Insure your program does not blindly “resume” when receiving a duplicate file. After file has been sent, the message “N file(s) sent successfully” displays (where N = number of files) and the -NetMRS- (path)> prompt redisplays.

Note: Refer to your communications software package for instructions on receiving the file.

Additional Commands (Not in HELP file)

You can change to a different drive as you would in DOS. Example: Type D: and press <Enter> to change to the “D” drive.


Note

On the L-Series APU-102, the AEI application files are on the D drive. The Operating System files are on the protected C drive.